00a-OS WK•ENG A5
IMPORTANT
Read Before Using Keyboard!
IMPORTANT
Read Before Using Keyboard!
Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by
Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that
your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages
and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your
instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with
your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in
the future.
Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by
Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that
your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages
and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your
instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with
your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in
the future.
FINAL STEP
You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says:
Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to
abort>
Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System
to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the
following message in the instrument display screen:
Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue>
At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed
through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn
OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below.
IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP!
STEP 2
With the instrument turned OFF, insert the GEM WK6/WK8 Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive.
After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON.
STEP 1
FINAL STEP
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until
the following message appears in your display screen:
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!!
<Enter to clear/Escape to abort>
Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your
WK6/WK8 World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded.
ESCAPE
Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.
Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument.
This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a
few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory
will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears
when you power-up the instrument.
271217
Dial
Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.
Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument.
This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a
few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory
will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears
when you power-up the instrument.
IMPORTANT
Read Before Using Keyboard!
Dial
Congratulations on your purchase of the new GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by
Generalmusic. This instrument is equipped with cutting edge Flash ROM memory, so that
your new keyboard can be permanently updated by disk with the latest operational advantages
and new features. It is important that you follow the procedure below before using your
instrument for the first time to ensure that the instrument functions properly. Check with
your authorised Generalmusic dealer for exciting new features to load in your Flash ROM in
the future.
ESCAPE
You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says:
Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to
abort>
Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System
to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the
following message in the instrument display screen:
Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue>
At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed
through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn
OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below.
IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP!
TEMPO / DATA
TEMPO / DATA
STEP 2
ENTER
ENTER
As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until
the following message appears in your display screen:
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!!
<Enter to clear/Escape to abort>
Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your
WK6/WK8 World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded.
As you turn the instrument ON, KEEP ROTATING THE DIAL until
the following message appears in your display screen:
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests Memory Clear!!
<Enter to clear/Escape to abort>
Press ENTER. You have now completed the update process, and your
WK6/WK8 World Keyboard has been permanently upgraded.
With the instrument turned OFF, insert the GEM WK6/WK8 Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive.
After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON.
ESCAPE
FINAL STEP
Location of Dial, Enter & Escape controls.
You will see a message in the instrument display screen that says:
Loading OS-DISK clears ALL MEMORY!! <Enter to Load/Escape to
abort>
Press ENTER and wait about 3 minutes for the new Operating System
to load. When the new system has finished loading, you will see the
following message in the instrument display screen:
Loading Successful!! <Enter to continue>
At this time, Press ENTER again and the instrument will proceed
through the normal operating display screens. You can now Turn
OFF the instrument in preparation for the final step listed below.
IMPORTANT: REMOVE THE OPERATING SYSTEM DISK BEFORE PROCEEDING TO THE FINAL STEP!
STEP 1
Dial
STEP 2
Note: There may be a Battery Warning message when you initially turn on the instrument.
This message will not appear after the instrument has been plugged in and turned ON for a
few hours. During this time, the internal battery that holds new information in memory
will recharge. For now, just press ENTER or ESCAPE to continue on if the message appears
when you power-up the instrument.
With the instrument turned OFF, insert the GEM WK6/WK8 Operating System Disk included in your materials packet into the disk drive.
After you have inserted the disk, turn the instrument ON.
271217
STEP 1
271217
English
Cod. 271217
Owner’s manual
Owner’s manual
Owner’s manual
Cod. 271217
Cod. 271217
English
English
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS,
Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and
Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.
The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for
eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior
written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications
it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons
resulting from improper use of the instrument.
Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check with an authorized
Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center.
Copyright Generalmusic © 1998. All rights reserved.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
1.
2.
1.
2.
Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product.
Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to
rain.
This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the
components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly
instructions found at the back of the manual.
This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk
on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind.
This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat.
This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the product.
This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time.
Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
c) the product has been exposed to rain; or
d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or
e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as
optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where
applicable) are well secured before use.
Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that
may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owner’s manual for additional
information.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for
eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior
written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications
it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons
resulting from improper use of the instrument.
Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check with an authorized
Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center.
Copyright Generalmusic © 1998. All rights reserved.
15.
3.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
14.
4.
15.
13.
5.
14.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO
USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the
product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS,
Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and
Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.
10.
11.
12.
6.
7.
8.
13.
9.
9.
10.
11.
12.
6.
7.
8.
10.
11.
12.
9.
5.
13.
6.
7.
8.
4.
14.
5.
3.
15.
4.
Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product.
Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to
rain.
This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the
components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly
instructions found at the back of the manual.
This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk
on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind.
This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat.
This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the product.
This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time.
Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
c) the product has been exposed to rain; or
d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or
e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as
optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where
applicable) are well secured before use.
Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that
may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owner’s manual for additional
information.
3.
Read all the instructions (Safety, Installation and FCC if applicable) before using the product.
Do not use this product near water (example, near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink or wet basement) and do not expose to
rain.
This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer, or should be used with the
components supplied. If this product requires assembly before being played, take special care to follow the assembly
instructions found at the back of the manual.
This product, whether alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord, or place it in a position where one could walk
on, trip over or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind.
This product should be located so that its location does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat.
This product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the product.
This product may be equipped with a polarised line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the wall outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for long periods of time.
Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
This product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
a) the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
b) objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
c) the product has been exposed to rain; or
d) the product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits marked changes in performance; or
e) the product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
Some products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as part of the product or as
optional accessories. Please ensure that benches are correctly assembled and stable and any optional fixtures (where
applicable) are well secured before use.
Electromagnetic Interference (RFI) This electronic product utilises digital sample wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that
may adversely affect radio/TV reception. Read the FCC note on the inside back cover of the owner’s manual for additional
information.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for
eventual errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied, photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior
written consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications
it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines all liability for damage to property or persons
resulting from improper use of the instrument.
Make sure that all internal electronic options are installed by an authorized Generalmusic service technician. Check with an authorized
Generalmusic dealer for information on the closest service center.
Copyright Generalmusic © 1998. All rights reserved.
Products and brand names that are referred to in this publication (AKAI, Apple, IBM,Jaz, Kurzweil, Macintosh, Microsoft, MS-DOS,
Sample Vision, Windows, Zip) may either be trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective owners. The Publisher/s and
Author/s make no claim to these trademarks.
CAUTION
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
-
-
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate this product.
-
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate this product.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate this product.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com
Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy – Via delle Rose, 12
Tel. +39 541 959511 – fax +39 541 957404 – tlx 550555 GMUSIC I
PRINTED IN ITALY
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Stock Code 271217
Stock Code 271217
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
PRINTED IN ITALY
PRINTED IN ITALY
Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy – Via delle Rose, 12
Tel. +39 541 959511 – fax +39 541 957404 – tlx 550555 GMUSIC I
Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (RN) - Italy – Via delle Rose, 12
Tel. +39 541 959511 – fax +39 541 957404 – tlx 550555 GMUSIC I
Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com
Internet: http://www.generalmusic.com
Stock Code 271217
Contents i
Contents
○
○
○
○
○
Contents
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction
QUICK GUIDE
QUICK GUIDE
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
i
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35
i
○
Change the effect assigned to a Performance 2. 35
Play with Effects or bypass them 2. 37
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
Selecting the Arrange Mode options 2. 33
Changing the split point 2. 34
Front layout 1. 1
Rear panel connections 1. 2
The Display 1. 3
Front layout 1. 1
Rear panel connections 1. 2
The Display 1. 3
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32
About the WK Styles 2. 23
Play with the Styles 2. 24
About the accompaniment tracks 2. 26
Start a Style with Key Start 2. 27
Start a Style with Tap Tempo 2. 28
Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 2. 28
The functions of the Styles 2. 29
Select a Style Performance 2. 29
Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 2. 31
Chapter 2 • User Guide
Chapter 2 • User Guide
Power up 2. 1
Power up 2. 1
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes 2. 2
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes 2. 2
Style/RealTime mode 2. 2
Song mode 2. 2
Style/RealTime mode 2. 2
Song mode 2. 2
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3
Full keyboard mode 2. 3
Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4
Multi keyboard mode 2. 7
Adjust the overall volume of the instrument 2. 8
Full keyboard mode 2. 3
Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4
Multi keyboard mode 2. 7
Adjust the overall volume of the instrument 2. 8
9 • The Styles 2. 23
Hold the display during selection procedures 2. 22
8 • Display Hold 2. 22
3 • Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8
3 • Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8
About the WK Sounds 2. 17
Select and play the Bank 1 Sounds (GM) 2. 17
Select and play sound variations (Bank 2, 3, ..... etc..) 2. 19
Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20
The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 2. 21
Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 2. 8
Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 2. 8
4 • General transposition 2. 9
4 • General transposition 2. 9
Transpose the instrument up or down 2. 9
Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10
Play the Programmable Pads 2. 11
Play with headphones 2. 11
Play with the pedals 2. 12
Play with the Trackball 2. 12
Transpose the instrument up or down 2. 9
Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10
Play the Programmable Pads 2. 11
Play with headphones 2. 11
Play with the pedals 2. 12
Play with the Trackball 2. 12
7 • Selecting the WK Sounds 2. 17
Select and play the Performances 2. 15
5 • Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13
6 • The Performances 2. 15
5 • Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13
6 • The Performances 2. 15
5 • Listen to the Demo Songs 2. 13
6 • The Performances 2. 15
Transpose the instrument up or down 2. 9
Transposing tracks by octaves 2. 10
Play the Programmable Pads 2. 11
Play with headphones 2. 11
Play with the pedals 2. 12
Play with the Trackball 2. 12
Select and play the Performances 2. 15
Select and play the Performances 2. 15
7 • Selecting the WK Sounds 2. 17
7 • Selecting the WK Sounds 2. 17
About the WK Sounds 2. 17
Select and play the Bank 1 Sounds (GM) 2. 17
Select and play sound variations (Bank 2, 3, ..... etc..) 2. 19
Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20
The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 2. 21
About the WK Sounds 2. 17
Select and play the Bank 1 Sounds (GM) 2. 17
Select and play sound variations (Bank 2, 3, ..... etc..) 2. 19
Using the Keypad to Select a Sound 2. 20
The SOLO button - Isolate a single sound from the rest 2. 21
4 • General transposition 2. 9
Adjust the sound volumes separately (balancing) 2. 8
3 • Adjusting the volume of the real time sounds 2. 8
8 • Display Hold 2. 22
8 • Display Hold 2. 22
Full keyboard mode 2. 3
Upper/Lower keyboard mode 2. 4
Multi keyboard mode 2. 7
Adjust the overall volume of the instrument 2. 8
Hold the display during selection procedures 2. 22
Hold the display during selection procedures 2. 22
9 • The Styles 2. 23
9 • The Styles 2. 23
About the WK Styles 2. 23
Play with the Styles 2. 24
About the accompaniment tracks 2. 26
Start a Style with Key Start 2. 27
Start a Style with Tap Tempo 2. 28
Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 2. 28
The functions of the Styles 2. 29
Select a Style Performance 2. 29
Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 2. 31
About the WK Styles 2. 23
Play with the Styles 2. 24
About the accompaniment tracks 2. 26
Start a Style with Key Start 2. 27
Start a Style with Tap Tempo 2. 28
Start and stop a Style with Fade In/Out 2. 28
The functions of the Styles 2. 29
Select a Style Performance 2. 29
Select a Style without changing the keyboard sounds 2. 31
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode) 2. 3
Style/RealTime mode 2. 2
Song mode 2. 2
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes 2. 2
Power up 2. 1
Chapter 2 • User Guide
Front layout 1. 1
Rear panel connections 1. 2
The Display 1. 3
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes 2. 32
Selecting the Arrange Mode options 2. 33
Changing the split point 2. 34
Selecting the Arrange Mode options 2. 33
Changing the split point 2. 34
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP) 2. 35
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Contents i
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Contents
○
i
○
Change the effect assigned to a Performance 2. 35
Play with Effects or bypass them 2. 37
Introduction
Change the effect assigned to a Performance 2. 35
Play with Effects or bypass them 2. 37
QUICK GUIDE
Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Contents i
ii Contents
12 • Store Performance 2. 38
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12 • Store Performance 2. 38
○
Save to the current Performance 2. 38
Save to a different Performance 2. 39
Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41
Save to the current Performance 2. 38
Save to a different Performance 2. 39
Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41
About Songs 6. 1
About Standard MIDI files
6. 1
Song Playback/Jukebox
6. 2
«Play view» parameters
6. 3
Play view Soft buttons 6. 4
Jukebox Soft buttons 6. 5
Recording a Song
6. 6
The Record method 6. 7
The «Record View» page in detail
6. 10
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song 2. 42
Load the Demo Song 2. 42
Playback the Demo Song 2. 44
14 • Preload 2. 46
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song 2. 42
Load the Demo Song 2. 42
Playback the Demo Song 2. 44
14 • Preload 2. 46
Play all the Songs or MidiFiles present on a disk 2. 46
15 • Multimedia 2. 48
Display Song lyrics 2. 48
Play all the Songs or MidiFiles present on a disk 2. 46
15 • Multimedia 2. 48
Display Song lyrics 2. 48
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50
Chapter 6 • Songs, MIDI files & Song recording 6. 1
17 • Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55
The Save procedure 2. 55
Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58
Play along with your recorded Song 2. 53
Play Songs using Jukebox 2. 54
Selection 5. 1
Display Hold 5. 9
Effects Off 5. 9
Help 5. 10
Play along with your recorded Song 2. 53
Play Songs using Jukebox 2. 54
17 • Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55
The Save procedure 2. 55
Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58
Chapter 5 • Selection/Help 5. 1
18 • MIDI 2. 59
18 • MIDI 2. 59
Create a Preload list 4. 2
The Preload functions 4. 3
About MIDI 2. 59
The MIDI Channels 2. 60
The MIDI Configuration 2. 61
The Computer port 2. 62
MIDI Filters 2. 63
MIDI Lock 2. 63
MIDI Panic 2. 64
About MIDI 2. 59
The MIDI Channels 2. 60
The MIDI Configuration 2. 61
The Computer port 2. 62
MIDI Filters 2. 63
MIDI Lock 2. 63
MIDI Panic 2. 64
Chapter 4 • Preload 4. 1
The general «Disk» procedure 3. 4
Load Operations 3. 7
Save operations 3. 14
Erase operations 3. 22
Copy 3. 24
Move 3. 26
Utility 3. 28
Additional functions 3. 34
General disk handling information 3. 37
REFERENCE GUIDE
REFERENCE GUIDE
Chapter 3 • Disk & Hard disk 3. 1
The general «Disk» procedure 3. 4
Load Operations 3. 7
Save operations 3. 14
Erase operations 3. 22
Copy 3. 24
Move 3. 26
Utility 3. 28
Additional functions 3. 34
General disk handling information 3. 37
Chapter 3 • Disk & Hard disk 3. 1
The general «Disk» procedure 3. 4
Load Operations 3. 7
Save operations 3. 14
Erase operations 3. 22
Copy 3. 24
Move 3. 26
Utility 3. 28
Additional functions 3. 34
General disk handling information 3. 37
Chapter 3 • Disk & Hard disk 3. 1
About MIDI 2. 59
The MIDI Channels 2. 60
The MIDI Configuration 2. 61
The Computer port 2. 62
MIDI Filters 2. 63
MIDI Lock 2. 63
MIDI Panic 2. 64
Create a Preload list 4. 2
The Preload functions 4. 3
Chapter 4 • Preload 4. 1
Create a Preload list 4. 2
The Preload functions 4. 3
18 • MIDI 2. 59
Chapter 5 • Selection/Help 5. 1
The Save procedure 2. 55
Restoring the Songs memory 2. 58
Chapter 5 • Selection/Help 5. 1
Selection 5. 1
Display Hold 5. 9
Effects Off 5. 9
Help 5. 10
17 • Save your programmed data to disk 2. 55
Play along with your recorded Song 2. 53
Play Songs using Jukebox 2. 54
Selection 5. 1
Display Hold 5. 9
Effects Off 5. 9
Help 5. 10
REFERENCE GUIDE
Chapter 4 • Preload 4. 1
Chapter 6 • Songs, MIDI files & Song recording 6. 1
Chapter 6 • Songs, MIDI files & Song recording 6. 1
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.) 2. 50
About Songs 6. 1
About Standard MIDI files
6. 1
Song Playback/Jukebox
6. 2
«Play view» parameters
6. 3
Play view Soft buttons 6. 4
Jukebox Soft buttons 6. 5
Recording a Song
6. 6
The Record method 6. 7
The «Record View» page in detail
Display Song lyrics 2. 48
15 • Multimedia 2. 48
About Songs 6. 1
About Standard MIDI files
6. 1
Song Playback/Jukebox
6. 2
«Play view» parameters
6. 3
Play view Soft buttons 6. 4
Jukebox Soft buttons 6. 5
Recording a Song
6. 6
The Record method 6. 7
The «Record View» page in detail
Play all the Songs or MidiFiles present on a disk 2. 46
14 • Preload 2. 46
Load the Demo Song 2. 42
Playback the Demo Song 2. 44
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song 2. 42
6. 10
Save to the current Performance 2. 38
Save to a different Performance 2. 39
Restoring the original Performance settings 2. 41
○
○
○
○
○
○
ii Contents
○
○
○
12 • Store Performance 2. 38
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ii Contents
○
○
○
6. 10
Contents iii
Chapter 7 • Edit Song 7. 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Chapter 7 • Edit Song 7. 1
○
○
Erase 7. 3
Move 7. 5
Copy 7. 6
Quantize 7. 8
Insert measures 7. 10
Delete measures 7. 11
Velocity 7. 12
Transpose 7. 13
Microscope 7. 14
Master Track 7. 17
Score & Edit Score 7. 20
Score Controls 7. 21
Edit Score 7. 22
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Chapter 13 • Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1
Volume 12. 1
Pan 12. 1
Random Pan 12. 2
Audio Out 12. 2
3D Effect 12. 3
Chapter 12 • Edit Mixer 12. 1
MIDI Channels 11. 1
Configuration 11. 2
MIDI Filters 11. 3
General Settings 11. 3
Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6
MIDI Dump 11. 7
Local On,Local Off 11. 9
MIDI Lock 11. 9
Recording 8. 2
The «Record View» page 8. 4
Chapter 9 • Edit Style 9. 1
Chapter 9 • Edit Style 9. 1
Erase 9. 3
Move 9. 5
Copy 9. 6
Quantize 9. 8
Insert Measures 9. 10
Delete measures 9. 11
Velocity 9. 12
Transpose 9. 13
Microscope 9. 14
Mask 9. 17
Erase 9. 3
Move 9. 5
Copy 9. 6
Quantize 9. 8
Insert Measures 9. 10
Delete measures 9. 11
Velocity 9. 12
Transpose 9. 13
Microscope 9. 14
Mask 9. 17
Chapter 11 • Edit MIDI 11. 1
Effect type 10. 1
Send Level 10. 2
General Effect Balance 10. 2
Effects Programming 10. 3
Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5
Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6
Vocal Processor 10. 7
Chord 10. 19
Vocoder 10. 10
Unison 10. 11
Edit 10. 11
Chapter 10 • Edit Effects 10. 1
Chapter 10 • Edit Effects 10. 1
Effect type 10. 1
Send Level 10. 2
General Effect Balance 10. 2
Effects Programming 10. 3
Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5
Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6
Vocal Processor 10. 7
Chord 10. 19
Vocoder 10. 10
Unison 10. 11
Edit 10. 11
Effect type 10. 1
Send Level 10. 2
General Effect Balance 10. 2
Effects Programming 10. 3
Effect 1 - Reverb table 10. 5
Effect 2 - Delay/Chorus/Flanger/Modulation table 10. 6
Vocal Processor 10. 7
Chord 10. 19
Vocoder 10. 10
Unison 10. 11
Edit 10. 11
Chapter 10 • Edit Effects 10. 1
Erase 9. 3
Move 9. 5
Copy 9. 6
Quantize 9. 8
Insert Measures 9. 10
Delete measures 9. 11
Velocity 9. 12
Transpose 9. 13
Microscope 9. 14
Mask 9. 17
Chapter 11 • Edit MIDI 11. 1
Chapter 11 • Edit MIDI 11. 1
MIDI Channels 11. 1
Configuration 11. 2
MIDI Filters 11. 3
General Settings 11. 3
Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6
MIDI Dump 11. 7
Local On,Local Off 11. 9
MIDI Lock 11. 9
MIDI Channels 11. 1
Configuration 11. 2
MIDI Filters 11. 3
General Settings 11. 3
Common Channel/Arrangement 11. 6
MIDI Dump 11. 7
Local On,Local Off 11. 9
MIDI Lock 11. 9
Chapter 9 • Edit Style 9. 1
Recording 8. 2
The «Record View» page 8. 4
Chapter 8 • User Style recording 8. 1
Erase 7. 3
Move 7. 5
Copy 7. 6
Quantize 7. 8
Insert measures 7. 10
Delete measures 7. 11
Velocity 7. 12
Transpose 7. 13
Microscope 7. 14
Master Track 7. 17
Score & Edit Score 7. 20
Score Controls 7. 21
Edit Score 7. 22
Chapter 12 • Edit Mixer 12. 1
Chapter 12 • Edit Mixer 12. 1
Volume 12. 1
Pan 12. 1
Random Pan 12. 2
Audio Out 12. 2
3D Effect 12. 3
Volume 12. 1
Pan 12. 1
Random Pan 12. 2
Audio Out 12. 2
3D Effect 12. 3
Chapter 13 • Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1
Chapter 13 • Edit Controllers/Pads 13. 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Trackball 13. 1
Pedals Programming 13. 2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Contents iii
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Chapter 7 • Edit Song 7. 1
Trackball 13. 1
Pedals Programming 13. 2
○
○
Trackball 13. 1
Pedals Programming 13. 2
Chapter 8 • User Style recording 8. 1
Recording 8. 2
The «Record View» page 8. 4
○
○
Erase 7. 3
Move 7. 5
Copy 7. 6
Quantize 7. 8
Insert measures 7. 10
Delete measures 7. 11
Velocity 7. 12
Transpose 7. 13
Microscope 7. 14
Master Track 7. 17
Score & Edit Score 7. 20
Score Controls 7. 21
Edit Score 7. 22
Chapter 8 • User Style recording 8. 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Contents iii
iv Contents
Pedals Assignment 13. 2
Pads 13. 3
The Switch Pedal functions 13. 4
The Continuous Pedal functions 13. 5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Pedals Assignment 13. 2
Pads 13. 3
The Switch Pedal functions 13. 4
The Continuous Pedal functions 13. 5
○
ROM Sound tables A. 2
Drumkit tables A. 10
ROM Style tables A. 30
Performance tables A. 32
Effects tables A. 32
Wavetables A. 33
MIDI Implementation chart A. 36/37
Recongnized Control Changer messages A. 38
System Exclusive Implementation A. 39
Index (alphabetical) A. 59
Chapter 14 • Edit Tracks 14. 1
Chapter 14 • Edit Tracks 14. 1
Transpose 14. 1
Master Transpose 14. 1
Detune 14. 2
Random Pitch 14. 2
Mode/Priority 14. 2
Velocity Curve 14. 3
Velocity Range 14. 3
Harmony 14. 4
Delay 14. 5
Key Range 14. 5
Create Track 14. 6
Copy Track 14. 6
Erase Track 14. 6
Transpose 14. 1
Master Transpose 14. 1
Detune 14. 2
Random Pitch 14. 2
Mode/Priority 14. 2
Velocity Curve 14. 3
Velocity Range 14. 3
Harmony 14. 4
Delay 14. 5
Key Range 14. 5
Create Track 14. 6
Copy Track 14. 6
Erase Track 14. 6
APPENDIX
General Controls 17. 2
Tuning/Scale 17. 2
Pedalboard / Computer 17. 4
Date & Time 17. 5
Display controls 17. 6
Mic/Line Input 17. 6
The Edit General Main Menu Options 17. 9
Chapter 15 • Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1
Chapter 16 • Edit Sound 16. 1
Chapter 15 • Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1
Edit Perf Sound 15. 2
Edit Sound Patch 15. 5
Chapter 16 • Edit Sound 16. 1
Chapter 17 • Edit General 17. 1
Edit Perf Sound 15. 2
Edit Sound Patch 15. 5
Waveform 16. 9
Volume & Balance 16. 11
Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope 16. 15
Filter 16. 23
Pitch Envelope 16. 28
LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator) 16. 31
Pan 16. 33
Sample Translator version 1.0 16. 40
Loading samples 16. 42
Saving your Samples 16. 45
Cancelling samples 16. 46
Assigning samples 16. 46
Cancelling assignments 16. 48
Sample Editing 16. 48
Sample MIDI Dump 16. 52
Abort (F8) 16. 53
Waveform 16. 9
Volume & Balance 16. 11
Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope 16. 15
Filter 16. 23
Pitch Envelope 16. 28
LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator) 16. 31
Pan 16. 33
Sample Translator version 1.0 16. 40
Loading samples 16. 42
Saving your Samples 16. 45
Cancelling samples 16. 46
Assigning samples 16. 46
Cancelling assignments 16. 48
Sample Editing 16. 48
Sample MIDI Dump 16. 52
Abort (F8) 16. 53
Waveform 16. 9
Volume & Balance 16. 11
Amplitude Envelope & Balance Envelope 16. 15
Filter 16. 23
Pitch Envelope 16. 28
LFO (Low Frequency Ocillator) 16. 31
Pan 16. 33
Sample Translator version 1.0 16. 40
Loading samples 16. 42
Saving your Samples 16. 45
Cancelling samples 16. 46
Assigning samples 16. 46
Cancelling assignments 16. 48
Sample Editing 16. 48
Sample MIDI Dump 16. 52
Abort (F8) 16. 53
Chapter 17 • Edit General 17. 1
Chapter 16 • Edit Sound 16. 1
General Controls 17. 2
Tuning/Scale 17. 2
Pedalboard / Computer 17. 4
Date & Time 17. 5
Display controls 17. 6
Mic/Line Input 17. 6
The Edit General Main Menu Options 17. 9
General Controls 17. 2
Tuning/Scale 17. 2
Pedalboard / Computer 17. 4
Date & Time 17. 5
Display controls 17. 6
Mic/Line Input 17. 6
The Edit General Main Menu Options 17. 9
Edit Perf Sound 15. 2
Edit Sound Patch 15. 5
Chapter 17 • Edit General 17. 1
Chapter 15 • Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch 15. 1
Transpose 14. 1
Master Transpose 14. 1
Detune 14. 2
Random Pitch 14. 2
Mode/Priority 14. 2
Velocity Curve 14. 3
Velocity Range 14. 3
Harmony 14. 4
Delay 14. 5
Key Range 14. 5
Create Track 14. 6
Copy Track 14. 6
Erase Track 14. 6
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
ROM Sound tables A. 2
Drumkit tables A. 10
ROM Style tables A. 30
Performance tables A. 32
Effects tables A. 32
Wavetables A. 33
MIDI Implementation chart A. 36/37
Recongnized Control Changer messages A. 38
System Exclusive Implementation A. 39
Index (alphabetical) A. 59
ROM Sound tables A. 2
Drumkit tables A. 10
ROM Style tables A. 30
Performance tables A. 32
Effects tables A. 32
Wavetables A. 33
MIDI Implementation chart A. 36/37
Recongnized Control Changer messages A. 38
System Exclusive Implementation A. 39
Index (alphabetical) A. 59
Chapter 14 • Edit Tracks 14. 1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
iv Contents
○
○
Pedals Assignment 13. 2
Pads 13. 3
The Switch Pedal functions 13. 4
The Continuous Pedal functions 13. 5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
iv Contents
○
○
Introduction i
Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Thank you for purchasing the GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by Generalmusic.
Thank you for purchasing the GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by Generalmusic.
The WK6/WK8 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the
instrument. With the optional A/V card, a musician can connect his instrument to the WK6/8, mix his
sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!) and follow a music score which
can be projected on a monitor connected to the instrument’s video outputs. At the same time a group of
singers can follow the lyrics projected on the monitor (television or other video projection device) by the
WK6/8 video interface.
The WK6/WK8 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the
instrument. With the optional A/V card, a musician can connect his instrument to the WK6/8, mix his
sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!) and follow a music score which
can be projected on a monitor connected to the instrument’s video outputs. At the same time a group of
singers can follow the lyrics projected on the monitor (television or other video projection device) by the
WK6/8 video interface.
At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
Once you are acquainted with the instrument’s basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all
the potentials of your WK6/WK8 World Keyboard.
THREE VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION
The Standard model can be fitted with optional kits for Power Station and Mega Station facilities, and all
models can be fitted with the SCSI port.
The basic Operating System, which features an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator, is common to all three versions. The WK6 Power Station is supplied with a factory-fitted Hard
Disk containing a vast library of Songs and User Styles, while the WK8 Mega Station includes an
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor and 8 Megabytes of Sample-RAM (D-RAM) in addition to the
Hard Disk. This model is also predisposed for a SCSI port which can be installed via an optional
Generalmusic SCSI kit.
HOW TO USE THE OWNER’S MANUAL
To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owner’s Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.
First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the WK6/8 which explains the functions of each
button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical
illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument.
To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owner’s Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.
First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the WK6/8 which explains the functions of each
button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical
illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument.
The WK Series World Keyboard is produced in three versions: the WK6 standard, the WK6 Power
Station and the WK8 Mega Station. All three versions incorporate a Flash-ROM memory which allows
the instruments to be up-dated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions.
HOW TO USE THE OWNER’S MANUAL
The Standard model can be fitted with optional kits for Power Station and Mega Station facilities, and all
models can be fitted with the SCSI port.
The Standard model can be fitted with optional kits for Power Station and Mega Station facilities, and all
models can be fitted with the SCSI port.
The basic Operating System, which features an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator, is common to all three versions. The WK6 Power Station is supplied with a factory-fitted Hard
Disk containing a vast library of Songs and User Styles, while the WK8 Mega Station includes an
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor and 8 Megabytes of Sample-RAM (D-RAM) in addition to the
Hard Disk. This model is also predisposed for a SCSI port which can be installed via an optional
Generalmusic SCSI kit.
HOW TO USE THE OWNER’S MANUAL
The basic Operating System, which features an advanced Edit Sound function and the Sample Translator, is common to all three versions. The WK6 Power Station is supplied with a factory-fitted Hard
Disk containing a vast library of Songs and User Styles, while the WK8 Mega Station includes an
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor and 8 Megabytes of Sample-RAM (D-RAM) in addition to the
Hard Disk. This model is also predisposed for a SCSI port which can be installed via an optional
Generalmusic SCSI kit.
The WK Series World Keyboard is produced in three versions: the WK6 standard, the WK6 Power
Station and the WK8 Mega Station. All three versions incorporate a Flash-ROM memory which allows
the instruments to be up-dated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions.
To ensure long, trouble-free operation, please read this manual carefully. The Owner’s Manual is supplied as a 3-ring binder with instructions inserted inside.
The WK Series World Keyboard is produced in three versions: the WK6 standard, the WK6 Power
Station and the WK8 Mega Station. All three versions incorporate a Flash-ROM memory which allows
the instruments to be up-dated by disk with the latest operational advantages and new functions.
First, read the Quick Guide chapter while operating the WK6/8 which explains the functions of each
button and the display. This will help you understand the basic operation of the instrument. Graphical
illustrations are included for a better understanding of the instrument.
THREE VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION
Once you are acquainted with the instrument’s basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all
the potentials of your WK6/WK8 World Keyboard.
Once you are acquainted with the instrument’s basic functions, use the Reference Guide to discover all
the potentials of your WK6/WK8 World Keyboard.
At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
At the end of the manual is the Appendix containing various tables, MIDI information and an index.
THREE VERSIONS OF A POWERFUL WORKSTATION
The WK6/WK8 is a multimedia keyboard workstation which offers several ways of interfacing with the
instrument. With the optional A/V card, a musician can connect his instrument to the WK6/8, mix his
sounds with those of the workstation (complete with effects processing!) and follow a music score which
can be projected on a monitor connected to the instrument’s video outputs. At the same time a group of
singers can follow the lyrics projected on the monitor (television or other video projection device) by the
WK6/8 video interface.
Thank you for purchasing the GEM WK6/WK8 World Keyboard by Generalmusic.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction i
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction i
ii Introduction
disk-based samples or data received via MIDI.
○
ii Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FEATURES OF THE WK6 & WK8
•
•
•
•
•
○
disk-based samples or data received via MIDI.
Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities
Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32
parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to
a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are
assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to
the auto-accompaniment section.
Sound generation
Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modified by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned
singularly or in pairs to up to a maximum of 3
Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 Waves per voice.
ROM-Sounds
ROM (permanent memory) contains up to 16
megabytes of samples which are the source
of over 1,000 ROM-Sounds.
RAM-Sounds
You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based
on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds
can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or can be created by the user with the
sound editor program. Sounds can be loaded
from WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS and WX/SX Series disks.
Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch
The “Edit Perf Sound” and “Edit Sound Patch”
functions permits quick modification of Sounds
and Drumkits to produce “PerformanceSounds”. The modifications are stored in Performance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or
Real-Performances to load the correct sounds.
Sound Edit
WK6/8 features and advanced, powerful and
highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes
you deep into the heart of sound synthesis at
its very best. You can shape envelopes, control Waveforms and open and close filters with
the help of high definition graphical representations projected on the display. The Sound
Edit also features the Sample Translator, an
incoporated Waveform creating program which
allows you to create new Sounds starting from
•
FEATURES OF THE WK6 & WK8
○
•
○
○
•
○
○
Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities
Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32
parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to
a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are
assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to
the auto-accompaniment section.
Sample-RAM (D-RAM)
WK8 is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM to allow the laoding of disk-based samples to create RAM -Sounds. The WK6 is supplied
with a 2 Mb D-RAM. The D-RAM is backed
by a Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning
off the instrument. The Standard and Power
Station models can be upgraded with optional
D-RAM kits).
○
○
•
○
•
Volatile Sample RAM (optional)
It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of
additional Sample-RAM via standard 30 pin
computer SIMMs (single in-line Memory Modules) obtainable from most computer outlets.
○
○
Sound generation
Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modified by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned
singularly or in pairs to up to a maximum of 3
Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 Waves per voice.
•
•
○
○
•
•
Digital Effects Processor
Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in
real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs
and modulations). A flexible matrix allows different effects to be assigned to every track.
○
○
ROM-Sounds
ROM (permanent memory) contains up to 16
megabytes of samples which are the source
of over 1,000 ROM-Sounds.
•
•
○
○
•
•
Sequencer
The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer
has a Microscope function (microscopic edit)
and Score facility (to display Score, chords and
Lyrics). The QuickRec recording method allows the rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles.
•
○
RAM-Sounds
You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based
on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds
can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or can be created by the user with the
sound editor program. Sounds can be loaded
from WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS and WX/SX Series disks.
•
○
Sample-RAM (D-RAM)
WK8 is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM to allow the laoding of disk-based samples to create RAM -Sounds. The WK6 is supplied
with a 2 Mb D-RAM. The D-RAM is backed
by a Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning
off the instrument. The Standard and Power
Station models can be upgraded with optional
D-RAM kits).
Volatile Sample RAM (optional)
It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of
additional Sample-RAM via standard 30 pin
computer SIMMs (single in-line Memory Modules) obtainable from most computer outlets.
Digital Effects Processor
Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in
real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs
and modulations). A flexible matrix allows different effects to be assigned to every track.
Sequencer
The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer
has a Microscope function (microscopic edit)
and Score facility (to display Score, chords and
Lyrics). The QuickRec recording method allows the rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles.
Jukebox & Preload
The Jukebox function allows you to chain the
Songs in memory and play them one after the
other with a single command. The Preload
function allows you to create a list of diskbased Songs or MIDI Files and play them all
by means of a single command, without first
loading all data in memory.
Automatic accompaniment
The internal ROM Styles provide automatic
musical accompaniments, consisting of 8
tracks. Every Style has 4 Variations. Up to
32 disk based Styles (User programmable) can
be loaded and automatically stored in the battery backed system memory. Each Style can
also be automatically reconfigured by means
of up to 8 associated Style Performances.
•
•
Jukebox & Preload
The Jukebox function allows you to chain the
Songs in memory and play them one after the
other with a single command. The Preload
function allows you to create a list of diskbased Songs or MIDI Files and play them all
by means of a single command, without first
loading all data in memory.
•
○
•
Automatic accompaniment
The internal ROM Styles provide automatic
musical accompaniments, consisting of 8
tracks. Every Style has 4 Variations. Up to
32 disk based Styles (User programmable) can
be loaded and automatically stored in the battery backed system memory. Each Style can
also be automatically reconfigured by means
of up to 8 associated Style Performances.
•
○
Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch
The “Edit Perf Sound” and “Edit Sound Patch”
functions permits quick modification of Sounds
and Drumkits to produce “PerformanceSounds”. The modifications are stored in Performance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or
Real-Performances to load the correct sounds.
•
•
Polyphony/multitimbral capabilities
Maximum polyphony: 64 voices. Multitimbricity: 16 parts (Style/RealTime modes) or 32
parts (Song mode). Each part is assigned to
a track. In Style/RealTime mode 8 tracks are
assigned to the keyboard and the other 8 to
the auto-accompaniment section.
Sound generation
Based on sampled waveforms (Wave), modified by programmable digital filters (DCF, Digitally Controlled Filters). Waves are assigned
singularly or in pairs to up to a maximum of 3
Layers, to obtain Sounds consisting of a maximum of 6 Waves per voice.
ROM-Sounds
ROM (permanent memory) contains up to 16
megabytes of samples which are the source
of over 1,000 ROM-Sounds.
RAM-Sounds
You can load disk-based RAM-Sounds based
on samples contained in ROM. RAM Sounds
can be supplied by Generalmusic, by third parties, or can be created by the user with the
sound editor program. Sounds can be loaded
from WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS and WX/SX Series disks.
Edit Perf-Sound/Sound Patch
The “Edit Perf Sound” and “Edit Sound Patch”
functions permits quick modification of Sounds
and Drumkits to produce “PerformanceSounds”. The modifications are stored in Performance tracks to allow Songs, Styles or
Real-Performances to load the correct sounds.
Sound Edit
WK6/8 features and advanced, powerful and
highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes
you deep into the heart of sound synthesis at
its very best. You can shape envelopes, control Waveforms and open and close filters with
the help of high definition graphical representations projected on the display. The Sound
Edit also features the Sample Translator, an
incoporated Waveform creating program which
allows you to create new Sounds starting from
•
○
Sound Edit
WK6/8 features and advanced, powerful and
highly flexible Sound Edit section that takes
you deep into the heart of sound synthesis at
its very best. You can shape envelopes, control Waveforms and open and close filters with
the help of high definition graphical representations projected on the display. The Sound
Edit also features the Sample Translator, an
incoporated Waveform creating program which
allows you to create new Sounds starting from
•
○
disk-based samples or data received via MIDI.
•
FEATURES OF THE WK6 & WK8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ii Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sample-RAM (D-RAM)
WK8 is fitted with 8 megabytes of RAM to allow the laoding of disk-based samples to create RAM -Sounds. The WK6 is supplied
with a 2 Mb D-RAM. The D-RAM is backed
by a Ni-Cd battery to retain data after turning
off the instrument. The Standard and Power
Station models can be upgraded with optional
D-RAM kits).
Volatile Sample RAM (optional)
It is possible to install up to 32 megabytes of
additional Sample-RAM via standard 30 pin
computer SIMMs (single in-line Memory Modules) obtainable from most computer outlets.
Digital Effects Processor
Four Digital Effects Processors, controlled in
real time, enrich the sound with effects (reverbs
and modulations). A flexible matrix allows different effects to be assigned to every track.
Sequencer
The 32 track, 250 event/16 Song sequencer
has a Microscope function (microscopic edit)
and Score facility (to display Score, chords and
Lyrics). The QuickRec recording method allows the rapid recording of Songs by using existing Styles.
Jukebox & Preload
The Jukebox function allows you to chain the
Songs in memory and play them one after the
other with a single command. The Preload
function allows you to create a list of diskbased Songs or MIDI Files and play them all
by means of a single command, without first
loading all data in memory.
Automatic accompaniment
The internal ROM Styles provide automatic
musical accompaniments, consisting of 8
tracks. Every Style has 4 Variations. Up to
32 disk based Styles (User programmable) can
be loaded and automatically stored in the battery backed system memory. Each Style can
also be automatically reconfigured by means
of up to 8 associated Style Performances.
Introduction iii
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction iii
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
•
•
○
○
•
•
Advanced MIDI operation & System
Exclusive
WK6/8 has two independent MIDI circuits (A
and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with
MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communcation.
Direct connection with a computer
The Computer jack permits the connection of
computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to
WK6/8 via a single serial cable.
SCSI port (optional)
For off-line storage, WK6/8 can be fitted with
a SCSI port, so you can store files on an external storage device connected via the SCSI
port (ZIP™, JAZ™, Hard Disks, etc.). This also
makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM
drive. A SCSI port can be installed in all models by means of Generalmusic’s optional SCSI
installation kit, available from all authorised
Generalmusic outlets. Installation should only
be carried out by authorised Generalmusic
service centres. The WK8 leaves the factory
predisposed for the SCSI port for easy installation.
Multitasking operating mode
The Multitasking operating system allows you
to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is
playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing.
Up-dateable operating system (OS)
Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add
new functions to the instrument.
•
•
•
•
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
•
○
○
Advanced MIDI operation & System
Exclusive
WK6/8 has two independent MIDI circuits (A
and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with
MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communcation.
○
○
•
○
○
Direct connection with a computer
The Computer jack permits the connection of
computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to
WK6/8 via a single serial cable.
○
○
•
○
Disk drive
Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in
WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 megabyte), standard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb). WK6/8 is able to initialize
disks for every format. It is possible to load
RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK6/8,
WX2, SX2 floppy disks. If Sample-RAM is
present, it is also possible to load new samples
from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other
instruments and computers.
Hard disk
WK6/8 (Power & Mega Station) is fitted with a
2.5” IDE or E-IDE internal hard disk (max. 2
Gigabytes). The standard model can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard
Disk installation kit, available from authorized
Generalmusic stores and should be installed
by a qualified service technician. A compatible IDE hard drive can be purchased from most
computer outlets.
Score view
The display can show the score, the lyrics and
chord symbols of a song. It is also possible to
connect WK6/8 to a video system (monitor,
domestic TV, closed circuit video) by means
of the Generalmusic Audio/Video card (optional on Standard and Power Stations) to display
score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected
onto a monitor during a performance to allow
others to sing with the player.
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor
The optional Audio/Video card installation kit
(standard feature for WK8) offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the
instrument’s internal Effects Processor, of projecting Song lyrics onto an external video device (TV, monitor, etc.), and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies
to your performance.
○
Disk drive
Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in
WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 megabyte), standard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb). WK6/8 is able to initialize
disks for every format. It is possible to load
RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK6/8,
WX2, SX2 floppy disks. If Sample-RAM is
present, it is also possible to load new samples
from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other
instruments and computers.
○
•
○
•
○
•
Hard disk
WK6/8 (Power & Mega Station) is fitted with a
2.5” IDE or E-IDE internal hard disk (max. 2
Gigabytes). The standard model can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard
Disk installation kit, available from authorized
Generalmusic stores and should be installed
by a qualified service technician. A compatible IDE hard drive can be purchased from most
computer outlets.
○
○
•
○
○
SCSI port (optional)
For off-line storage, WK6/8 can be fitted with
a SCSI port, so you can store files on an external storage device connected via the SCSI
port (ZIP™, JAZ™, Hard Disks, etc.). This also
makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM
drive. A SCSI port can be installed in all models by means of Generalmusic’s optional SCSI
installation kit, available from all authorised
Generalmusic outlets. Installation should only
be carried out by authorised Generalmusic
service centres. The WK8 leaves the factory
predisposed for the SCSI port for easy installation.
•
○
•
•
○
Multitasking operating mode
The Multitasking operating system allows you
to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is
playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing.
•
○
•
•
○
Score view
The display can show the score, the lyrics and
chord symbols of a song. It is also possible to
connect WK6/8 to a video system (monitor,
domestic TV, closed circuit video) by means
of the Generalmusic Audio/Video card (optional on Standard and Power Stations) to display
score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected
onto a monitor during a performance to allow
others to sing with the player.
•
Advanced MIDI operation & System
Exclusive
WK6/8 has two independent MIDI circuits (A
and B), offering up to 32 MIDI channels, with
MIDI-merge and MIDI-thru functions and System Exclusive communcation.
Direct connection with a computer
The Computer jack permits the connection of
computers not fitted with a MIDI interface to
WK6/8 via a single serial cable.
SCSI port (optional)
For off-line storage, WK6/8 can be fitted with
a SCSI port, so you can store files on an external storage device connected via the SCSI
port (ZIP™, JAZ™, Hard Disks, etc.). This also
makes it possible to load files from a CD-ROM
drive. A SCSI port can be installed in all models by means of Generalmusic’s optional SCSI
installation kit, available from all authorised
Generalmusic outlets. Installation should only
be carried out by authorised Generalmusic
service centres. The WK8 leaves the factory
predisposed for the SCSI port for easy installation.
Multitasking operating mode
The Multitasking operating system allows you
to execute several operations simultaneously, such as modifying sounds while a song is
playing, loading a song during song play, formatting a disk while playing.
Up-dateable operating system (OS)
Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add
new functions to the instrument.
•
•
•
Up-dateable operating system (OS)
Since the operating system resides in a flashROM, it is possible to load updates from floppy disk. Operating system updates can add
new functions to the instrument.
•
Disk drive
Data can be stored on 3.5" HD floppy disks, in
WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 megabyte), standard MS-DOS (1.44 megabyte) or Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb). WK6/8 is able to initialize
disks for every format. It is possible to load
RAM-Sounds, Styles and Songs from WK6/8,
WX2, SX2 floppy disks. If Sample-RAM is
present, it is also possible to load new samples
from disk (as RAM -Sounds). MS-DOS compatibility permits MIDI file exchange with other
instruments and computers.
Hard disk
WK6/8 (Power & Mega Station) is fitted with a
2.5” IDE or E-IDE internal hard disk (max. 2
Gigabytes). The standard model can be upgraded with the optional Generalmusic Hard
Disk installation kit, available from authorized
Generalmusic stores and should be installed
by a qualified service technician. A compatible IDE hard drive can be purchased from most
computer outlets.
Score view
The display can show the score, the lyrics and
chord symbols of a song. It is also possible to
connect WK6/8 to a video system (monitor,
domestic TV, closed circuit video) by means
of the Generalmusic Audio/Video card (optional on Standard and Power Stations) to display
score and lyrics on a television (or other external video device). Lyrics can be projected
onto a monitor during a performance to allow
others to sing with the player.
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor
The optional Audio/Video card installation kit
(standard feature for WK8) offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the
instrument’s internal Effects Processor, of projecting Song lyrics onto an external video device (TV, monitor, etc.), and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies
to your performance.
Audio/Video card with Vocal Processor
The optional Audio/Video card installation kit
(standard feature for WK8) offers the possibility of processing Mic/Line signals with the
instrument’s internal Effects Processor, of projecting Song lyrics onto an external video device (TV, monitor, etc.), and includes the Vocal Processor function to add vocal harmonies
to your performance.
•
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction iii
iv Introduction
○
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES
Observe these important preliminary notes before using your instrument:
Observe these important preliminary notes before using your instrument:
AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.=
AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.=
MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first
time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests
on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also
find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a precautionary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any
factory-loaded files. The protection is removed in the Disk Utility page.
MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first
time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests
on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also
find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a precautionary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any
factory-loaded files. The protection is removed in the Disk Utility page.
UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument.
The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained in the instrument’s
Flash ROM.
UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument.
The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained in the instrument’s
Flash ROM.
To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk:
To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk:
(1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message
«Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort» appears, press ENTER to start the OS
update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the message «Loading successful (Enter to
continue)» is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows
below to insure proper operation.
(1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message
«Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort» appears, press ENTER to start the OS
update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the message «Loading successful (Enter to
continue)» is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows
below to insure proper operation.
RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instrument’s memory has been damaged, either by
being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate
properly. The remedy is a power-up reset:
RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instrument’s memory has been damaged, either by
being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate
properly. The remedy is a power-up reset:
1. The WK6/8 should contain the following items from the factory:
a) Instrument;
b) 2 Floppy disks (1 Operating System (OS)-Disk, 1 Demo disk);
c) Owner’s manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder).
2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide
the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate).
3. Generalmusic on Internet:
http://www.generalmusic.com
Important information
ESCAPE
OFF
ON
POWER
1
+
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
2
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up
Requests MEMORY CLEAR !!
< ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort >
(1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the
message «!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to
abort>» appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.
(1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the
message «!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to
abort>» appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.
2
1
(1) Turn on the instrument while simultaneously pressing the POWER switch and rotating the DIAL, (2) when the
message «!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up Requests MEMORY CLEAR !! < ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to
abort>» appears, press ENTER to clear the MEMORY.
RESETTING AT POWER UP - If the data contained in the instrument’s memory has been damaged, either by
being exposed to the effects of a strong magnetic field, or other unknown reason, the instrument may not operate
properly. The remedy is a power-up reset:
TEMPO / DATA
POWER
2
1
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up
Requests MEMORY CLEAR !!
< ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort >
TEMPO / DATA
POWER
(1) turn off the instrument, (2) insert the floppy disk in the drive, (3) turn on the instrument, (4) When the message
«Loading OS-disk clears all memory!! ENTER to load, ESCAPE to abort» appears, press ENTER to start the OS
update, (5) wait while the operating system is being loaded, (6) when the message «Loading successful (Enter to
continue)» is displayed, press ENTER. After completing this process, proceed with the power-up reset that follows
below to insure proper operation.
ON
ENTER
+
OFF
ON
ENTER
+
OFF
!!WARNING!! Dial on Power-Up
Requests MEMORY CLEAR !!
< ENTER to CLEAR / ESCAPE to abort >
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
To load the operating system contained on the floppy disk:
UP-DATEABLE OPERATING SYSTEM - A disk containing the operating system is supplied with the instrument.
The disk can contain a more recent version of the operating system than the one contained in the instrument’s
Flash ROM.
Important information
Important information
1. The WK6/8 should contain the following items from the factory:
a) Instrument;
b) 2 Floppy disks (1 Operating System (OS)-Disk, 1 Demo disk);
c) Owner’s manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder).
2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide
the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate).
3. Generalmusic on Internet:
http://www.generalmusic.com
1. The WK6/8 should contain the following items from the factory:
a) Instrument;
b) 2 Floppy disks (1 Operating System (OS)-Disk, 1 Demo disk);
c) Owner’s manual (shrink-wrap pack with 3-ring binder).
2. When contacting your retailer or authorized Generalmusic technical assistance centre, always provide
the model name and serial number of your instrument (found on the identification plate).
3. Generalmusic on Internet:
http://www.generalmusic.com
MODELS WITH OPTIONAL HARD DISK INSTALLED- the hard disk may appear to operate rather slowly the first
time you open its directory. This is caused by operations relating to the organization of the internal data and tests
on the integrity of the device. The delay is eliminated on all successive hard disk access operations. You may also
find that the Hard Disk is write protected - this is merely a precautionary measure to avoid accidental erasure of any
factory-loaded files. The protection is removed in the Disk Utility page.
AVOID PLACING DISKS NEAR MAGNETS - Do not place floppy disks on top of speakers, near magnets, telephones, or other sources of electromagnetic fields. The disk contents could be damaged.=
Observe these important preliminary notes before using your instrument:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
iv Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
IMPORTANT PRELIMINARY NOTES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
iv Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction v
○
SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING
The rechargeable battery
The rechargeable battery
The WK6/8 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery
is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!).
The WK6/8 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery
is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!).
When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for
at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.
When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for
at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM
-Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the
Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at
power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after
powering up the instrument again
○
-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: It is possible to load RAM
-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
What remains in memory and what is cancelled
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
What remains in memory and what is cancelled
Modified Style-Performances
○
○
User Styles (User buttons)
○
○
RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
○
© Note: It is possible to load RAM
○
-Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the
Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at
power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after
powering up the instrument again
Songs
○
Setup (general settings)
○
RAM
○
-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)
○
RAM
○
© WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM
Samples in Volatile S-RAM
○
To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least
once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK6/8 will keep the battery charged.
Samples in Backed S-RAM
○
The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE
settings.
To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least
once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK6/8 will keep the battery charged.
Programmable Performances
Not stored after turning off
Stored after turning off
Not stored after turning off
Programmable Performances
Modified Style-Performances
Modified Style-Performances
User Styles (User buttons)
What remains in memory and what is cancelled
Programmable Performances
User Styles (User buttons)
○
Songs
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-Sounds (totally new Sound Waves) only if the Sample-RAM is installed.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Setup (general settings)
RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)
Samples in Volatile S-RAM
○
The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE
settings.
-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)
RAM
○
○
○
○
○
Samples in Backed S-RAM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-Sounds (based on samples in Volatile S-RAM)
RAM
○
○
○
Samples in Volatile S-RAM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The status of the following buttons also remain memorized: ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, TEMPO LOCK, MIXER LOCK, BASS TO LOWEST and the ARRANGE MODE
settings.
When the instrument is turned off, if the battery is at maximum charge level, the data in RAM is conserved for about two weeks. The charge of the battery increases by one day for every hour the instrument is left on, until the maximum level is reached. If the battery discharges, leave the instrument on for
at least 15 hours to recharge it completely.
RAM
To increase the efficiency of the rechargeable battery, repeat the complete recharging operation at least
once a month. In most cases, normal use of the WK6/8 will keep the battery charged.
The WK6/8 conserves the data in RAM after turning off, thanks to a rechargeable battery. The battery
is recharged while the instrument is turned on (not just plugged in!).
The rechargeable battery
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction v
SOME USEFUL INFORMATION BEFORE STARTING
Samples in Backed S-RAM
○
© WARNING- Sounds based on sample RAM (RAM
-Sounds) are conserved after power down only if the
Backed Sample-RAM is installed. If the volatile Sample-RAM is installed, the Sounds and samples will be lost at
power down (much like typical computer memory). If desired, these Sounds can be reloaded from disk after
powering up the instrument again
RAM-Sounds (based on samples in ROM)
-Sounds (based on samples in Backed S-RAM)
○
© Note: It is possible to load RAM
Setup (general settings)
RAM
Not stored after turning off
Stored after turning off
Stored after turning off
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Introduction v
vi Introduction
RAM RESET
Battery discharged message
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can
reset the backed RAM.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter
the “Edit General” menu.
If the instrument has been left turned off for a
long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data.
RAM RESET
Battery discharged message
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can
reset the backed RAM.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter
the “Edit General” menu.
If the instrument has been left turned off for a
long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge.
If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following
message:
If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off
for a long period of time, be sure to save all userprogrammed data to disk to safeguard your data
against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.
The message cancels automatically after 2/3
seconds.
If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following
message:
2. Press the soft button F4 to select the “Restore
all” command. The following dialogue window
is displayed.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or
ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is confirmed, the instrument can be
played after few seconds.
2. Press the soft button F4 to select the “Restore
all” command. The following dialogue window
is displayed.
Leave the instrument on for a few hours to recharge the battery. One hour of charge time corresponds to approximately one day of use - the
battery charge remains active for approximately
15 days of non-use.
After the message cancels, be sure to save all of
your edited work to disk until after the battery has
sufficiently charged.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or
ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is confirmed, the instrument can be
played after few seconds.
Leave the instrument on for a few hours to recharge the battery. One hour of charge time corresponds to approximately one day of use - the
battery charge remains active for approximately
15 days of non-use.
After the message cancels, be sure to save all of
your edited work to disk until after the battery has
sufficiently charged.
The message cancels automatically after 2/3
seconds.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the initialization, or
ESCAPE to cancel the procedure. If the procedure is confirmed, the instrument can be
played after few seconds.
If the battery has lost its charge completely, turning the instrument on will show the following
message:
Battery discharged message
RAM RESET
○
If the instrument has been left turned off for a
long period of time, the battery will slowly discharge.
○
If you want to recall the factory settings, you can
reset the backed RAM.
○
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to enter
the “Edit General” menu.
When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data.
○
○
○
○
○
vi Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Leave the instrument on for a few hours to recharge the battery. One hour of charge time corresponds to approximately one day of use - the
battery charge remains active for approximately
15 days of non-use.
If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off
for a long period of time, be sure to save all userprogrammed data to disk to safeguard your data
against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.
2. Press the soft button F4 to select the “Restore
all” command. The following dialogue window
is displayed.
○
The message cancels automatically after 2/3
seconds.
After the message cancels, be sure to save all of
your edited work to disk until after the battery has
sufficiently charged.
If you foresee leaving the instrument turned off
for a long period of time, be sure to save all userprogrammed data to disk to safeguard your data
against automatic erasure due to battery discharge.
○
When the battery discharges completely, it causes the total loss of all user programmed data.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
vi Introduction
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quick
Guide
Quick
Guide
• 1 Layout & Display
• 1 Layout & Display
• 2 User Guide
• 2 User Guide
• 2 User Guide
• 1 Layout & Display
Quick
Guide
User Guide
○
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Power source
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Power source
• Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before
connecting to the mains.
• DC power cannot be used to power this instrument.
• If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall
outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
• Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before
connecting to the mains.
• DC power cannot be used to power this instrument.
• If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall
outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a
soft, dry cloth.
• Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they
may damage the instrument finish.
• Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick
succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.
Handling the power cord
•
• Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands.
• Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug.
• Never forcibly bend the power cord.
• If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or
source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified
technician.
Handling the power cord
• Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands.
• Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug.
• Never forcibly bend the power cord.
• If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or
source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified
technician.
General user maintenance
• Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it.
• Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume
slider at about two thirds of the course).
• Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all
units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument
Important notes
• Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at
once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased.
• As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
• Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store
where it was purchased.
• Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other
unexpected damage or accident.
If the instrument plays in an abnormal way
• Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at
once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased.
• As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
If the instrument plays in an abnormal way
If the instrument plays in an abnormal way
• Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store
where it was purchased.
• Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other
unexpected damage or accident.
• Do not allow liquids to penetrate the instrument. Do not place containers of liquids on the instrument. If water or liquids penetrate the instrument, remove the power cord from the wall socket at
once, and contact the store where the unit was purchased.
• As a general precaution, never open the unit and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry.
Important notes
• Turn off the power immediately, remove the power cord from the mains outlet and contact the store
where it was purchased.
• Discontinue using the unit at once. Failure to do so may result in additional damage or other
unexpected damage or accident.
Important notes
If water (or other liquid) gets into the instrument
• Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it.
• Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume
slider at about two thirds of the course).
• Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all
units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
• Do not place heavy objects on the instrument and avoid leaning on it.
• Before turning on the instrument, be sure to set the volume to a reasonable level (master volume
slider at about two thirds of the course).
• Before connecting your instrument to other devices, always remember to turn off the power to all
units; this will help to prevent damage or malfunction.
• Never touch the power cord or its plug with wet hands.
• Never pull on the cord to remove it from the wall socket, always pull the plug.
• Never forcibly bend the power cord.
• If the power cord is scarred, cut or broken, or has a bad contact, it will be a potential fire hazard or
source of serious electric shock. NEVER use a damaged power cord; have it replaced by a qualified
technician.
General user maintenance
General user maintenance
•
•
Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a
soft, dry cloth.
• Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they
may damage the instrument finish.
• Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick
succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.
Clean the outer surface of your instrument using a soft, clean, slightly damp cloth and polish with a
soft, dry cloth.
• Never use industrial cleaners, detergents, abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or polishes as they
may damage the instrument finish.
• Always turn off the power supply after use and never turn the unit on and off repeatedly in quick
succession as this places an undue load on the electronic components.
Handling the power cord
• Be sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate before
connecting to the mains.
• DC power cannot be used to power this instrument.
• If the instrument is to remain unused for long periods of time, remove the power cord from its wall
outlet. For safety purposes, remove the power cord in cases of storms with lightning.
Power source
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Front & Rear panel 1•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
14 15
16
17
18
19 20
21
22
23
FRONT LAYOUT
1
2
3
2
A
ACC. 4/6
LOWER.2
LOWER.1
TRACKS
SOUND
3
2
EFFECTS
CONTRAST
UNDO
HELP
D. HOLD
KEY PAD
MIDI
MIXER
EDIT / NUMBER
TRACK SCROLL
UPPER.2
4
6
5
4
CNT / PADS
F1
UPPER.1
5
7
6
1. Power On/Off Switch.
2. Speakers.
3. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/
3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H].
4. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower
Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer
Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off
5. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play,
Store Perf.
6. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons A…H,
F1…F8.
7. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P.
8. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad.
9. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score,
Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time.
10. Sound Groups.
11. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads,
Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General,
Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED.
HELP
D. HOLD
EDIT / NUMBER
KEY PAD
MIDI
F3
CNT / PADS
F4
SEQUENCER
RECORD
ST. / SONG
F5
E
3
TRACKS
4
SOUND
5
6
SCORE
F
ST. / SONG
F6
F7
STORE
PERF.
2
F2
D
SOLO
MIXER
F1
1
SYNTH
7
STYLE
REAL TIME
G
SONG
STOP
F8
H
GENERAL
8
9
PLAY
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
H. D.
0
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
+
SOUND GROUPS
PROG 1
PROG 3
FILL
8 9 10 11
2
12. Trackball (Pitch Bend, Modulation).
13. Headphones jacks (2).
14. Keyboard (C2-C7) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from
C–1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the
Transpose function, the entire range C–1 G9 can be covered on the keyboard.
15. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name
writing situations.
16. Style Groups.
17. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <,
Fill ><, Fill >.
18. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending.
19. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial.
20. Directional buttons (cursor arrows).
21. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4.
22. Octave –/+, Transpose b/#.
23. Disk Drive location.
O
OFF
ACC. 1/3
LATIN. 2
VAR. 4
UNDO
EFFECTS
C
H
G
POWE
O
MAX
LATIN. 1
VAR. 3
BASS
SEQUENCER
1
TRAD. 2
VAR. 2
DRUMS
RECORD
ST. / SONG
F3
F2
B
VAR. 1
DANCE. 2
MIC/LINE
F5
F4
D
TRAD. 1
US. TRAD
DANCE. 1
M.VOL
SCORE
E
POWE
C
FADE I / O
ESCAPE
H
#
SOLO
JAZZ
SFX
G
TRANSPOSE
F
PERC.
b
EFFECTS
BYPASS
GENERAL
+
FUNK
E
9
SYNTH
ST. / SONG
ETHNIC
OCTAVE
ROCK
16. BEAT
D
DISK
_
8. BEAT
BRASS
C
F6
F
8
SYN. FIX
ENSEMB
B
H. D.
PRELOAD
7
SYN. PAD
PAD 4
CONTRAST
STYLE GROUPS
STRINGS
A
F7
SYN. LD
BASS
MIN
+
0
_
DEMO
STYLE
REAL TIME
G
PAD 3
GUITAR
STORE
PERF.
PLAY
PAD 2
ORGAN
ARRANGE
MODE
STRINGS
SOUND GROUPS
STOP
PIPE
LOWER
MEMORY
BASS
GUITAR
ORGAN
SONG
CHROM.
ARRANGE
MEMORY
CHROM.
PIANO
F8
PIANO
REED
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
STYLE P.
PAD 1
START / STOP
8
STYLE P.
FILL
TAP TEMPO
7
8
6
7
5
6
TEMPO / DATA
4
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
5
ENTER
3
4
2
3
ENDING
1
2
KEY START
ST. LOCK
FILL
1
INTRO
H
FILL
ST. LOCK
PROG 4
PROG 2
LATIN. 2
VAR. 4
PROG 3
PROG 1
LATIN. 1
VAR. 3
PROG 1
8 9 10 11
B
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
HARMONY
ON / OFF
DANCE. 2
TRAD. 2
VAR. 2
DANCE. 2
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
VAR. 1
DANCE. 1
BASS TO
LOWEST
DANCE. 1
SFX
BRASS
TRAD. 1
US. TRAD
FUNK
MIXER
LOCK
FUNK
#
TRANSPOSE
PERC.
SOUND GROUPS
STYLE GROUPS
b
ENSEMB
ROCK
H. D.
+
7
TRACK SCROLL
A
EFFECTS
BYPASS
ARRANGE
MODE
HARMONY
ON / OFF
+
ETHNIC
TEMPO
LOCK
DISK
0
LOWER
MEMORY
ROCK
OCTAVE
_
SYN. FIX
SYN. PAD
SYN. LD
9
PRELOAD
ARRANGE
MEMORY
F
E
D
BASS TO
LOWEST
PAD 4
GENERAL
8
PLAY
DEMO
STYLE GROUPS
16. BEAT
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
C
MIXER
LOCK
PIPE
STOP
UPPER.1
TEMPO
LOCK
PAD 3
REED
SONG
B
A
_
JAZZ
PAD 2
SYNTH
7
STYLE
REAL TIME
F8
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
PROG 2
PAD 1
F6
G
H
TEMPO / DATA
STORE
PERF.
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
HARMONY
ON / OFF
ENTER
ST. / SONG
ENDING
BASS TO
LOWEST
6
SCORE
F
F7
MIXER
LOCK
5
KEY START
F5
E
4
INTRO
EFFECTS
BYPASS
ARRANGE
MODE
SEQUENCER
RECORD
ST. / SONG
PROG 4
MIN
F4
PROG 3
D
SOLO
LATIN. 2
LOWER
MEMORY
F
E
D
SOUND
LATIN. 1
ARRANGE
MEMORY
C
UPPER.2
TRAD. 2
B
A
TRACKS
LOWER.1
TRAD. 1
MIN
CNT / PADS
LOWER.2
ACC. 4/6
US. TRAD
F3
C
3
H
G
ACC. 1/3
BASS
DRUMS
6
MAX
MIXER
2
F2
MIC/LINE
5
16. BEAT
MIDI
4
JAZZ
B
FADE I / O
3
8. BEAT
EDIT / NUMBER
KEY PAD
1
8. BEAT
ESCAPE
D. HOLD
START / STOP
HELP
FILL
UNDO
EFFECTS
TEMPO
LOCK
2
M.VOL
CONTRAST
F1
TAP TEMPO
TRACK SCROLL
A
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
1
UPPER.1
MAX
FILL
UPPER.2
2
FILL
LOWER.1
8 9 10 11
VAR. 4
LOWER.2
ACC. 4/6
7
VAR. 3
ACC. 1/3
BASS
DRUMS
6
VAR. 2
MIC/LINE
5
VAR. 1
M.VOL
4
FADE I / O
3
12. Trackball (Pitch Bend, Modulation).
13. Headphones jacks (2).
14. Keyboard (C2-C7) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from
C–1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the
Transpose function, the entire range C–1 G9 can be covered on the keyboard.
15. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name
writing situations.
16. Style Groups.
17. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <,
Fill ><, Fill >.
18. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending.
19. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial.
20. Directional buttons (cursor arrows).
21. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4.
22. Octave –/+, Transpose b/#.
23. Disk Drive location.
OFF
2
1. Power On/Off Switch.
2. Speakers.
3. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/
3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H].
4. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower
Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer
Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off
5. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play,
Store Perf.
6. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons A…H,
F1…F8.
7. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P.
8. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad.
9. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score,
Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time.
10. Sound Groups.
11. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads,
Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General,
Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED.
O
12. Trackball (Pitch Bend, Modulation).
13. Headphones jacks (2).
14. Keyboard (C2-C7) - responds to note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for all notes from
C–1 - G9 (notes numbers 0 - 127). Using the
Transpose function, the entire range C–1 G9 can be covered on the keyboard.
15. Alphanumeric configuration - each note corresponds to a letter or number for use in name
writing situations.
16. Style Groups.
17. Fade In/Out, Var 1, Var 2, Var 3, Var 4, Fill <,
Fill ><, Fill >.
18. Start/Stop, Intro, Key Start, Ending.
19. Enter, Escape, Tempo/Data Dial.
20. Directional buttons (cursor arrows).
21. Pad 1, Pad 2, Pad 3, Pad 4.
22. Octave –/+, Transpose b/#.
23. Disk Drive location.
1. Power On/Off Switch.
2. Speakers.
3. Sliders (M.Vol, Mic/Line, Drum, Bass, Acc1/
3, Acc 4/6, Lower 2, Lower 1, Upper 2, Upper 1, [A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H].
4. Arrange On/Off, Arrange Memory, Lower
Memory, Arrange Mode, Tempo Lock, Mixer
Lock, Bass to Lowest, Harmony On/Off
5. Effects Bypass, Solo, Single Touch Play,
Store Perf.
6. 1/4 VGA Display (backlit), Track Scroll buttons, Page Select buttons, Soft buttons A…H,
F1…F8.
7. Style Lock, Performance Groups, Style P.
8. Contrast, Undo, Help, D. Hold, Key Pad.
9. Sequencer: Record St./Song, <<, >>, Score,
Song, Stop, Play, Style/Real Time.
10. Sound Groups.
11. Edit/Number: Effects, Midi, Mixer, Cnt/Pads,
Tracks, Sound, St./Song, Synth, General,
Demo, Preload, Disk, Hard Disk LED.
POWE
FRONT LAYOUT
1
○
12 13
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
○
OFF
PROG 2
ST. LOCK
FILL
1
INTRO
PROG 4
FILL
TAP TEMPO
2
KEY START
3
ENDING
4
5
ENTER
6
7
8
STYLE P.
TEMPO / DATA
PAD 1
START / STOP
PIANO
CHROM.
REED
PIPE
PAD 2
PAD 3
ORGAN
SYN. LD
GUITAR
BASS
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
_
PAD 4
STRINGS
ETHNIC
+
OCTAVE
ENSEMB
BRASS
PERC.
b
TRANSPOSE
SFX
#
ESCAPE
FRONT LAYOUT
14 15
16
17
18
19 20
○
○
○
21
○
○
○
22
○
○
○
23
○
○
○
○
12 13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Front & Rear panel 1•1
14 15
16
17
18
19 20
21
22
23
Chapter 1 • Layout & Display
12 13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Front & Rear panel 1•1
1•2 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack.
The auxiliary outputs emit “dry” sounds (i.e.
with no effects).
8. Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in
RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard). Both outputs are operational only with
the Audio/Video Interface (optional for the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Models not fitted with the A/V Interface leave
the factory with an adhesive applied below
these outputs saying “NO VIDEO INTERFACE INSTALLED”.
9. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power
cord into this socket.
○
○
○
○
○
○
REAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)
7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack.
The auxiliary outputs emit “dry” sounds (i.e.
with no effects).
8. Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in
RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard). Both outputs are operational only with
the Audio/Video Interface (optional for the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Models not fitted with the A/V Interface leave
the factory with an adhesive applied below
these outputs saying “NO VIDEO INTERFACE INSTALLED”.
9. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power
cord into this socket.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume.
SCSI port (optional).
Pedalboard port.
Computer port (serial connector for direct
computer conection (Apple Macintosh or IBM
PC and compatibles).
5. MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/
B, MIDI OUT A/B).
6. Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 2/1 (audio inputs for
Microphone or Line signals and twin gain
control for the input signals). The optional A/
V board is required for most external processing applications (optional for WK6 standard
and Power Station models).
1
RIGHT
2
LEFT
1
1
3
2
2
1
RIGHT
LEFT
8
9
RGB
S-VHS
OUTPUT
MIC / LINE IN
DAMPER
○
7
VOLUME
VIDEO
4
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
THRU B
5
OUT B
IN B
PEDAL
DAMPER
2
1
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
5
THRU B
OUT B
IN B
6
THRU A
OUT A
2
IN A
PEDAL
1
7
RIGHT
LEFT
MIC / LINE IN
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
MIDI
SCSI PORT
1 2 34
Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume.
SCSI port (optional).
Pedalboard port.
Computer port (serial connector for direct
computer conection (Apple Macintosh or IBM
PC and compatibles).
5. MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/
B, MIDI OUT A/B).
6. Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 2/1 (audio inputs for
Microphone or Line signals and twin gain
control for the input signals). The optional A/
V board is required for most external processing applications (optional for WK6 standard
and Power Station models).
○
6
1.
2.
3.
4.
○
2
REAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)
2
1
RIGHT
8
LEFT
RGB
9
S-VHS
OUTPUT
MIDI
VIDEO
SCSI PORT
SCSI PORT
SCSI PORT
MIDI
IN B
1 234
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
2
5
1
RIGHT
LEFT
2
6
1
RIGHT
LEFT
RGB
7
8
7. Output: (Left, Right, 1, 2). For Mono reproduction, use either the RIGHT or LEFT jack.
The auxiliary outputs emit “dry” sounds (i.e.
with no effects).
8. Video RGB, SVHS: RGB (Video output in
RGB/Composite Video standard), SVHS (Video output in SVHS/Composite Video standard). Both outputs are operational only with
the Audio/Video Interface (optional for the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Models not fitted with the A/V Interface leave
the factory with an adhesive applied below
these outputs saying “NO VIDEO INTERFACE INSTALLED”.
9. Mains socket: Insert the supplied power
cord into this socket.
SCSI PORT
2
1
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
3
4
2
1
MIC / LINE IN
2
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
LEFT
RIGHT
○
○
2
1
RIGHT
7
○
1•2 User Guide
OUT B
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LEFT
VIDEO
OUTPUT
MIC / LINE IN
1
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
THRU B
OUT B
IN B
1 234
9
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
2
5
1
RIGHT
LEFT
2
6
1
RIGHT
LEFT
RGB
7
S-VHS
8
VIDEO
RGB
S-VHS
8
9
9
SCSI PORT
MIDI
PEDAL
IN A
5
OUTPUT
6
○
THRU B
2
DAMPER
MIDI
PEDAL
DAMPER
S-VHS
2
DAMPER
1
VOLUME
PEDALB.
COMPUTER
3
4
2
1
THRU B
OUT B
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
5
VIDEO
MIC / LINE IN
REAR PANEL (CONNECTIONS)
OUT B
1.
2.
3.
4.
THRU B
5.
COMPUTER
6.
PEDALB.
Pedals: Damper, 1, 2, Volume.
SCSI port (optional).
Pedalboard port.
Computer port (serial connector for direct
computer conection (Apple Macintosh or IBM
PC and compatibles).
MIDI interface: (MIDI IN A/B, MIDI THRU A/
B, MIDI OUT A/B).
Mic/Line In: 1, 2, Gain 2/1 (audio inputs for
Microphone or Line signals and twin gain
control for the input signals). The optional A/
V board is required for most external processing applications (optional for WK6 standard
and Power Station models).
VOLUME
PEDAL
OUTPUT
MIC / LINE IN
1
MIDI
VIDEO
PEDAL
2
DAMPER
2
1
OUTPUT
LEFT
RIGHT
2
1
RIGHT
6
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
○
1•2 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LEFT
RGB
S-VHS
8
○
○
○
9
Display 1•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
EDIT/NUMBER
SECTION
ENABLED FOR
NUMERIC ENTRY
WHEN THE
KEYPAD LED
IS ON
TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS
GENERAL
SYNTH
ST. / SONG
TRACK SCROLL
CNT / PADS
6
5
SOUND
TRACKS
A
F1
3
2
B
F2
EFFECTS
MIXER
MIDI
EDIT / NUMBER
F
F6
D
E
E
F5
ESCAPE
F7
H
F8
TEMPO / DATA
CURSOR
ARROWS
The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary
navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on
the left and right of the display, and the TRACK
SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons
above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry
device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers
when the KEYPAD LED is on.
NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT
CURSOR
NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION
CURSOR
ARROWS
SOFT BUTTONS F1 … F8
ENTER
F8
SOFT BUTTONS A … H
ENTER/ESCAPE
AND DIAL
ENTER/ESCAPE
AND DIAL
ENTER
SOFT BUTTONS F1 … F8
NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION
F6
G
F7
NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT
CURSOR
F5
F
G
H
F4
TEMPO / DATA
SOFT BUTTONS F1 … F8
ENTER/ESCAPE
AND DIAL
ENTER
The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary
navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on
the left and right of the display, and the TRACK
SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons
above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry
device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers
when the KEYPAD LED is on.
F8
H
F7
F6
F
ESCAPE
F5
E
F4
D
EDIT / NUMBER
MIDI
MIXER
1
2
3
TRACKS
SOUND
4
5
6
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
F2
F1
PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
+
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
3
EDIT/NUMBER
SECTION
ENABLED FOR
NUMERIC ENTRY
WHEN THE
KEYPAD LED
IS ON
TRACKS
SOUND
4
5
6
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
CNT / PADS
H. D.
The WK6/8 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all
times.
_
1
TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS
H. D.
MIXER
TRACK SCROLL
The display’s cursor is a negative highlight zone
which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified
with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
MIDI
A
The display’s cursor is a negative highlight zone
which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified
with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
CNT / PADS
EFFECTS
B
EDIT/NUMBER
SECTION
ENABLED FOR
NUMERIC ENTRY
WHEN THE
KEYPAD LED
IS ON
EDIT / NUMBER
KEY PAD
OLD
F3
EFFECTS
C
KEY PAD
OLD
TEMPO / DATA
G
ESCAPE
CURSOR
ARROWS
○
Display 1•3
_
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
+
0
THE DISPLAY
F4
F3
NEGATIVE HIGHLIGHT
CURSOR
D
F2
C
KEY PAD
F3
OLD
C
SOFT BUTTONS A … H
F1
1
B
The principal navigating controls are the CURSOR ARROWS (directional arrows) and the principal Data entry device is the DIAL. Secondary
navigating devices are the SOFT BUTTONS on
the left and right of the display, and the TRACK
SCROLL and PAGE (MENU) SCROLL buttons
above the Soft buttons. A secondary data entry
device is the numeric keypad (the EDIT/NUMBER section), which enters absolute numbers
when the KEYPAD LED is on.
4
A
SOFT BUTTONS A … H
9
8
7
TRACK SCROLL
PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS
NAVIGATION, DATA ENTRY, CONFIRMATION/CANCELLATION
H. D.
DISK
PAGE (MENU) SCROLL BUTTONS
○
The WK6/8 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all
times.
+
TRACK SCROLL BUTTONS
THE DISPLAY
PRELOAD
○
DEMO
○
0
The WK6/8 display is the principal user interface which communicates the status of the instrument at all
times.
○
_
○
The display’s cursor is a negative highlight zone
which can be moved by means of the cursor buttons. The selected parameter can be modified
with the DIAL or NUMERIC KEYPAD. Confirmation or cancellation of an operation within the display is with the ENTER or ESCAPE buttons.
THE DISPLAY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•3
1•4 User Guide
ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of
alphanumerical data where each note of the central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter, symbol or number. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone.
ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY
In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of
alphanumerical data where each note of the central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter, symbol or number. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone.
3. To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or
more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.
6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the
active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and
close the window.
5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode,
the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight).
ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE
DELETE - cancels the selected
character or the one after;
• F2:
SPACE - inserts a space
between two entries;
• E2:
INS/OVER - toggles between
Insert / Overwrite mode;
• D#2:
CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off;
• D2:
4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character, processing command or number.
The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard
zone provide word processing functions:
2. Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate
the “Change name...” function. A second
entry zone appears where a name can be
inserted. The current name appears selected
(shown in negative highlight).
1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button.
An entry zone appears showing the status of
the current Performance:
Two options appear below the name (“Caps
On/Caps Off” and “Insert/Overwrite”) which
can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and
D#2 respectively.
Two options appear below the name (“Caps
On/Caps Off” and “Insert/Overwrite”) which
can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and
D#2 respectively.
The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard
zone provide word processing functions:
The notes on the extreme left of the keyboard
zone provide word processing functions:
• D2:
CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off;
• D#2:
INS/OVER - toggles between
Insert / Overwrite mode;
• E2:
SPACE - inserts a space
between two entries;
2. Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate
the “Change name...” function. A second
entry zone appears where a name can be
inserted. The current name appears selected
(shown in negative highlight).
4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character, processing command or number.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•4 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• E2:
SPACE - inserts a space
between two entries;
DELETE - cancels the selected
character or the one after;
<— (BACKSPACE) - cancels
the previous character;
• G2:
• G2:
<— (BACKSPACE) - cancels
the previous character;
5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode,
the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight).
6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the
active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and
close the window.
ALPHANUMERIC ENTRY
○
INS/OVER - toggles between
Insert / Overwrite mode;
• F2:
DELETE - cancels the selected
character or the one after;
3. To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or
more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.
In name writing situations (Performance name, Song name, etc.), the keyboard activates as a source of
alphanumerical data where each note of the central zone of the keyboard corresponds to a letter, symbol or number. Use the / cursor buttons or the DIAL to navigate within the active name writing zone.
○
• D#2:
• F2:
ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE
○
CAPS - Caps On / Caps Off;
The following example shows how to modify a
Performance name:
○
• D2:
1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button.
An entry zone appears showing the status of
the current Performance:
3. To completely cancel the selected name, insert the first character. To change one or
more characters only, move the flashing cursor with the cursor buttons.
4. Insert the desired characters using the keyboard. Each note corresponds to a character, processing command or number.
Two options appear below the name (“Caps
On/Caps Off” and “Insert/Overwrite”) which
can be enabled or disabled with notes D2 and
D#2 respectively.
2. Press the Soft buttons F7 or F8 to activate
the “Change name...” function. A second
entry zone appears where a name can be
inserted. The current name appears selected
(shown in negative highlight).
1. Press the STORE PERFORMANCE button.
An entry zone appears showing the status of
the current Performance:
The following example shows how to modify a
Performance name:
• G2:
<— (BACKSPACE) - cancels
the previous character;
The following example shows how to modify a
Performance name:
ALPHANUMERIC CONFIGURATION IN NAME-WRITING MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•4 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5. Move back with the cursor button and correct wrong characters. In Overwrite mode,
the inserted characters substitute the selected characters (in negative highlight).
6. Press ENTER to confirm and to close the
active zone, or press ESCAPE to cancel and
close the window.
Display 1•5
THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: “SOUND VIEW” PAGE
○
This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. «Sound View» is the default viewing mode.
A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight
variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).
g
○
THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: “SOUND VIEW” PAGE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. «Sound View» is the default viewing mode.
A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight
variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).
g
h
a
c
a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / .
b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound
name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which
are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.
c.
d.
e.
If the track has been modified with «Edit Perf Sound», the symbol appears after the Sound name.
Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In
Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu
shows the options to select:
• the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi).
• the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone
for the automatic accompaniment.
Status bar showing general information.
Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name.
A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by
the symbol [‘]. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*].
Tempo (varied with the DIAL).
Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff).
Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.
c
h
f
d
g
f.
g.
h.
e
If the track has been modified with «Edit Perf Sound», the symbol appears after the Sound name.
Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In
Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu
shows the options to select:
• the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi).
• the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone
for the automatic accompaniment.
Status bar showing general information.
Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name.
A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by
the symbol [‘]. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*].
Tempo (varied with the DIAL).
Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff).
Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.
b
b
c
a
b
f
e
a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / .
b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound
name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which
are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.
This type of page shows the Sounds assigned to the tracks. «Sound View» is the default viewing mode.
A typical Sound View page appears in Style/RealTime mode (other Sound View pages showing slight
variations appear in Song mode and Style and Song recording modes).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•5
THE DEFAULT DISPLAY: “SOUND VIEW” PAGE
f.
g.
h.
○
a. Track status icons. Select the tracks with the Soft buttons A...H or with the cursor buttons / .
b. Sound names. The name of the Group to which the Sound belongs appears close to the Sound
name, or (in order) the ProgramChange, BankSelect MSB, BankSelect LSB numbers. Tracks which
are not assigned to internal sounds show a string of dashes (------) instead of the Sound name.
f
h
d.
e.
○
d
e
c.
○
If the track has been modified with «Edit Perf Sound», the symbol appears after the Sound name.
c. Menu or Function list. Contains options which can be selected with the Soft buttons F1...F8. In
Style/RealTime mode the soft buttons are coupled (F1/F2, F3/F4, F5/F6, F7/F8) and the menu
shows the options to select:
• the track status (Full, Upp/Low, Multi).
• the Split Point. The keyboard area below the split point corresponds to the chord recognition zone
for the automatic accompaniment.
d. Status bar showing general information.
e. Style and Performance name (Performance or Style-Performance, depending on whether SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on or off). Song mode: Song and Song-Performance name.
A Performance that has been modified but not saved with STORE PERFORMANCE is identified by
the symbol [‘]. A ROM Style with a modified Style-Performance is identified by the symbol [*].
f. Tempo (varied with the DIAL).
g. Locator (measure and beat counter). In Style mode this parameter monitors the Style pattern (riff).
h. Chord - the current recognized Chord symbol.
d
a
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•5
1•6 User Guide
THE DISPLAY’S EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Every edit environment has a relative icon:
THE DISPLAY’S EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS
Every edit environment has a relative icon:
A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from
4 to 8 tracks of the current Performance.
A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at
the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative
Group name appears on the main display.
Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the
keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up
to 32 tracks.
Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a WK6/8 Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the
MIDI OUT. In this case, “MIDI” is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers (MSBLSB) on the main display when WK6/8 is set to Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes only the
Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown.
Edit Effects
Edit MIDI
Edit Effects
Edit MIDI
Edit Mixer
Edit Controllers/Pads
Edit Mixer
Edit Controllers/Pads
Edit Tracks
Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit
Edit Tracks
Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit
Edit Style/Song
Edit General
Edit Disk / Preload
Edit Sound
TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS
Edit Style/Song
Edit General
Edit Disk / Preload
Edit Sound
Edit Disk / Preload
Edit Sound
Edit Style/Song
Edit General
TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS
TRACKS, PERFORMANCES AND THE TRACK STATUS ICONS
A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from
4 to 8 tracks of the current Performance.
A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at
the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative
Group name appears on the main display.
Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the
keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up
to 32 tracks.
Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a WK6/8 Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the
MIDI OUT. In this case, “MIDI” is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers (MSBLSB) on the main display when WK6/8 is set to Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes only the
Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown.
A Track is the smallest part of a Performance and in normal playing conditions, the display shows from
4 to 8 tracks of the current Performance.
A Performance is a configuration of several tracks, so that different Sounds can be combined to play at
the same time. The Sound name and its ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers or the relative
Group name appears on the main display.
Style-Performances and Programmable Performances have a maximum of 16 tracks (8 tracks for the
keyboard and 8 engaged by the sequencer for the arrangements). A Song-Performance can contain up
to 32 tracks.
Sometimes, a track is not assigned to a WK6/8 Sound, but it controls an expander connected to the
MIDI OUT. In this case, “MIDI” is shown as well as ProgramChange and BankSelect numbers (MSBLSB) on the main display when WK6/8 is set to Multi mode. In Full or Upper/Lower modes only the
Sound Bank name appears, the ProgramChange and Bank Select numbers are not shown.
Edit Tracks
Edit Perf Sound/Drumkit
Edit Mixer
Edit Controllers/Pads
Edit Effects
Edit MIDI
Every edit environment has a relative icon:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•6 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
THE DISPLAY’S EDIT STATUS IDENTIFICATION ICONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•6 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•7
Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track
status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can
toggle between the “mute” and “play” status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.
○
○
○
○
○
○
Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the
display.
The status of a track can be shown in four different ways:
in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard;
in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated;
in record if the track is in a record pending status;
in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall
track status, both for playing, muting, recording
in real time and in MIDI setups.
Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the
display.
The status of a track can be shown in four different ways:
in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard;
in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated;
in record if the track is in a record pending status;
in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes.
Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track
status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can
toggle between the “mute” and “play” status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.
The track is temporarily deactivated.
The track contains notes – i.e. it is engaged
by a Song or Style accompaniment track.
In either case, this type of track cannot play
in real time on the keyboard, unless it is
set to key-play. This track cannot receive
data at MIDI IN.
The track receives MIDI messages (IN),
but does not transmit them (OUT).
«MIDI-transmit» icon
THE TRACK ICONS
The track is in a recording status.
«record» icon
The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
«mute» icon (track with note)
The track is temporarily deactivated.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•7
The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall
track status, both for playing, muting, recording
in real time and in MIDI setups.
Most of the operating modes display the tracks and their status icons are shown on the left part of the
display.
The status of a track can be shown in four different ways:
in key-play if it can be played on the keyboard;
in mute if the track is temporarily deactivated;
in record if the track is in a record pending status;
in seq-play if the track contains recorded notes.
The Track and MIDI status Icons are usually combined together to allow you to control the overall
track status, both for playing, muting, recording
in real time and in MIDI setups.
Each status is identified by an icon which appears in the track status column. You can change the track
status by repeatedly pressing the corresponding soft button. For example, in RealTime mode, you can
toggle between the “mute” and “play” status by pressing the corresponding soft button repeatedly.
The track is temporarily deactivated.
«MIDI-receive» icon
The track can be played on the keyboard
in Real Time.
The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
The track can receive (IN) and transmit
(OUT).
«key-play» icon (keyboard play)
The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified
by a status icon.
«MIDI-transmit» icon
«MIDI-receive/transmit» icon
«mute» icon
«MIDI-receive/transmit» icon
The track receives MIDI messages (IN),
but does not transmit them (OUT).
«seq-play» icon (sequencer-play)
The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified
by a status icon.
The track is temporarily deactivated, even
if it is connected to the keyboard. The
track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
«MIDI-receive» icon
The track can receive (IN) and transmit
(OUT).
The track can receive (IN) and transmit
(OUT).
The track is temporarily deactivated, even
if it is connected to the keyboard. The
track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
The track is in a recording status.
«seq-play» icon (sequencer-play)
«MIDI-receive/transmit» icon
«mute» icon
«MIDI-receive» icon
The MIDI status of the tracks is also be identified
by a status icon.
«mute» icon (track with note)
«record» icon
The track can be played on the keyboard
in Real Time.
The track is in a recording status.
«seq-play» icon (sequencer-play)
The track contains notes – i.e. it is engaged
by a Song or Style accompaniment track.
In either case, this type of track cannot play
in real time on the keyboard, unless it is
set to key-play. This track cannot receive
data at MIDI IN.
The track receives MIDI messages (IN),
but does not transmit them (OUT).
The track is temporarily deactivated, even
if it is connected to the keyboard. The
track does not receive or transmit MIDI.
«MIDI-transmit» icon
The track can be played on the keyboard
in Real Time.
«mute» icon
«key-play» icon (keyboard play)
«record» icon
The track contains notes – i.e. it is engaged
by a Song or Style accompaniment track.
In either case, this type of track cannot play
in real time on the keyboard, unless it is
set to key-play. This track cannot receive
data at MIDI IN.
The track does not receive MIDI messages (IN), but transmits them (OUT).
«key-play» icon (keyboard play)
THE TRACK ICONS
«mute» icon (track with note)
THE TRACK ICONS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display 1•7
1•8 User Guide
DIALOG WINDOWS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters
require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.
DIALOG WINDOWS
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters
require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.
Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.
Select one of the options with the cursor buttons.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.
Select one of the options with the cursor buttons.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate
specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).
WARNINGS
Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor.
Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor.
Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.
Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.
Press the soft button corresponding to the option required.
Select the parameter which has to be modified with the cursor.
Modify the value with the DIAL or numeric keypad.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
WARNINGS
WARNINGS
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate
specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).
These are similar to the dialog windows, but they do not display options to select. They communicate
specific messages to the user (wrong operations, information on the current operation, etc.).
Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.
Press F5, ENTER or ESCAPE to close the warning.
Select one of the options with the cursor buttons.
Press ENTER to confirm or press ESCAPE to cancel the modifications.
ENTER and ESCAPE close the dialog windows.
Several types of dialog window exist; generally an option requires selection or one or more parameters
require modifications and confirmation with ENTER or a soft button. Some examples follow.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•8 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DIALOG WINDOWS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1•8 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•1
○
Chapter 2 • User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Chapter 2 • User Guide
POWER UP
POWER UP
< --------------- Single sound - full keyboard --------------- >
POWER
1
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel
is in the “OFF” position.
ON
OFF
1
2. Connect the power cord to the rear panel mains
socket and insert the other end of the power cord
into a suitable grounded wall outlet.
2
2
3. Press the power switch to turn on WK6/8.
POWER
ON
OFF
4
2. Connect the power cord to the rear panel mains
socket and insert the other end of the power cord
into a suitable grounded wall outlet.
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel
is in the “OFF” position.
3. Press the power switch to turn on WK6/8.
After a few seconds the instrument sets to
the default situation.
The power up display shows a single sound
(Piano 1) active.
CONTRAST
3
4. Play on the keyboard and you will hear the Piano 1 sound play across the full keyboard.
POWER
ON
OFF
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with
the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the
right of the display.
Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the contrast.
The display reaches its maximum brightness
a few minutes after turning on.
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with
the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the
right of the display.
Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the contrast.
The display reaches its maximum brightness
a few minutes after turning on.
OFF
3
ON
POWER
CONTRAST
3
POWER
ON
OFF
4. Play on the keyboard and you will hear the Piano 1 sound play across the full keyboard.
4. Play on the keyboard and you will hear the Piano 1 sound play across the full keyboard.
If necessary, regulate the display contrast with
the DISPLAY CONTRAST panel knob on the
right of the display.
Different viewing angles may require an adjustment of the contrast.
The display reaches its maximum brightness
a few minutes after turning on.
After a few seconds the instrument sets to
the default situation.
The power up display shows a single sound
(Piano 1) active.
CONTRAST
After a few seconds the instrument sets to
the default situation.
The power up display shows a single sound
(Piano 1) active.
3. Press the power switch to turn on WK6/8.
2
2. Connect the power cord to the rear panel mains
socket and insert the other end of the power cord
into a suitable grounded wall outlet.
1
1. Be sure that the power switch on the rear panel
is in the “OFF” position.
4
OFF
ON
POWER
< --------------- Single sound - full keyboard --------------- >
4
< --------------- Single sound - full keyboard --------------- >
POWER UP
Chapter 2 • User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•1
2•2 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes
WK6/8 features two distinct playing modes:
• Style/RealTime mode and
• Song mode.
WK6/8 features two distinct playing modes:
• Style/RealTime mode and
• Song mode.
STYLE/REALTIME MODE
SONG MODE
STYLE/REALTIME MODE
SONG MODE
In this mode you can play with Styles, or play
with the Performances and use WK6/8 as a conventional keyboard.
Up to 32 tracks are available in Song mode. Via
MIDI, WK6/8 can be also used as a multitimbral
(32 part) sound generator for Song recording with
an external sequencer.
In this mode you can play with Styles, or play
with the Performances and use WK6/8 as a conventional keyboard.
Up to 32 tracks are available in Song mode. Via
MIDI, WK6/8 can be also used as a multitimbral
(32 part) sound generator for Song recording with
an external sequencer.
A Song is sequenced data consisting of one or
more tracks (instrumental parts). A Song can be
loaded from disk as a WK6/8 Song or as a Standard MIDI-file.
Let’s takes a brief look at some of the operations
that can be carried out in Style/RealTime mode
and Song mode.
You can record a Song one track at a time
(multitrack recording), or in a single step by exploiting the existing styles (Quick Record). The
Quick Record method has the advantage of allowing you to record the melody of a Song while
the auto-accompaniments take care of the rest.
You can record a Song one track at a time
(multitrack recording), or in a single step by exploiting the existing styles (Quick Record). The
Quick Record method has the advantage of allowing you to record the melody of a Song while
the auto-accompaniments take care of the rest.
Let’s takes a brief look at some of the operations
that can be carried out in Style/RealTime mode
and Song mode.
If the auto-accompaniments are playing, the Style
mode is active; if not, Style mode is off and Performance (RealTime) mode is on.
If the auto-accompaniments are playing, the Style
mode is active; if not, Style mode is off and Performance (RealTime) mode is on.
Style and RealTime modes have a Performance
in common, structured with the same number of
tracks (16) and the same Performance editing
tasks. A sound is assigned to each track and 8
tracks can be played at the same time in real
time; the remaining 8 accompaniment tracks belong to the Style and play automatically when you
press Start/Stop and play chords below the split
point with the instrument set to Style mode.
Sounds and accompaniments can be recalled by
selecting a Style (from the STYLE GROUP buttons) or a Performance (from the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons).
In this mode you can play with Styles, or play
with the Performances and use WK6/8 as a conventional keyboard.
STYLE/REALTIME MODE
Sounds and accompaniments can be recalled by
selecting a Style (from the STYLE GROUP buttons) or a Performance (from the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons).
Style and RealTime modes have a Performance
in common, structured with the same number of
tracks (16) and the same Performance editing
tasks. A sound is assigned to each track and 8
tracks can be played at the same time in real
time; the remaining 8 accompaniment tracks belong to the Style and play automatically when you
press Start/Stop and play chords below the split
point with the instrument set to Style mode.
Style and RealTime modes have a Performance
in common, structured with the same number of
tracks (16) and the same Performance editing
tasks. A sound is assigned to each track and 8
tracks can be played at the same time in real
time; the remaining 8 accompaniment tracks belong to the Style and play automatically when you
press Start/Stop and play chords below the split
point with the instrument set to Style mode.
Sounds and accompaniments can be recalled by
selecting a Style (from the STYLE GROUP buttons) or a Performance (from the PERFORMANCE GROUPS buttons).
If the auto-accompaniments are playing, the Style
mode is active; if not, Style mode is off and Performance (RealTime) mode is on.
A Song is sequenced data consisting of one or
more tracks (instrumental parts). A Song can be
loaded from disk as a WK6/8 Song or as a Standard MIDI-file.
Up to 32 tracks are available in Song mode. Via
MIDI, WK6/8 can be also used as a multitimbral
(32 part) sound generator for Song recording with
an external sequencer.
SONG MODE
WK6/8 features two distinct playing modes:
• Style/RealTime mode and
• Song mode.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•2 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 • The WK6/8 playing modes
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•2 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
A Song is sequenced data consisting of one or
more tracks (instrumental parts). A Song can be
loaded from disk as a WK6/8 Song or as a Standard MIDI-file.
You can record a Song one track at a time
(multitrack recording), or in a single step by exploiting the existing styles (Quick Record). The
Quick Record method has the advantage of allowing you to record the melody of a Song while
the auto-accompaniments take care of the rest.
Let’s takes a brief look at some of the operations
that can be carried out in Style/RealTime mode
and Song mode.
User Guide 2•3
○
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode)
Every time you power up, WK6/8 sets to Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance
selected. This Performance is factory-set to activate the Piano 1 sound across the full keyboard. This
sound is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section - all other keyboard sections (Upper 2, Lower 1,
Lower 2) are off (mute).
Every time you power up, WK6/8 sets to Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance
selected. This Performance is factory-set to activate the Piano 1 sound across the full keyboard. This
sound is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section - all other keyboard sections (Upper 2, Lower 1,
Lower 2) are off (mute).
FULL KEYBOARD MODE
FULL KEYBOARD MODE
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
< ------------------ Slow Strings (Upper 2) ------------------ >
1
Play a single sound or two layered sounds across
the entire keyboard
1
Play a single sound or two layered sounds across
the entire keyboard
1. After turning the instrument on, you can play a
single sound (Piano1) straight away.
3
Sounds shown active for
play (the keyboard icon)
2
E
F
F
Note that the soft buttons in this situation are
paired.
The track (Upper 2) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
G
H
F
E
3. Play on the keyboard.
3. Play on the keyboard.
2
Sounds shown active for
play (the keyboard icon)
G
H
Sounds shown active for
play (the keyboard icon)
The sound, which is assigned to the Upper 1
keyboard section, plays across the entire
keyboard range (Full keyboard).
H
G
You will hear two sounds for each note
played. Both sounds are layered across the
entire keyboard.
E
2. Press the soft button(s) E/F TWICE to select and
activate the Upper 2 keyboard section.
Note that the soft buttons in this situation are
paired.
The track (Upper 2) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
2
2. Press the soft button(s) E/F TWICE to select and
activate the Upper 2 keyboard section.
Note that the soft buttons in this situation are
paired.
The track (Upper 2) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
2. Press the soft button(s) E/F TWICE to select and
activate the Upper 2 keyboard section.
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
The sound, which is assigned to the Upper 1
keyboard section, plays across the entire
keyboard range (Full keyboard).
3. Play on the keyboard.
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
The sound, which is assigned to the Upper 1
keyboard section, plays across the entire
keyboard range (Full keyboard).
You will hear two sounds for each note
played. Both sounds are layered across the
entire keyboard.
1. After turning the instrument on, you can play a
single sound (Piano1) straight away.
You will hear two sounds for each note
played. Both sounds are layered across the
entire keyboard.
3
3
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
1. After turning the instrument on, you can play a
single sound (Piano1) straight away.
Play a single sound or two layered sounds across
the entire keyboard
1
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
< ------------------ Slow Strings (Upper 2) ------------------ >
< --------------------- Piano 1 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
< ------------------ Slow Strings (Upper 2) ------------------ >
FULL KEYBOARD MODE
Every time you power up, WK6/8 sets to Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance
selected. This Performance is factory-set to activate the Piano 1 sound across the full keyboard. This
sound is assigned to the Upper 1 keyboard section - all other keyboard sections (Upper 2, Lower 1,
Lower 2) are off (mute).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•3
2 • Play the WK6/8 keyboard sounds (Style/RealTime mode)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•3
2•4 User Guide
UPPER/LOWER KEYBOARD MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
Split the keyboard
F2
F3
F4
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
You will hear no sound on the left part of the
keyboard and two on the right. The keyboard
will be divided at the note indicated in the
bottom right hand corner of the display (Split:
B3).
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 active, Lower
mute), the Upper 1 & 2 sounds are assigned
to the right keyboard extension while the left
section is muted.
○
© Note: The Split Point is programmable - more
about this later.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This time, you will hear a sound on the left
part of the keyboard.
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 & Lower 1 active), three sounds play: two layered sounds
across the extension C4-C7 and a single
sound across the extension C2-B3.
7
H
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- no sound ----- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >
< ------------ Upper 2 ------------- >
G
F
CURRENT SPLIT POINT
E
7. Play on the keyboard with the left hand below
note.
D
C
B
6
6
F3
F4
5
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- no sound ----- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >
< ------------ Upper 2 ------------- >
CURRENT SPLIT POINT
6. Press the soft button(s) C/D TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 1 keyboard section.
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
F2
5. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
○
6. Press the soft button(s) C/D TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 1 keyboard section.
F1
4. Press the paired soft buttons F3/F4 on the right
of the display to select the UPP/LOW keyboard
mode.
5. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
You will hear no sound on the left part of the
keyboard and two on the right. The keyboard
will be divided at the note indicated in the
bottom right hand corner of the display (Split:
B3).
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 active, Lower
mute), the Upper 1 & 2 sounds are assigned
to the right keyboard extension while the left
section is muted.
4
Split the keyboard
F1
4. Press the paired soft buttons F3/F4 on the right
of the display to select the UPP/LOW keyboard
mode.
UPPER/LOWER KEYBOARD MODE
A
6
A
A
B
7. Play on the keyboard with the left hand below
note.
6. Press the soft button(s) C/D TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 1 keyboard section.
D
CURRENT SPLIT POINT
F
G
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- no sound ----- > < ------------ Upper 1 ------------- >
< ------------ Upper 2 ------------- >
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
○
©
Note: The Split Point is programmable - more
about this later.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This time, you will hear a sound on the left
part of the keyboard.
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 & Lower 1 active), three sounds play: two layered sounds
across the extension C4-C7 and a single
sound across the extension C2-B3.
E
You will hear no sound on the left part of the
keyboard and two on the right. The keyboard
will be divided at the note indicated in the
bottom right hand corner of the display (Split:
B3).
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 active, Lower
mute), the Upper 1 & 2 sounds are assigned
to the right keyboard extension while the left
section is muted.
This time, you will hear a sound on the left
part of the keyboard.
In this situation (Upper 1 & 2 & Lower 1 active), three sounds play: two layered sounds
across the extension C4-C7 and a single
sound across the extension C2-B3.
C
B
7. Play on the keyboard with the left hand below
note.
○
H
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
F4
F3
F2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
○
○
○
○
○
2•4 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
UPPER/LOWER KEYBOARD MODE
F1
○
G
H
7
○
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
Split the keyboard
○
F
Note: The Split Point is programmable - more
about this later.
4. Press the paired soft buttons F3/F4 on the right
of the display to select the UPP/LOW keyboard
mode.
○
E
©
5. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
○
D
○
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
○
C
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•4 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•5
○
8
○
○
○
ADD A SECOND SOUND ON THE LEFT
HAND
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
C
○
○
○
8
A
B
C
11
G
9. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
H
E
F
G
The track is muted (shown by the “mute” icon
in the track status column).
F
D
11. Play on the keyboard.
E
Sounds shown
muted (the mute icon)
H
Now you can play with two real time sounds
on the left hand and two on the right.
9
9
10. Press the corresponding soft button(s) A/B ONCE
to mute the (selected) sound assigned to the
Lower 2 keyboard section.
Now you can play with two real time sounds
on the left hand and two on the right.
○
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
D
9. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
○
8. Press the soft button(s) A/B TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 2 keyboard section.
B
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
○
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
A
8. Press the soft button(s) A/B TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 2 keyboard section.
○
You will hear one sound only on the left hand.
To mute other sounds not shown selected
(positive), press the corresponding paired soft
buttons TWICE.
ADD A SECOND SOUND ON THE LEFT
HAND
H
G
To mute a sound
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --- Nylon Gtr ----- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --- Nylon Gtr ----- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
F
E
To mute a sound, or to activate a muted sound, it
must be shown selected in the display. A selected sound is shown in negative highlight. In
this example, if you have followed the steps
above, the sound NYLONGTR will be shown in
negative highlight.
D
C
B
A
MUTE OR ACTIVATE ONE OR MORE
SOUNDS
MUTE OR ACTIVATE ONE OR MORE
SOUNDS
To mute a sound, or to activate a muted sound, it
must be shown selected in the display. A selected sound is shown in negative highlight. In
this example, if you have followed the steps
above, the sound NYLONGTR will be shown in
negative highlight.
To mute a sound, or to activate a muted sound, it
must be shown selected in the display. A selected sound is shown in negative highlight. In
this example, if you have followed the steps
above, the sound NYLONGTR will be shown in
negative highlight.
10
MUTE OR ACTIVATE ONE OR MORE
SOUNDS
10
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --- Nylon Gtr ----- > < --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
E
To mute a sound
10
E
To mute a sound
F
F
G
G
10. Press the corresponding soft button(s) A/B ONCE
to mute the (selected) sound assigned to the
Lower 2 keyboard section.
9
Sounds shown
muted (the mute icon)
The track is muted (shown by the “mute” icon
in the track status column).
H
11
11. Play on the keyboard.
F
E
You will hear one sound only on the left hand.
To mute other sounds not shown selected
(positive), press the corresponding paired soft
buttons TWICE.
D
8. Press the soft button(s) A/B TWICE to select and
activate the LOWER 2 keyboard section.
C
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
B
A
8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SPLIT Keyboard
< - Slow Strings --- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
○
User Guide 2•5
ADD A SECOND SOUND ON THE LEFT
HAND
You will hear one sound only on the left hand.
To mute other sounds not shown selected
(positive), press the corresponding paired soft
buttons TWICE.
11
G
11. Play on the keyboard.
Sounds shown
muted (the mute icon)
The track activates for “play” (shown by the
small keyboard icon in the track status column).
The track is muted (shown by the “mute” icon
in the track status column).
H
9. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
H
Now you can play with two real time sounds
on the left hand and two on the right.
10. Press the corresponding soft button(s) A/B ONCE
to mute the (selected) sound assigned to the
Lower 2 keyboard section.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•5
2•6 User Guide
12. Press the paired soft buttons C/D TWICE to mute
the sound assigned to the Lower 1 keyboard section.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12
A
B
13. Now play on the keyboard with both hands.
12
A
B
13. Now play on the keyboard with both hands.
C
You will return to the situation described at
point 4 on page 3 (no sound on the left hand,
two sounds on the right).
12. Press the paired soft buttons C/D TWICE to mute
the sound assigned to the Lower 1 keyboard section.
C
You will return to the situation described at
point 4 on page 3 (no sound on the left hand,
two sounds on the right).
D
E
F
D
E
F
G
G
H
The track (Lower 1) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
13
H
13
H
G
F
14. Press, for example, the paired soft buttons C/D
ONCE (if the muted sound is shown selected), or
TWICE if the muted sound is not selected (positive highlight).
E
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- No sound ----- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- No sound ----- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
D
C
B
A
14
14
To activate a muted sound
To activate a muted sound, press the corresponding paired soft buttons once if the track is selected (negative) or twice if the track is not selected (positive).
To activate a muted sound, press the corresponding paired soft buttons once if the track is selected (negative) or twice if the track is not selected (positive).
To activate a muted sound
To activate a muted sound
To activate a muted sound, press the corresponding paired soft buttons once if the track is selected (negative) or twice if the track is not selected (positive).
A
14. Press, for example, the paired soft buttons C/D
ONCE (if the muted sound is shown selected), or
TWICE if the muted sound is not selected (positive highlight).
SPLIT Keyboard
< --- No sound ----- > < ------------ Piano 1 ------------- >
< --------- Slow Strings ----------- >
A
B
C
D
E
F
14. Press, for example, the paired soft buttons C/D
ONCE (if the muted sound is shown selected), or
TWICE if the muted sound is not selected (positive highlight).
The track (Lower 1) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
G
13
The track (Lower 1) activates for “play”
(shown by the small keyboard icon in the track
status column).
H
H
G
You will return to the situation described at
point 4 on page 3 (no sound on the left hand,
two sounds on the right).
F
E
D
C
13. Now play on the keyboard with both hands.
A
12
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•6 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12. Press the paired soft buttons C/D TWICE to mute
the sound assigned to the Lower 1 keyboard section.
B
○
14
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•6 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
User Guide 2•7
○
15
○
○
MULTI KEYBOARD MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
15
F3
15. Press the paired soft buttons F5/F6 on the right
of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
F4
F5
Multi (split) Keyboard
< --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections are no longer displayed.
The Multi situation shows 8 of the 16 Tracks
of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard
mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real
time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated
to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).
○
Play up to 8 sounds at the same time
F3
15. Press the paired soft buttons F5/F6 on the right
of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
○
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections are no longer displayed.
The Multi situation shows 8 of the 16 Tracks
of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard
mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real
time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated
to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).
F6
F4
F5
F6
17. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
Play up to 8 sounds at the same time
○
You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right
hand, depending on the active/mute status
of each track.
At this point, you can practice changing the
overall sound combination by activating and/
or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
MULTI KEYBOARD MODE
17
H
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are
not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.
16
F
E
D
C
B
A
16
16. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed
tracks using the relative soft buttons A … F on
the left of the display.
A
B
C
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are
not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.
16. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed
tracks using the relative soft buttons A … F on
the left of the display.
G
16
16. Configure the active/mute status of the displayed
tracks using the relative soft buttons A … F on
the left of the display.
A
B
C
In Multi mode, the soft buttons on the left are
not paired; each button relates to the corresponding track shown in the display.
D
E
F
G
D
E
F
G
H
H
17. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right
hand, depending on the active/mute status
of each track.
At this point, you can practice changing the
overall sound combination by activating and/
or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
Multi (split) Keyboard
< --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
17
Multi (split) Keyboard
< --- Sound(s) ----- > < ----------- Sound(s) ------------- >
F6
F5
F4
F3
Play up to 8 sounds at the same time
15
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•7
○
○
○
MULTI KEYBOARD MODE
17
15. Press the paired soft buttons F5/F6 on the right
of the display to select the MULTI keyboard mode.
You will hear a single sound, or a combination of sounds on both the left hand and right
hand, depending on the active/mute status
of each track.
At this point, you can practice changing the
overall sound combination by activating and/
or muting the sounds at will using the methods already described.
All references to the Upper and Lower keyboard sections are no longer displayed.
The Multi situation shows 8 of the 16 Tracks
of the current Performance. In Multi keyboard
mode, you can play up to 8 Sounds in real
time. The remaining 8 tracks are associated
to the Style auto accompaniment tracks (explained later).
17. Play on the keyboard with both hands.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•7
2•8 User Guide
○
Multi
mode
○
○
○
○
○
○
H
G
B
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F
E
D
C
○
○
B
○
A
○
UPPER.2
○
LOWER.1
○
LOWER.2
○
ACC. 4/6
○
ACC. 1/3
○
BASS
○
DRUMS
○
UPPER.1
H
G
ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)
A
DRUMS
The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or
Multi setups) can be independently regulated with
the corresponding sliders of the group to the left
of the display.
BASS
ACC. 1/3
ACC. 4/6
LOWER.2
LOWER.1
UPPER.2
UPPER.1
Full keyboard mode
Upper/Lower mode
The correspondence between the sliders and the
tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on
the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can
affect:
A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings above the sliders, or
B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings A…H below the sliders.
• In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard
modes (situation A), refer to the markings above
the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2) control the corresponding tracks.
MIN
• In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22),
refer to the markings A…H. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to
track 1, slider B to track 2, …. slider H to track 8.
MAX
MIC/LINE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•8 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
M.VOL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3 • Adjusting the volume
ADJUST THE OVERALL VOLUME OF THE
INSTRUMENT
If you are using headphones, a comfortable level
is around half way of the slider’s travel distance.
M.VOL
MIC/LINE
The correspondence between the sliders and the
tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on
the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can
affect:
A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings above the sliders, or
B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings A…H below the sliders.
○
○
Adjust the general volume of the instrument with
the M. VOL. slider.
○
MIN
Note: If you are using external amplification,
better results are obtained by adjusting the volume
with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering
the volume of the instrument.
○
○
Full keyboard mode
Upper/Lower mode
DRUMS
ACC. 4/6
ACC. 1/3
BASS
LOWER.2
LOWER.1
UPPER.1
UPPER.2
A
A
DRUMS
B
C
D
BASS
ACC. 1/3
ACC. 4/6
○
○
○
○
○
E
LOWER.2
○
G
F
○
LOWER.1
○
○
H
UPPER.1
UPPER.2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
B
A
○
B
○
○
C
○
D
○
○
E
○
○
F
○
○
G
○
H
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi
mode
3 • Adjusting the volume
○
○
ADJUST THE OVERALL VOLUME OF THE
INSTRUMENT
○
○
Adjust the general volume of the instrument with
the M. VOL. slider.
○
○
If you are using headphones, a comfortable level
is around half way of the slider’s travel distance.
○
○
© Note: If you are using external amplification,
better results are obtained by adjusting the volume
with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering
the volume of the instrument.
○
○
ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)
○
○
The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or
Multi setups) can be independently regulated with
the corresponding sliders of the group to the left
of the display.
○
F
○
E
○
D
○
C
○
B
○
A
○
○
MAX
If you are using headphones, a comfortable level
is around half way of the slider’s travel distance.
○
○
M.VOL
Adjust the general volume of the instrument with
the M. VOL. slider.
©
○
• In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard
modes (situation A), refer to the markings above
the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2) control the corresponding tracks.
ADJUST THE OVERALL VOLUME OF THE
INSTRUMENT
○
• In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22),
refer to the markings A…H. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to
track 1, slider B to track 2, …. slider H to track 8.
3 • Adjusting the volume
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MAX
○
MIN
©
Note: If you are using external amplification,
better results are obtained by adjusting the volume
with mixer or amplifier controls rather than lowering
the volume of the instrument.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MIC/LINE
○
○
ADJUST THE SOUND VOLUMES SEPARATELY (BALANCING)
The volume of each sound (in Full, Upp/Low or
Multi setups) can be independently regulated with
the corresponding sliders of the group to the left
of the display.
The correspondence between the sliders and the
tracks is indicated by the two LEDs shown on
the right of the group of sliders. The sliders can
affect:
A) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings above the sliders, or
B) the tracks identified by the silkscreened
markings A…H below the sliders.
• In Full Keyboard or Upper&Lower keyboard
modes (situation A), refer to the markings above
the sliders. The sliders (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2) control the corresponding tracks.
• In Multi mode (situation B), or when Style accompaniment tracks are shown (see page 22),
refer to the markings A…H. Each slider corresponds to one of the displayed tracks: slider A to
track 1, slider B to track 2, …. slider H to track 8.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•8 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Full keyboard mode
Upper/Lower mode
DRUMS
BASS
ACC. 1/3
ACC. 4/6
LOWER.2
LOWER.1
UPPER.2
UPPER.1
A
A
B
C
D
DRUMS
BASS
ACC. 1/3
ACC. 4/6
E
LOWER.2
F
LOWER.1
G
UPPER.2
H
UPPER.1
B
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Multi
mode
User Guide 2•9
○
4 • Transposition
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4 • Transposition
○
○
○
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR
DOWN
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR
DOWN
If you would like to play a song in a different key,
or a song is too high or too low for a singer or
another instrument, you can transpose WK6/8
to play the song in an easier key.
If you would like to play a song in a different key,
or a song is too high or too low for a singer or
another instrument, you can transpose WK6/8
to play the song in an easier key.
The LED on the active button goes off and
the instrument’s normal pitch is restored. The
display shows the “0” setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.
TRANSPOSE
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time
semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the
overall pitch (range ± 24 semitones = 2 octaves).
3
TRANSPOSE
C#4
D4
C4
C#4
B3
D4
C#4
C4
2
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch).
Press the Transpose # button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired
pitch. The LED turns on to show that the
instrument is in a positive transposed status.
C4
TRANSPOSE
2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.
C#4
B3
C4
TRANSPOSE
C#4
C4
B3
D4
C#4
C4
3
C4
C#4
D4
C#4
C4
C4
C#4
D4
D#4
D4
C#4
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
TRANSPOSE
The LED on the active button goes off and
the instrument’s normal pitch is restored. The
display shows the “0” setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.
If you would like to play a song in a different key,
or a song is too high or too low for a singer or
another instrument, you can transpose WK6/8
to play the song in an easier key.
1
The LED on the active button goes off and
the instrument’s normal pitch is restored. The
display shows the “0” setting for a few seconds then returns to normal.
C4
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time
semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the
overall pitch (range ± 24 semitones = 2 octaves).
TRANSPOSE
TRANSPOSE
D4
1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.
B3
To clear the keyboard transpose setting
3
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value.
Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative
reading. The LED on the b button will then
turn on. (An eventual positive transpose status will be cancelled).
2
To clear the keyboard transpose setting
D4
C#4
C4
2
C#4
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch).
Press the Transpose # button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired
pitch. The LED turns on to show that the
instrument is in a positive transposed status.
C#4
C4
B3
D#4
D4
C#4
2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.
2. Press TRANSPOSE b to lower the pitch.
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value.
Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative
reading. The LED on the b button will then
turn on. (An eventual positive transpose status will be cancelled).
D4
C#4
C4
1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.
C#4
C4
B3
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value (0 = standard pitch).
Press the Transpose # button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired
pitch. The LED turns on to show that the
instrument is in a positive transposed status.
D#4
D4
C#4
An insertion screen shows the current Transpose value.
Continue pressing the TRANSPOSE b button until the dialog window shows a negative
reading. The LED on the b button will then
turn on. (An eventual positive transpose status will be cancelled).
D4
C#4
C4
1. Press TRANSPOSE # to raise the pitch.
TRANSPOSE
3. Press both TRANSPOSE buttons simultaneously.
The TRANSPOSE b/# buttons allow real time
semitone adjustments (transpositions) of the
overall pitch (range ± 24 semitones = 2 octaves).
1
To clear the keyboard transpose setting
1
TRANSPOSE
TRANSPOSE THE INSTRUMENT UP OR
DOWN
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•9
○
○
○
4 • Transposition
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•9
2•10 User Guide
TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed
in octave steps, within the range ±5 octaves.
TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES
Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed
in octave steps, within the range ±5 octaves.
A
B
1
A
B
C
C
D
1. Select the track you wish to transpose.
D
1. Select the track you wish to transpose.
E
E
F
2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting.
F
2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting.
G
G
H
An insertion screen shows the current Octave setting.
Press the OCTAVE + button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired setting. The value is expressed in semitones:
12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/
3 seconds.
H
2
3
OCTAVE
4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.
The insertion screen shows the value of “0”
and the track’s normal pitch is restored.
C5
C4
C3
C6
C5
C4
4
C5
C4
C3
To clear the Track Octave setting
4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.
The insertion screen shows the value of “0”
and the track’s normal pitch is restored.
2
OCTAVE
H
2. Press the OCTAVE + to raise the octave setting.
G
F
1. Select the track you wish to transpose.
E
D
C
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•10 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TRANSPOSING TRACKS BY OCTAVES
B
A
○
Any track, if selected, can be instantly transposed
in octave steps, within the range ±5 octaves.
○
2
C5
C4
C3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•10 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
OCTAVE
C6
C5
C4
3
C4
C3
C2
4
OCTAVE
An insertion screen shows the current Octave setting.
Press the OCTAVE + button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired setting. The value is expressed in semitones:
12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/
3 seconds.
C4
C3
C2
3. Press OCTAVE – button to lower the octave
setting.
To clear the Track Octave setting
The current Octave setting is shown.
Continue pressing the OCTAVE – button as
many times as necessary until you reach the
desired setting. An eventual positive Octave
status will be cancelled.
OCTAVE
The current Octave setting is shown.
Continue pressing the OCTAVE – button as
many times as necessary until you reach the
desired setting. An eventual positive Octave
status will be cancelled.
C5
C4
C3
3
3. Press OCTAVE – button to lower the octave
setting.
To clear the Track Octave setting
C4
C3
C2
The current Octave setting is shown.
Continue pressing the OCTAVE – button as
many times as necessary until you reach the
desired setting. An eventual positive Octave
status will be cancelled.
C6
C5
C4
4. Press both OCTAVE buttons simultaneously.
OCTAVE
3. Press OCTAVE – button to lower the octave
setting.
OCTAVE
The insertion screen shows the value of “0”
and the track’s normal pitch is restored.
4
C5
C4
C3
An insertion screen shows the current Octave setting.
Press the OCTAVE + button as many times
as necessary until you reach the desired setting. The value is expressed in semitones:
12 = 1 octave, 24 = 2 octaves, etc.. The insertion screen cancels automatically after 2/
3 seconds.
OCTAVE
C5
C4
C3
OCTAVE
User Guide 2•11
PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS
○
The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad
2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of
adding extra sounds to your playing. You can
program each pad to produce an instrumental
sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the
rotary slow/fast switching function.
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad
2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of
adding extra sounds to your playing. You can
program each pad to produce an instrumental
sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the
rotary slow/fast switching function.
• Strike the Pads freely.
PAD 1
PAD 2
• Strike the Pads freely.
PAD 4
PAD 3
PAD 1
PAD 2
PAD 4
PAD 3
While you play, add additional sounds from
the pads in real time.
The configuration of the Programmable Pads
can be stored in the Programmable Performances.
The headphones jack panel is located on the
left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into
the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal
speakers to allow you to play in total silence
without disturbing others in the same room.
Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not
exclude the internal speakers.
Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the
headphone volume.
PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
• Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
• Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
The headphones jack panel is located on the
left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into
the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal
speakers to allow you to play in total silence
without disturbing others in the same room.
Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not
exclude the internal speakers.
Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the
headphone volume.
The headphones jack panel is located on the
left side of the instrument, under the keyboard. Inserting the headphones plug into
the PHONES 1 jack excludes the internal
speakers to allow you to play in total silence
without disturbing others in the same room.
Plugging into the PHONES 2 jack does not
exclude the internal speakers.
Use the Master Volume slider to adjust the
headphone volume.
• Plug a set of headphones into the PHONES 1 jack.
PLAY WITH HEADPHONES
While you play, add additional sounds from
the pads in real time.
The configuration of the Programmable Pads
can be stored in the Programmable Performances.
While you play, add additional sounds from
the pads in real time.
The configuration of the Programmable Pads
can be stored in the Programmable Performances.
PAD 1
• Strike the Pads freely.
PAD 2
PAD 3
PAD 4
The four programmable Pads buttons (Pad 1, Pad
2, Pad 3, Pad 4) provide quick and easy ways of
adding extra sounds to your playing. You can
program each pad to produce an instrumental
sound, a percussive sound or sample. The programmable Pads can also be assigned to the
rotary slow/fast switching function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•11
PLAY THE PROGRAMMABLE PADS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•11
2•12 User Guide
PLAY WITH THE PEDALS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY WITH THE PEDALS
PEDAL
The rear connections panel includes four jacks
for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper.
The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for
a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions.
DAMPER
The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.
Pitch Bend
The default configuration of the Trackball is as
follows:
• Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend
• Up/Down movement = Modulation
Modulation
The on-board controlling devices include a
Trackball on the left key block, preset for Performance functions.
All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume
type).
The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function
assignable and can be independently enabled or
disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a
Performance.
Modulation
The default configuration of the pedals is as follows:
• Ped1
=
Soft
• Ped2
=
Sostenuto
• Ped3
=
Damper (sustain)
• Volume =
Volume
Pitch Bend
The rear connections panel includes four jacks
for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper.
The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for
a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions.
Volume Pedal
(continuous)
Footswitch
(on/off)
SOFT
DAMPER
SOSTENUTO
VOLUME
The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.
Volume Pedal
(continuous)
PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL
The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the
central position.
VOLUME
The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the
central position.
Footswitch
(on/off)
PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL
The default configuration of the Trackball is as
follows:
• Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend
• Up/Down movement = Modulation
VOLUME
SOFT
All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume
type).
The on-board controlling devices include a
Trackball on the left key block, preset for Performance functions.
1
DAMPER
SOSTENUTO
The default configuration of the pedals is as follows:
• Ped1
=
Soft
• Ped2
=
Sostenuto
• Ped3
=
Damper (sustain)
• Volume =
Volume
The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function
assignable and can be independently enabled or
disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a
Performance.
2
PEDAL
The rear connections panel includes four jacks
for control pedals, denoted Volume, 1, 2, Damper.
The Volume jack is a non-programmable port for
a standard Volume Pedal (optional). The remaining three pedal jacks are programmable and preset to provide Performance functions.
The default configuration of the pedals is as follows:
• Ped1
=
Soft
• Ped2
=
Sostenuto
• Ped3
=
Damper (sustain)
• Volume =
Volume
The pedal jacks 1, 2 and Damper are function
assignable and can be independently enabled or
disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a
Performance.
DAMPER
2
1
VOLUME
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•12 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
1
DAMPER
SOSTENUTO
SOFT
Footswitch
(on/off)
Volume Pedal
(continuous)
PLAY WITH THE TRACKBALL
The on-board controlling devices include a
Trackball on the left key block, preset for Performance functions.
The default configuration of the Trackball is as
follows:
• Left/Right movement = Pitch Bend
• Up/Down movement = Modulation
The Trackball is spring loaded to return to the
central position.
The Trackball can be enabled or disabled to react with the keyboard tracks of a Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•12 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VOLUME
VOLUME
All three pedals (1, 2, Damper) can be programmed to accept Switch action (on/off) or Continuous (graduated levels) control pedals (Volume
type).
PEDAL
○
PLAY WITH THE PEDALS
○
DAMPER
Modulation
Pitch Bend
User Guide 2•13
○
5 • Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style)
1
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5 • Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style)
1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open
the Demo window.
1
G
H. D.
The “Select Demo” dialog window appears.
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
H. D.
F
The “Select Demo” dialog window appears.
DEMO
○
H
1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open
the Demo window.
○
E
2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo
Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .
2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo
Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo
Song or Demo Style).
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo
Song or Demo Style).
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names.
An animated string of text starts to scroll
across the top of the display under the title,
shiwing basic technical specifications of the
instrument.
If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and
Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song
automatically and stops when it reaches the
end of the last Demo Style in memory.
If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or
Styles, press ESCAPE.
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names.
An animated string of text starts to scroll
across the top of the display under the title,
shiwing basic technical specifications of the
instrument.
If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and
Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song
automatically and stops when it reaches the
end of the last Demo Style in memory.
If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or
Styles, press ESCAPE.
D
C
B
A
The selected single demo playback starts and
shows up in negative highlight. When the
end is reached, the demo stops.
4
ESCAPE
4. To listen to a single Song or Style, select one of
the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
2
2
ENTER
3
2
ENTER
4. To listen to a single Song or Style, select one of
the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The corresponding selection window activates showing 8 Song or Style names.
An animated string of text starts to scroll
across the top of the display under the title,
shiwing basic technical specifications of the
instrument.
If you select ALL, all the Demo Songs and
Demo Styles are chained into a single medley. The sequencer starts to play the first song
automatically and stops when it reaches the
end of the last Demo Style in memory.
If you want to cancel the Select Demo display without playing the Demo Songs or
Styles, press ESCAPE.
3
3
ENTER
4. To listen to a single Song or Style, select one of
the Demos (Song or Style) with the corresponding soft button.
The selected single demo playback starts and
shows up in negative highlight. When the
end is reached, the demo stops.
The selected single demo playback starts and
shows up in negative highlight. When the
end is reached, the demo stops.
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the selection window of the element selected in step 2 (Demo
Song or Demo Style).
4
4
A
A
2. Select one of the elements in the list (All, Demo
Song, Demo Style) with the cursor buttons / .
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
_
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•13
H
5 • Listen to the Demos (All, Song, Style)
H. D.
DISK
○
PRELOAD
○
DEMO
○
1
+
○
F
G
1. Press DEMO (in the Edit/Number section) to open
the Demo window.
0
H
The “Select Demo” dialog window appears.
F
G
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•13
2•14 User Guide
5. Select the «ALL DEMO» option shown in the current selection window to chain all demos displayed (Song or Style).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
5. Select the «ALL DEMO» option shown in the current selection window to chain all demos displayed (Song or Style).
5
F1
Playback starts automatically from the first
demo. Demos not yet played are shown in
negative highlight while those played return
positive.
While a demo plays, all the buttons on the
control panel (except DEMO, the Function
buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled.
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft button, or press ESCAPE.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft button, or press ESCAPE.
6
If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO
dialogue window closes and the display returns to the last operating mode selected.
○
F1
Playback starts automatically from the first
demo. Demos not yet played are shown in
negative highlight while those played return
positive.
While a demo plays, all the buttons on the
control panel (except DEMO, the Function
buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled.
F2
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
ENTER
If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO
dialogue window closes and the display returns to the last operating mode selected.
H. D.
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If you press ESCAPE, the SELECT DEMO
dialogue window closes and the display returns to the last operating mode selected.
6. To stop a demo press the corresponding soft button, or press ESCAPE.
0
_
+
H. D.
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
ENTER
6
Playback starts automatically from the first
demo. Demos not yet played are shown in
negative highlight while those played return
positive.
While a demo plays, all the buttons on the
control panel (except DEMO, the Function
buttons and ESCAPE) are disabled.
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•14 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
○
5. Select the «ALL DEMO» option shown in the current selection window to chain all demos displayed (Song or Style).
○
F7
F8
6
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
ENTER
H. D.
○
○
○
○
2•14 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
○
© IMPORTANT: Remember to escape DEMO
mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or
Song, or enter one of the Edit modes.
○
○
F5
F6
○
IMPORTANT: Remember to escape DEMO
mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or
Song, or enter one of the Edit modes.
ESCAPE
○
○
F3
F4
©
IMPORTANT: Remember to escape DEMO
mode if you want to select a Performance, Style or
Song, or enter one of the Edit modes.
○
○
F2
○
User Guide 2•15
○
6 • The Performances
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6 • The Performances
ABOUT THE PERFORMANCES
ABOUT THE PERFORMANCES
A Performance is a combination of sounds that sets the instrument automatically for real time playing
(keyboard sounds), for the accompaniments (Styles) and for Songs (multitrack recording) The Performances feature single, layered and multi sounds, split and full keyboard combinations, custom effect
settings and more. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk.
A Performance is a combination of sounds that sets the instrument automatically for real time playing
(keyboard sounds), for the accompaniments (Styles) and for Songs (multitrack recording) The Performances feature single, layered and multi sounds, split and full keyboard combinations, custom effect
settings and more. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk.
Use the paired Soft buttons F7/F8 nearest to
the name.
2. Select the Performance called “StGuitar”.
The display shows 8 Performances to choose
from, each with a different name.
If the instrument is in a mode other than Style/
RealTime, press the STYLE/REALTIME button (only if the LED is not on) then any button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS.
STYLE/REALTIME returns you to the last
selected Performance - use this button as a
‘return to start’ button whenever you wish to
have one or more sounds active across the
keyboard.
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
The Performance memorises, in addition to the sounds, the status of the effects, the assignments of
the controlling devices (trackball, pedals, pads), the MIDI channel configuration, the track status (active/
mute), the mixer settings and Tempo data. Selecting a Performance instantly changes all the sounds
of the tracks and the relative Performance settings.
The Performance memorises, in addition to the sounds, the status of the effects, the assignments of
the controlling devices (trackball, pedals, pads), the MIDI channel configuration, the track status (active/
mute), the mixer settings and Tempo data. Selecting a Performance instantly changes all the sounds
of the tracks and the relative Performance settings.
F1
2
Performances are divided into two types: those residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which
govern the keyboard sounds and those associated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by selecting
the respective element. The structure and programming procedures of both Performance types are
practically identical. In this section, we’ll take a closer look at the RealTime Performances.
Performances are divided into two types: those residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which
govern the keyboard sounds and those associated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by selecting
the respective element. The structure and programming procedures of both Performance types are
practically identical. In this section, we’ll take a closer look at the RealTime Performances.
WK6/8 has 64 user programmable Performances, organized into eight different banks.
WK6/8 has 64 user programmable Performances, organized into eight different banks.
Select and play the Performances
Select and play the Performances
6
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
1
1. If the instrument is set to Style/RealTime mode,
press button 1 in the PERFORMANCE
GROUPS section.
6
1
The display shows 8 Performances to choose
from, each with a different name.
If the instrument is in a mode other than Style/
RealTime, press the STYLE/REALTIME button (only if the LED is not on) then any button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS.
STYLE/REALTIME returns you to the last
selected Performance - use this button as a
‘return to start’ button whenever you wish to
have one or more sounds active across the
keyboard.
STYLE
REAL TIME
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
Select and play the Performances
5
1
5
4
4
3
3
The display shows 8 Performances to choose
from, each with a different name.
If the instrument is in a mode other than Style/
RealTime, press the STYLE/REALTIME button (only if the LED is not on) then any button in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS.
STYLE/REALTIME returns you to the last
selected Performance - use this button as a
‘return to start’ button whenever you wish to
have one or more sounds active across the
keyboard.
2
2
1
1
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
1. If the instrument is set to Style/RealTime mode,
press button 1 in the PERFORMANCE
GROUPS section.
STYLE
REAL TIME
1
1. If the instrument is set to Style/RealTime mode,
press button 1 in the PERFORMANCE
GROUPS section.
2
3
4
5
6
STYLE
REAL TIME
WK6/8 has 64 user programmable Performances, organized into eight different banks.
Performances are divided into two types: those residing in the PERFORMANCE GROUPS which
govern the keyboard sounds and those associated to Styles and Songs which are recalled by selecting
the respective element. The structure and programming procedures of both Performance types are
practically identical. In this section, we’ll take a closer look at the RealTime Performances.
2
The Performance memorises, in addition to the sounds, the status of the effects, the assignments of
the controlling devices (trackball, pedals, pads), the MIDI channel configuration, the track status (active/
mute), the mixer settings and Tempo data. Selecting a Performance instantly changes all the sounds
of the tracks and the relative Performance settings.
F1
F2
F3
A Performance is a combination of sounds that sets the instrument automatically for real time playing
(keyboard sounds), for the accompaniments (Styles) and for Songs (multitrack recording) The Performances feature single, layered and multi sounds, split and full keyboard combinations, custom effect
settings and more. You can create your own Performances or load new ones from disk.
2. Select the Performance called “StGuitar”.
2. Select the Performance called “StGuitar”.
F4
F5
Use the paired Soft buttons F7/F8 nearest to
the name.
2
Use the paired Soft buttons F7/F8 nearest to
the name.
F6
F7
F8
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
ABOUT THE PERFORMANCES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•15
6 • The Performances
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•15
2•16 User Guide
○
If the STYLE LOCK button is on, selecting
Performances selects live keyboard sounds
only.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting
a Performance selects live keyboard and also
accompaniment Sounds. The relative Style,
Variation and Tempo are selected. Sounds
are those stored in the Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If the STYLE LOCK button is on, selecting
Performances selects live keyboard sounds
only.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting
a Performance selects live keyboard and also
accompaniment Sounds. The relative Style,
Variation and Tempo are selected. Sounds
are those stored in the Performance.
REAL-PERFORMANCE
PERF.
GROUPS
ST. LOCK
1
8. BEAT
In this case, two sounds are shown active for
play across the entire keyboard; SteelGtr1
and SteelGtr2, respectively assigned to the
Upper 1 and Upper 2 keyboard sections. Full
Keyb mode is shown selected.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional selections.
Change keyboard mode and activate/mute
the sounds recalled by the Performances
using the methods described on the previous pages to modify the overall sound combination.
To memorise a new situation to the current
Performance of to a different one, go to page
2. 39 for an example of how to store a Performance setting.
ST. LOCK
REAL-PERFORMANCE
PERF.
GROUPS
ST. LOCK
1
8. BEAT
ST. LOCK
REAL-PERFORMANCE
REAL-PERFORMANCE
Performance name
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: If you do not select a Performance within
the first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the selected
Performance.
In this case, two sounds are shown active for
play across the entire keyboard; SteelGtr1
and SteelGtr2, respectively assigned to the
Upper 1 and Upper 2 keyboard sections. Full
Keyb mode is shown selected.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional selections.
Change keyboard mode and activate/mute
the sounds recalled by the Performances
using the methods described on the previous pages to modify the overall sound combination.
To memorise a new situation to the current
Performance of to a different one, go to page
2. 39 for an example of how to store a Performance setting.
3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
< ------------------- SteelGuit 1 (Upper 1) ------------------- >
< ------------------- SteelGuit 2 (Upper 2) ------------------- >
REAL-PERFORMANCE
ST. LOCK
8. BEAT
1
ST. LOCK
PERF.
GROUPS
REAL-PERFORMANCE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•16 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
In this case, two sounds are shown active for
play across the entire keyboard; SteelGtr1
and SteelGtr2, respectively assigned to the
Upper 1 and Upper 2 keyboard sections. Full
Keyb mode is shown selected.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to make additional selections.
Change keyboard mode and activate/mute
the sounds recalled by the Performances
using the methods described on the previous pages to modify the overall sound combination.
To memorise a new situation to the current
Performance of to a different one, go to page
2. 39 for an example of how to store a Performance setting.
○
If the STYLE LOCK button is on, selecting
Performances selects live keyboard sounds
only.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting
a Performance selects live keyboard and also
accompaniment Sounds. The relative Style,
Variation and Tempo are selected. Sounds
are those stored in the Performance.
○
○
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the selected
Performance.
Performance name
○
○
Note: If you do not select a Performance within
the first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
© Note: If you do not select a Performance within
the first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
○
3
○
○
©
After selecting your Performance, the display
returns to the power up situation showing the
sounds recalled by the Performance selected.
○
©
After selecting your Performance, the display
returns to the power up situation showing the
sounds recalled by the Performance selected.
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the selected
Performance.
< ------------------- SteelGuit 1 (Upper 1) ------------------- >
< ------------------- SteelGuit 2 (Upper 2) ------------------- >
After selecting your Performance, the display
returns to the power up situation showing the
sounds recalled by the Performance selected.
Performance name
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•16 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
< ------------------- SteelGuit 1 (Upper 1) ------------------- >
< ------------------- SteelGuit 2 (Upper 2) ------------------- >
User Guide 2•17
7 • Selecting the WK6/8 Sounds
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RAM-Sounds
You can customize any sound to your tastes with
the built in sound edit capabilities:
These sounds are RAM-Sounds based on RAM
samples. The Sample Translator incoporated in
«Edit Sound» allows you to load disk-based Samples and edit them with dedicated parameters.
These type of Sounds are stored in the SampleRAM. Disk based RAM -sounds can also be
loaded into Sample-RAM.
ROM-Sounds
The ROM-Sounds are a part of the instrument’s
permanently stored data base. These sounds
are permanent and cannot be cancelled. They
are based on the internal samples archive (ROMWaves).
○
7 • Selecting the WK6/8 Sounds
The vast number of Sounds in the WK6/8 memory, arranged in 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each, include
orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instrument sounds.
The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the
remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
These types of Sounds can be loaded from floppy
disk (WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS/GPS or WX/SX), or
created with the advanced «Edit Sound».
RAM
-Sounds
Drumkit / SoundPatch
These are Sound combinations comprising the
three sound types described above. Drumkits
assign a different percussive Sound to each note
of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two
Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (velocity switch).
The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can
be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a
Drumkit in which a percussive instrument responds with two different Sounds, each on a different dynamic level.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ABOUT THE WK6/8 SOUNDS
The WK6/8 Sounds are divided in four different
types:
• ROM-Sounds;
• RAM-Sounds;
• RAM -Sounds;
• Drumkits / SoundPatches.
In the more advanced «Edit Sound» environment,
you intervene on the Sound parameters and the
resulting modifications are stored to RAM. This
allows you to assign the edited sound (or drumkit)
to any track of any Performance. Also
incoporated within the same edit is the Sample
Translator which allows the loading and editing
of Samples.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied - the “empty” slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or
disk based RAM-sounds.
ABOUT THE WK6/8 SOUNDS
«Edit Perf Sound» is a quick edit method which
forms part of the Edit Performance functions. The
resulting modifications are stored in the track to
which the Sound (or Drumkit) is assigned, consequently, all Sounds subsequently assigned to
the same track inherit the same modifications.
○
©
Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied - the “empty” slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or
disk based RAM-sounds.
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•17
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The WK6/8 Sounds are divided in four different
types:
• ROM-Sounds;
• RAM-Sounds;
• RAM -Sounds;
• Drumkits / SoundPatches.
RAM-Sounds
You can customize any sound to your tastes with
the built in sound edit capabilities:
These sounds are RAM-Sounds based on RAM
samples. The Sample Translator incoporated in
«Edit Sound» allows you to load disk-based Samples and edit them with dedicated parameters.
These type of Sounds are stored in the SampleRAM. Disk based RAM -sounds can also be
loaded into Sample-RAM.
These types of Sounds can be loaded from floppy
disk (WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS/GPS or WX/SX), or
created with the advanced «Edit Sound».
RAM
«Edit Perf Sound» is a quick edit method which
forms part of the Edit Performance functions. The
resulting modifications are stored in the track to
which the Sound (or Drumkit) is assigned, consequently, all Sounds subsequently assigned to
the same track inherit the same modifications.
○
○
In the more advanced «Edit Sound» environment,
you intervene on the Sound parameters and the
resulting modifications are stored to RAM. This
allows you to assign the edited sound (or drumkit)
to any track of any Performance. Also
incoporated within the same edit is the Sample
Translator which allows the loading and editing
of Samples.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-Sounds
○
○
○
○
○
○
Drumkit / SoundPatch
These are Sound combinations comprising the
three sound types described above. Drumkits
assign a different percussive Sound to each note
of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two
Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (velocity switch).
○
○
○
The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can
be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a
Drumkit in which a percussive instrument responds with two different Sounds, each on a different dynamic level.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ROM-Sounds
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The ROM-Sounds are a part of the instrument’s
permanently stored data base. These sounds
are permanent and cannot be cancelled. They
are based on the internal samples archive (ROMWaves).
7 • Selecting the WK6/8 Sounds
○
○
The vast number of Sounds in the WK6/8 memory, arranged in 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each, include
orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instrument sounds.
The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the
remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.
○
○
© Note: Not all sound Banks are fully occupied - the “empty” slots are ready to accept user-edited sounds or
disk based RAM-sounds.
○
○
ABOUT THE WK6/8 SOUNDS
○
○
RAM-Sounds
○
○
These types of Sounds can be loaded from floppy
disk (WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS/GPS or WX/SX), or
created with the advanced «Edit Sound».
○
○
-Sounds
○
○
RAM
○
○
The WK6/8 Sounds are divided in four different
types:
• ROM-Sounds;
• RAM-Sounds;
• RAM -Sounds;
• Drumkits / SoundPatches.
○
○
You can customize any sound to your tastes with
the built in sound edit capabilities:
○
○
These sounds are RAM-Sounds based on RAM
samples. The Sample Translator incoporated in
«Edit Sound» allows you to load disk-based Samples and edit them with dedicated parameters.
These type of Sounds are stored in the SampleRAM. Disk based RAM -sounds can also be
loaded into Sample-RAM.
○
○
Drumkit / SoundPatch
○
○
«Edit Perf Sound» is a quick edit method which
forms part of the Edit Performance functions. The
resulting modifications are stored in the track to
which the Sound (or Drumkit) is assigned, consequently, all Sounds subsequently assigned to
the same track inherit the same modifications.
○
○
These are Sound combinations comprising the
three sound types described above. Drumkits
assign a different percussive Sound to each note
of the keyboard. SoundPatches superimpose two
Sounds, separated by a dynamic threshold (velocity switch).
○
○
In the more advanced «Edit Sound» environment,
you intervene on the Sound parameters and the
resulting modifications are stored to RAM. This
allows you to assign the edited sound (or drumkit)
to any track of any Performance. Also
incoporated within the same edit is the Sample
Translator which allows the loading and editing
of Samples.
○
○
ROM-Sounds
○
©
○
The structure of the Drumkit and SoundPatch can
be fused, in order to obtain, for example, a
Drumkit in which a percussive instrument responds with two different Sounds, each on a different dynamic level.
The vast number of Sounds in the WK6/8 memory, arranged in 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each, include
orchestral, percussion and contemporary musical instrument sounds.
The Bank 1 Sounds are all GeneralMidi compatible, while those that occupy the positions of the
remaining 15 banks are variations the Bank 1 sounds.
○
The ROM-Sounds are a part of the instrument’s
permanently stored data base. These sounds
are permanent and cannot be cancelled. They
are based on the internal samples archive (ROMWaves).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•17
2•18 User Guide
SELECT AND PLAY BANK 1 SOUNDS (GM)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECT AND PLAY BANK 1 SOUNDS (GM)
Your selection will be assigned to the currently
selected track of the selected Performance. The
keyboard extension over which the sound will play
will also depend on the current keyboard mode.
Your selection will be assigned to the currently
selected track of the selected Performance. The
keyboard extension over which the sound will play
will also depend on the current keyboard mode.
To listen to the sound that you select without hearing others, mute the tracks of all the sounds not
wanted, or use the SOLO button as described
on page 2.21.
To listen to the sound that you select without hearing others, mute the tracks of all the sounds not
wanted, or use the SOLO button as described
on page 2.21.
< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
1
3
1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
In this example, press the PIANO 1 button.
The display shows 8 Sounds to choose from.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
BASS
STRI
SYN. FIX
ETH
In this example, press the PIANO 1 button.
The display shows 8 Sounds to choose from.
2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).
A
B
C
D
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
E
○
○
F
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
H
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
H
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
GUITAR
BASS
STRI
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETH
B
C
D
E
F
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
H
Note: If you do not select a Sound within the
first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
© Note: If you do not select a Sound within the
first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
○
ORGAN
G
○
Note: If you do not select a Sound within the
first 2/3 seconds, the display returns to the
previous situation with no changes.
CHROM.
A
G
©
PIANO
2
After selecting the Sound, the display returns
to the previous situation showing the selected
sound assigned to the selected track.
Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.
After selecting the Sound, the display returns
to the previous situation showing the selected
sound assigned to the selected track.
SOUND GROUP
1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
2
2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
G
After selecting the Sound, the display returns
to the previous situation showing the selected
sound assigned to the selected track.
F
E
D
C
Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.
B
A
2
In this example, press the PIANO 1 button.
The display shows 8 Sounds to choose from.
3
To listen to the sound that you select without hearing others, mute the tracks of all the sounds not
wanted, or use the SOLO button as described
on page 2.21.
REED
3
1. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
Repeat step 2 to make additional selections.
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
2. Select a Sound by pressing the paired Soft buttons near the Sound name in the display (buttons E/F for Piano3 in this example).
3. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
PIANO
PIPE
ETH
STRI
BASS
GUITAR
ORGAN
CHROM.
SYN. FIX
SYN. PAD
SYN. LD
SOUND GROUP
1
< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
< --------------------- Piano 3 (Upper 1) --------------------- >
Your selection will be assigned to the currently
selected track of the selected Performance. The
keyboard extension over which the sound will play
will also depend on the current keyboard mode.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•18 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECT AND PLAY BANK 1 SOUNDS (GM)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•18 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•19
SELECT AND PLAY SOUND VARIATIONS
(BANK 2, 3, ..... ETC..)
○
4
○
○
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
○
○
○
SELECT AND PLAY SOUND VARIATIONS
(BANK 2, 3, ..... ETC..)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
SOUND GROUP
STRI
4. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
PIANO
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRI
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETH
4. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
If you press the same Sound Groups button
as in point 1, you can listen to variations of
the same sound selected in point 2.
REED
SYN. LD
PIPE
SYN. PAD
If you press the same Sound Groups button
as in point 1, you can listen to variations of
the same sound selected in point 2.
ETH
SYN. FIX
< ------------------ E.G. Piano1 (Upper 1) ------------------ >
5
5. Select a different Bank using the Page/Bank
buttons ( ).
The button selects the Banks in increasing numerical order while the
button selects in decreasing order.
Each Sound Group consists of 16 Sound
Banks capable of containing up to 8 Sounds
each.
5
5. Select a different Bank using the Page/Bank
buttons ( ).
The button selects the Banks in increasing numerical order while the
button selects in decreasing order.
Each Sound Group consists of 16 Sound
Banks capable of containing up to 8 Sounds
each.
7
6
A
6
A
B
6. Select a Sound from the current Bank with the
corresponding paired Soft buttons (buttons E/F
for E.G.Piano1 in this example).
B
6. Select a Sound from the current Bank with the
corresponding paired Soft buttons (buttons E/F
for E.G.Piano1 in this example).
C
D
E
F
G
C
D
E
F
G
H
H
7. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
7. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to make additional
selections from other Banks and Groups.
Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to make additional
selections from other Banks and Groups.
Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 to make additional
selections from other Banks and Groups.
7. Play on the keyboard and listen to the Sound.
H
G
6. Select a Sound from the current Bank with the
corresponding paired Soft buttons (buttons E/F
for E.G.Piano1 in this example).
F
E
D
C
B
The button selects the Banks in increasing numerical order while the
button selects in decreasing order.
Each Sound Group consists of 16 Sound
Banks capable of containing up to 8 Sounds
each.
A
6
7
If you press the same Sound Groups button
as in point 1, you can listen to variations of
the same sound selected in point 2.
5
< ------------------ E.G. Piano1 (Upper 1) ------------------ >
5. Select a different Bank using the Page/Bank
buttons ( ).
7
< ------------------ E.G. Piano1 (Upper 1) ------------------ >
ETH
SYN. FIX
SYN. PAD
SYN. LD
PIPE
REED
STRI
BASS
GUITAR
ORGAN
CHROM.
PIANO
4. Press a SOUND GROUPS button.
SOUND GROUP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•19
4
○
SELECT AND PLAY SOUND VARIATIONS
(BANK 2, 3, ..... ETC..)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•19
2•20 User Guide
USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT A SOUND
○
○
D
○
○
○
○
○
○
+
PRELOAD
H. D.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6
5
1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you
wish to reassign.
CNT / PADS
3A
0
+
EFFECTS
PRELOAD
DEMO
GENERAL
SYNTH
CNT / PADS
6
5
SOUND
TRACKS
3
2
MIXER
MIDI
3B
H
4
F
D
C
B
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
PRELOAD
DISK
○
EDIT / NUMBER
MIDI
EFFECTS
+
0
MIXER
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
TRACKS
SOUND
5
4
○
2
○
○
USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT A SOUND
The WK6/8 Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the
BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00
[CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying
the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on
the numeric keypad.
In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to
the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0
○
○
○
H.○ D.
○
○
○
KEY PAD
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
KEY PAD
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3A
2. Press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric
keypad.
3. Specify the ProgramChange of the required
Sound.
A: In the example, specify «4» then «9».
B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash («–») which acts as
a separator then specify the corresponding
Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify «–» then «2».
If necessary, add a second separator («–»)
and the third part of the message (BankSelect
LSB).
○
+
4. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS
MIDI
MIXER
1
2
3
TRACKS
SOUND
4
5
6
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
CNT / PADS
An insertion window activates showing the
number of Sound currently assigned to the
track.
○
ENTER
○
1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you
wish to reassign.
DISK
PRELOAD
_
○
A
Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its
own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if
the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying
ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you
will select Sound 96-2-1.
6
○
○
1
©
EDIT / NUMBER
H. D.
EFFECTS
MIDI
MIXER
1
2
3
TRACKS
SOUND
4
5
6
ST. / SONG
SYNTH
GENERAL
7
8
9
DEMO
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
CNT / PADS
3B
H. D.
4
KEY PAD
ENTER
OR
The KEY PAD LED turns off.
ESCAPE
A
2•20 User Guide
○
○
OR
E
○
ST. / SONG
DEMO
G
○
6
CNT / PADS
KEY PAD
○
5
DEMO
2
○
○
© Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its
own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if
the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying
ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you
will select Sound 96-2-1.
○
SOUND
_
EDIT / NUMBER
○
TRACKS
H. D.
EFFECTS
○
3
1
9
8
The KEY PAD LED turns off.
○
2
ST. / SONG
4
DISK
4. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
○
1
4
A: In the example, specify «4» then «9».
B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash («–») which acts as
a separator then specify the corresponding
Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify «–» then «2».
If necessary, add a second separator («–»)
and the third part of the message (BankSelect
LSB).
○
MIXER
CNT / PADS
7
MIXER
MIDI
EDIT / NUMBER
3. Specify the ProgramChange of the required
Sound.
○
MIDI
H. D.
3
2
1
An insertion window activates showing the
number of Sound currently assigned to the
track.
○
EDIT / NUMBER
EFFECTS
_
SOUND
TRACKS
2. Press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric
keypad.
3A
○
4
○
○
1. Select (if necessary) the track whose sound you
wish to reassign.
GENERAL
○
SYNTH
○
ST. / SONG
○
3B
9
8
○
○
KEY PAD
2
7
DISK
○
○
H
DEMO
○
○
F
G
Note: If you specify the ProgramChange on its
own, the bank rests unchanged. For example, if
the current Sound is 112-2-1, by specifying
ProgramChange 96 or sending PC96 via MIDI, you
will select Sound 96-2-1.
○
○
USING THE KEYPAD TO SELECT A SOUND
○
○
The WK6/8 Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the
BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00
[CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying
the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on
the numeric keypad.
In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to
the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
○
○
2. Press the KEY PAD button to enable the numeric
keypad.
○
○
An insertion window activates showing the
number of Sound currently assigned to the
track.
○
○
3. Specify the ProgramChange of the required
Sound.
0
○
_
○
○
A: In the example, specify «4» then «9».
B: If the required Sound belongs to a different Bank, key in a dash («–») which acts as
a separator then specify the corresponding
Bank number (Bank Select MSB). In the example, specify «–» then «2».
If necessary, add a second separator («–»)
and the third part of the message (BankSelect
LSB).
ENTER
○
E
KEY PAD
○
○
C
4
○
○
4. Confirm by pressing KEY PAD or ENTER, or press
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
○
○
B
OR
○
○
The KEY PAD LED turns off.
○
○
A
ESCAPE
○
○
1
The WK6/8 Sounds are identified by two numbers: the ProgramChange (PC) and the
BankSelect MSB number (ControlChange 00
[CC00]). You can select a Sound by specifying
the absolute values (PC and CC numbers) on
the numeric keypad.
In MIDI setups, a third number corresponding to
the BankSelect LSB (CC 32) is sometimes necessary to select a sound of an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
©
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•20 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•21
THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE
SOUND FROM THE REST
○
○
○
○
○
THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE
SOUND FROM THE REST
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If you are playing in a situation where two or more
sounds are displayed, before activating a muted
sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest
using the SOLO button in the following manner:
3
SOLO
SOLO
1
1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.
The LED of the SOLO button turns on and
the sound currently shown highlighted will
play while all other sounds are automatically
muted (if active).
The LED of the SOLO button turns on and
the sound currently shown highlighted will
play while all other sounds are automatically
muted (if active).
2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
In this example, the sound WarmPad (Lower
2) is automatically activated and the previous one (E.G.Piano1) is automatically muted.
Observe that the sound plays across the full
keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left
split in Upp/Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected.
In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even
sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they
are “Solo’d”. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point.
In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solo’d sound
plays across the currently assigned keyboard
extension. In this case, the SOLO button
recognises the current Split Point.
The SOLO button finds its principal use in
Multi track situations.
In this example, the sound WarmPad (Lower
2) is automatically activated and the previous one (E.G.Piano1) is automatically muted.
Observe that the sound plays across the full
keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left
split in Upp/Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected.
In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even
sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they
are “Solo’d”. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point.
In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solo’d sound
plays across the currently assigned keyboard
extension. In this case, the SOLO button
recognises the current Split Point.
The SOLO button finds its principal use in
Multi track situations.
H
G
F
E
D
2
C
B
A
A
B
2
C
D
E
F
SOLO
In this example, the sound WarmPad (Lower
2) is automatically activated and the previous one (E.G.Piano1) is automatically muted.
Observe that the sound plays across the full
keyboard: normally Lower 2 plays on the left
split in Upp/Low mode and cannot be activated when Full keyboard mode is selected.
In Full keyboard mode, therefore, even
sounds assigned to the Lower keyboard sections play across the full keyboard when they
are “Solo’d”. In other words, the SOLO button overrides the current Split point.
In Upp/Low and Multi mode, a Solo’d sound
plays across the currently assigned keyboard
extension. In this case, the SOLO button
recognises the current Split Point.
The SOLO button finds its principal use in
Multi track situations.
< ------------------- WARMPAD (Lower 2) ------------------- >
1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.
○
3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal
operation.
1
○
The SOLO LED turns off.
If you are playing in a situation where two or more
sounds are displayed, before activating a muted
sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest
using the SOLO button in the following manner:
○
2
A
B
C
D
E
F
2. Select any another sound by pressing the corresponding Soft button once only.
G
H
G
H
The LED of the SOLO button turns on and
the sound currently shown highlighted will
play while all other sounds are automatically
muted (if active).
3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal
operation.
○
○
The SOLO LED turns off.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•21
3
SOLO
THE SOLO BUTTON - ISOLATE A SINGLE
SOUND FROM THE REST
SOLO
The SOLO LED turns off.
SOLO
If you are playing in a situation where two or more
sounds are displayed, before activating a muted
sound you may want to listen to it alone to decide whether to activate it or not. In such a situation, you can isolate the sound from the rest
using the SOLO button in the following manner:
3
1
3. Press the SOLO button again to return to normal
operation.
< ------------------- WARMPAD (Lower 2) ------------------- >
1. Press the SOLO button and play on the keyboard.
< ------------------- WARMPAD (Lower 2) ------------------- >
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•21
2•22 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8 • Display Hold
8 • Display Hold
HOLD THE DISPLAY DURING SELECTION
PROCEDURES
1
D. HOLD
HOLD THE DISPLAY DURING SELECTION
PROCEDURES
K
1
D. HOLD
K
ESCAPE
OR
Press D. HOLD to cancel the function (LED
off).
6
6. Press ESCAPE to close the selection window without cancelling D. HOLD.
2
CHROM.
REED
5
3
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
If you activate D. HOLD (LED on), the selection
window remains locked after selecting an item.
This allows you to continue selecting other items
until you are satisfied with the result.
1. Press D. HOLD.
REED
PIANO
K
PIPE
ETHNIC
STRING
BASS
GUITAR
ORGAN
CHROM.
SYN. FIX
SYN. PAD
SYN. LD
SOUND GROUP
1. Press D. HOLD.
ORGAN
The display remains fixed showing the selection of sounds.
D. HOLD
If you activate D. HOLD (LED on), the selection
window remains locked after selecting an item.
This allows you to continue selecting other items
until you are satisfied with the result.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
Normally, after selecting an item (Sound, Performance, Style or Song) from a selection window,
the display returns to the previous status automatically.
5. Press another Group button to open a different
selection window and select another item.
Normally, after selecting an item (Sound, Performance, Style or Song) from a selection window,
the display returns to the previous status automatically.
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
ETHNIC
SYN. FIX
A
SOUND GROUP
2
PIANO
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
3
A
B
The LED of the button turns on.
B
The LED of the button turns on.
F8
4. Select other sounds as required.
C
F7
D
F6
2. Press a button from the SOUND GROUPS, the
PERFORMANCE GROUPS or the STYLE GROUPS
section to open the relative selection window.
E
The selection window remains locked after
you select your sound.
F5
F
F4
G
F3
H
F2
3. Select a Sound from the selection window.
F1
4
4
In the example, we select a Sound Groups
button:
In the example, we select a Sound Groups
button:
3. Select a Sound from the selection window.
F1
2. Press a button from the SOUND GROUPS, the
PERFORMANCE GROUPS or the STYLE GROUPS
section to open the relative selection window.
F2
H
The selection window remains locked after
you select your sound.
C
D
2. Press a button from the SOUND GROUPS, the
PERFORMANCE GROUPS or the STYLE GROUPS
section to open the relative selection window.
In the example, we select a Sound Groups
button:
E
F
G
H
4
3. Select a Sound from the selection window.
F1
F2
The selection window remains locked after
you select your sound.
F3
G
F4
F
F5
F3
F4
F5
E
F6
D
4. Select other sounds as required.
F7
F6
4. Select other sounds as required.
F7
The LED of the button turns on.
C
F8
F8
B
5
6. Press ESCAPE to close the selection window without cancelling D. HOLD.
5. Press another Group button to open a different
selection window and select another item.
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
2
PIPE
REED
REED
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
Normally, after selecting an item (Sound, Performance, Style or Song) from a selection window,
the display returns to the previous status automatically.
ETHNIC
STRING
BASS
GUITAR
ORGAN
CHROM.
PIANO
SYN. FIX
SYN. PAD
SYN. LD
SOUND GROUP
Press D. HOLD to cancel the function (LED
off).
The display remains fixed showing the selection of sounds.
If you activate D. HOLD (LED on), the selection
window remains locked after selecting an item.
This allows you to continue selecting other items
until you are satisfied with the result.
3
A
5. Press another Group button to open a different
selection window and select another item.
1. Press D. HOLD.
The display remains fixed showing the selection of sounds.
6
D. HOLD
K
6. Press ESCAPE to close the selection window without cancelling D. HOLD.
Press D. HOLD to cancel the function (LED
off).
OR
ESCAPE
K
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•22 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8 • Display Hold
D. HOLD
○
1
○
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•22 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
CHROM.
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
REED
PIPE
SYN. LD
SYN. PAD
SYN. FIX
ETHNIC
6
D. HOLD
OR
ESCAPE
HOLD THE DISPLAY DURING SELECTION
PROCEDURES
○
SOUND GROUP
PIANO
K
User Guide 2•23
In Style/RealTime mode, press the right TRACK
SCROLL button to bring the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
TRACK SCROLL
ABOUT THE WK6/8 STYLES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9 • The Styles
○
○
○
○
○
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock
and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music
The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are
triggered by the chord information received from
the WK6/8 keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.
In Style/RealTime mode, press the right TRACK
SCROLL button to bring the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
TRACK SCROLL
The WK6/8 has 192 auto accompaniment Styles
arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2
banks of 8 Styles each. Your instrument may
also contain a set of Flash User Styles. See page
2. 27 for more details. Each Style has 4 Variations, 4 Intros, 4 Fills and 4 Endings. A Style,
therefore, provides a complete range of musical
structures with which you can create an entire
song.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•23
○
○
○
○
○
9 • The Styles
○
The accompaniment tracks and the keyboard
tracks can be changed in the same manner and
saved in the Performance (Style-Performance or
Performance).
In Style/RealTime mode, press the right TRACK
SCROLL button to bring the 8 automatic accompaniment tracks into view.
○
TRACK SCROLL
○
The arrangement patterns of the ROM Styles are
fixed and cannot be modified. It is, however,
possible to program your own Style patterns to
create up to 32 User-programmable Styles and
store them in the 4 USER GROUPS. You can
also program User Styles using copies (whole or
partial) of the ROM Styles.
Up to 32 disk based user-programmable Styles
of your choice can be loaded into the 4 USER
Groups available.
Press the left TRACK SCROLL button to restore
the Style/RealTime display.
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock
and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music
The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are
triggered by the chord information received from
the WK6/8 keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.
○
Each Style consists of 16 tracks: the first 8 are
engaged by the sequencer for the auto accompaniments, and the remaining 8 belong to the real
time keyboard sections (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2 in Upp/Low mode, tracks 1 … 8 in Multimode).
The 8 accompaniment tracks are divided as follows: DRUMS (drum sets), BASS, ACC. 1/2/3 and
ACC. 4/5/6 (accompaniments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and
6).
Accompaniment
tracks
Sounds assigned to the
accompaniment tracks
ABOUT THE WK6/8 STYLES
○
The WK6/8 has 192 auto accompaniment Styles
arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2
banks of 8 Styles each. Your instrument may
also contain a set of Flash User Styles. See page
2. 27 for more details. Each Style has 4 Variations, 4 Intros, 4 Fills and 4 Endings. A Style,
therefore, provides a complete range of musical
structures with which you can create an entire
song.
The arrangement patterns of the ROM Styles are
fixed and cannot be modified. It is, however,
possible to program your own Style patterns to
create up to 32 User-programmable Styles and
store them in the 4 USER GROUPS. You can
also program User Styles using copies (whole or
partial) of the ROM Styles.
Up to 32 disk based user-programmable Styles
of your choice can be loaded into the 4 USER
Groups available.
Press the left TRACK SCROLL button to restore
the Style/RealTime display.
○
Accompaniment
tracks
Sounds assigned to the
accompaniment tracks
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their
Performances, 8 for each Style. In fact, once
you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play, giving you endless sound combination possibilities.
Accompaniment
tracks
Sounds assigned to the
accompaniment tracks
○
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their
Performances, 8 for each Style. In fact, once
you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play, giving you endless sound combination possibilities.
The Styles are rendered more versatile by their
Performances, 8 for each Style. In fact, once
you select a Style, you can assign up to 8 different Performances to the Style while you play, giving you endless sound combination possibilities.
The accompaniment tracks and the keyboard
tracks can be changed in the same manner and
saved in the Performance (Style-Performance or
Performance).
○
ABOUT THE WK6/8 STYLES
The WK6/8 has 192 auto accompaniment Styles
arranged in 12 Style Groups, each containing 2
banks of 8 Styles each. Your instrument may
also contain a set of Flash User Styles. See page
2. 27 for more details. Each Style has 4 Variations, 4 Intros, 4 Fills and 4 Endings. A Style,
therefore, provides a complete range of musical
structures with which you can create an entire
song.
Each Style consists of 16 tracks: the first 8 are
engaged by the sequencer for the auto accompaniments, and the remaining 8 belong to the real
time keyboard sections (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2 in Upp/Low mode, tracks 1 … 8 in Multimode).
The 8 accompaniment tracks are divided as follows: DRUMS (drum sets), BASS, ACC. 1/2/3 and
ACC. 4/5/6 (accompaniments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and
6).
○
Each Style consists of 16 tracks: the first 8 are
engaged by the sequencer for the auto accompaniments, and the remaining 8 belong to the real
time keyboard sections (Upper 1 & 2, Lower 1 &
2 in Upp/Low mode, tracks 1 … 8 in Multimode).
The 8 accompaniment tracks are divided as follows: DRUMS (drum sets), BASS, ACC. 1/2/3 and
ACC. 4/5/6 (accompaniments 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and
6).
Styles are a collection of musical patterns representing many types of music, ranging from rock
and pop to traditional, Latin and Oriental music
The automatic accompaniments of the Styles are
triggered by the chord information received from
the WK6/8 keyboard; the accompaniment patterns change to suit the current chord.
○
The arrangement patterns of the ROM Styles are
fixed and cannot be modified. It is, however,
possible to program your own Style patterns to
create up to 32 User-programmable Styles and
store them in the 4 USER GROUPS. You can
also program User Styles using copies (whole or
partial) of the ROM Styles.
Up to 32 disk based user-programmable Styles
of your choice can be loaded into the 4 USER
Groups available.
Press the left TRACK SCROLL button to restore
the Style/RealTime display.
9 • The Styles
○
The accompaniment tracks and the keyboard
tracks can be changed in the same manner and
saved in the Performance (Style-Performance or
Performance).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•23
2•24 User Guide
PLAY WITH THE STYLES
○
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY.
LATIN. 1
FUNK
ROCK
US
LATIN. 2
DANCE. 1
US
DANCE. 2
STYLE GROUP
2
ARRANGE
MEMORY
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
1
ARRANGE
MODE
LOWER
MEMORY
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
○
2•24 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ARRANGE
MEMORY
PLAY WITH THE STYLES
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY.
LOWER
MEMORY
The ARRANGE ON/OFF and ARRANGE
MEMORY buttons will activate if not already
on.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the
sounds memorized in the recalled Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks as well as those assigned to the keyboard sections. Also recalled are settings relating to the keyboard
mode and chord recognition mode for the
current Style.
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting
Styles changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks only while those of the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.
ARRANGE
MODE
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
FUNK
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
US
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
US
PLAY WITH THE STYLES
16. BEAT
8. BEAT
TRAD. 2
TRAD. 1
○
○
2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat,
16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
JAZZ in this example.
8 Style names belonging to the selected Style
Group are displayed in Bank 1.
3. Use the Page Scroll buttons (
) to select Bank
2 if Bank 1 does not show the required Style.
A second bank of 8 Styles belonging to the
selected Style Group is displayed.
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY.
US. TRAD
JAZZ
○
○
The ARRANGE ON/OFF and ARRANGE
MEMORY buttons will activate if not already
on.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the
sounds memorized in the recalled Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks as well as those assigned to the keyboard sections. Also recalled are settings relating to the keyboard
mode and chord recognition mode for the
current Style.
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting
Styles changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks only while those of the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.
3
3
○
○
2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat,
16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
○
○
JAZZ in this example.
8 Style names belonging to the selected Style
Group are displayed in Bank 1.
○
○
3. Use the Page Scroll buttons (
) to select Bank
2 if Bank 1 does not show the required Style.
○
○
A second bank of 8 Styles belonging to the
selected Style Group is displayed.
○
○
STYLE GROUP
3. Use the Page Scroll buttons (
) to select Bank
2 if Bank 1 does not show the required Style.
○
○
2
JAZZ in this example.
8 Style names belonging to the selected Style
Group are displayed in Bank 1.
○
○
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
2. Press a Style button in the STYLE GROUPS (8 Beat,
16 Beat, Rock, etc.).
○
○
1
The ARRANGE ON/OFF and ARRANGE
MEMORY buttons will activate if not already
on.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is on, the
sounds memorized in the recalled Style Performance are assigned to all the tracks. Selecting a Style changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks as well as those assigned to the keyboard sections. Also recalled are settings relating to the keyboard
mode and chord recognition mode for the
current Style.
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting
Styles changes the sounds of the accompaniment tracks only while those of the keyboard sounds remain unchanged.
A second bank of 8 Styles belonging to the
selected Style Group is displayed.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•24 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
1
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
ARRANGE
MEMORY
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MODE
2
STYLE GROUP
3
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
FUNK
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
US
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
US
User Guide 2•25
○
A
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
C
D
E
F
G
H
TRACK SCROLL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: You can also scroll all 16 Style tracks
using the / cursor buttons.
○
○
4
A
Buttons A/B for SWING in this example.
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds. Observe also that the keyboard mode has
changed from Full to Upp/Low.
Press the right Track Scroll button to check
the sounds recalled for the accompaniment
tracks. Observe that in this example, the
tracks Acc4/5/6 are all muted.
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
B
©
○
○
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
○
○
TRACK SCROLL
○
Note: You can also scroll all 16 Style tracks
using the / cursor buttons.
○
○
5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect
the Style introduction, then press the START/STOP
button to start the accompaniment.
TRACK SCROLL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect
the Style introduction, then press the START/STOP
button to start the accompaniment.
TRACK SCROLL
ENDING
You’ll hear the drum track start to play with
an introduction (the length of the Intro will
depend on the currently selected Variation).
You can also preset the Ending or the Fill ><
to play as an Intro.
You’ll hear the drum track start to play with
an introduction (the length of the Intro will
depend on the currently selected Variation).
You can also preset the Ending or the Fill ><
to play as an Intro.
You’ll hear the drum track start to play with
an introduction (the length of the Intro will
depend on the currently selected Variation).
You can also preset the Ending or the Fill ><
to play as an Intro.
5
6. Play a chord of at least three notes below the
chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
INTRO
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
TRACK SCROLL
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment
pattern is triggered.
In default conditions, the keyboard’s chord
recognition mode is set to “Fingered 1”. You
can change the chord recognition mode to
“One finger”, “Fingered 2” or “Free 1 & 2”, by
entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See
the ARRANGE MODE function on page 2.33
of this chapter.
5
6. Play a chord of at least three notes below the
chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment
pattern is triggered.
In default conditions, the keyboard’s chord
recognition mode is set to “Fingered 1”. You
can change the chord recognition mode to
“One finger”, “Fingered 2” or “Free 1 & 2”, by
entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See
the ARRANGE MODE function on page 2.33
of this chapter.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
INTRO
INTRO
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
KEY START
○
○
ENDING
○
© Note: You can also scroll all 16 Style tracks
using the / cursor buttons.
START / STOP
6
TRACK SCROLL
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•25
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
START / STOP
6
4. Select a Style with the corresponding paired soft
buttons.
○
○
Buttons A/B for SWING in this example.
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds. Observe also that the keyboard mode has
changed from Full to Upp/Low.
Press the right Track Scroll button to check
the sounds recalled for the accompaniment
tracks. Observe that in this example, the
tracks Acc4/5/6 are all muted.
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
○
○
5. Press the INTRO button if you want to preselect
the Style introduction, then press the START/STOP
button to start the accompaniment.
○
○
KEY START
○
○
INTRO
○
○
INTRO
○
4. Select a Style with the corresponding paired soft
buttons.
5
○
○
6. Play a chord of at least three notes below the
chord Split Point (note B3) to start Style play.
○
○
START / STOP
○
○
6
○
○
4
Buttons A/B for SWING in this example.
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds. Observe also that the keyboard mode has
changed from Full to Upp/Low.
Press the right Track Scroll button to check
the sounds recalled for the accompaniment
tracks. Observe that in this example, the
tracks Acc4/5/6 are all muted.
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
○
○
A fully orchestrated auto accompaniment
pattern is triggered.
In default conditions, the keyboard’s chord
recognition mode is set to “Fingered 1”. You
can change the chord recognition mode to
“One finger”, “Fingered 2” or “Free 1 & 2”, by
entering the ARRANGE MODE options. See
the ARRANGE MODE function on page 2.33
of this chapter.
4. Select a Style with the corresponding paired soft
buttons.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•25
2•26 User Guide
7. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
Note how the accompaniment pattern
changes to a different Variation.
The VAR buttons control the Style Variations.
Each button recalls a different version of the
same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro,
Fill and Ending sections.
VAR. 1
VAR. 2
VAR. 3
7. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.
Note how the accompaniment pattern
changes to a different Variation.
The VAR buttons control the Style Variations.
Each button recalls a different version of the
same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro,
Fill and Ending sections.
VAR. 4
START / STOP
VAR. 1
8. Press one of the FILL buttons.
VAR. 3
VAR. 4
Start/Stop stops the Style instantly.
Ending stops the Style with an ending phrase.
11
INTRO
8
FILL
FILL
FILL< plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
previous Variation.
FILL>< plays the fill cycle then continues with
the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, Fill >< can be preselected
to play as an intro.
FILL> plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
next Variation (this button also incorporates
the Tap Tempo function - see over).
Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you
hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat
the Fill cycle continually until release.
FILL
The combination of sounds that play and the
current keyboard mode will depend on the
Style selected.
TAP TEMPO
10. Start to play a melody with the right hand.
Note how the accompaniment pattern is
transposed.
FILL
FILL
FILL
9/10
9. Play a different chord.
TAP TEMPO
ENDING
TRACK SCROLL
TAP TEMPO
FILL
FILL
FILL
The combination of sounds that play and the
current keyboard mode will depend on the
Style selected.
TAP TEMPO
FILL
FILL
FILL
11. Stop the Style by pressing the Start/Stop button
or the Ending button.
8
11
Start/Stop stops the Style instantly.
Ending stops the Style with an ending phrase.
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
Note how the accompaniment pattern is
transposed.
VAR. 4
VAR. 3
VAR. 2
VAR. 1
11. Stop the Style by pressing the Start/Stop button
or the Ending button.
ENDING
○
○
2•26 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
○
7. Press one of the VAR buttons shown off.
VAR. 4
○
VAR. 3
○
VAR. 2
○
VAR. 1
○
VAR. 3
VAR. 4
8
FILL
FILL
FILL
TAP TEMPO
FILL
FILL
FILL
TAP TEMPO
9/10
The combination of sounds that play and the
current keyboard mode will depend on the
Style selected.
Start/Stop stops the Style instantly.
Ending stops the Style with an ending phrase.
8. Press one of the FILL buttons.
○
VAR. 2
10. Start to play a melody with the right hand.
START / STOP
○
VAR. 1
VAR. 4
9. Play a different chord.
Note how the accompaniment pattern
changes to a different Variation.
The VAR buttons control the Style Variations.
Each button recalls a different version of the
same accompaniment. Each Variation includes different patterns for the Basic, Intro,
Fill and Ending sections.
ENDING
KEY START
10. Start to play a melody with the right hand.
VAR. 3
TRACK SCROLL
FILL< plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
previous Variation.
FILL>< plays the fill cycle then continues with
the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, Fill >< can be preselected
to play as an intro.
FILL> plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
next Variation (this button also incorporates
the Tap Tempo function - see over).
Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you
hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat
the Fill cycle continually until release.
9/10
Note how the accompaniment pattern is
transposed.
○
VAR. 2
TRACK SCROLL
9. Play a different chord.
○
VAR. 1
8. Press one of the FILL buttons.
11. Stop the Style by pressing the Start/Stop button
or the Ending button.
FILL< plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
previous Variation.
FILL>< plays the fill cycle then continues with
the current Variation. When the accompaniment is not playing, Fill >< can be preselected
to play as an intro.
FILL> plays the fill cycle then breaks into the
next Variation (this button also incorporates
the Tap Tempo function - see over).
Normally the fill cycle plays once only. If you
hold the FILL button pressed, it will repeat
the Fill cycle continually until release.
VAR. 2
7
11
INTRO
KEY START
START / STOP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•26 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ENDING
ENDING
User Guide 2•27
○
Your instrument leaves the factory with a set of
User Styles stored in the Flash banks of the User
Style locations. These memory locations are reserved for factory use and the contents may differ
depending on the various world markets. It is not
possible to save data (other than Performance
data) to the User flash banks, nor is it possible to
erase the data contained in them. From time to
time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems
which contain upgrades of the User flash banks.
○
○
○
○
○
SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY
USER STYLES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
N.B. The recalled Flash User Style can be modified and memorised to the same Flash User Bank,
or to any other User location. Refer to the Style
Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performance.
SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY
USER STYLES
Your instrument leaves the factory with a set of
User Styles stored in the Flash banks of the User
Style locations. These memory locations are reserved for factory use and the contents may differ
depending on the various world markets. It is not
possible to save data (other than Performance
data) to the User flash banks, nor is it possible to
erase the data contained in them. From time to
time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems
which contain upgrades of the User flash banks.
H
G
F
E
D
C
3
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
USER. 1
USER. 2
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER. 3
USER. 4
Select a Flash User Style
The selection procedure is identical to the one
used to select a Style, with the different that you
select the Flash User Style from the second bank
of the User locations (User 1).
2
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
USER. 1
USER. 2
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER. 3
USER. 4
2
) to select Bank 2.
1. Press the User 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS
section.
8 User locations belonging to the selected
User Group are displayed in Bank 1 (if User
Styles have not been recorded or loaded from
disk, all the User locations of Bank 1 will be
“empty”).
8 User locations belonging to the selected
User Group are displayed in Bank 1 (if User
Styles have not been recorded or loaded from
disk, all the User locations of Bank 1 will be
“empty”).
2. Use the Page buttons (
1. Press the User 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS
section.
8 User locations belonging to the selected
User Group are displayed in Bank 1 (if User
Styles have not been recorded or loaded from
disk, all the User locations of Bank 1 will be
“empty”).
1. Press the User 1 button in the STYLE GROUPS
section.
) to select Bank 2.
2. Use the Page buttons (
The second bank of the User Styles corresponds to the Flash bank which contains 8
Flash User Styles. These Styles may differ
from market to market.
2
LATIN. 2
USER. 3
FUNK
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
USER. 1
USER. 4
USER. 2
STYLE GROUP
1
B
C
F
G
H
○
B
N.B. The recalled Flash User Style can be modified and memorised to the same Flash User Bank,
or to any other User location. Refer to the Style
Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performance.
D
○
A
C
E
○
3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•27
D
E
F
G
H
SELECT AND PLAY THE FLASH MEMORY
USER STYLES
N.B. The recalled Flash User Style can be modified and memorised to the same Flash User Bank,
or to any other User location. Refer to the Style
Performance procedure on the pages which follow for details regarding how to store Performance.
○
3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding
paired soft buttons.
Buttons A/B for SpgtiWSTRN in this example. Proceed as already described for the
Rom Styles in the previous pages.
A
○
LATIN. 1
3
Buttons A/B for SpgtiWSTRN in this example. Proceed as already described for the
Rom Styles in the previous pages.
TRAD. 2
3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding
paired soft buttons.
Your instrument leaves the factory with a set of
User Styles stored in the Flash banks of the User
Style locations. These memory locations are reserved for factory use and the contents may differ
depending on the various world markets. It is not
possible to save data (other than Performance
data) to the User flash banks, nor is it possible to
erase the data contained in them. From time to
time, Generalmusic may offer operating systems
which contain upgrades of the User flash banks.
The second bank of the User Styles corresponds to the Flash bank which contains 8
Flash User Styles. These Styles may differ
from market to market.
) to select Bank 2.
Select a Flash User Style
The selection procedure is identical to the one
used to select a Style, with the different that you
select the Flash User Style from the second bank
of the User locations (User 1).
2. Use the Page buttons (
STYLE GROUP
FUNK
The second bank of the User Styles corresponds to the Flash bank which contains 8
Flash User Styles. These Styles may differ
from market to market.
Select a Flash User Style
The selection procedure is identical to the one
used to select a Style, with the different that you
select the Flash User Style from the second bank
of the User locations (User 1).
FUNK
1
3. Select a Flash User Style with the corresponding
paired soft buttons.
B
A
STYLE GROUP
Buttons A/B for SpgtiWSTRN in this example. Proceed as already described for the
Rom Styles in the previous pages.
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•27
2•28 User Guide
START A STYLE WITH KEY START
○
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
1. Make sure that ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
MEMORY are off.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
○
INTRO
2. When the Style is not playing, press KEY START.
ARRANGE
MEMORY
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
4
LOWER
MEMORY
The KEY START LED turns on.
3. Preselect the INTRO (or FILL or ENDING) to start
the Style with an Intro, and play a chord (at least
3 notes) with your left hand.
The accompaniment starts immediately
(eventually preceded by the introductory pattern if selected). If you release the keys, the
accompaniment stops instantly.
4
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
INTRO
3
START / STOP
○
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
○
○
○
○
2•28 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1/2
LOWER
MEMORY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
START A STYLE WITH KEY START
The Key Start function synchronizes the start of
the automatic accompaniment with a note
pressed on the keyboard below the split point
without having to use START/STOP. KEY START
can be used in various situations. The most common use is as follows:
KEY START
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
INTRO
KEY START
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ARRANGE
MEMORY
INTRO
MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while
your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops
instantly when the notes are released. If, instead,
one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment or the drum track only will continue playing
after releasing the keys.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOWER
MEMORY
○
© Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
ENDING
○
1/2
1. Make sure that ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
MEMORY are off.
○
○
3
KEY START
START / STOP
INTRO
2. When the Style is not playing, press KEY START.
The KEY START LED turns on.
3. Preselect the INTRO (or FILL or ENDING) to start
the Style with an Intro, and play a chord (at least
3 notes) with your left hand.
The accompaniment starts immediately
(eventually preceded by the introductory pattern if selected). If you release the keys, the
accompaniment stops instantly.
4
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
ARRANGE
MEMORY
LOWER
MEMORY
4. Press the Arrange Memory button (LED on) and
play another chord with your left hand.
The accompaniment starts playing again. If
you release the keys, this time the arrangement continues to play. The Arrange Memory
function memorises the last chord played.
○
ENDING
5. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the accompaniment.
With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active.
With Ending, KEY START turns off.
If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.
The Key Start function synchronizes the start of
the automatic accompaniment with a note
pressed on the keyboard below the split point
without having to use START/STOP. KEY START
can be used in various situations. The most common use is as follows:
ARRANGE
MEMORY
○
5
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active.
With Ending, KEY START turns off.
If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.
○
○
1. Make sure that ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
MEMORY are off.
5. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the accompaniment.
○
○
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MEMORY
○
○
○
START / STOP
The accompaniment starts playing again. If
you release the keys, this time the arrangement continues to play. The Arrange Memory
function memorises the last chord played.
○
○
2. When the Style is not playing, press KEY START.
4. Press the Arrange Memory button (LED on) and
play another chord with your left hand.
○
○
The accompaniment starts playing again. If
you release the keys, this time the arrangement continues to play. The Arrange Memory
function memorises the last chord played.
○
○
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MEMORY
INTRO
MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while
your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops
instantly when the notes are released. If, instead,
one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment or the drum track only will continue playing
after releasing the keys.
○
○
START / STOP
START A STYLE WITH KEY START
○
○
© Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
MEMORY are off, the accompaniment plays while
your notes are pressed on the keyboard and stops
instantly when the notes are released. If, instead,
one of these two functions are active, the accompaniment or the drum track only will continue playing
after releasing the keys.
○
○
The KEY START LED turns on.
○
○
3. Preselect the INTRO (or FILL or ENDING) to start
the Style with an Intro, and play a chord (at least
3 notes) with your left hand.
○
○
The accompaniment starts immediately
(eventually preceded by the introductory pattern if selected). If you release the keys, the
accompaniment stops instantly.
○
○
4. Press the Arrange Memory button (LED on) and
play another chord with your left hand.
ENDING
○
KEY START
○
INTRO
○
5
○
© Note: If ARRANGE MEMORY or LOWER
○
5. Press START/STOP or ENDING to stop the accompaniment.
START / STOP
1/2
○
With Start/Stop, KEY START remains active.
With Ending, KEY START turns off.
If you use Start/Stop to stop the accompaniment, press KEY START to turn it off.
The Key Start function synchronizes the start of
the automatic accompaniment with a note
pressed on the keyboard below the split point
without having to use START/STOP. KEY START
can be used in various situations. The most common use is as follows:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•28 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
INTRO
KEY START
START / STOP
ENDING
ENDING
User Guide 2•29
START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO
○
• With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on
the TAP TEMPO button.
○
○
○
○
START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on
the TAP TEMPO button.
FILL
The tempo is set according to the timing of the
last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically.
○
FILL
The tempo is set according to the timing of the
last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically.
TAP TEMPO
The tempo adjusts itself automatically according
to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.).
The tempo adjusts itself automatically according
to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.).
The beat is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
The beat is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE
IN/OUT
START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE
IN/OUT
TAP TEMPO
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.
Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment
is running; all the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically
stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
• Press the button before starting the accompaniment with Start/Stop.
FADE I / O
FADE I / O
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero.
Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start
the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and
reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure
(bar) cycle.
START / STOP
START / STOP
FADE I / O
START / STOP
FADE I / O
• Press the button before starting the accompaniment with Start/Stop.
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero.
Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start
the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and
reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure
(bar) cycle.
FADE I / O
The Style track volumes are instantly set to zero.
Use either START/STOP or KEY START to start
the accompaniment. After the start, the accompaniment track volumes gradually increase and
reach their programmed peak after a 2 measure
(bar) cycle.
• Press the button before starting the accompaniment with Start/Stop.
FADE I / O
Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment
is running; all the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically
stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
Press FADE IN/OUT while the accompaniment
is running; all the track volumes gradually decrease and the accompaniment automatically
stops at the end of the Fade Out cycle.
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.
During the Fade cycle, the relative LED flashes.
START AND STOP A STYLE WITH FADE
IN/OUT
The beat is tapped out with the sound of drumsticks.
The tempo adjusts itself automatically according
to the current Time Signature (4/4, 3/4, etc.).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•29
START A STYLE WITH TAP TEMPO
FILL
○
• With the Style accompaniment off, beat time on
the TAP TEMPO button.
TAP TEMPO
○
The tempo is set according to the timing of the
last two taps, the relative Tempo value is displayed and the accompaniment starts automatically.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•29
2•30 User Guide
THE FUNCTIONS OF THE STYLES
TEMPO LOCK
The Styles are governed by the following 8 functions which determine how the Styles play.
If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the tempo changes too. If
the function is on, the tempo will not change.
ARRANGE
MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing,
making simple one-note melodies sound as if they
are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is
associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit
this function. For more information on the Harmony types available, see «Edit Tracks» in the
Reference Guide.
MIXER LOCK
This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED
off) the current Harmony Type selected in the
HARMONY function of the «Edit Tracks» environment.
○
○
○
○
○
If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the
auto accompaniment of the current Style plays
around the lowest note of the current chord. If
you play a different inversion of the same chord,
the lowest note also changes resulting in a different bass note being played.
If off, the bass will follow the original programmed
pattern of the Style.
If off, the bass will follow the original programmed
pattern of the Style.
Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the
otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playing different chord inversions.
HARMONY ON/OFF
When this button is on, all the accompaniment
parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you
will only hear the Drum track when you press
Start/Stop to start the Style.
This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED
off) the current Harmony Type selected in the
HARMONY function of the «Edit Tracks» environment.
ARRANGE ON/OFF
BASS TO LOWEST
A Performance also memorizes the track volumes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a
Performance is selected the track volumes
change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks
assigned to the keyboard will change while the
accompaniment track volumes will not.
Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing,
making simple one-note melodies sound as if they
are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is
associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit
this function. For more information on the Harmony types available, see «Edit Tracks» in the
Reference Guide.
MIXER
LOCK
BASS TO
LOWEST
HARMONY
ON / OFF
ARRANGE MODE
ARRANGE MEMORY
If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the
auto accompaniment of the current Style plays
around the lowest note of the current chord. If
you play a different inversion of the same chord,
the lowest note also changes resulting in a different bass note being played.
In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even
when you have taken your hand off the keys.
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from
the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand
causes the accompaniment to stop.
The Lower Memory function is useful for holding
on ‘background’ sounds without having to use a
Damper pedal (which may be of more use with
the upper sounds).
LOWER MEMORY
Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the
otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playing different chord inversions.
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the
left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are
held even if the left hand is taken away from the
keys.
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
ARRANGE
MEMORY
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MODE
If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the tempo changes too. If
the function is on, the tempo will not change.
The Styles are governed by the following 8 functions which determine how the Styles play.
TEMPO LOCK
THE FUNCTIONS OF THE STYLES
○
○
○
○
○
2•30 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
THE FUNCTIONS OF THE STYLES
TEMPO LOCK
The Styles are governed by the following 8 functions which determine how the Styles play.
If TEMPO LOCK is off, when a Style or a Performance is selected the tempo changes too. If
the function is on, the tempo will not change.
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MODE
MIXER LOCK
BASS TO
LOWEST
MIXER
LOCK
TEMPO
LOCK
A Performance also memorizes the track volumes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a
Performance is selected the track volumes
change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks
assigned to the keyboard will change while the
accompaniment track volumes will not.
HARMONY
ON / OFF
ARRANGE ON/OFF
When this button is on, all the accompaniment
parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you
will only hear the Drum track when you press
Start/Stop to start the Style.
ARRANGE MEMORY
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from
the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand
causes the accompaniment to stop.
LOWER MEMORY
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the
left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are
held even if the left hand is taken away from the
keys.
The Lower Memory function is useful for holding
on ‘background’ sounds without having to use a
Damper pedal (which may be of more use with
the upper sounds).
In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even
when you have taken your hand off the keys.
ARRANGE MODE
MIXER LOCK
Pressing this button gains access to the chord
recognition modes for the accompaniments.
Refer to the “Arrange mode” paragraph on page
2.33 for more information.
○
○
BASS TO LOWEST
HARMONY ON/OFF
LOWER MEMORY
○
○
If this is on, the notes of the track assigned to the
left hand (Upper&Lower and Multi modes) are
held even if the left hand is taken away from the
keys.
When this button is on, the accompaniment continues to play after releasing the left hand from
the keyboard. When off, releasing your left hand
causes the accompaniment to stop.
○
○
The Lower Memory function is useful for holding
on ‘background’ sounds without having to use a
Damper pedal (which may be of more use with
the upper sounds).
ARRANGE MEMORY
○
○
In the Upper&Lower and Multi modes, the function is used to keep the Drum part playing even
when you have taken your hand off the keys.
When this button is on, all the accompaniment
parts of a Style are enabled. If it is not on, you
will only hear the Drum track when you press
Start/Stop to start the Style.
○
○
A Performance also memorizes the track volumes. If MIXER LOCK is off, when a Style or a
Performance is selected the track volumes
change too. If it is on, all the volumes of the tracks
assigned to the keyboard will change while the
accompaniment track volumes will not.
HARMONY
ON / OFF
ARRANGE ON/OFF
○
○
ARRANGE MODE
BASS TO
LOWEST
MIXER
LOCK
TEMPO
LOCK
○
TEMPO
LOCK
LOWER
MEMORY
ARRANGE
MEMORY
○
Pressing this button gains access to the chord
recognition modes for the accompaniments.
Refer to the “Arrange mode” paragraph on page
2.33 for more information.
ARRANGE
ON / OFF
○
Pressing this button gains access to the chord
recognition modes for the accompaniments.
Refer to the “Arrange mode” paragraph on page
2.33 for more information.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•30 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
BASS TO LOWEST
If BASS TO LOWEST is on, the bass part of the
auto accompaniment of the current Style plays
around the lowest note of the current chord. If
you play a different inversion of the same chord,
the lowest note also changes resulting in a different bass note being played.
If off, the bass will follow the original programmed
pattern of the Style.
Bass To Lowest permits real time changes to the
otherwise fixed bass pattern of a Style, by playing different chord inversions.
HARMONY ON/OFF
This button enables (LED on) or disables (LED
off) the current Harmony Type selected in the
HARMONY function of the «Edit Tracks» environment.
Harmony can orchestrate your Style playing,
making simple one-note melodies sound as if they
are being played by a full orchestra. Harmony is
associated to Styles only. Songs cannot exploit
this function. For more information on the Harmony types available, see «Edit Tracks» in the
Reference Guide.
User Guide 2•31
SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE
○
○
○
○
○
SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
When Single Touch Play is on, each WK6/8 Style
is associated to 8 Style Performances which you
can assign at any time before or during play. The
Style Performances are permanent and cannot
be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore
command.
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
1
A
4
A Style Performance be programmed to change
the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns
of the current Style remain unchanged.
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
FUNK
DANC
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATI
1
A Style Performance be programmed to change
the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns
of the current Style remain unchanged.
STYLE GROU
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
Buttons C/D for E.Guitar in this example.
If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting
a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on).
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the keyboard sounds recalled by the
selected Style Performance.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the
selection display.
When Single Touch Play is on, each WK6/8 Style
is associated to 8 Style Performances which you
can assign at any time before or during play. The
Style Performances are permanent and cannot
be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore
command.
○
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
STYLE GROU
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
FUNK
DANC
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
TRAD. 2
LATI
4. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
Here’s how to assign a different Style Performance to the current Style.
Here’s how to assign a different Style Performance to the current Style.
8 Style Performance names associated to the
current Style are displayed.
5
6
7
8
STYLE P.
D
E
H
G
F
H
E
D
C
3
STYLE P.
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
8
7
6
5
4
STYLE P.
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY and press a Style button
in the STYLE GROUPS.
B
A
8
7
6
5
H
3. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the
Style Performances.
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
4
F
G
2. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group
with the corresponding soft buttons.
3
D
E
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds for the
Style selected.
F
G
3. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the
Style Performances.
B
C
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds for the
Style selected.
C
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the recalled keyboard sounds for the
Style selected.
A
2. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group
with the corresponding soft buttons.
PERFORMANCE GROUPS
2. Select a Style from bank 1 or 2 of the Style Group
with the corresponding soft buttons.
4
B
3
A
2
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY and press a Style button
in the STYLE GROUPS.
3. Press the STYLE P. button to gain access to the
Style Performances.
2
1. Press SINGLE TCH. PLAY and press a Style button
in the STYLE GROUPS.
2
8 Style Performance names associated to the
current Style are displayed.
8 Style Performance names associated to the
current Style are displayed.
4. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
4. Select a Style Performance with the corresponding paired soft buttons.
Buttons C/D for E.Guitar in this example.
If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting
a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on).
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the keyboard sounds recalled by the
selected Style Performance.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the
selection display.
Buttons C/D for E.Guitar in this example.
If Single Touch Play is off (LED off), selecting
a Style Performance activates the button automatically (LED on).
The display returns to Style/RealTime mode
showing the keyboard sounds recalled by the
selected Style Performance.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for other Style Performance selections. Use D.HOLD to lock the
selection display.
Here’s how to assign a different Style Performance to the current Style.
DANC
STYLE GROU
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•31
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SELECT A STYLE PERFORMANCE
FUNK
H
4
When Single Touch Play is on, each WK6/8 Style
is associated to 8 Style Performances which you
can assign at any time before or during play. The
Style Performances are permanent and cannot
be destroyed. They are, however, rewritable (keyboard and accompaniment sounds). Their default settings can be restored with the Restore
command.
ROCK
16. BEAT
8. BEAT
LATI
F
G
○
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
TRAD. 2
D
E
○
TRAD. 1
C
○
US. TRAD
B
○
JAZZ
A
○
A Style Performance be programmed to change
the keyboard sounds as well as the accompaniment sounds, but the accompaniment patterns
of the current Style remain unchanged.
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•31
2•32 User Guide
SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING
THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS
○
If you want to change Style while playing without
changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style
with Single Touch Play off:
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING
THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS
If you want to change Style while playing without
changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style
with Single Touch Play off:
1. While playing with a Style, turn off SINGLE TCH
PLAY.
1. While playing with a Style, turn off SINGLE TCH
PLAY.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the accompaniment patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds
remain unchanged.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the accompaniment patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds
remain unchanged.
2
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
F
TRACK SCROLL
A
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
If TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK are off,
the tempo and track volumes also change.
2. Press one of the buttons of the STYLE GROUPS
section and select a Style from bank 1 or 2.
T
1
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
2
2. Press one of the buttons of the STYLE GROUPS
section and select a Style from bank 1 or 2.
C
F
TRACK SCROLL
H
3
H
TRACK SCROLL
G
F
E
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
If TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK are off,
the tempo and track volumes also change.
Selecting a Style instantly changes the automatic accompaniment patterns together with
the sounds and effects of the automatic accompaniment tracks.
The sounds and effects of the live keyboard
tracks remain unchanged.
3
3. To check the change in accompaniment sounds,
press the right Track Scroll button to view the
accompaniment tracks.
3. To check the change in accompaniment sounds,
press the right Track Scroll button to view the
accompaniment tracks.
G
3. To check the change in accompaniment sounds,
press the right Track Scroll button to view the
accompaniment tracks.
D
C
B
2. Press one of the buttons of the STYLE GROUPS
section and select a Style from bank 1 or 2.
When SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, selecting a Style changes the accompaniment patterns, the sounds and effects of the accompaniment tracks only - the keyboard sounds
remain unchanged.
A
JAZZ
US. TRAD
T
TRAD. 1
2
16. BEAT
8. BEAT
F
ROCK
SINGLE
TCH. PLAY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•32 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECT A STYLE WITHOUT CHANGING
THE KEYBOARD SOUNDS
1
○
If you want to change Style while playing without
changing the keyboard sounds, select the Style
with Single Touch Play off:
○
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
T
D
E
F
G
H
3
TRACK SCROLL
TRACK SCROLL
1. While playing with a Style, turn off SINGLE TCH
PLAY.
○
JAZZ
F
C
Press the left Track Scroll button to return to
the keyboard sounds.
If TEMPO LOCK and MIXER LOCK are off,
the tempo and track volumes also change.
TRACK SCROLL
○
ROCK
B
Selecting a Style instantly changes the automatic accompaniment patterns together with
the sounds and effects of the automatic accompaniment tracks.
The sounds and effects of the live keyboard
tracks remain unchanged.
D
E
16. BEAT
A
B
Selecting a Style instantly changes the automatic accompaniment patterns together with
the sounds and effects of the automatic accompaniment tracks.
The sounds and effects of the live keyboard
tracks remain unchanged.
8. BEAT
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•32 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•33
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
About the Chord Recognition modes
The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various
different ways according to how many notes are
pressed and where on the keyboard (above or
below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with
a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns.
The chord recognition modes available are:
• One finger - A single note played below the
Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord.
A minor chord requires the root note and the
minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord
requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a
Bb either above or below C).
Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for
full chord recognition. With less than three
notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes
played are considered ‘stray’.
Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be
played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the
arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a
‘partial’ accompaniment.
Free 1 - A three note chord is recognized
anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the
Split Point. Less then three notes does not
affect the chord recognition mechanism.
Free 1 recognizes up to 4 chord notes.
Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recognized.
The option selected can be stored to the Performances.
•
•
•
•
About Dynamic Arrange
When Dynamic Arrange is active, the volume of
the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord
notes. Increased chord note velocity increases
the volume of the accompaniments.
When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain
unchanged with changes in chord note velocity.
About Autobacking
When Autobacking is on, a quick change of chord
updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern
instantly without “breaks” in the pattern.
When off, a change of chord does not update
instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.
The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to
several options associated to the Styles: the
“Auto” or “Fixed” Chord modes, the Style Chord
Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and
Autobacking.
•
•
About Autobacking
When Autobacking is on, a quick change of chord
updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern
instantly without “breaks” in the pattern.
When off, a change of chord does not update
instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.
About the Auto and Fixed Chord modes
Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to
change automatically according to the change in
the keyboard mode.
• “Auto Chord Mode”, active by default, allows
changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full
Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that
the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change
along with the Performance.
• “Fixed Chord Mode” allows you to set a
chord recognition mode which does change
with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes).
The option selected remains memorized after power down.
•
About Dynamic Arrange
When Dynamic Arrange is active, the volume of
the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord
notes. Increased chord note velocity increases
the volume of the accompaniments.
When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain
unchanged with changes in chord note velocity.
The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to
several options associated to the Styles: the
“Auto” or “Fixed” Chord modes, the Style Chord
Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and
Autobacking.
•
•
○
A minor chord requires the root note and the
minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord
requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a
Bb either above or below C).
Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for
full chord recognition. With less than three
notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes
played are considered ‘stray’.
Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be
played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the
arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a
‘partial’ accompaniment.
Free 1 - A three note chord is recognized
anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the
Split Point. Less then three notes does not
affect the chord recognition mechanism.
Free 1 recognizes up to 4 chord notes.
Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recognized.
The option selected can be stored to the Performances.
•
○
About the Auto and Fixed Chord modes
Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to
change automatically according to the change in
the keyboard mode.
• “Auto Chord Mode”, active by default, allows
changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full
Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that
the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change
along with the Performance.
• “Fixed Chord Mode” allows you to set a
chord recognition mode which does change
with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes).
The option selected remains memorized after power down.
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes
About the Chord Recognition modes
The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various
different ways according to how many notes are
pressed and where on the keyboard (above or
below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with
a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns.
The chord recognition modes available are:
• One finger - A single note played below the
Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord.
•
○
About Dynamic Arrange
When Dynamic Arrange is active, the volume of
the Style Auto accompaniments can be controlled according to the velocity applied to the chord
notes. Increased chord note velocity increases
the volume of the accompaniments.
When Off, the accompaniment volumes remain
unchanged with changes in chord note velocity.
About the Auto and Fixed Chord modes
Chord recognition can be set to remain fixed regardless of the keyboard mode setting, or to
change automatically according to the change in
the keyboard mode.
• “Auto Chord Mode”, active by default, allows
changes of the chord recognition mode according to the selected keyboard mode (Full
Keyboard, Upper&Lower or Multi). Given that
the keyboard mode is memorized in a Performance, the chord recognition can change
along with the Performance.
• “Fixed Chord Mode” allows you to set a
chord recognition mode which does change
with changes in the keyboard mode (and consequently any Performance changes).
The option selected remains memorized after power down.
○
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes
A minor chord requires the root note and the
minor third (e.g. C and Eb). A seventh chord
requires the root and seventh (e.g. C with a
Bb either above or below C).
Fingered 1 - Needs at least three notes for
full chord recognition. With less than three
notes, the chord is not recognized - the notes
played are considered ‘stray’.
Fingered 2 - At least three notes must be
played to obtain the fully programmed pattern. If less than three notes are played, the
arranger recognizes the chord but triggers a
‘partial’ accompaniment.
Free 1 - A three note chord is recognized
anywhere along the keyboard, overriding the
Split Point. Less then three notes does not
affect the chord recognition mechanism.
Free 1 recognizes up to 4 chord notes.
Free 2 - As above. Up to 6 notes are recognized.
The option selected can be stored to the Performances.
•
○
About the Chord Recognition modes
The Chord Recognition modes generate the automatic accompaniments of the Styles in various
different ways according to how many notes are
pressed and where on the keyboard (above or
below the split point). The programmed accompaniment patterns are always fully generated with
a fully recognised chord. Major, minor and seventh chords each can generate completely different accompaniment patterns.
The chord recognition modes available are:
• One finger - A single note played below the
Split Point is interpreted as the root of a major chord.
The ARRANGE MODE button gains access to
several options associated to the Styles: the
“Auto” or “Fixed” Chord modes, the Style Chord
Recognition modes, Dynamic Arrange and
Autobacking.
○
About Autobacking
When Autobacking is on, a quick change of chord
updates the Style auto accompaniment pattern
instantly without “breaks” in the pattern.
When off, a change of chord does not update
instantly but waits for the next note of the accompaniment before revising the pattern.
10 • Arrange Mode and the chord recognition modes
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•33
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•33
2•34 User Guide
SELECTING THE ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS
○
○
○
○
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ARRANGE
MODE
1. Press the ARRANGE MODE button to gain access
to the «Arrange Mode» environment.
SELECTING THE ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS
ARRANGE
MODE
1. Press the ARRANGE MODE button to gain access
to the «Arrange Mode» environment.
ESCAPE
OR
The page shows the parameters of either
«Auto Chord Mode» or «Fixed Chord Mode»,
depending on the option currently selected.
○
ARRANGE
MODE
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
2. Use the Soft buttons to select one of the two Chord
Mode options.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: In order for the chord to be recognized
(and the relative symbol to be shown on the
display) Arrange On/Off must be on.
2
4
The page shows the parameters of either
«Auto Chord Mode» or «Fixed Chord Mode»,
depending on the option currently selected.
1
F1
• Fixed Chord Mode - the display shows a
single list of recognition modes.
• Auto Chord Mode - the display divides into
two parts. The left part shows the options for
Upper&Lower and Multi, while the right shows
those for Full Keyboard.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. Use the Soft buttons to select one of the two Chord
Mode options.
• Fixed Chord Mode - the display shows a
single list of recognition modes.
• Auto Chord Mode - the display divides into
two parts. The left part shows the options for
Upper&Lower and Multi, while the right shows
those for Full Keyboard.
© Note: The symbols of the recognized chord
appear on the main Style display screen. If the
chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is shown
as the lowest note played followed by several
asterisks. For example: «C***** ».
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F1
F2
F3
○
2
○
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F1
4. Exit «Arrange Mode» by pressing either ARRANGE
MODE or ESCAPE.
3
3. Select the preferred chord recognition mode with
the cursor buttons.
F2
F3
F4
F1
3. Select the preferred chord recognition mode with
the cursor buttons.
F2
F3
F4
F5
F5
If the display is divided into two parts, use
the / cursor buttons to pass from left to right
and vice versa.
Use the / buttons to select the chord recognition options.
If the display is divided into two parts, use
the / cursor buttons to pass from left to right
and vice versa.
Use the / buttons to select the chord recognition options.
If the display is divided into two parts, use
the / cursor buttons to pass from left to right
and vice versa.
Use the / buttons to select the chord recognition options.
F6
F7
F8
F6
F7
F8
F8
F7
F6
F5
3
3. Select the preferred chord recognition mode with
the cursor buttons.
F4
4. Exit «Arrange Mode» by pressing either ARRANGE
MODE or ESCAPE.
4. Exit «Arrange Mode» by pressing either ARRANGE
MODE or ESCAPE.
3
F3
F2
F1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: The symbols of the recognized chord
appear on the main Style display screen. If the
chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is shown
as the lowest note played followed by several
asterisks. For example: «C***** ».
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F3
Note: In order for the chord to be recognized
(and the relative symbol to be shown on the
display) Arrange On/Off must be on.
F1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: The symbols of the recognized chord
appear on the main Style display screen. If the
chord is not recognized, the chord symbol is shown
as the lowest note played followed by several
asterisks. For example: «C***** ».
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
2. Use the Soft buttons to select one of the two Chord
Mode options.
F2
©
○
©
Note: In order for the chord to be recognized
(and the relative symbol to be shown on the
display) Arrange On/Off must be on.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The page shows the parameters of either
«Auto Chord Mode» or «Fixed Chord Mode»,
depending on the option currently selected.
○
• Fixed Chord Mode - the display shows a
single list of recognition modes.
• Auto Chord Mode - the display divides into
two parts. The left part shows the options for
Upper&Lower and Multi, while the right shows
those for Full Keyboard.
○
©
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ARRANGE
MODE
OR
1. Press the ARRANGE MODE button to gain access
to the «Arrange Mode» environment.
1
ARRANGE
MODE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•34 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING THE ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS
○
ENTER
ARRANGE
MODE
OR
ESCAPE
○
4
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•34 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 2•35
CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT
○
The Split Point is:
(a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower
keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and
Multi keyboard modes and,
(b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic
accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes).
○
○
○
○
○
CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Split Point is:
(a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower
keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and
Multi keyboard modes and,
(b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic
accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes).
ESCAPE
○
○
3
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
The current Split Point setting appears in the main
page as an option that can be selected with the
paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be
modified as required.
The current Split Point setting appears in the main
page as an option that can be selected with the
paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be
modified as required.
1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing,
press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the «Split Point»
dialog window.
1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing,
press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the «Split Point»
dialog window.
○
○
○
OR
2
2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard
(corresponding to the highest note of the Lower
split zone) to modify the setting.
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog
window. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog
window. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
○
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F7
F8
TEMPO / DATA
OR
○
○
○
Note: The Split Point is a general parameter
(not linked to a particular Performance) which is
conserved in memory when the instrument is
turned off. The new setting is lost when the “Reset
All” operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM
loses its data due to the total discharge of the
battery.
1
○
○
©
Note: The Split Point is a general parameter
(not linked to a particular Performance) which is
conserved in memory when the instrument is
turned off. The new setting is lost when the “Reset
All” operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM
loses its data due to the total discharge of the
battery.
○
○
If you press ENTER, the main page will show
the new Split Point setting.
If you press ESCAPE the original Split Point
will be restored.
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•35
○
CHANGING THE SPLIT POINT
○
○
The Split Point is:
(a) the point that separates the Upper and Lower
keyboard sections in the Upper&Lower and
Multi keyboard modes and,
(b) the point below which the keyboard recognizes chords which trigger the Style automatic
accompaniments (in Fingered and One Finger chord recognition modes).
○
○
The current Split Point setting appears in the main
page as an option that can be selected with the
paired soft buttons F7/F8. The setting can be
modified as required.
OR
F7
○
○
1
3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
TEMPO / DATA
F8
○
○
1. With the main Style/RealTime display showing,
press Soft buttons F7/F8 to open the «Split Point»
dialog window.
○
○
2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard
(corresponding to the highest note of the Lower
split zone) to modify the setting.
2
If you press ENTER, the main page will show
the new Split Point setting.
If you press ESCAPE the original Split Point
will be restored.
○
○
The new Split Point is shown in the dialog
window. If you entered the wrong note, simply play another.
3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
○
○
3. Press ENTER to confirm the new Split Point, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
2. Rotate the DIAL, or play a note on the keyboard
(corresponding to the highest note of the Lower
split zone) to modify the setting.
○
○
If you press ENTER, the main page will show
the new Split Point setting.
If you press ESCAPE the original Split Point
will be restored.
F7
F8
○
© Note: The Split Point is a general parameter
(not linked to a particular Performance) which is
conserved in memory when the instrument is
turned off. The new setting is lost when the “Reset
All” operation is carried out or if the backed-RAM
loses its data due to the total discharge of the
battery.
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•35
2•36 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
WK6/8 allows you to route the Performances (RealTime, Style and Song) to the on-board multi-effects
processor to enrich the sounds with Reverb and Modulation effects. The DSP consists of four real time
controlled units which process the Performances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb
channels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & B) are available.
In Style/RealTime mode, channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B for the
accompaniment tracks. Each track can be processed by two effects. When a Style is selected with the
SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects assigned to the accompaniment tracks will change
(Group B). When a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the
keyboard will change (Group A).
In Song mode, each track can be independently processed by either A or B channel effects.
Access to the DSPs is via the EFFECTS button in the Edit section. Press the EFFECTS button and (if
necessary) press ENTER to access the Effects editor to open the main Edit Effect page showing the
Effect Type function currently selected. The status of the parameters on this page depends on the
current mode (Style/RealTime or Song).
ESCAPE
OR
2
The Effect Type page shows the effects and
relative Effect Volume levels assigned to the
current Performance.
ENTER
TEMPO / DA
2. With the Effect editor selected, press ENTER or
the right PAGE SCROLL button to access the Effect Type page.
The first time you enter, the Edit Effect Menu
appears with the “Effect” editor selected
(other editors may or may not be available
depending on the configuration of your instrument).
1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section.
CHANGE THE EFFECT ASSIGNED TO A
PERFORMANCE
1
1
EFFECTS
1
CHANGE THE EFFECT ASSIGNED TO A
PERFORMANCE
EFFECTS
1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section.
1
WK6/8 allows you to route the Performances (RealTime, Style and Song) to the on-board multi-effects
processor to enrich the sounds with Reverb and Modulation effects. The DSP consists of four real time
controlled units which process the Performances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb
channels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & B) are available.
In Style/RealTime mode, channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B for the
accompaniment tracks. Each track can be processed by two effects. When a Style is selected with the
SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects assigned to the accompaniment tracks will change
(Group B). When a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the
keyboard will change (Group A).
In Song mode, each track can be independently processed by either A or B channel effects.
Access to the DSPs is via the EFFECTS button in the Edit section. Press the EFFECTS button and (if
necessary) press ENTER to access the Effects editor to open the main Edit Effect page showing the
Effect Type function currently selected. The status of the parameters on this page depends on the
current mode (Style/RealTime or Song).
CHANGE THE EFFECT ASSIGNED TO A
PERFORMANCE
1
The first time you enter, the Edit Effect Menu
appears with the “Effect” editor selected
(other editors may or may not be available
depending on the configuration of your instrument).
2. With the Effect editor selected, press ENTER or
the right PAGE SCROLL button to access the Effect Type page.
2. With the Effect editor selected, press ENTER or
the right PAGE SCROLL button to access the Effect Type page.
The Effect Type page shows the effects and
relative Effect Volume levels assigned to the
current Performance.
The Effect Type page shows the effects and
relative Effect Volume levels assigned to the
current Performance.
WK6/8 allows you to route the Performances (RealTime, Style and Song) to the on-board multi-effects
processor to enrich the sounds with Reverb and Modulation effects. The DSP consists of four real time
controlled units which process the Performances with Reverbs and Delay/Modulation effects: two Reverb
channels (A & B) and two Modulation channels (A & B) are available.
In Style/RealTime mode, channel A effects are reserved for the keyboard tracks and channel B for the
accompaniment tracks. Each track can be processed by two effects. When a Style is selected with the
SINGLE TOUCH PLAY button off, only the effects assigned to the accompaniment tracks will change
(Group B). When a Performance is selected with STYLE LOCK on, only the effects assigned to the
keyboard will change (Group A).
In Song mode, each track can be independently processed by either A or B channel effects.
Access to the DSPs is via the EFFECTS button in the Edit section. Press the EFFECTS button and (if
necessary) press ENTER to access the Effects editor to open the main Edit Effect page showing the
Effect Type function currently selected. The status of the parameters on this page depends on the
current mode (Style/RealTime or Song).
ENTER
EFFECTS
1. Press the EFFECTS button in the EDIT section.
The first time you enter, the Edit Effect Menu
appears with the “Effect” editor selected
(other editors may or may not be available
depending on the configuration of your instrument).
2
1
TEMPO / DA
2
ENTER
OR
OR
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•36 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
11 • The Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
○
TEMPO / DA
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•36 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•37
3. Select the effect processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and
Group (A or B)
○
3
○
○
○
○
○
3. Select the effect processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and
Group (A or B)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown
selected in the right column, press the Soft
button F1 to activate the correct page.
Use the / cursor buttons to select the
processors (Eff1 - Reverbs, or Eff2 - Modulations). The current effect type selected
appears in negative highlight.
If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown
selected in the right column, press the Soft
button F1 to activate the correct page.
Use the / cursor buttons to select the
processors (Eff1 - Reverbs, or Eff2 - Modulations). The current effect type selected
appears in negative highlight.
4. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type
from the selected processor (Eff1 or Eff 2).
4. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type
from the selected processor (Eff1 or Eff 2).
The DIAL scrolls through the available effects
of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP (Eff1)
provides a selection of 24 effects. The Modulation DSP (Eff2) provides a selection of 32
effects.
The DIAL scrolls through the available effects
of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP (Eff1)
provides a selection of 24 effects. The Modulation DSP (Eff2) provides a selection of 32
effects.
The changes heard when you modify this
parameter will depend on the current effect
types selected in both processors.
Repeat the operations 3, 4 and 5 for the
Group B parameters (accompaniment tracks)
if required.
The changes made remain in memory until a
new Performance or the same one is selected, or until the instrument is turned off.
To save the changes to the Performance, use
the STORE PERFORMANCE command,
explained on page 2.39.
5. Select the Vol parameter with the arrow button and regulate the general Volume level of
the Effect for the Performance.
5. Select the Vol parameter with the arrow button and regulate the general Volume level of
the Effect for the Performance.
Use the Dial to enter a value for the selected
Vol parameter. Repeat the operation for the
other Vol parameter is necessary.
Use the Dial to enter a value for the selected
Vol parameter. Repeat the operation for the
other Vol parameter is necessary.
5
6. Select the Effect 2 to Effect 1 parameter with the
cursor button and rotate the Dial to change
the quantity of feedback of the Eff2 signal into
Eff1.
The DIAL scrolls through the available effects
of the selected DSP. The Reverb DSP (Eff1)
provides a selection of 24 effects. The Modulation DSP (Eff2) provides a selection of 32
effects.
4
The changes heard when you modify this
parameter will depend on the current effect
types selected in both processors.
Repeat the operations 3, 4 and 5 for the
Group B parameters (accompaniment tracks)
if required.
The changes made remain in memory until a
new Performance or the same one is selected, or until the instrument is turned off.
To save the changes to the Performance, use
the STORE PERFORMANCE command,
explained on page 2.39.
5
5. Select the Vol parameter with the arrow button and regulate the general Volume level of
the Effect for the Performance.
6. Select the Effect 2 to Effect 1 parameter with the
cursor button and rotate the Dial to change
the quantity of feedback of the Eff2 signal into
Eff1.
Use the Dial to enter a value for the selected
Vol parameter. Repeat the operation for the
other Vol parameter is necessary.
5
4
6. Select the Effect 2 to Effect 1 parameter with the
cursor button and rotate the Dial to change
the quantity of feedback of the Eff2 signal into
Eff1.
6
4
3
The changes heard when you modify this
parameter will depend on the current effect
types selected in both processors.
Repeat the operations 3, 4 and 5 for the
Group B parameters (accompaniment tracks)
if required.
The changes made remain in memory until a
new Performance or the same one is selected, or until the instrument is turned off.
To save the changes to the Performance, use
the STORE PERFORMANCE command,
explained on page 2.39.
6
6
4. Rotate the DIAL to select a different effect type
from the selected processor (Eff1 or Eff 2).
If the EFFECT TYPE function is not shown
selected in the right column, press the Soft
button F1 to activate the correct page.
Use the / cursor buttons to select the
processors (Eff1 - Reverbs, or Eff2 - Modulations). The current effect type selected
appears in negative highlight.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•37
3
○
3. Select the effect processor (Eff1 or Eff2) and
Group (A or B)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•37
2•38 User Guide
PLAY WITH EFFECTS OR BYPASS THEM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY WITH EFFECTS OR BYPASS THEM
You can temporarily modify the way in which a
Performance is processed with the on-board effect processor by changing the On/Off setting of
the Effects Bypass button.
You can temporarily modify the way in which a
Performance is processed with the on-board effect processor by changing the On/Off setting of
the Effects Bypass button.
When the LED is off, the current Performance is
processed by the effects; when on, the effects
are bypassed.
When the LED is off, the current Performance is
processed by the effects; when on, the effects
are bypassed.
Bypass
Bypass
1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS BYPASS
button.
1
EFFECTS
BYPASS
1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS BYPASS
button.
EFFECTS
BYPASS
The LED of the button turns on, indicating
that the current Performance is no longer
processed by the Effects.
2
To activate the effects
EFFECTS
BYPASS
EFFECTS
BYPASS
The LED of the button goes off to indicate
that the current Performance is processed by
the Effects.
The LED of the button goes off to indicate
that the current Performance is processed by
the Effects.
The LED of the button goes off to indicate
that the current Performance is processed by
the Effects.
EFFECTS
BYPASS
2
EFFECTS
BYPASS
The LED of the button turns on, indicating
that the current Performance is no longer
processed by the Effects.
1. To bypass the effects, press the EFFECTS BYPASS
button.
EFFECTS
BYPASS
1
EFFECTS
BYPASS
Bypass
When the LED is off, the current Performance is
processed by the effects; when on, the effects
are bypassed.
You can temporarily modify the way in which a
Performance is processed with the on-board effect processor by changing the On/Off setting of
the Effects Bypass button.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•38 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY WITH EFFECTS OR BYPASS THEM
○
EFFECTS
BYPASS
2
2. Press the active EFFECTS BYPASS button.
To activate the effects
2. Press the active EFFECTS BYPASS button.
EFFECTS
BYPASS
The LED of the button turns on, indicating
that the current Performance is no longer
processed by the Effects.
2. Press the active EFFECTS BYPASS button.
To activate the effects
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•38 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
EFFECTS
BYPASS
EFFECTS
BYPASS
User Guide 2•39
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
12 • Store Performance
ESCAPE
12 • Store Performance
○
With ENTER, the new settings are memorised to the current Performance.
Each time this Performance is recalled, WK6/
8 will be configured with precisely the same
settings as those memorised.
○
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a RealTime Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance.
The changes made to a RealTime Performance or Style Performance are interchangeable, that is, you
can save a modified RealTime Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song
Performance can be saved to the Song Performances only. In all cases you can create a completely
new Performance and change its name.
The temporary status of an unsaved Performance is lost if you select a different Performance or the
same one again, or if you select a Style or Song. Changes to a Song Performance are also lost if you
press START/STOP or PLAY.
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a RealTime Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance.
The changes made to a RealTime Performance or Style Performance are interchangeable, that is, you
can save a modified RealTime Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song
Performance can be saved to the Song Performances only. In all cases you can create a completely
new Performance and change its name.
The temporary status of an unsaved Performance is lost if you select a different Performance or the
same one again, or if you select a Style or Song. Changes to a Song Performance are also lost if you
press START/STOP or PLAY.
Saving to the power-up Performance
WK6/8 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to
play in Full Keyboard mode. This Performance corresponds to the first Performance location of Group
button 1 of the Performance Groups. The factory-programmed status of the power-up Performance can
be modified in order that WK6/8 powers-up according to a preferred setting.
Whatever modifications you make (sound, keyboard mode, effect, track volume, Style tempo, etc.) and
save to the GrandPiano Performance are retained after power down. You can restore the original
(factory-set) status of the Performance Groups using the Restore Perfs function in «Edit General».
Saving to the power-up Performance
WK6/8 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to
play in Full Keyboard mode. This Performance corresponds to the first Performance location of Group
button 1 of the Performance Groups. The factory-programmed status of the power-up Performance can
be modified in order that WK6/8 powers-up according to a preferred setting.
Whatever modifications you make (sound, keyboard mode, effect, track volume, Style tempo, etc.) and
save to the GrandPiano Performance are retained after power down. You can restore the original
(factory-set) status of the Performance Groups using the Restore Perfs function in «Edit General».
SAVE TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE
SAVE TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
The type of Performance proposed by WK6/
8 depends on the status of the SINGLE
TOUCH PLAY button - if active a Style-Performance is suggested, if not a Performance
is proposed.
To save changes to the current Performance
(RealTime or Style), there is no need to make
any changes to the display situation because
it represents the current Performance.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Store
Performance» dialog window.
SAVE TO THE CURRENT PERFORMANCE
1
STORE
PERF.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Store
Performance» dialog window.
2
STORE
PERF.
2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE
to cancel.
1
1
STORE
PERF.
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Store
Performance» dialog window.
Saving to the power-up Performance
WK6/8 powers up in Style/RealTime mode with the GrandPiano Performance selected and ready to
play in Full Keyboard mode. This Performance corresponds to the first Performance location of Group
button 1 of the Performance Groups. The factory-programmed status of the power-up Performance can
be modified in order that WK6/8 powers-up according to a preferred setting.
Whatever modifications you make (sound, keyboard mode, effect, track volume, Style tempo, etc.) and
save to the GrandPiano Performance are retained after power down. You can restore the original
(factory-set) status of the Performance Groups using the Restore Perfs function in «Edit General».
The type of Performance proposed by WK6/
8 depends on the status of the SINGLE
TOUCH PLAY button - if active a Style-Performance is suggested, if not a Performance
is proposed.
To save changes to the current Performance
(RealTime or Style), there is no need to make
any changes to the display situation because
it represents the current Performance.
The type of Performance proposed by WK6/
8 depends on the status of the SINGLE
TOUCH PLAY button - if active a Style-Performance is suggested, if not a Performance
is proposed.
To save changes to the current Performance
(RealTime or Style), there is no need to make
any changes to the display situation because
it represents the current Performance.
With ENTER, the new settings are memorised to the current Performance.
Each time this Performance is recalled, WK6/
8 will be configured with precisely the same
settings as those memorised.
ENTER
2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE
to cancel.
TEMPO / DATA
With ENTER, the new settings are memorised to the current Performance.
Each time this Performance is recalled, WK6/
8 will be configured with precisely the same
settings as those memorised.
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•39
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
12 • Store Performance
2
Use the STORE PERFORMANCE command to save any changes you make to a RealTime Performance, a Style Performance or a Song Performance.
The changes made to a RealTime Performance or Style Performance are interchangeable, that is, you
can save a modified RealTime Performance to a Style Performance and vice versa. A modified Song
Performance can be saved to the Song Performances only. In all cases you can create a completely
new Performance and change its name.
The temporary status of an unsaved Performance is lost if you select a different Performance or the
same one again, or if you select a Style or Song. Changes to a Song Performance are also lost if you
press START/STOP or PLAY.
2. Press ENTER to confirm the operation, or ESCAPE
to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•39
2•40 User Guide
SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE
○
Save changes to a different Performance if you
want to retain the configuration of the original
Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Performance Store» dialog window.
A
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested is a Performance (situation
A), if SINGLE TCH PLAY is active, the destination suggested is a Style-Performance
(situation B).
SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE
Save changes to a different Performance if you
want to retain the configuration of the original
Performance.
1
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Performance Store» dialog window.
B
B
These two buttons toggle between the “Performance” and “Style” zones.
2
3
3. Select a destination Group.
3. Select a destination Group.
Rotate the Dial if you want to select a different Group (Performance or Style) in the
“Store to” zone. The Dial scrolls through all
the Performance Groups (situation A) or Style
Groups (situation B). In each case, the first
location (1) of the selected Group is proposed
as the destination in the “Perf” zone.
A
B
2
Rotate the Dial if you want to select a different Group (Performance or Style) in the
“Store to” zone. The Dial scrolls through all
the Performance Groups (situation A) or Style
Groups (situation B). In each case, the first
location (1) of the selected Group is proposed
as the destination in the “Perf” zone.
Rotate the Dial if you want to select a different Group (Performance or Style) in the
“Store to” zone. The Dial scrolls through all
the Performance Groups (situation A) or Style
Groups (situation B). In each case, the first
location (1) of the selected Group is proposed
as the destination in the “Perf” zone.
3
STORE
PERF.
2. Select the type of Performance to save to using
the / cursor arrows.
A
These two buttons toggle between the “Performance” and “Style” zones.
1
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested is a Performance (situation
A), if SINGLE TCH PLAY is active, the destination suggested is a Style-Performance
(situation B).
STORE
PERF.
TEMPO / DATA
2. Select the type of Performance to save to using
the / cursor arrows.
○
3
3. Select a destination Group.
2
These two buttons toggle between the “Performance” and “Style” zones.
A
B
B
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•40 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SAVE TO A DIFFERENT PERFORMANCE
1
○
Save changes to a different Performance if you
want to retain the configuration of the original
Performance.
A
○
B
1. Press STORE PERFORMANCE to open the «Performance Store» dialog window.
STORE
PERF.
○
TEMPO / DATA
If SINGLE TOUCH PLAY is off, the destination suggested is a Performance (situation
A), if SINGLE TCH PLAY is active, the destination suggested is a Style-Performance
(situation B).
○
2. Select the type of Performance to save to using
the / cursor arrows.
TEMPO / DATA
A
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•40 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•41
○
4A
○
○
○
○
4. Move down to the next zone with the cursor
arrow and select the destination Performance (1
- 8) with the Dial.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
TEM
ENTER
ENTER
TEM
5B
ESCAPE
5A
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
5. Press ENTER.
TEMPO / DATA
TEMPO / DATA
5B
TEM
4B
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
4A
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5A
If the destination is a RealTime Performance (A), the display returns to the modified
version of the original Performance.
If the destination is a Style Performance
(B), pressing ENTER opens a dialog window
requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same
name or change it.
Press ENTER again to confirm the new or
old Style Performance name. The display
returns to the modified version of the original
Performance. The Performance or Style Performance that you saved will be in the destination selected in point 4.
If you don’t want to save your modifications,
press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•41
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
5B
ENTER
TEM
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
4. Move down to the next zone with the cursor
arrow and select the destination Performance (1
- 8) with the Dial.
If the destination is a RealTime Performance (A), the display returns to the modified
version of the original Performance.
If the destination is a Style Performance
(B), pressing ENTER opens a dialog window
requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same
name or change it.
Press ENTER again to confirm the new or
old Style Performance name. The display
returns to the modified version of the original
Performance. The Performance or Style Performance that you saved will be in the destination selected in point 4.
If you don’t want to save your modifications,
press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
ENTER
4B
If you are saving to the RealTime Performances (A), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Performance destinations of the selected Group,
each identified by a number and name.
Empty locations have a number and no name.
The destination Performance will take the
name of the Performance being saved. To
change the name of the RealTime Performance, refer to the procedure explained on
page 1.4 of the Layout & Display chapter 1.
If you are saving to the Style Performances (B), the Dial scrolls through the 8
Styles of the selected Style Group or User
Group. As you scroll, each Style also shows
the currently associated Style Performance
in the “Perf” zone.
To select the destination Style Performance,
move down to the “Perf” zone and rotate the
Dial. A Style Perf. destination shows a name
and number, while an empty User Style destination shows a number only.
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
5A
4A
If you are saving to the RealTime Performances (A), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Performance destinations of the selected Group,
each identified by a number and name.
Empty locations have a number and no name.
The destination Performance will take the
name of the Performance being saved. To
change the name of the RealTime Performance, refer to the procedure explained on
page 1.4 of the Layout & Display chapter 1.
If you are saving to the Style Performances (B), the Dial scrolls through the 8
Styles of the selected Style Group or User
Group. As you scroll, each Style also shows
the currently associated Style Performance
in the “Perf” zone.
To select the destination Style Performance,
move down to the “Perf” zone and rotate the
Dial. A Style Perf. destination shows a name
and number, while an empty User Style destination shows a number only.
4B
5. Press ENTER.
○
5. Press ENTER.
If you are saving to the RealTime Performances (A), the Dial scrolls through the 8 Performance destinations of the selected Group,
each identified by a number and name.
Empty locations have a number and no name.
The destination Performance will take the
name of the Performance being saved. To
change the name of the RealTime Performance, refer to the procedure explained on
page 1.4 of the Layout & Display chapter 1.
If you are saving to the Style Performances (B), the Dial scrolls through the 8
Styles of the selected Style Group or User
Group. As you scroll, each Style also shows
the currently associated Style Performance
in the “Perf” zone.
To select the destination Style Performance,
move down to the “Perf” zone and rotate the
Dial. A Style Perf. destination shows a name
and number, while an empty User Style destination shows a number only.
○
If the destination is a RealTime Performance (A), the display returns to the modified
version of the original Performance.
If the destination is a Style Performance
(B), pressing ENTER opens a dialog window
requesting confirmation of the Style Performance name. You can either confirm the same
name or change it.
Press ENTER again to confirm the new or
old Style Performance name. The display
returns to the modified version of the original
Performance. The Performance or Style Performance that you saved will be in the destination selected in point 4.
If you don’t want to save your modifications,
press ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
4. Move down to the next zone with the cursor
arrow and select the destination Performance (1
- 8) with the Dial.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•41
2•42 User Guide
RESTORING THE ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
○
○
○
○
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
GENERAL
RESTORING THE ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
1
GENERAL
9
9
It is possible to cancel all modifications made to
the Performances and restore the factory settings.
You can select the type of Performance to restore (Rest.St.Perfs, Rest. Perfs, Rest. styles,
Rest. songs) or restore the default settings of all
the Performances in a single step (Restore all).
It is possible to cancel all modifications made to
the Performances and restore the factory settings.
You can select the type of Performance to restore (Rest.St.Perfs, Rest. Perfs, Rest. styles,
Rest. songs) or restore the default settings of all
the Performances in a single step (Restore all).
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
2. Press F5 («Restore Perfs») or F7 («Rest. St.Perfs»)
to cancel the changes made to the Performances
or Style-Performances.
2
2. Press F5 («Restore Perfs») or F7 («Rest. St.Perfs»)
to cancel the changes made to the Performances
or Style-Performances.
F1
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
F3
ESCAPE
F4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F1
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
F2
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F2
F3
F4
○
F5
© Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
F6
F5
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
F6
F7
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
3
F8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F7
○
With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and
the original Performance settings (volume,
sounds, transposition, tempo, etc.) are restored.
With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained.
F8
3
○
©
○
○
With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and
the original Performance settings (volume,
sounds, transposition, tempo, etc.) are restored.
With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained.
With ENTER, the changes are cancelled and
the original Performance settings (volume,
sounds, transposition, tempo, etc.) are restored.
With ESCAPE, the new settings are retained.
○
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
○
F6
F5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F4
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
2. Press F5 («Restore Perfs») or F7 («Rest. St.Perfs»)
to cancel the changes made to the Performances
or Style-Performances.
○
○
F3
F2
F1
2
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
It is possible to cancel all modifications made to
the Performances and restore the factory settings.
You can select the type of Performance to restore (Rest.St.Perfs, Rest. Perfs, Rest. styles,
Rest. songs) or restore the default settings of all
the Performances in a single step (Restore all).
9
1
GENERAL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•42 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RESTORING THE ORIGINAL PERFORMANCE SETTINGS
○
ENTER
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
3
©
F7
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
F8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•42 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 2•43
○
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song
Your WK6/8 is supplied with two floppy disks, one containing the operating system and one containing
a Demo Song, some User Styles and some Samples. In the following pages, you’ll learn how to load a
Song into the instrument’s memory and how to play it back.
Your WK6/8 is supplied with two floppy disks, one containing the operating system and one containing
a Demo Song, some User Styles and some Samples. In the following pages, you’ll learn how to load a
Song into the instrument’s memory and how to play it back.
Have the Demo Disk ready to load the Demo Song into memory. If you don’t have the supplied Demo
disk, use any WK6/8 format song disk, disks of previous formats (such as WK4, SK, PS, WX or SX
Series), or MIDI file disks.
Have the Demo Disk ready to load the Demo Song into memory. If you don’t have the supplied Demo
disk, use any WK6/8 format song disk, disks of previous formats (such as WK4, SK, PS, WX or SX
Series), or MIDI file disks.
LOAD THE DEMO SONG
LOAD THE DEMO SONG
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2. The H.D. LED (next to the
Disk button) turns on.
H. D
DISK
2
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
“Load Single Song”).
H. D
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Load Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
+
DISK
H. D
+
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
DISK
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Load Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
2
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
“Load Single Song”).
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2. The H.D. LED (next to the
Disk button) turns on.
+
2
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
“Load Single Song”).
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2. The H.D. LED (next to the
Disk button) turns on.
1
1
3
3
LOAD THE DEMO SONG
3
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Load Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
1
Have the Demo Disk ready to load the Demo Song into memory. If you don’t have the supplied Demo
disk, use any WK6/8 format song disk, disks of previous formats (such as WK4, SK, PS, WX or SX
Series), or MIDI file disks.
Your WK6/8 is supplied with two floppy disks, one containing the operating system and one containing
a Demo Song, some User Styles and some Samples. In the following pages, you’ll learn how to load a
Song into the instrument’s memory and how to play it back.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•43
13 • Load and play back the supplied Demo Song
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•43
2•44 User Guide
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
The File selector shows one or more Blocks
in the disk directory, and the directory of the
destination which represents the section of
RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example the Songs).
ENTER
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
The File selector shows one or more Blocks
in the disk directory, and the directory of the
destination which represents the section of
RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example the Songs).
TE
ESCAPE
OR
+
H. D
ESCAPE
4
ENTER
TE
ESCAPE
DISK
5. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER
to gain access.
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
7
DISK leaves Disk mode directly. If you return to Disk, the page will be the last one selected, in this case, the file selector showing
the Song directory.
ESCAPE allows you to (1) leave the Block,
(2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.
5
Now the display shows a list of Songs contained in the Block file. In this example, one
Song only is listed (Children).
ENTER
ESCAPE
If necessary, move over to the right column
and select an empty destination for the incoming file. In this example, all the destinations are empty and the first one is
preselected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame).
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure.
After a short period, the Demo Song will be
in memory.
Now the display shows a list of Songs contained in the Block file. In this example, one
Song only is listed (Children).
TEM
7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
6. Select a destination (if necessary) and press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
5. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER
to gain access.
6. Select a destination (if necessary) and press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
If necessary, move over to the right column
and select an empty destination for the incoming file. In this example, all the destinations are empty and the first one is
preselected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame).
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure.
After a short period, the Demo Song will be
in memory.
ESCAPE
6
If necessary, move over to the right column
and select an empty destination for the incoming file. In this example, all the destinations are empty and the first one is
preselected (shown enclosed by a rectangular frame).
Pressing ENTER the first time prompts a request to confirm the command. Press ENTER a second time to complete the procedure.
After a short period, the Demo Song will be
in memory.
ENTER
TEM
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
ENTER
TEM
6
ESCAPE
6. Select a destination (if necessary) and press ENTER twice to execute the Load Song command.
7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
ESCAPE
TEM
ENTER
5
ENTER
DISK leaves Disk mode directly. If you return to Disk, the page will be the last one selected, in this case, the file selector showing
the Song directory.
ESCAPE allows you to (1) leave the Block,
(2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
2•44 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4
○
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
7
H. D
+
OR
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
TE
○
ENTER
○
TEM
ENTER
The File selector shows one or more Blocks
in the disk directory, and the directory of the
destination which represents the section of
RAM containing the file types currently being handled (in this example the Songs).
○
ENTER
DISK
ESCAPE
○
6
H. D
+
○
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
DISK
○
TEM
7. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
5. If necessary, select a Block file and press ENTER
to gain access.
7
ENTER
ESCAPE
Now the display shows a list of Songs contained in the Block file. In this example, one
Song only is listed (Children).
DISK leaves Disk mode directly. If you return to Disk, the page will be the last one selected, in this case, the file selector showing
the Song directory.
ESCAPE allows you to (1) leave the Block,
(2) exit the file selector, (3) exit Disk mode.
5
OR
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•44 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 2•45
PLAYBACK THE DEMO SONG
○
Access to the Songs in memory is via the SONG
button in the SEQUENCER.
1
○
○
○
○
○
PLAYBACK THE DEMO SONG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Access to the Songs in memory is via the SONG
button in the SEQUENCER.
SONG
Select and playback the Demo Song
Select and playback the Demo Song
1 Press the SONG button.
1 Press the SONG button.
The «Select Song» window appears showing a list of song in memory. In this example,
the list shows the demo Song (Children) that
you loaded in the previous pages.
1
The «Select Song» window appears showing a list of song in memory. In this example,
the list shows the demo Song (Children) that
you loaded in the previous pages.
2
A
B
C
2 Select the Song (if necessary) with the Soft button.
○
D
E
F8
F
SONG
2
A
B
C
2 Select the Song (if necessary) with the Soft button.
D
E
F
F7
F6
H
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
3. Toggle between SOUND VIEW and PLAY VIEW with
the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
F1
F8
F2
F6
F5
F5
F4
F6
F3
F7
F2
F8
F1
F1
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View»
mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in «Sound View» mode in order to
see the sounds assigned to 8 tracks of the
current Song-Performance.
Use the Track Scroll buttons to view the other
8 tracks of the Song.
3
F2
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
3. Toggle between SOUND VIEW and PLAY VIEW with
the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
F3
F4
3
3. Toggle between SOUND VIEW and PLAY VIEW with
the corresponding Soft button (F5 or F6).
F7
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View»
mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in «Sound View» mode in order to
see the sounds assigned to 8 tracks of the
current Song-Performance.
Use the Track Scroll buttons to view the other
8 tracks of the Song.
H
F3
F4
F5
H
F6
F8
F1
The selected Song is shown in negative highlight. After selection, you pass automatically
to Song mode showing the “play view” window and the Song name on the status bar.
3
The selected Song is shown in negative highlight. After selection, you pass automatically
to Song mode showing the “play view” window and the Song name on the status bar.
G
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View»
mode in order to modify the playing parameters, or in «Sound View» mode in order to
see the sounds assigned to 8 tracks of the
current Song-Performance.
Use the Track Scroll buttons to view the other
8 tracks of the Song.
The selected Song is shown in negative highlight. After selection, you pass automatically
to Song mode showing the “play view” window and the Song name on the status bar.
G
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
G
F7
F7
F
2 Select the Song (if necessary) with the Soft button.
F8
The «Select Song» window appears showing a list of song in memory. In this example,
the list shows the demo Song (Children) that
you loaded in the previous pages.
F8
E
D
C
B
A
2
1 Press the SONG button.
Select and playback the Demo Song
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•45
○
PLAYBACK THE DEMO SONG
SONG
○
1
○
Access to the Songs in memory is via the SONG
button in the SEQUENCER.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•45
2•46 User Guide
4. Press PLAY in the SEQUENCER to start the playback.
○
7
PLAY
ESCAPE
ENTER
7
4
PLAY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4. Press PLAY in the SEQUENCER to start the playback.
This button starts the Song playback (or recording).
During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The song location pointer (LOC)
in the display shows the current position of
the Song.
You can also use the START/STOP button to
start the playback.
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance
one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these
buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at high speed. These buttons are
active either in Song play or stop status.
STOP
PLAY
5
6
During playback, the DIAL changes the
Song’s playing speed (tempo).
ENTER
7. Press STOP in the SEQUENCER to stop the playback.
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). You can also use the START/STOP
button to stop the Song.
When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position, the LED on the STOP button flashes.
Pressing PLAY while the STOP button is
flashing starts the Song from the current position.
If you press the START/STOP button again,
the Song starts instantly from the beginning.
PLAY
PLAY
8. Press STOP again to return to the starting position of the Song, or rewind with the << button.
When the Song is not playing and at its initial
starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•46 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
6. Rotate the DIAL to change the Song tempo.
TEMPO / DATA
STOP
4
5. Press << to ‘rewind’ the Song and >> to advance.
TEMPO / DATA
8
5
TEMPO / DATA
2•46 User Guide
○
○
5. Press << to ‘rewind’ the Song and >> to advance.
ENTER
○
○
6
○
○
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance
one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these
buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at high speed. These buttons are
active either in Song play or stop status.
ESCAPE
○
○
6. Rotate the DIAL to change the Song tempo.
TEMPO / DATA
○
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
○
○
4. Press PLAY in the SEQUENCER to start the playback.
STOP
○
○
This button starts the Song playback (or recording).
During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The song location pointer (LOC)
in the display shows the current position of
the Song.
You can also use the START/STOP button to
start the playback.
PLAY
○
○
During playback, the DIAL changes the
Song’s playing speed (tempo).
STOP
○
○
7. Press STOP in the SEQUENCER to stop the playback.
8
○
ENTER
ENTER
When the Song is not playing and at its initial
starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
○
○
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). You can also use the START/STOP
button to stop the Song.
When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position, the LED on the STOP button flashes.
Pressing PLAY while the STOP button is
flashing starts the Song from the current position.
If you press the START/STOP button again,
the Song starts instantly from the beginning.
6. Rotate the DIAL to change the Song tempo.
○
○
8. Press STOP again to return to the starting position of the Song, or rewind with the << button.
6
8. Press STOP again to return to the starting position of the Song, or rewind with the << button.
○
When the Song is not playing and at its initial
starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance
one measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these
buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at high speed. These buttons are
active either in Song play or stop status.
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). You can also use the START/STOP
button to stop the Song.
When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position, the LED on the STOP button flashes.
Pressing PLAY while the STOP button is
flashing starts the Song from the current position.
If you press the START/STOP button again,
the Song starts instantly from the beginning.
○
PLAY
5
5. Press << to ‘rewind’ the Song and >> to advance.
7. Press STOP in the SEQUENCER to stop the playback.
○
4
This button starts the Song playback (or recording).
During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The song location pointer (LOC)
in the display shows the current position of
the Song.
You can also use the START/STOP button to
start the playback.
During playback, the DIAL changes the
Song’s playing speed (tempo).
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
7
8
STOP
PLAY
STOP
PLAY
User Guide 2•47
○
14 • Preload
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
14 • Preload
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs
or MidiFiles present a disk.
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs
or MidiFiles present a disk.
1. Insert a WK6/8 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk
into the drive.
1. Insert a WK6/8 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk
into the drive.
START / STOP
1
1
Or
Check the disk label for the type of data contained in the disk.
Check the disk label for the type of data contained in the disk.
2. Press PRELOAD.
KEY START
INTRO
WK6/8 Starts to scan the disk contents ten
loads the first Song or MIDI File on disk into
the instrument’s Songs memory.
Shortly after, the Song (or MIDI File) starts to
play back. During the playback, the second
Song on disk is loaded (in background) to
the Songs memory.
N.B. The PRELOAD function exploits the first
two locations in Song memory, while all other
locations are automatically cancelled if occupied.
When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a second sequence begins (there will be a short
pause while the second song is accessed).
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played.
When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the
end, playback stops automatically.
H. D.
+
H. D.
DISK
2
3
3. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP
or START/STOP.
STOP
Playback stops instantly.
PRELOAD
DISK
_
0
+
H. D.
STOP
Playback stops instantly.
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
DEMO
2. Press PRELOAD.
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
Check the disk label for the type of data contained in the disk.
Or
1
START / STOP
Or
1. Insert a WK6/8 Songs disk or MidiFile data disk
into the drive.
3
3. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP
or START/STOP.
PRELOAD
+
DEMO
0
2
_
0
DISK
_
PRELOAD
WK6/8 Starts to scan the disk contents ten
loads the first Song or MIDI File on disk into
the instrument’s Songs memory.
Shortly after, the Song (or MIDI File) starts to
play back. During the playback, the second
Song on disk is loaded (in background) to
the Songs memory.
N.B. The PRELOAD function exploits the first
two locations in Song memory, while all other
locations are automatically cancelled if occupied.
When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a second sequence begins (there will be a short
pause while the second song is accessed).
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played.
When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the
end, playback stops automatically.
STOP
DEMO
3
2
3. Stop the playback at any time by pressing STOP
or START/STOP.
ENDING
WK6/8 Starts to scan the disk contents ten
loads the first Song or MIDI File on disk into
the instrument’s Songs memory.
Shortly after, the Song (or MIDI File) starts to
play back. During the playback, the second
Song on disk is loaded (in background) to
the Songs memory.
N.B. The PRELOAD function exploits the first
two locations in Song memory, while all other
locations are automatically cancelled if occupied.
When the first Song or MidiFile ends, a second sequence begins (there will be a short
pause while the second song is accessed).
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MidiFiles on disk have been played.
When the last Song or MidiFile reaches the
end, playback stops automatically.
Playback stops instantly.
2. Press PRELOAD.
START / STOP
Use the PRELOAD button to play all the Songs
or MidiFiles present a disk.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•47
○
○
○
○
○
○
14 • Preload
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•47
2•48 User Guide
4. Start the playback from the point it was stopped
by pressing PLAY.
○
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY
4. Start the playback from the point it was stopped
by pressing PLAY.
5. Press the STOP button twice to stop and escape
from the PLAY ALL SONGS function.
5. Press the STOP button twice to stop and escape
from the PLAY ALL SONGS function.
To return to Style/RealTime mode, press the
STYLE/REALTIME button.
To return to Style/RealTime mode, press the
STYLE/REALTIME button.
5
5
STOP
STOP
5
To return to Style/RealTime mode, press the
STYLE/REALTIME button.
5. Press the STOP button twice to stop and escape
from the PLAY ALL SONGS function.
4
PLAY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•48 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4. Start the playback from the point it was stopped
by pressing PLAY.
○
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•48 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY
STOP
User Guide 2•49
○
15 • Multimedia
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
15 • Multimedia
○
○
○
○
DISPLAY SONG LYRICS
DISPLAY SONG LYRICS
WK6/8 can display Lyrics when playing WK6/8,
WK4, SK & PS Series disks with songs containing Lyrics tracks. There are a wide variety of disks
that display lyrics when played.
WK6/8 can display Lyrics when playing WK6/8,
WK4, SK & PS Series disks with songs containing Lyrics tracks. There are a wide variety of disks
that display lyrics when played.
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE
CONTROLS.
Automatic loading of Songs at power up
Automatic loading of Songs at power up
If your WK6/8 has no Songs with lyrics in memory,
it is possible to load a Block of data (including
Song data) automatically from disk at power up.
If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb
format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file containing Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk
containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted
in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM automatically.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK
loading procedure replaces all the data conserved
in System RAM.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SCORE
3/4
1. Press the SONG BUTTON.
1. Press the SONG BUTTON.
PLAY
You will see up to sixteen Song choices in
the display. (If necessary, load Song data
into memory using the Load All Song operation).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PLAY
○
○
© WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK
loading procedure replaces all the data conserved
in System RAM.
○
3/4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SCORE
You will see up to sixteen Song choices in
the display. (If necessary, load Song data
into memory using the Load All Song operation).
H
G
F
E
5
D
F5
B
F6
A
F7
F8
3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.
5
2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding
Soft button.
C
2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding
Soft button.
3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.
SONG
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE
CONTROLS.
F7
F8
4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear.
1/2
4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear.
F5
F6
5. Press the F8 soft button to activate the SCORE
CONTROLS.
DISPLAY SONG LYRICS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•49
○
○
○
15 • Multimedia
○
PLAY
WK6/8 can display Lyrics when playing WK6/8,
WK4, SK & PS Series disks with songs containing Lyrics tracks. There are a wide variety of disks
that display lyrics when played.
○
3/4
H
Automatic loading of Songs at power up
○
H
F
G
If your WK6/8 has no Songs with lyrics in memory,
it is possible to load a Block of data (including
Song data) automatically from disk at power up.
If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb
format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file containing Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk
containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted
in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM automatically.
○
D
E
© WARNING - The automatic AUTOLOAD.BLK
loading procedure replaces all the data conserved
in System RAM.
○
F
G
SCORE
○
D
E
B
C
1. Press the SONG BUTTON.
○
C
A
You will see up to sixteen Song choices in
the display. (If necessary, load Song data
into memory using the Load All Song operation).
○
F5
○
B
5
○
F7
○
F6
○
A
SONG
2. Select the desired SONG with the corresponding
Soft button.
○
If your WK6/8 has no Songs with lyrics in memory,
it is possible to load a Block of data (including
Song data) automatically from disk at power up.
If you have one or more Songs disks (1.44 Mb
format), insert the disk into the drive of your computer and change the name of the Block file containing Song data to: AUTOLOAD.BLK (use capital letters only). At power up, if the floppy-disk
containing the AUTOLOAD.BLK file is inserted
in the drive, the Block is loaded in RAM automatically.
F8
○
1/2
3. Press PLAY to start the SONG playback.
SONG
4. Press the SCORE button and the score will appear.
1/2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•49
2•50 User Guide
6. Use the DIRECTIONAL ARROWS to highlight the
desired viewing choices (All, Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4,
Chord).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6
Connect one of the video outputs to a domestic
TV or to a monitor by means of the dedicated
cable supplied with the AV board (optional in the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Tune the TV to the AV channel. To select the AV
channel, consult the owner’s manual of the television set. Computer monitors or televisions
normally operate in AV mode.
In Song mode, press SCORE to display the
Score. Press F8 («Score controls...») to open
the «Score controls» dialog window and move
the cursor to the «Echo LCD» parameter.
Set the «Echo LCD» parameter to OFF.
«Echo LCD = OFF»: only the Score or the Lyrics
is displayed on the external monitor.
«Echo LCD = ON»: the monitor displays exactly
what is shown on the display, including all the
controls.
Move the cursor to «View mode» and select a
combination of colors for the lyrics and the screen.
Move the cursor to «Video mode» and select the
RGB or CV (Composite Video) mode. To view
on RGB monitors, set this parameter to RGB.
U.S.A. models normally operate in CV and transmit in Composite.
Move the cursor to «Y shift» and regulate the
vertical alignment of the image.
Press ENTER to close the dialog window and
return to the Score View page.
ENTER
Press the ENTER button to view the results.
7. Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main
Song Playback page.
TEMPO / DATA
6. Use the DIRECTIONAL ARROWS to highlight the
desired viewing choices (All, Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4,
Chord).
6
ENTER
Press the ENTER button to view the results.
7. Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main
Song Playback page.
ESCAPE
TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL
MONITOR
Connect one of the video outputs to a domestic
TV or to a monitor by means of the dedicated
cable supplied with the AV board (optional in the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Tune the TV to the AV channel. To select the AV
channel, consult the owner’s manual of the television set. Computer monitors or televisions
normally operate in AV mode.
In Song mode, press SCORE to display the
Score. Press F8 («Score controls...») to open
the «Score controls» dialog window and move
the cursor to the «Echo LCD» parameter.
Set the «Echo LCD» parameter to OFF.
«Echo LCD = OFF»: only the Score or the Lyrics
is displayed on the external monitor.
«Echo LCD = ON»: the monitor displays exactly
what is shown on the display, including all the
controls.
Move the cursor to «View mode» and select a
combination of colors for the lyrics and the screen.
Move the cursor to «Video mode» and select the
RGB or CV (Composite Video) mode. To view
on RGB monitors, set this parameter to RGB.
U.S.A. models normally operate in CV and transmit in Composite.
Move the cursor to «Y shift» and regulate the
vertical alignment of the image.
Press ENTER to close the dialog window and
return to the Score View page.
7
ENTER
OR
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
SCORE
OR
ESCAPE
7
TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL
MONITOR
ENTER
SCORE
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
ENTER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•50 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6
TEMPO / DATA
○
6. Use the DIRECTIONAL ARROWS to highlight the
desired viewing choices (All, Lyrics 1, 2, 3, 4,
Chord).
○
Press the ENTER button to view the results.
○
7. Press ESCAPE or SCORE to return to the main
Song Playback page.
○
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
TO DISPLAY LYRICS ON AN EXTERNAL
MONITOR
Connect one of the video outputs to a domestic
TV or to a monitor by means of the dedicated
cable supplied with the AV board (optional in the
WK6 standard and Power Station models).
Tune the TV to the AV channel. To select the AV
channel, consult the owner’s manual of the television set. Computer monitors or televisions
normally operate in AV mode.
In Song mode, press SCORE to display the
Score. Press F8 («Score controls...») to open
the «Score controls» dialog window and move
the cursor to the «Echo LCD» parameter.
Set the «Echo LCD» parameter to OFF.
«Echo LCD = OFF»: only the Score or the Lyrics
is displayed on the external monitor.
«Echo LCD = ON»: the monitor displays exactly
what is shown on the display, including all the
controls.
Move the cursor to «View mode» and select a
combination of colors for the lyrics and the screen.
Move the cursor to «Video mode» and select the
RGB or CV (Composite Video) mode. To view
on RGB monitors, set this parameter to RGB.
U.S.A. models normally operate in CV and transmit in Composite.
Move the cursor to «Y shift» and regulate the
vertical alignment of the image.
Press ENTER to close the dialog window and
return to the Score View page.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•50 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
SCORE
ESCAPE
OR
User Guide 2•51
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.)
1/2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.)
WK6/8 allows you to record a simple multi-track
Song using the QUICK REC recording method and
the existing Styles for automatic accompaniments.
In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from
1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of
up to 16 tracks. You can then play along with
your recorded Song in playback with one or more
tracks not used in the recording.
SONG
H
WK6/8 allows you to record a simple multi-track
Song using the QUICK REC recording method and
the existing Styles for automatic accompaniments.
In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from
1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of
up to 16 tracks. You can then play along with
your recorded Song in playback with one or more
tracks not used in the recording.
○
If you want the Style to govern the Performance sounds, press SINGLE TCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off and
Lower Memory activate automatically if off).
To maintain the current Performance, select
the Style with SINGLE TCH PLAY Off then
turn on the accompaniment controls (Arrange
On/Off and Lower Memory) if necessary.
○
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1/2
SONG
A
A
B
D
E
JAZZ
US. TRAD
H
FUNK
DANCE. 1
LATIN. 2
DANCE. 2
USER.
USER.
STYLE GROUP
F5
2. Select an empty location with the corresponding
Soft button or Function button.
The RECORD ST./SONG button turns on
(LED on).
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at
the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The
display appears in negative highlight with the
selected track in positive.
F4
F3
F2
F1
3
4
STYLE GROUP
The «Song Banks» display shows empty
songs as User locations. If not, you can use
the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.
F5
The RECORD ST./SONG button turns on
(LED on).
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at
the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The
display appears in negative highlight with the
selected track in positive.
3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
4
H
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
ROCK
JAZZ
US. TRAD
TRAD. 1
FUNK
DANCE. 1
DANCE. 2
USER.
TRAD. 2
LATIN. 1
LATIN. 2
USER.
F5
2. Select an empty location with the corresponding
Soft button or Function button.
3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
F3
F4
3. Select QuickRec with the soft button F2.
F3
F4
F1
F2
STYLE GROUP
8. BEAT
16. BEAT
JAZZ
US. TRAD
ROCK
DANCE. 2
DANCE. 1
FUNK
USER.
Quick Rec Recording
ROCK
LATIN. 1
F1
F2
2. Select an empty location with the corresponding
Soft button or Function button.
3
The «Song Banks» display shows empty
songs as User locations. If not, you can use
the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.
1. Press the SONG button.
16. BEAT
8. BEAT
TRAD. 2
1. Press the SONG button.
3
F
G
4
TRAD. 1
H
1. Press the SONG button.
Quick Rec Recording
The RECORD ST./SONG button turns on
(LED on).
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the Performance selected at
the time of entering Quick Rec mode. The
display appears in negative highlight with the
selected track in positive.
F
G
The «Song Banks» display shows empty
songs as User locations. If not, you can use
the Restore All Songs function (in Edit General) to clear all songs in memory.
C
D
E
Quick Rec Recording
B
4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of
the backings for the Song.
C
TRAD. 1
LATIN. 2
LATIN. 1
TRAD. 2
USER.
G
F
E
4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of
the backings for the Song.
4. Select a preferred Style to use as the provider of
the backings for the Song.
D
C
B
A
If you want the Style to govern the Performance sounds, press SINGLE TCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off and
Lower Memory activate automatically if off).
To maintain the current Performance, select
the Style with SINGLE TCH PLAY Off then
turn on the accompaniment controls (Arrange
On/Off and Lower Memory) if necessary.
D
E
F
G
SONG
H
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•51
1/2
C
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
16 • Record a Song (Quick rec.)
A
B
○
WK6/8 allows you to record a simple multi-track
Song using the QUICK REC recording method and
the existing Styles for automatic accompaniments.
In practice, the Quick Rec method can record from
1 to 8 real time tracks accompanied by all the backing tracks of a Style to create a multitrack Song of
up to 16 tracks. You can then play along with
your recorded Song in playback with one or more
tracks not used in the recording.
A
If you want the Style to govern the Performance sounds, press SINGLE TCH PLAY before selecting the Style (Arrange On/Off and
Lower Memory activate automatically if off).
To maintain the current Performance, select
the Style with SINGLE TCH PLAY Off then
turn on the accompaniment controls (Arrange
On/Off and Lower Memory) if necessary.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•51
2•52 User Guide
5. Select the preferred keyboard mode.
○
6
A
E
F
G
H
7
F
E
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
○
○
○
○
5
○
○
○
STORE
PERF.
ENTER
5. Select the preferred keyboard mode.
Full allows you to record one or two keyboard
sounds across the entire keyboard.
Upp/Low allows you to record up to two keyboard sounds on the left and two on the right
on a split keyboard.
Set Multi (as in the example) if you want to
view all 8 keyboard tracks of the Performance in order to set more than 4 sounds for
simultaneous recording.
The tracks already activated for the recording are shown set for “key-play” (with a small
keyboard icon together with the MIDI status
icon [
] - see page 1.7 of chapter 1).
5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
6
A
B
6. Activate, if necessary, other tracks to record with.
C
D
Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly, first to select, then to activate a track.
The track status icon changes from “mute” to
“play”. In the example, track 2 is activated
by pressing soft button B twice.
If you don’t want to record with one or more
of the currently activated tracks, simply mute
them.
You can also change the sounds of one or
more tracks of both the keyboard sounds as
well as the accompaniment sounds. Use the
Track Scroll buttons (or the / buttons) to
view the accompaniment tracks.
TEMPO / DATA
5. Select the preferred keyboard mode.
6
○
○
B
A
○
○
Full allows you to record one or two keyboard
sounds across the entire keyboard.
Upp/Low allows you to record up to two keyboard sounds on the left and two on the right
on a split keyboard.
Set Multi (as in the example) if you want to
view all 8 keyboard tracks of the Performance in order to set more than 4 sounds for
simultaneous recording.
The tracks already activated for the recording are shown set for “key-play” (with a small
keyboard icon together with the MIDI status
icon [
] - see page 1.7 of chapter 1).
○
○
D
○
○
ESCAPE
C
○
○
6. Activate, if necessary, other tracks to record with.
2•52 User Guide
○
○
C
H
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
F7
G
ENTER
○
○
F8
STORE
PERF.
○
○
F5
7
○
○
F6
ESCAPE
○
○
Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly, first to select, then to activate a track.
The track status icon changes from “mute” to
“play”. In the example, track 2 is activated
by pressing soft button B twice.
If you don’t want to record with one or more
of the currently activated tracks, simply mute
them.
You can also change the sounds of one or
more tracks of both the keyboard sounds as
well as the accompaniment sounds. Use the
Track Scroll buttons (or the / buttons) to
view the accompaniment tracks.
○
○
7. If you have changed something (keyboard mode,
sound, track status, etc.), PRESS STORE PERF +
ENTER to store the changes to the current Performance.
○
○
IMPORTANT: If you don’t store the changes,
they will be lost when to start the recording.
○
○
F3
IMPORTANT: If you don’t store the changes,
they will be lost when to start the recording.
○
○
F4
D
○
○
F1
6. Activate, if necessary, other tracks to record with.
○
○
F2
B
7. If you have changed something (keyboard mode,
sound, track status, etc.), PRESS STORE PERF +
ENTER to store the changes to the current Performance.
○
5
Full allows you to record one or two keyboard
sounds across the entire keyboard.
Upp/Low allows you to record up to two keyboard sounds on the left and two on the right
on a split keyboard.
Set Multi (as in the example) if you want to
view all 8 keyboard tracks of the Performance in order to set more than 4 sounds for
simultaneous recording.
The tracks already activated for the recording are shown set for “key-play” (with a small
keyboard icon together with the MIDI status
icon [
] - see page 1.7 of chapter 1).
Press the corresponding soft button repeatedly, first to select, then to activate a track.
The track status icon changes from “mute” to
“play”. In the example, track 2 is activated
by pressing soft button B twice.
If you don’t want to record with one or more
of the currently activated tracks, simply mute
them.
You can also change the sounds of one or
more tracks of both the keyboard sounds as
well as the accompaniment sounds. Use the
Track Scroll buttons (or the / buttons) to
view the accompaniment tracks.
○
7. If you have changed something (keyboard mode,
sound, track status, etc.), PRESS STORE PERF +
ENTER to store the changes to the current Performance.
IMPORTANT: If you don’t store the changes,
they will be lost when to start the recording.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•52 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
E
F
G
H
7
STORE
PERF.
ENTER
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 2•53
○
8
○
○
○
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
○
○
8. Press either PLAY or START/STOP or KEY START
to start the recording and start to play.
○
PLAY
PLAY starts the recording for the real time
tracks only.
START/STOP starts the recording and engages the Style accompaniment tracks at the
same time.
KEY START allows you to start the recording
(Style and real time tracks) by playing on the
keyboard.
You can also start the recording with an Intro
by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING
button before record start. Use START/STOP
or KEY START to trigger the Intro.
As the recording proceeds, you can select
other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real
time tracks, etc..
START / STOP
OR
9
ENDING
KEY START
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8
STOP
Recorded track icon
OR
START / STOP
9. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
9. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard
tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to
the starting position [1 1 1].
START/STOP stops the accompaniment
tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to
continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the
recording completely, press STOP.
The RECORD ST./SONG button LED will
now turn off.
When the sequencer stops recording, the display reverts to the Play View situation showing the song’s parameters.
The icon of the recorded tracks are shown
with note symbols.
To start the playback and to play along with
the Song, press PLAY or START/STOP. See
over.
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard
tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to
the starting position [1 1 1].
START/STOP stops the accompaniment
tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to
continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the
recording completely, press STOP.
The RECORD ST./SONG button LED will
now turn off.
When the sequencer stops recording, the display reverts to the Play View situation showing the song’s parameters.
The icon of the recorded tracks are shown
with note symbols.
To start the playback and to play along with
the Song, press PLAY or START/STOP. See
over.
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
PLAY
PLAY starts the recording for the real time
tracks only.
START/STOP starts the recording and engages the Style accompaniment tracks at the
same time.
KEY START allows you to start the recording
(Style and real time tracks) by playing on the
keyboard.
You can also start the recording with an Intro
by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING
button before record start. Use START/STOP
or KEY START to trigger the Intro.
As the recording proceeds, you can select
other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real
time tracks, etc..
OR
INTRO
○
STOP stops the sequencer and the recording of both the accompaniment and keyboard
tracks, taking the Song pointer (locator) to
the starting position [1 1 1].
START/STOP stops the accompaniment
tracks but not the sequencer, allowing you to
continue recording the real time tracks without accompaniment. The Song Pointer continues to monitor the recording. To stop the
recording completely, press STOP.
The RECORD ST./SONG button LED will
now turn off.
When the sequencer stops recording, the display reverts to the Play View situation showing the song’s parameters.
The icon of the recorded tracks are shown
with note symbols.
To start the playback and to play along with
the Song, press PLAY or START/STOP. See
over.
8. Press either PLAY or START/STOP or KEY START
to start the recording and start to play.
OR
START / STOP
OR
9
ENDING
KEY START
INTRO
STOP
OR
START / STOP
9. When you have finished, stop the recording either with STOP or START/STOP.
OR
STOP
INTRO
KEY START
ENDING
9
OR
START / STOP
OR
PLAY
ENDING
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•53
KEY START
○
INTRO
○
8
○
Recorded track icon
8. Press either PLAY or START/STOP or KEY START
to start the recording and start to play.
START / STOP
○
PLAY starts the recording for the real time
tracks only.
START/STOP starts the recording and engages the Style accompaniment tracks at the
same time.
KEY START allows you to start the recording
(Style and real time tracks) by playing on the
keyboard.
You can also start the recording with an Intro
by preselecting the INTRO, FILL or ENDING
button before record start. Use START/STOP
or KEY START to trigger the Intro.
As the recording proceeds, you can select
other Styles, introduce the Fills, change Performances, activate or deactivate other real
time tracks, etc..
Recorded track icon
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•53
2•54 User Guide
PLAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED
SONG
○
In Song playback mode, you can play along with
your recorded Song by activating one or more
tracks not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the
sequencer and use it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not
wish to hear.
START / STOP
OR
STOP
A
PLAY
2
H
A
F
C
D
E
B
G
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
KEY START
ENDING
3
INTRO
STOP
KEY START
PLAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED
SONG
In Song playback mode, you can play along with
your recorded Song by activating one or more
tracks not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the
sequencer and use it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not
wish to hear.
The operations can be carried out before or after
start, but remember, if you start after modifying
the track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store the Performance.
In the example below, the changes are carried
out during playback.
1
INTRO
2. During playback, press the soft button of the
track you wish to play along with as many times
as necessary until it is shown set for “key-play”
then start to play.
OR
START / STOP
KEY START
ENDING
PLAY
OR
1. Start the playback of the selected Song with PLAY
or START/STOP.
START / STOP
2
A
B
C
D
E
If the track contains recorded notes (shown
with the “seq.-play” icon ):
F
G
H
• press the relative soft button once to select
the track;
• once again to mute the track and;
• once again to set it to “key-play”.
The graphic example opposite illustrates how
to disengage a recorded track and activate it
for real time playing.
If the track was not used for the recording, it
will be shown either as a muted track (
)
). In this case:
or in “key-play” status (
• press the relative soft button repeatedly to
toggle from “muted” to “key-play” and vice
versa.
ENDING
PLAY ALONG WITH YOUR RECORDED
SONG
○
○
In Song playback mode, you can play along with
your recorded Song by activating one or more
tracks not used for the recording. It is also possible to disengage a recorded track from the
sequencer and use it to play in real time. Naturally, you can also mute the tracks you do not
wish to hear.
KEY START
INTRO
○
○
A
1
ENDING
2•54 User Guide
○
○
A
PLAY
○
○
The operations can be carried out before or after
start, but remember, if you start after modifying
the track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store the Performance.
In the example below, the changes are carried
out during playback.
○
○
A
OR
○
○
H
START / STOP
○
○
1. Start the playback of the selected Song with PLAY
or START/STOP.
○
○
F
A
○
○
D
C
○
○
B
E
○
○
START / STOP
G
○
○
OR
A
○
○
INTRO
A
○
○
2. During playback, press the soft button of the
track you wish to play along with as many times
as necessary until it is shown set for “key-play”
then start to play.
ENDING
3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.
○
If the track contains recorded notes (shown
with the “seq.-play” icon ):
KEY START
INTRO
3
• press the relative soft button once to select
the track;
• once again to mute the track and;
• once again to set it to “key-play”.
The graphic example opposite illustrates how
to disengage a recorded track and activate it
for real time playing.
If the track was not used for the recording, it
will be shown either as a muted track (
)
). In this case:
or in “key-play” status (
• press the relative soft button repeatedly to
toggle from “muted” to “key-play” and vice
versa.
○
• press the relative soft button once to select
the track;
• once again to mute the track and;
• once again to set it to “key-play”.
The graphic example opposite illustrates how
to disengage a recorded track and activate it
for real time playing.
If the track was not used for the recording, it
will be shown either as a muted track (
)
or in “key-play” status (
). In this case:
• press the relative soft button repeatedly to
toggle from “muted” to “key-play” and vice
versa.
1
1. Start the playback of the selected Song with PLAY
or START/STOP.
If the track contains recorded notes (shown
with the “seq.-play” icon ):
○
3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.
The operations can be carried out before or after
start, but remember, if you start after modifying
the track status, the tracks will revert to their previous status unless you store the Performance.
In the example below, the changes are carried
out during playback.
2. During playback, press the soft button of the
track you wish to play along with as many times
as necessary until it is shown set for “key-play”
then start to play.
○
3. Press STOP or START/STOP to stop the playback.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•54 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
A
A
A
3
INTRO
KEY START
STOP
OR
START / STOP
ENDING
User Guide 2•55
PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your
choice and plays them back as a ‘medley’ with a
single command.
PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your
choice and plays them back as a ‘medley’ with a
single command.
The Play View page of the Song appears and
the status bar shows the indication: «Jukebox active».
You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with
STOP.
1
F2
The left part of the display shows the list of
Songs in memory. The right part shows the
Jukebox list.
The negative highlight cursor shows which
song is selected in the Song list. The frame
on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list.
Pass from left to right and vice versa with the
directional arrows.
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
4
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the
Jukebox list and press the INSERT soft button
(F5) (or ENTER) to insert the Song in the list.
F2
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the
Jukebox list and press the INSERT soft button
(F5) (or ENTER) to insert the Song in the list.
2/3
F1
If you want to substitute one of the names in the
Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of
the display, select the name to change; move
the cursor back to the left part, select the Song
to insert and press INSERT or ENTER.
Take the cursor to the right and select a new
location for the next Song. Return to the left
part and carry out the selection.
F1
The left part of the display shows the list of
Songs in memory. The right part shows the
Jukebox list.
The negative highlight cursor shows which
song is selected in the Song list. The frame
on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list.
Pass from left to right and vice versa with the
directional arrows.
1
1. With the Song «Play View» page showing, press
F1 («Jukebox...») to access the Jukebox display.
4. Press F8 («Execute») to start the playback of the
Jukebox list.
1. With the Song «Play View» page showing, press
F1 («Jukebox...») to access the Jukebox display.
2/3
F8
F5
F3
F4
F4
F3
F5
3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press
INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list.
F2
F1
F6
F7
F8
If you want to substitute one of the names in the
Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of
the display, select the name to change; move
the cursor back to the left part, select the Song
to insert and press INSERT or ENTER.
Take the cursor to the right and select a new
location for the next Song. Return to the left
part and carry out the selection.
F5
F6
F7
F8
If you want to substitute one of the names in the
Jukebox list, move the cursor to the right part of
the display, select the name to change; move
the cursor back to the left part, select the Song
to insert and press INSERT or ENTER.
Take the cursor to the right and select a new
location for the next Song. Return to the left
part and carry out the selection.
2/3
F1
F2
F3
F4
4
The left part of the display shows the list of
Songs in memory. The right part shows the
Jukebox list.
The negative highlight cursor shows which
song is selected in the Song list. The frame
on the right shows the destination in the Jukebox list.
Pass from left to right and vice versa with the
directional arrows.
4
F5
4. Press F8 («Execute») to start the playback of the
Jukebox list.
F3
F4
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
4. Press F8 («Execute») to start the playback of the
Jukebox list.
F6
F7
F8
The Play View page of the Song appears and
the status bar shows the indication: «Jukebox active».
You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with
STOP.
F6
F7
F8
The Play View page of the Song appears and
the status bar shows the indication: «Jukebox active».
You can interrupt the Jukebox at any time with
STOP.
1. With the Song «Play View» page showing, press
F1 («Jukebox...») to access the Jukebox display.
3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press
INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list.
F1
F2
2. Select a Song from the left part to include in the
Jukebox list and press the INSERT soft button
(F5) (or ENTER) to insert the Song in the list.
F2
The right part of the display shows the name
of the Song added to the list and the frame
advances one step automatically.
The right part of the display shows the name
of the Song added to the list and the frame
advances one step automatically.
F7
F6
F1
3. Repeat the procedure for other Songs and press
INSERT (or ENTER) each time to compile the list.
The right part of the display shows the name
of the Song added to the list and the frame
advances one step automatically.
F2
F1
1
The Jukebox function chains the songs of your
choice and plays them back as a ‘medley’ with a
single command.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•55
PLAY SONGS USING JUKEBOX
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•55
2•56 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
17 • Save your programmed data to disk
17 • Save your programmed data to disk
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the
instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk
(or Hard disk) with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be
continually updated, not as a data storage device.
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the
instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk
(or Hard disk) with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be
continually updated, not as a data storage device.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be WK6/8 format disks (or standard MSDOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8 format disks. How to
save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be WK6/8 format disks (or standard MSDOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8 format disks. How to
save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected - if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget
to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the
disk.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected - if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget
to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the
disk.
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
2
+
H. D
DISK
Save operations are characterized by the option of creating of a new Block if necessary.
Save operations are characterized by the option of creating of a new Block if necessary.
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
THE SAVE PROCEDURE
The following example shows how to save the
Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec
method to Disk.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected. Make
back-up copies of the supplied demo disks and
store the originals in a safe place.
○
○
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
Save operations are characterized by the option of creating of a new Block if necessary.
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
2
DISK
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected - if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you forget
to do this, the instrument will prompt you with an appropriate message when you attempt to save to the
disk.
H. D
+
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to. These can be WK6/8 format disks (or standard MSDOS disks for the storage of MIDI files). You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8 format disks. How to
save MIDI files is discussed in the Disk chapter of the Reference Guide.
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable battery to safeguard your programmed data when the
instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy disk
(or Hard disk) with the Save command. The RAM should be considered as a work area which can be
continually updated, not as a data storage device.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•56 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
17 • Save your programmed data to disk
○
1
©
THE SAVE PROCEDURE
○
○
1
○
1
○
WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected. Make
back-up copies of the supplied demo disks and
store the originals in a safe place.
○
The following example shows how to save the
Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec
method to Disk.
○
©
○
© WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected. Make
back-up copies of the supplied demo disks and
store the originals in a safe place.
THE SAVE PROCEDURE
The following example shows how to save the
Song that you recorded with the Quick Rec
method to Disk.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•56 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
DISK
H. D
+
User Guide 2•57
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
“Save Single Song”).
○
3
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Save Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
○
○
○
○
○
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
“Save Single Song”).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Save Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
You’ll be prompted to create a new Block. The
name “MAIN” is suggested automatically.
Use the keyboard as the source of alphanumeric data to give the block a name.
ESCAPE
TEMP
ENTER
TEMP
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
TEMP
6
The display shows the directory of the songs
present in RAM and the floppy disk directory.
In the example, the instrument’s RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic
names).
If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. In the illustrated example, a new disk is used.
If the disk is a used one, what appears in the
directory will depend on the contents. One
or more Block files may be present.
5
5
5. If necessary, select the Song to save and its destination on disk.
6
ESCAPE
TEMP
ENTER
ENTER
6
A selected file is shown in negative highlight.
Use the cursor arrows to select a different
file. In the example, Song_02 is selected.
An empty destination is shown as a broken
line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame.
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
A selected file is shown in negative highlight.
Use the cursor arrows to select a different
file. In the example, Song_02 is selected.
An empty destination is shown as a broken
line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame.
5
TEMP
4
ESCAPE
6. Press ENTER.
6. Press ENTER.
TEMP
ESCAPE
You’ll be prompted to create a new Block. The
name “MAIN” is suggested automatically.
Use the keyboard as the source of alphanumeric data to give the block a name.
3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•57
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
“Save Single Song”).
You’ll be prompted to create a new Block. The
name “MAIN” is suggested automatically.
Use the keyboard as the source of alphanumeric data to give the block a name.
ENTER
Use the navigational arrows ( / and /
buttons) to navigate within the two columns
of the display area and select the required
command by combining one element from
each column.
For example, combine “Single” from the left
column with “Song” from the right to specify
“Save Single Song”.
If you are using a MIDI file disk, specify “Single MIDI File”.
5. If necessary, select the Song to save and its destination on disk.
ESCAPE
The display shows the directory of the songs
present in RAM and the floppy disk directory.
In the example, the instrument’s RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic
names).
If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. In the illustrated example, a new disk is used.
If the disk is a used one, what appears in the
directory will depend on the contents. One
or more Block files may be present.
ESCAPE
5. If necessary, select the Song to save and its destination on disk.
The display shows the directory of the songs
present in RAM and the floppy disk directory.
In the example, the instrument’s RAM directory is shown with 2 songs (with generic
names).
If the disk is new (no Blocks present), the directory will be empty. In the illustrated example, a new disk is used.
If the disk is a used one, what appears in the
directory will depend on the contents. One
or more Block files may be present.
ENTER
4. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
4
A selected file is shown in negative highlight.
Use the cursor arrows to select a different
file. In the example, Song_02 is selected.
An empty destination is shown as a broken
line. A preselected destination is shown enclosed by a rectangular frame.
ENTER
6. Press ENTER.
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•57
2•58 User Guide
7. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7
The floppy disk directory now shows the first
8 empty Song locations (within the new
block). Up to 16 locations are available by
scrolling with the cursor arrow.
ENTER
8. If necessary, select a destination and press ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song command.
The floppy disk directory now shows the first
8 empty Song locations (within the new
block). Up to 16 locations are available by
scrolling with the cursor arrow.
TEMP
8. If necessary, select a destination and press ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song command.
ESCAPE
8
Pressing ENTER the first prompts a request
to confirm the command (Are you sure?).
Press ENTER a second time to complete the
procedure.
After a short period, the Song will be saved
to disk.
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
ENTER
7. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.
Pressing ENTER the first prompts a request
to confirm the command (Are you sure?).
Press ENTER a second time to complete the
procedure.
After a short period, the Song will be saved
to disk.
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
TEMP
ESCAPE
9
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
DISK
7
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
8
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
9
ENTER
DISK
H. D
+
9. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
H. D
OR
ESCAPE
9. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
ESCAPE
9. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit DISK
mode.
OR
+
H. D
ENTER
TEMP
8
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
7
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•58 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7. Confirm the new Block name with ENTER.
ESCAPE
○
The floppy disk directory now shows the first
8 empty Song locations (within the new
block). Up to 16 locations are available by
scrolling with the cursor arrow.
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
9
○
8. If necessary, select a destination and press ENTER twice to execute the Save Single Song command.
DISK
○
Pressing ENTER the first prompts a request
to confirm the command (Are you sure?).
Press ENTER a second time to complete the
procedure.
After a short period, the Song will be saved
to disk.
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•58 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
+
OR
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
User Guide 2•59
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
○
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy
way of clearing memory to make room for other
Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save your Songs to
disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
1
○
○
○
○
○
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy
way of clearing memory to make room for other
Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save your Songs to
disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
GENERAL
9
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
2. Press the «Restore Songs» soft button (F6) to
cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
2. Press the «Restore Songs» soft button (F6) to
cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
F5
○
○
○
○
○
○
F8
○
©
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F1
○
F2
F3
F4
○
○
F5
F6
F7
F8
○
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○
3
○
©
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
ESCAPE
GENERAL
○
○
9
○
○
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain access
to the «Edit General» environment.
○
○
2. Press the «Restore Songs» soft button (F6) to
cancel all the Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in RAM.
○
○
2
○
F1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•59
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
○
1
○
○
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, there is a quick and easy
way of clearing memory to make room for other
Songs using the Restore Songs operation. Naturally, you must remember to save your Songs to
disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
○
F3
○
F2
○
○
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
F5
F4
○
○
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
F7
F6
○
○
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
F8
F3
F4
F7
○
○
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
○
F2
F6
○
○
© Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
F1
○
○
2
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
○
9
3
○
○
GENERAL
ESCAPE
2
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•59
2•60 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
18 • MIDI
18 • MIDI
Fig. 1 - Connection diagram of a master keyboard and two expanders, slave 1 and slave 2 ( or other instruments). The data
generated by the Master is received at the MIDI IN of Slave 1 and sent to the sound engine of Slave 1 and to the MIDI IN of Slave 2.
ABOUT MIDI
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a
system of communication between electronic
musical instruments and computers. This section explains some of the more important MIDI
features of your WK6/8. If you wish to delve further into MIDI and all the possibilities offered, you
should refer to specialised MIDI literature available in all music outlets.
MIDI connection rules
• An instrument which controls another instrument is called the master, while an instrument that is controlled by a controlling device is called the slave.
• The MIDI OUT of the master is connected to
the MIDI IN of the slave.
• To program Songs on an external sequencer,
connect the MIDI OUT of the WK6/8 to the
MIDI IN of the sequencer; the MIDI OUT of
the sequencer to the MIDI IN of the WK6/8.
• Do not connect the same MIDI port between
two instruments.
internal course
IN
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
The MIDI THRU port permits the connection of
several slave instruments in series, as shown in
the illustration below (Fig. 1). Slave 1 and Slave
2 are controlled by the single Master. Slave 2
does not receive Slave 1 data, which only acts
as a through device.
With MIDI it is possible to:
• control another musical instrument (expander, keyboard, etc.) with WK6/8;
• control WK6/8 with a master keyboard or
other controlling device (guitar controller, wind
controller, drum pads...);
• connect WK6/8 to an external sequencer to
program Songs and Styles.
The MIDI THRU port
The MIDI ports
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a twin set of MIDI ports:
• Two MIDI OUTs (A & B)
• Two MIDI INs (A & B)
• Two MIDI THRUs (A & B).
All MIDI programming tasks referred to are carried out in the MIDI Edit environment (unless otherwise specified), accessed by pressing the MIDI
button in the EDIT section. Some examples are
discussed here while for the rest, you should
refer to the Edit MIDI chapter of the Reference
manual.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•60 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The MIDI THRU port permits the connection of
several slave instruments in series, as shown in
the illustration below (Fig. 1). Slave 1 and Slave
2 are controlled by the single Master. Slave 2
does not receive Slave 1 data, which only acts
as a through device.
THRU
WK6/8 MIDI interface and
Computer port
COMPUTER
THRU B
MASTER
SLAVE 2
MIDI cable
OUT B
IN B
THRU A
OUT A
IN A
SLAVE 1
MIDI cable
IN
18 • MIDI
○
The MIDI THRU port
MIDI
IN
OUT
SLAVE 2
MIDI cable
THRU
IN
internal course
Fig. 1 - Connection diagram of a master keyboard and two expanders, slave 1 and slave 2 ( or other instruments). The data
generated by the Master is received at the MIDI IN of Slave 1 and sent to the sound engine of Slave 1 and to the MIDI IN of Slave 2.
○
The MIDI ports
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a twin set of MIDI ports:
• Two MIDI OUTs (A & B)
• Two MIDI INs (A & B)
• Two MIDI THRUs (A & B).
With MIDI it is possible to:
• control another musical instrument (expander, keyboard, etc.) with WK6/8;
• control WK6/8 with a master keyboard or
other controlling device (guitar controller, wind
controller, drum pads...);
• connect WK6/8 to an external sequencer to
program Songs and Styles.
ABOUT MIDI
MIDI connection rules
• An instrument which controls another instrument is called the master, while an instrument that is controlled by a controlling device is called the slave.
• The MIDI OUT of the master is connected to
the MIDI IN of the slave.
• To program Songs on an external sequencer,
connect the MIDI OUT of the WK6/8 to the
MIDI IN of the sequencer; the MIDI OUT of
the sequencer to the MIDI IN of the WK6/8.
• Do not connect the same MIDI port between
two instruments.
internal course
All MIDI programming tasks referred to are carried out in the MIDI Edit environment (unless otherwise specified), accessed by pressing the MIDI
button in the EDIT section. Some examples are
discussed here while for the rest, you should
refer to the Edit MIDI chapter of the Reference
manual.
WK6/8 MIDI interface and
Computer port
IN A
IN
MIDI connection rules
• An instrument which controls another instrument is called the master, while an instrument that is controlled by a controlling device is called the slave.
• The MIDI OUT of the master is connected to
the MIDI IN of the slave.
• To program Songs on an external sequencer,
connect the MIDI OUT of the WK6/8 to the
MIDI IN of the sequencer; the MIDI OUT of
the sequencer to the MIDI IN of the WK6/8.
• Do not connect the same MIDI port between
two instruments.
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a
system of communication between electronic
musical instruments and computers. This section explains some of the more important MIDI
features of your WK6/8. If you wish to delve further into MIDI and all the possibilities offered, you
should refer to specialised MIDI literature available in all music outlets.
MIDI (Musical Instruments Digital Interface) is a
system of communication between electronic
musical instruments and computers. This section explains some of the more important MIDI
features of your WK6/8. If you wish to delve further into MIDI and all the possibilities offered, you
should refer to specialised MIDI literature available in all music outlets.
SLAVE 2
WK6/8 MIDI interface and
Computer port
MIDI
OUT A
SLAVE 1
OUT
OUT B
The MIDI THRU port permits the connection of
several slave instruments in series, as shown in
the illustration below (Fig. 1). Slave 1 and Slave
2 are controlled by the single Master. Slave 2
does not receive Slave 1 data, which only acts
as a through device.
THRU A
MIDI cable
THRU B
MIDI cable
SLAVE 1
IN B
COMPUTER
IN
MASTER
OUT B
MIDI cable
The MIDI THRU port
MIDI
THRU B
MASTER
THRU
The MIDI ports
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a twin set of MIDI ports:
• Two MIDI OUTs (A & B)
• Two MIDI INs (A & B)
• Two MIDI THRUs (A & B).
With MIDI it is possible to:
• control another musical instrument (expander, keyboard, etc.) with WK6/8;
• control WK6/8 with a master keyboard or
other controlling device (guitar controller, wind
controller, drum pads...);
• connect WK6/8 to an external sequencer to
program Songs and Styles.
COMPUTER
OUT
All MIDI programming tasks referred to are carried out in the MIDI Edit environment (unless otherwise specified), accessed by pressing the MIDI
button in the EDIT section. Some examples are
discussed here while for the rest, you should
refer to the Edit MIDI chapter of the Reference
manual.
ABOUT MIDI
Fig. 1 - Connection diagram of a master keyboard and two expanders, slave 1 and slave 2 ( or other instruments). The data
generated by the Master is received at the MIDI IN of Slave 1 and sent to the sound engine of Slave 1 and to the MIDI IN of Slave 2.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•60 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•61
THE MIDI CHANNELS
○
MIDI IN port
(A or B)
○
○
○
THE MIDI CHANNELS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MIDI OUT
port (A or B)
TEMPO / DATA
3/4
How to assign the MIDI channels
1. Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section.
1. Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section.
MIDI OUT
port (A or B)
MIDI
1
2
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
2. Select the track whose channel you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft buttons.
2
You enter in Edit MIDI with the display showing the current MIDI channel and port (A or
B) configuration for the first 8 tracks of the
current Performance.
You enter in Edit MIDI with the display showing the current MIDI channel and port (A or
B) configuration for the first 8 tracks of the
current Performance.
2. Select the track whose channel you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft buttons.
2. Select the track whose channel you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft buttons.
You enter in Edit MIDI with the display showing the current MIDI channel and port (A or
B) configuration for the first 8 tracks of the
current Performance.
2
2
1. Press the MIDI button in the EDIT section.
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
How to assign the MIDI channels
3. Select the parameter to change with the cursor arrow.
The MIDI channel is the principal channel assignable to a track and used to transmit and receive
track MIDI messages (note data, bank change/
program change, etc.). The WK6/8 is able to
transmit and receive via two groups of MIDI channels: A and B (MIDI A ports and MIDI B ports).
Each group can handle 16 MIDI channels. One
MIDI channel is freely assignable to each WK6/
8 track from the 32 channels available (A1...A16,
B1...B16).
Each track of every Performance can be independently assigned a MIDI receive channel and
a MIDI transmit channel. The receive and transmit channels do not necessarily have to be the
same.
3/4
The first parameter represents the MIDI IN
port (A or B), then the IN channel followed by
the OUT port (A or B) and OUT channel.
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
3. Select the parameter to change with the cursor arrow.
How to assign the MIDI channels
3. Select the parameter to change with the cursor arrow.
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
The first parameter represents the MIDI IN
port (A or B), then the IN channel followed by
the OUT port (A or B) and OUT channel.
2
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
MIDI IN port
(A or B)
4 Rotate the DIAL to change the setting of the selected parameter.
MIDI
1
○
The MIDI channel is the principal channel assignable to a track and used to transmit and receive
track MIDI messages (note data, bank change/
program change, etc.). The WK6/8 is able to
transmit and receive via two groups of MIDI channels: A and B (MIDI A ports and MIDI B ports).
Each group can handle 16 MIDI channels. One
MIDI channel is freely assignable to each WK6/
8 track from the 32 channels available (A1...A16,
B1...B16).
Each track of every Performance can be independently assigned a MIDI receive channel and
a MIDI transmit channel. The receive and transmit channels do not necessarily have to be the
same.
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
○
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
The MIDI channel is the principal channel assignable to a track and used to transmit and receive
track MIDI messages (note data, bank change/
program change, etc.). The WK6/8 is able to
transmit and receive via two groups of MIDI channels: A and B (MIDI A ports and MIDI B ports).
Each group can handle 16 MIDI channels. One
MIDI channel is freely assignable to each WK6/
8 track from the 32 channels available (A1...A16,
B1...B16).
Each track of every Performance can be independently assigned a MIDI receive channel and
a MIDI transmit channel. The receive and transmit channels do not necessarily have to be the
same.
○
3/4
The first parameter represents the MIDI IN
port (A or B), then the IN channel followed by
the OUT port (A or B) and OUT channel.
2
1
MIDI
4 Rotate the DIAL to change the setting of the selected parameter.
4 Rotate the DIAL to change the setting of the selected parameter.
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•61
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
○
○
○
THE MIDI CHANNELS
MIDI OUT
port (A or B)
○
MIDI IN port
(A or B)
TEMPO / DATA
MIDI OUT
channel
(1...16)
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•61
2•62 User Guide
THE MIDI CONFIGURATION
○
MIDI
IN
How to configure a track
1
TEMPO / DATA
1. After entering Edit MIDI, press the soft button
F2 (or the page button) to open the Configuration page.
2
3/4
2
MIDI
OUT
○
○
2•62 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
keyboard/
Common Channel
internal sound
generator
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
THE MIDI CONFIGURATION
Each track of a Performance can be independently configured with regards to how the track
handles keyboard data, MIDI IN and MIDI OUT
data and the information directed to the internal
sound engine. Each parameter (MIDI IN, MIDI
OUT, Keyboard and Sound Engine) can be independently enabled/disabled for the track selected.
MIDI
IN
How to configure a track
1
1. After entering Edit MIDI, press the soft button
F2 (or the page button) to open the Configuration page.
keyboard/
Common Channel
internal sound
generator
MIDI
2
The display shows the current configuration
of the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
2. Select the track whose configuration you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft button.
3. Select the parameter to enable/disable with the
cursor arrow.
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
The first parameter represents the assigned
MIDI IN port (A or B), then the keyboard followed by the internal sound engine and OUT
port.
4 Rotate the DIAL to disable or enable the selected
parameter.
For example, if you set the MIDI IN port to
OFF, the track cannot receive MIDI IN data.
Or, if you set the keyboard to off, the track is
muted but still available for MIDI IN data. Or,
if you disable the sound engine, the track
cannot play the internal sounds but can play
external sounds via MIDI OUT. Finally, if yo
set the OUT port to off, the track cannot
trasmit data via MIDI OUT. The on/off combinations of the 4 available elements provide
endless MIDI configurations.
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
TEMPO / DATA
THE MIDI CONFIGURATION
internal sound
generator
○
keyboard/
Common Channel
○
○
MIDI
IN
○
○
Each track of a Performance can be independently configured with regards to how the track
handles keyboard data, MIDI IN and MIDI OUT
data and the information directed to the internal
sound engine. Each parameter (MIDI IN, MIDI
OUT, Keyboard and Sound Engine) can be independently enabled/disabled for the track selected.
MIDI
○
○
1
○
○
How to configure a track
○
○
1. After entering Edit MIDI, press the soft button
F2 (or the page button) to open the Configuration page.
○
○
The display shows the current configuration
of the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
○
○
2. Select the track whose configuration you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft button.
○
○
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
For example, if you set the MIDI IN port to
OFF, the track cannot receive MIDI IN data.
Or, if you set the keyboard to off, the track is
muted but still available for MIDI IN data. Or,
if you disable the sound engine, the track
cannot play the internal sounds but can play
external sounds via MIDI OUT. Finally, if yo
set the OUT port to off, the track cannot
trasmit data via MIDI OUT. The on/off combinations of the 4 available elements provide
endless MIDI configurations.
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
○
3. Select the parameter to enable/disable with the
cursor arrow.
2
4 Rotate the DIAL to disable or enable the selected
parameter.
○
The first parameter represents the assigned
MIDI IN port (A or B), then the keyboard followed by the internal sound engine and OUT
port.
3/4
3. Select the parameter to enable/disable with the
cursor arrow.
The first parameter represents the assigned
MIDI IN port (A or B), then the keyboard followed by the internal sound engine and OUT
port.
○
2
2. Select the track whose configuration you wish to
change using the corresponding Soft button.
Use the Track Scroll buttons, or the /
cursor buttons to bring other tracks into view.
○
4 Rotate the DIAL to disable or enable the selected
parameter.
The display shows the current configuration
of the first 8 tracks of the current Performance.
○
For example, if you set the MIDI IN port to
OFF, the track cannot receive MIDI IN data.
Or, if you set the keyboard to off, the track is
muted but still available for MIDI IN data. Or,
if you disable the sound engine, the track
cannot play the internal sounds but can play
external sounds via MIDI OUT. Finally, if yo
set the OUT port to off, the track cannot
trasmit data via MIDI OUT. The on/off combinations of the 4 available elements provide
endless MIDI configurations.
Repeat the procedure for other parameters
and other tracks.
Each track of a Performance can be independently configured with regards to how the track
handles keyboard data, MIDI IN and MIDI OUT
data and the information directed to the internal
sound engine. Each parameter (MIDI IN, MIDI
OUT, Keyboard and Sound Engine) can be independently enabled/disabled for the track selected.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•62 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
3/4
TEMPO / DATA
MIDI
OUT
User Guide 2•63
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a COMPUTER port
which allows two way communications between
the instrument and a computer (PC or MAC) without the need of a MIDI interface. A cable to connect the instrument to your computer’s (IBM/compatible or Macintosh) serial port can be obtained
from your Generalmusic outlet or computer outlet.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
WK
• Macintosh for any Apple Macintosh computer;
COMP.
RS-232/
MODEM
MIDI
OUT A
The Computer function (in Edit General - P.brd/
Computer editor) offers three communication
modes to choose from:
EXPANDER
MIDI cable
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
a slow PC communication suitable for
80386, or earlier models;
• PC2
a fast PC communication suitable for
80486, Pentium or faster processor.
When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI
ports can be used to connect to other musical
instruments.
○
○
• PC1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•63
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
CH. 1
○
○
○
○
○
COMPUTER
CH. A1...A16
RS-232/
MODEM
EXPANDER
MIDI cable
Fig. 2 - Connection of WK6/8 and computer via the COMPUTER port.
Connection of an expander at MIDI OUT A of WK6/8.
MIDI IN
Figure 2 shown below illustrates a simple connection possibility between the WK6/8, a Computer and an expander.
Fig. 2 - Connection of WK6/8 and computer via the COMPUTER port.
Connection of an expander at MIDI OUT A of WK6/8.
• PC1
a slow PC communication suitable for
80386, or earlier models;
COMPUTER
○
Note: The COMPUTER port and
PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the
same time. Connecting one excludes the other
automatically.
○
CH. A1...A16
• Macintosh for any Apple Macintosh computer;
©
a fast PC communication suitable for
80486, Pentium or faster processor.
COMP.
MIDI
OUT A
The Computer function (in Edit General - P.brd/
Computer editor) offers three communication
modes to choose from:
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows
the control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while
MIDI connections can control 32 (groups A & B).
When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI
ports can be used to connect to other musical
instruments.
CH. 1
WK
Figure 2 shown below illustrates a simple connection possibility between the WK6/8, a Computer and an expander.
○
• PC2
○
○
When the COMPUTER port is in use, the MIDI
ports can be used to connect to other musical
instruments.
○
○
○
○
○
MIDI IN
○
THE COMPUTER PORT
○
○
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a COMPUTER port
which allows two way communications between
the instrument and a computer (PC or MAC) without the need of a MIDI interface. A cable to connect the instrument to your computer’s (IBM/compatible or Macintosh) serial port can be obtained
from your Generalmusic outlet or computer outlet.
○
○
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows
the control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while
MIDI connections can control 32 (groups A & B).
○
○
© Note: The COMPUTER port and
PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the
same time. Connecting one excludes the other
automatically.
○
○
COMPUTER
○
○
CH. 1
○
○
WK
○
THE COMPUTER PORT
CH. A1...A16
○
○
COMP.
○
a fast PC communication suitable for
80486, Pentium or faster processor.
○
RS-232/
MODEM
○
Note: The COMPUTER port and
PEDALBOARD connector cannot be used at the
same time. Connecting one excludes the other
automatically.
• PC2
○
EXPANDER
○
a slow PC communication suitable for
80386, or earlier models;
○
MIDI
OUT A
○
©
• Macintosh for any Apple Macintosh computer;
• PC1
○
MIDI cable
The connection via the COMPUTER port allows
the control of 16 MIDI channels (group A), while
MIDI connections can control 32 (groups A & B).
The Computer function (in Edit General - P.brd/
Computer editor) offers three communication
modes to choose from:
○
MIDI IN
Your WK6/8 is fitted with a COMPUTER port
which allows two way communications between
the instrument and a computer (PC or MAC) without the need of a MIDI interface. A cable to connect the instrument to your computer’s (IBM/compatible or Macintosh) serial port can be obtained
from your Generalmusic outlet or computer outlet.
Figure 2 shown below illustrates a simple connection possibility between the WK6/8, a Computer and an expander.
Fig. 2 - Connection of WK6/8 and computer via the COMPUTER port.
Connection of an expander at MIDI OUT A of WK6/8.
THE COMPUTER PORT
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•63
2•64 User Guide
MIDI FILTERS
MIDI LOCK
The WK6/8 MIDI Filters allow you to block the
reception and transmission of unwanted MIDI
messages from the MIDI data stream.
This feature allows you to “lock” the MIDI settings of the instrument. Normally, the MIDI Channels, MIDI Configuration and MIDI Filters are
memorized for each Performance. This means
that every time you recall a different Performance,
the instrument’s MIDI settings will change according to the way they were set for the recalled Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SMF Save Format: this function allows you to
set WK6/8 to save MIDI files as format 0 or format 1.
For example, if you were playing a midi file from
an external sequencer using the E. Piano 2 sound
from the WK6/8, you might find that every time
you start the playback of the sequence, the sound
switches to, for example, Piano1. This occurs
because of the presence of a Program change
message at the beginning of the Song. This problem can be overcome by selecting the “Program
change” MIDI IN Filter Program which “filters off”
all program change messages from the MIDI IN
data stream.
System Exclusive: your WK6/8 can be enabled or disabled for the transmission/reception
of System Exclusive messages.
MIDI Lock allows you to override the individual
Performance settings, permitting you to select any
Performance without changing the current settings. After enabling the MIDI Lock function (soft
button F8 - option in negative highlight), you may
adjust the MIDI settings as you wish. All subsequent changed made to the MIDI settings will
remain in memory until you change them again,
or until you disable the MIDI Lock function.
MIDI Dump: a means of sending all information
currently residing in the instrument’s memory to
another WK6/8, or an external data storage device. The WK6/8 can also receive a DUMP from
an external source.
Other MIDI features
Very briefly, your WK6/8 offers the following additional MIDI features:
Very briefly, your WK6/8 offers the following additional MIDI features:
Common channel: this channel is primarily used
for the sending and receiving of PERFORMANCE
messages. A Program Change message received on the Common channel will not change
one of the individual sound on the keyboard. Instead, it will be interpreted as a PERFORMANCE
CHANGE message.
MIDI Lock allows you to override the individual
Performance settings, permitting you to select any
Performance without changing the current settings. After enabling the MIDI Lock function (soft
button F8 - option in negative highlight), you may
adjust the MIDI settings as you wish. All subsequent changed made to the MIDI settings will
remain in memory until you change them again,
or until you disable the MIDI Lock function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•64 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
In another example, whenever you select a
Sound from the WK6/8 panel, a Program Change
message would also be sent to an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT, causing the expander’s sound to be changed at the same time.
To avoid changing the external sound every time
you select a WK6/8 sound, you would select a
“Program Change” MIDI OUT Filter to exclude
all program change messages from the MIDI OUT
data stream.
MIDI Lock allows you to override the individual
Performance settings, permitting you to select any
Performance without changing the current settings. After enabling the MIDI Lock function (soft
button F8 - option in negative highlight), you may
adjust the MIDI settings as you wish. All subsequent changed made to the MIDI settings will
remain in memory until you change them again,
or until you disable the MIDI Lock function.
Other MIDI features
Very briefly, your WK6/8 offers the following additional MIDI features:
Common channel: this channel is primarily used
for the sending and receiving of PERFORMANCE
messages. A Program Change message received on the Common channel will not change
one of the individual sound on the keyboard. Instead, it will be interpreted as a PERFORMANCE
CHANGE message.
System Exclusive: your WK6/8 can be enabled or disabled for the transmission/reception
of System Exclusive messages.
System Exclusive: your WK6/8 can be enabled or disabled for the transmission/reception
of System Exclusive messages.
SMF Save Format: this function allows you to
set WK6/8 to save MIDI files as format 0 or format 1.
SMF Save Format: this function allows you to
set WK6/8 to save MIDI files as format 0 or format 1.
MIDI LOCK
○
For example, if you were playing a midi file from
an external sequencer using the E. Piano 2 sound
from the WK6/8, you might find that every time
you start the playback of the sequence, the sound
switches to, for example, Piano1. This occurs
because of the presence of a Program change
message at the beginning of the Song. This problem can be overcome by selecting the “Program
change” MIDI IN Filter Program which “filters off”
all program change messages from the MIDI IN
data stream.
MIDI Dump: a means of sending all information
currently residing in the instrument’s memory to
another WK6/8, or an external data storage device. The WK6/8 can also receive a DUMP from
an external source.
MIDI FILTERS
○
This feature allows you to “lock” the MIDI settings of the instrument. Normally, the MIDI Channels, MIDI Configuration and MIDI Filters are
memorized for each Performance. This means
that every time you recall a different Performance,
the instrument’s MIDI settings will change according to the way they were set for the recalled Performance.
The WK6/8 MIDI Filters allow you to block the
reception and transmission of unwanted MIDI
messages from the MIDI data stream.
○
The WK6/8 MIDI Filters allow you to block the
reception and transmission of unwanted MIDI
messages from the MIDI data stream.
MIDI Dump: a means of sending all information
currently residing in the instrument’s memory to
another WK6/8, or an external data storage device. The WK6/8 can also receive a DUMP from
an external source.
This feature allows you to “lock” the MIDI settings of the instrument. Normally, the MIDI Channels, MIDI Configuration and MIDI Filters are
memorized for each Performance. This means
that every time you recall a different Performance,
the instrument’s MIDI settings will change according to the way they were set for the recalled Performance.
○
MIDI LOCK
For example, if you were playing a midi file from
an external sequencer using the E. Piano 2 sound
from the WK6/8, you might find that every time
you start the playback of the sequence, the sound
switches to, for example, Piano1. This occurs
because of the presence of a Program change
message at the beginning of the Song. This problem can be overcome by selecting the “Program
change” MIDI IN Filter Program which “filters off”
all program change messages from the MIDI IN
data stream.
Other MIDI features
○
In another example, whenever you select a
Sound from the WK6/8 panel, a Program Change
message would also be sent to an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT, causing the expander’s sound to be changed at the same time.
To avoid changing the external sound every time
you select a WK6/8 sound, you would select a
“Program Change” MIDI OUT Filter to exclude
all program change messages from the MIDI OUT
data stream.
Common channel: this channel is primarily used
for the sending and receiving of PERFORMANCE
messages. A Program Change message received on the Common channel will not change
one of the individual sound on the keyboard. Instead, it will be interpreted as a PERFORMANCE
CHANGE message.
In another example, whenever you select a
Sound from the WK6/8 panel, a Program Change
message would also be sent to an expander connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT, causing the expander’s sound to be changed at the same time.
To avoid changing the external sound every time
you select a WK6/8 sound, you would select a
“Program Change” MIDI OUT Filter to exclude
all program change messages from the MIDI OUT
data stream.
MIDI FILTERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•64 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•65
The WK6/8 features a hidden MIDI PANIC button. This function can be used in the event of
problems or “lock-ups” during MIDI transmission
or reception.
How to perform MIDI PANIC
• If your machine locks up while working with
MIDI, carry out the MIDI Panic operation by
buttons to the right of
pressing the two
the display.
○
○
○
○
○
General MIDI: a GeneralMIDI compatibility on/
off switch.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
MIDI In Fix Velocity: allows you to receive velocity as transmitted, or to fix a set velocity value
for all note data, useful for instruments that are
not able to transmit velocity messages.
Local On/Off: a switch which isolates the WK6/
8 as a whole from its internal sound engine allowing WK6/8 to be used as a MIDI controller.
MIDI PANIC
The WK6/8 features a hidden MIDI PANIC button. This function can be used in the event of
problems or “lock-ups” during MIDI transmission
or reception.
How to perform MIDI PANIC
• If your machine locks up while working with
MIDI, carry out the MIDI Panic operation by
buttons to the right of
pressing the two
the display.
MIDI Panic sends “All Notes Off” and “Reset all Controllers” commands on all active
channels.
MIDI Panic sends “All Notes Off” and “Reset all Controllers” commands on all active
channels.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•65
MIDI PANIC
○
General MIDI: a GeneralMIDI compatibility on/
off switch.
The WK6/8 features a hidden MIDI PANIC button. This function can be used in the event of
problems or “lock-ups” during MIDI transmission
or reception.
○
MIDI In Fix Velocity: allows you to receive velocity as transmitted, or to fix a set velocity value
for all note data, useful for instruments that are
not able to transmit velocity messages.
○
Local On/Off: a switch which isolates the WK6/
8 as a whole from its internal sound engine allowing WK6/8 to be used as a MIDI controller.
Local On/Off: a switch which isolates the WK6/
8 as a whole from its internal sound engine allowing WK6/8 to be used as a MIDI controller.
○
How to perform MIDI PANIC
• If your machine locks up while working with
MIDI, carry out the MIDI Panic operation by
pressing the two
buttons to the right of
the display.
MIDI In Fix Velocity: allows you to receive velocity as transmitted, or to fix a set velocity value
for all note data, useful for instruments that are
not able to transmit velocity messages.
MIDI PANIC
MIDI Panic sends “All Notes Off” and “Reset all Controllers” commands on all active
channels.
General MIDI: a GeneralMIDI compatibility on/
off switch.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Guide 2•65
2•66 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•66 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2•66 User Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Reference
Guide
Reference
Guide
• 3 Disk & Hard Disk
• 3 Disk & Hard Disk
• 4 Preload
• 4 Preload
• 5 Selection/Help
• 5 Selection/Help
• 6 Songs MIDI Files & Song Recording
• 6 Songs MIDI Files & Song Recording
• 7 Edit Song
• 7 Edit Song
• 8 User Style recording
• 8 User Style recording
• 9 Edit Style
• 9 Edit Style
• 10 Edit Effects
• 10 Edit Effects
• 11 Edit MIDI
• 11 Edit MIDI
• 12 Edit Mixer
• 11 Edit MIDI
• 10 Edit Effects
• 9 Edit Style
• 8 User Style recording
• 7 Edit Song
• 6 Songs MIDI Files & Song Recording
• 5 Selection/Help
• 4 Preload
• 3 Disk & Hard Disk
Reference
Guide
• 17 Edit General
• 13 Edit Controllers/Pads
• 16 Edit Sound/Sample Translator
• 14 Edit Tracks
• 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch
• 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch
• 14 Edit Tracks
• 16 Edit Sound/Sample Translator
• 13 Edit Controllers/Pads
• 17 Edit General
• 12 Edit Mixer
• 12 Edit Mixer
• 13 Edit Controllers/Pads
• 14 Edit Tracks
• 15 Edit Perf Sound/Sound Patch
• 16 Edit Sound/Sample Translator
• 17 Edit General
Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk 3•1
Real-Perf
Block n
Block 3
Block 2
Block 1
Files are organized in sub-directories which are
contained in a Block. The Block reflects the
structure of the instrument’s internal RAM, as illustrated below.
Data is stored on disks in the form of Files (a
Song, a Performance, a Style, a Setup or a
Block).
Files & the block
conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI
eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders
the first three banks of all WK6/8 Series instruments fully compatible.
WK6/8 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data
disks originating from non-Generalmusic instruments. Song exchanges with other instruments
requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI file on
MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720 Kb formats).
Files & the block
Data is stored on disks in the form of Files (a
Song, a Performance, a Style, a Setup or a
Block).
Files are organized in sub-directories which are
contained in a Block. The Block reflects the
structure of the instrument’s internal RAM, as illustrated below.
Real-Perf
Songs
Group 1
...
Group 8
1
...
16
Group 1
...
Group 12
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
○
3•1
Setup
Sounds
Setup
Group 1
...
Group 16
RAMlock)
(1 B
DISKlocks)
(n B
WK6/8 is able to initialize disks for every format.
It is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles
and Songs from WK4, SK, PS, WX and SX Series disks.
Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3
and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block,
but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suitable for Hard Disks.
When you load a Block using the Load Single
Block command, the entire contents of RAM are
updated.
• 3 Disk & Hard disk
○
Group 1
...
Group 12
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
GENERAL INFORMATION
○
conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI
eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders
the first three banks of all WK6/8 Series instruments fully compatible.
Disk & Hard Disk
○
Style-Perf
User Styles
Working with disks provides you with a means of
building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds
and Songs that you can load into the WK6/8 RAM
memory at any time. As you become more familiar with your WK6/8, you’ll discover the practical uses of working with disks, because of the
flexibility and power that they offer.
○
WK6/8 recognizes the following formats:
• WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 Mb);
• standard MS-DOS (1.44Mb);
• Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
Group 1
...
Group 8
1
...
16
Style-Perf
User Styles
Real-Perf
Songs
Group 1
...
Group 16
WK6/8 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data
disks originating from non-Generalmusic instruments. Song exchanges with other instruments
requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI file on
MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720 Kb formats).
○
Block n
Block 3
Block 2
Block 1
Block
Floppy disks and the Hard disk
○
Block
○
Songs
○
Group 1
...
Group 8
○
Real-Perf
○
Songs
○
Group 1
...
Group 8
○
1
...
16
Style-Perf
○
1
...
16
○
Group 1
...
Group 12
○
Style-Perf
○
The WK6/8 can handle floppy disks and hard
disks of the following types.
• Floppy disks: 3.5" high density (HD) and
double density (DD).
• Hard disk: a 2,5” IDE or E-IDE unit with a
capacity of 2 Gigabytes (max.). Installation
requires the Generalmusic HDisk kit which
also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk
has faster access times and more convenient than floppies. The WK6/8 with a factory
installed Hard disk is write-protected to avoid
accidental cancellation of the files it contains.
However, the protection can be deactivated
(see “Hard Disk Protection” option in the Disk
Utility page).
User Styles
Group 1
...
Group 12
○
○
Floppy disks and the Hard disk
User Styles
When you load a Block using the Load Single
Block command, the entire contents of RAM are
updated.
○
○
Working with disks provides you with a means of
building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds
and Songs that you can load into the WK6/8 RAM
memory at any time. As you become more familiar with your WK6/8, you’ll discover the practical uses of working with disks, because of the
flexibility and power that they offer.
Setup
DISKlocks)
(n B
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block,
but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suitable for Hard Disks.
○
○
Floppy disk formats
Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.
○
○
Sounds
Setup
Group 1
...
Group 16
○
○
Sounds
Sounds
RAMlock)
(1 B
○
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Setup
Group 1
...
Group 16
○
The WK6/8 can handle floppy disks and hard
disks of the following types.
• Floppy disks: 3.5" high density (HD) and
double density (DD).
• Hard disk: a 2,5” IDE or E-IDE unit with a
capacity of 2 Gigabytes (max.). Installation
requires the Generalmusic HDisk kit which
also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk
has faster access times and more convenient than floppies. The WK6/8 with a factory
installed Hard disk is write-protected to avoid
accidental cancellation of the files it contains.
However, the protection can be deactivated
(see “Hard Disk Protection” option in the Disk
Utility page).
Group 1
...
Group 12
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
○
GENERAL INFORMATION
Setup
Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3
and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
Style-Perf
User Styles
○
Sounds
Group 1
...
Group 12
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
○
• 3 Disk & Hard disk
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
User Styles
Group 1
...
Group 8
1
...
16
Style-Perf
Floppy disk formats
WK6/8 is able to initialize disks for every format.
It is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles
and Songs from WK4, SK, PS, WX and SX Series disks.
Real-Perf
Songs
○
Group 1
...
Group 16
Group 1
...
Group 8
1
...
16
○
Group 1
...
Group 16
Real-Perf
Songs
Sounds
WK6/8 recognizes the following formats:
• WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 Mb);
• standard MS-DOS (1.44Mb);
• Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
Block n
Block 3
Block 2
Block 1
Block
○
Floppy disk formats
Files are organized in sub-directories which are
contained in a Block. The Block reflects the
structure of the instrument’s internal RAM, as illustrated below.
○
DISKlocks)
(n B
Data is stored on disks in the form of Files (a
Song, a Performance, a Style, a Setup or a
Block).
○
RAMlock)
(1 B
Files & the block
○
Illustration showing how data is organized in RAM and disks.
The WK6/8 can handle floppy disks and hard
disks of the following types.
• Floppy disks: 3.5" high density (HD) and
double density (DD).
• Hard disk: a 2,5” IDE or E-IDE unit with a
capacity of 2 Gigabytes (max.). Installation
requires the Generalmusic HDisk kit which
also expands the System-RAM. A Hard disk
has faster access times and more convenient than floppies. The WK6/8 with a factory
installed Hard disk is write-protected to avoid
accidental cancellation of the files it contains.
However, the protection can be deactivated
(see “Hard Disk Protection” option in the Disk
Utility page).
○
WK6/8 recognizes the following formats:
• WK6/8 expanded format (1.6 Mb);
• standard MS-DOS (1.44Mb);
• Atari ST/Falcon format (720 Kb).
Floppy disks and the Hard disk
WK6/8 cannot read Song, Style and Sound data
disks originating from non-Generalmusic instruments. Song exchanges with other instruments
requires that the Song be saved as a MIDI file on
MS-DOS formatted disks (1.44 Mb or 720 Kb formats).
○
Floppy disks can contain more than one Block,
but as a unit of storage, the Block is more suitable for Hard Disks.
Working with disks provides you with a means of
building a library of Performances, Styles, Sounds
and Songs that you can load into the WK6/8 RAM
memory at any time. As you become more familiar with your WK6/8, you’ll discover the practical uses of working with disks, because of the
flexibility and power that they offer.
conforms to the GMX format, a General MIDI
eXtended format by Generalmusic which renders
the first three banks of all WK6/8 Series instruments fully compatible.
○
WK6/8 is able to initialize disks for every format.
It is also possible to load Ram-Sounds, Styles
and Songs from WK4, SK, PS, WX and SX Series disks.
GENERAL INFORMATION
○
When you load a Block using the Load Single
Block command, the entire contents of RAM are
updated.
• 3 Disk & Hard disk
○
Song disks of other formats, such as the WK3
and PS1500 Series, are recognized if the data
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•1
3•2 Reference Guide
File Quantity
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Files can be handled as Single elements, as a
Group of files or as an entire set of file types (All),
as shown in the following table:
7. H Disk Utility Useful functions for the Hard disk
(formatting, HD check, restore,
backup, protection).
6. Floppy Utility Useful functions for floppy disks (formatting, disk name).
File Types
The types of File encountered when working in
the WK6/8 Disk environment are identified by a
name and, in some cases an extension. The table which follows summarizes the file types encountered:
File Types
The types of File encountered when working in
the WK6/8 Disk environment are identified by a
name and, in some cases an extension. The table which follows summarizes the file types encountered:
Data stored in floppy disk, hard disk or RAM can
be Loaded, Saved, Erased, Copied or Moved
using one of the following methods:
• as single elements (Single Song, Single User
Style, Single Performance, Single MidiFile,
etc.);
• as a Group of files (User Style Group, Song
Group, etc.);
• as an “ALL” data set containing file types of
all Groups (All Songs, All Sounds, All Style
Groups, All Performance Groups, etc.).
FILE QUANTITY
ROM Style Perf banks excluding
USER.
USER Styles and relative
Style-Perfs.
Load, Save, Erase Copy, Move operations
General settings for MIDI channels
video, pedals & pads.
RAM-Sound and RAM
All
All Groups of a file type (all Sounds,
All Performances, All Styles, etc.).
Sound
Performances Real Perf Groups.
All Groups of a file type (all Sounds,
All Performances, All Styles, etc.).
The DISK commands
Saves data to disk.
3. Erase
Erases data from RAM or disk.
4. Copy
Copies data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
5. Move
Moves data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
All file types except MIDI files.
Group
Description
Type of File
A single file.
Single
FILE QUANTITY
Files can be handled as Single elements, as a
Group of files or as an entire set of file types (All),
as shown in the following table:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
File Quantity
○
File Types
The types of File encountered when working in
the WK6/8 Disk environment are identified by a
name and, in some cases an extension. The table which follows summarizes the file types encountered:
○
The Main DISK pages
The Disk commands a spread across 7 main
pages, each identifying a principal Disk operation:
2. Save
Block
○
MIDI files (“Name”.MID)
Format 0 or 1.
Setup
○
MIDI file
General settings for MIDI channels
video, pedals & pads.
All the files assigned to one of the
buttons of the Style Groups (ROM
and User), Performance Groups or
Sound Groups. It is also possible to
load to 2 “virtual” Song Groups.
7. H Disk Utility Useful functions for the Hard disk
(formatting, HD check, restore,
backup, protection).
WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS format;
WX2 format (“Name”.WXS);
SX2 format (Name”.SXS).
Loads data to RAM.
-Sound.
6. Floppy Utility Useful functions for floppy disks (formatting, disk name).
Song
RAM-Sound and RAM
Moves data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
The DISK commands
Sound
Copies data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
5. Move
USER Styles and relative
Style-Perfs.
1. Load
All
Erases data from RAM or disk.
4. Copy
User Style
Performances Real Perf Groups.
All Groups of a file type (all Sounds,
All Performances, All Styles, etc.).
Saves data to disk.
3. Erase
Data stored in floppy disk, hard disk or RAM can
be Loaded, Saved, Erased, Copied or Moved
using one of the following methods:
• as single elements (Single Song, Single User
Style, Single Performance, Single MidiFile,
etc.);
• as a Group of files (User Style Group, Song
Group, etc.);
• as an “ALL” data set containing file types of
all Groups (All Songs, All Sounds, All Style
Groups, All Performance Groups, etc.).
ROM Style Perf banks excluding
USER.
2. Save
Load, Save, Erase Copy, Move operations
Style-Perf.
Loads data to RAM.
USER Styles and relative
Style-Perfs.
1. Load
ROM Style Perf banks excluding
USER.
User Style
The Main DISK pages
The Disk commands a spread across 7 main
pages, each identifying a principal Disk operation:
WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS format;
WX2 format (“Name”.WXS);
SX2 format (Name”.SXS).
The «Disk» commands are specified in the main
Disk pages by combining the File Quantity in one
column with the File Type in the other:
• select the file quantity (Single, Group, All);
• select the file type (Sound, Performance,
Song, etc.).
Example: To load a single Song, specify «SINGLE» and «SONG» in the main LOAD page.
MIDI files (“Name”.MID)
Format 0 or 1.
Song
The «Disk» commands are specified in the main
Disk pages by combining the File Quantity in one
column with the File Type in the other:
• select the file quantity (Single, Group, All);
• select the file type (Sound, Performance,
Song, etc.).
Example: To load a single Song, specify «SINGLE» and «SONG» in the main LOAD page.
-Sound.
Style-Perf.
The DISK commands
WK6/8, WK4, SK, PS format;
WX2 format (“Name”.WXS);
SX2 format (Name”.SXS).
MIDI file
Setup
All the files assigned to one of the
buttons of the Style Groups (ROM
and User), Performance Groups or
Sound Groups. It is also possible to
load to 2 “virtual” Song Groups.
MIDI files (“Name”.MID)
Format 0 or 1.
Song
Group
MIDI file
User Style
All file types except MIDI files.
The Main DISK pages
The Disk commands a spread across 7 main
pages, each identifying a principal Disk operation:
Style-Perf.
All
Block
Loads data to RAM.
Performances Real Perf Groups.
All the files assigned to one of the
buttons of the Style Groups (ROM
and User), Performance Groups or
Sound Groups. It is also possible to
load to 2 “virtual” Song Groups.
1. Load
-Sound.
A single file.
Saves data to disk.
RAM-Sound and RAM
Single
2. Save
Sound
Description
Erases data from RAM or disk.
General settings for MIDI channels
video, pedals & pads.
Type of File
3. Erase
Group
A single file.
4. Copy
All file types except MIDI files.
Files can be handled as Single elements, as a
Group of files or as an entire set of file types (All),
as shown in the following table:
FILE QUANTITY
Copies data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
Setup
Single
5. Move
Block
Description
Moves data from floppy disk to hard
disk or vice versa, from disk to disk
or from RAM to RAM.
Type of File
File Quantity
6. Floppy Utility Useful functions for floppy disks (formatting, disk name).
7. H Disk Utility Useful functions for the Hard disk
(formatting, HD check, restore,
backup, protection).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The «Disk» commands are specified in the main
Disk pages by combining the File Quantity in one
column with the File Type in the other:
• select the file quantity (Single, Group, All);
• select the file type (Sound, Performance,
Song, etc.).
Example: To load a single Song, specify «SINGLE» and «SONG» in the main LOAD page.
Load, Save, Erase Copy, Move operations
Data stored in floppy disk, hard disk or RAM can
be Loaded, Saved, Erased, Copied or Moved
using one of the following methods:
• as single elements (Single Song, Single User
Style, Single Performance, Single MidiFile,
etc.);
• as a Group of files (User Style Group, Song
Group, etc.);
• as an “ALL” data set containing file types of
all Groups (All Songs, All Sounds, All Style
Groups, All Performance Groups, etc.).
Disk & Hard Disk 3•3
Single, Group, All
MIDIFile
Single
Empty locations are represented by a broken line.
If you select a destination already occupied by a
file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming
one.
○
○
○
○
The file selector
○
Some file types cannot be handled more than
one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only
be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE command. Some files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while others are limited to Single and All sets only.
The table below shows the valid commands for
each file type:
File Type
Command
Block
Single
Setup
Single
Sound
Single, Group, All
Real Perfs
Single, Group, All
Style Perfs
Single, Group, All
User Styles
Single, Group, All
Song
Single, Group, All
MIDIFile
Single
The File Selector corresponds to the second level
of disk operations and is accessed by confirming
the command specified in the main page. Once
in the file selector, you can select the source
files and respective destinations.
The file selector is divided into two columns
showing (a) the source file directory (a contents
list) and (b) the destination directory. All «Disk»
operations, except the Erase command and the
Utility, copy or move files from a source to a destination (e.g. from disk to RAM).
The direction of the copy or move operation is
shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the
direction and the names of the source and destination files.
The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard
Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the
Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3.
Empty locations are represented by a broken line.
If you select a destination already occupied by a
file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming
one.
Single, Group, All
The file selector is divided into two columns
showing (a) the source file directory (a contents
list) and (b) the destination directory. All «Disk»
operations, except the Erase command and the
Utility, copy or move files from a source to a destination (e.g. from disk to RAM).
Command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•3
The file selector
○
(b)
Destination
Directory
Source
Directory
available
memory
«Load Single Song» File selector
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Limitations
The File Selector corresponds to the second level
of disk operations and is accessed by confirming
the command specified in the main page. Once
in the file selector, you can select the source
files and respective destinations.
○
(a)
Some file types cannot be handled more than
one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only
be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE command. Some files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while others are limited to Single and All sets only.
○
The table below shows the valid commands for
each file type:
○
File Type
○
Single
○
Main «Load» page
Block
«Load Single Song» File selector
directory
file type refresh
Single
quantity
Setup
Destination
Directory
Source
Directory
available
memory
Single, Group, All
(b)
destination page selection device
)
(
selection
device
Sound
Main «Load» page
directory
file type refresh
The direction of the copy or move operation is
shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the
direction and the names of the source and destination files.
(a)
quantity
Single, Group, All
source
device
destination page selection device
)
(
selection
device
Real Perfs
source
device
Style Perfs
Song
The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard
Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the
Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3.
○
Single, Group, All
Single, Group, All
○
User Styles
User Styles
○
Single, Group, All
Single, Group, All
○
Song
Style Perfs
○
The source device can be a floppy disk, the Hard
Disk or RAM. The device is selected with the
Soft buttons F1, F2 and F3.
Single, Group, All
○
Single
Real Perfs
○
MIDIFile
Single, Group, All
○
Empty locations are represented by a broken line.
If you select a destination already occupied by a
file, the existing file is replaced by the incoming
one.
Sound
○
destination page selection device
device
)
(
selection
Single
○
source
device
Setup
The direction of the copy or move operation is
shown in the status bar by an arrow pointing the
direction and the names of the source and destination files.
○
(b)
Single
Limitations
(a)
Block
○
Destination
Directory
Command
○
Source
Directory
File Type
○
«Load Single Song» File selector
The table below shows the valid commands for
each file type:
The file selector is divided into two columns
showing (a) the source file directory (a contents
list) and (b) the destination directory. All «Disk»
operations, except the Erase command and the
Utility, copy or move files from a source to a destination (e.g. from disk to RAM).
○
available
memory
The File Selector corresponds to the second level
of disk operations and is accessed by confirming
the command specified in the main page. Once
in the file selector, you can select the source
files and respective destinations.
○
directory
file type refresh
Some file types cannot be handled more than
one at a time. MIDI Files, for example, can only
be handled using the SINGLE MIDI FILE command. Some files can be handled as Single elements, Groups and All sets, while others are limited to Single and All sets only.
○
quantity
The file selector
Main «Load» page
Limitations
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•3
3•4 Reference Guide
○
The general «Disk» procedure
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use the following procedure as a reference for
all the Disk operations. Some specific examples
are also explained in this chapter.
1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a
disk into the drive.
The general «Disk» procedure
Use the following procedure as a reference for
all the Disk operations. Some specific examples
are also explained in this chapter.
1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a
disk into the drive.
1
F8
F7
F6
F5
If you are working with the Hard Disk (optional accessory), simply press DISK.
1
If you are working with the Hard Disk (optional accessory), simply press DISK.
F4
F3
F2
2. Press DISK and go to the page relating to the
desired Disk function (Load, Save, Erase, Copy,
Move, Utility).
2. Press DISK and go to the page relating to the
desired Disk function (Load, Save, Erase, Copy,
Move, Utility).
F1
3
DISK
H. D
+
3. Select, if necessary, the device being handled with
the soft buttons F1, F2, F3.
+
2
Use the
buttons to scroll through the
main disk pages. The example shows the
main Load page.
H. D
DISK
3
DISK
2
H. D
+
Load and Save operations show the Floppy
Disk and Hard Disk options. If you are working with the Hard disk, the H.D. LED will turn
on during the course of an operation.
Erase, Copy and Move operations show the
RAM option in addition to Floppy and Hard
Disk.
Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.
2. Press DISK and go to the page relating to the
desired Disk function (Load, Save, Erase, Copy,
Move, Utility).
Load and Save operations show the Floppy
Disk and Hard Disk options. If you are working with the Hard disk, the H.D. LED will turn
on during the course of an operation.
Erase, Copy and Move operations show the
RAM option in addition to Floppy and Hard
Disk.
Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.
2
Use the
buttons to scroll through the
main disk pages. The example shows the
main Load page.
3. Select, if necessary, the device being handled with
the soft buttons F1, F2, F3.
3. Select, if necessary, the device being handled with
the soft buttons F1, F2, F3.
Load and Save operations show the Floppy
Disk and Hard Disk options. If you are working with the Hard disk, the H.D. LED will turn
on during the course of an operation.
Erase, Copy and Move operations show the
RAM option in addition to Floppy and Hard
Disk.
Utility is an exception, discussed afterwards.
Use the
buttons to scroll through the
main disk pages. The example shows the
main Load page.
3
F1
F1
F2
F2
If you are working with the Hard Disk (optional accessory), simply press DISK.
F3
F3
F4
F4
F5
F5
1. If you are working with floppy disks, insert a
disk into the drive.
F6
F6
F7
F7
F8
F8
1
Use the following procedure as a reference for
all the Disk operations. Some specific examples
are also explained in this chapter.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The general «Disk» procedure
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk 3•5
4. Specify the desired command with the directional
arrows (for example, «Load Single Song»).
○
4
○
○
○
○
○
4. Specify the desired command with the directional
arrows (for example, «Load Single Song»).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use the button to move into the quantity
column and select the file quantity (Single,
Group, All) with the / buttons.
Pass over to the other column with the button and select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.
Use the button to move into the quantity
column and select the file quantity (Single,
Group, All) with the / buttons.
Pass over to the other column with the button and select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.
5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
The “Wait Please” message appears for an
instant before opening the File Selector.
The file selector now shows the source directory consisting of one or more Blocks to
choose from, and the destination directory
representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case
the Song memory).
This display example shows the floppy disk
directory (a) with a single Block file, and the
instrument’s RAM directory (b) showing the
empty Song memory. The disk name is
shown at the top of the left column (c). If the
disk has no name, either “NO NAME” or
“UNTITLED” or other will be shown.
The “Wait Please” message appears for an
instant before opening the File Selector.
The file selector now shows the source directory consisting of one or more Blocks to
choose from, and the destination directory
representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case
the Song memory).
This display example shows the floppy disk
directory (a) with a single Block file, and the
instrument’s RAM directory (b) showing the
empty Song memory. The disk name is
shown at the top of the left column (c). If the
disk has no name, either “NO NAME” or
“UNTITLED” or other will be shown.
○
○
○
○
Note: At this point, to exit from «Edit Disk»,
press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The contents of the opened Block reveals the
file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
(a)
○
○
ENTER
○
(b)
6
TE
○
ESCAPE
The contents of the opened Block reveals the
file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).
(d)
○
TE
ESCAPE
6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.
ESCAPE
○
ENTER
Note: At this point, to exit from «Edit Disk»,
press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.
(c)
○
○
©
TE
TE
○
ENTER
○
(d)
At the bottom of both columns, information
regarding the selected file will appear. In this
case, the left column shows the date that the
file was created and its dimensions expressed
in Kb (d). The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.
At the bottom of both columns, information
regarding the selected file will appear. In this
case, the left column shows the date that the
file was created and its dimensions expressed
in Kb (d). The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.
Use the button to move into the quantity
column and select the file quantity (Single,
Group, All) with the / buttons.
Pass over to the other column with the button and select the file type (Sound, Performance, Song, etc.) with the / buttons.
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•5
4. Specify the desired command with the directional
arrows (for example, «Load Single Song»).
○
○
(c)
5. Press ENTER to confirm the command and open
the File Selector.
○
©
5
○
6
ENTER
○
(b)
ESCAPE
○
(a)
(b)
○
ESCAPE
(a)
○
○
6
○
○
5
The “Wait Please” message appears for an
instant before opening the File Selector.
The file selector now shows the source directory consisting of one or more Blocks to
choose from, and the destination directory
representing the sector of RAM corresponding to the file type being handled (in this case
the Song memory).
This display example shows the floppy disk
directory (a) with a single Block file, and the
instrument’s RAM directory (b) showing the
empty Song memory. The disk name is
shown at the top of the left column (c). If the
disk has no name, either “NO NAME” or
“UNTITLED” or other will be shown.
○
TE
TE
○
○
ENTER
ENTER
○
(c)
© Note: At this point, to exit from «Edit Disk»,
press DISK. Escape exits the File selector.
○
ESCAPE
○
5
6. Select a Block and press ENTER to gain access.
○
(d)
○
The contents of the opened Block reveals the
file type selected in step 4 (in this case, several Songs in numerical order).
○
At the bottom of both columns, information
regarding the selected file will appear. In this
case, the left column shows the date that the
file was created and its dimensions expressed
in Kb (d). The right column is blank and represents the empty destination.
○
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•5
3•6 Reference Guide
7. If necessary, select the source file.
○
ESCAPE
or
+
H. D
DISK
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
10
ESCAPE
9
12
3•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7. If necessary, select the source file.
Use the / buttons to select the source
file from the active column. If you are not in
the desired column, move over with the /
buttons.
DISK
○
TEMPO / DATA
Move into the destination column with the /
buttons and use the / buttons to select
a destination.
Empty locations are identified by a broken
line. If you select an existing file, it will be
erased by the incoming file.
or
9
ENTER
TEM
9. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.
You will be prompted with “Are you sure?”.
ESCAPE
10. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
With ENTER, the command is executed and
a dialog window opens showing a message
relating to the current operation: For example, if you are loading a single Song, the
message will say: “Loading Single Song....”
When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed.
11. Repeat steps 7, 8, 9 and 10 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
To select another file from a different block,
return to the source column, press Escape
to escape the current Block, press Escape
again to exit the File Selector, select another
Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.
12. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit «Disk».
Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations
and remembers the last page selected.
Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the
current Block, (2) close the file selector and
(3) escape from «Disk».
H. D
+
7/8
8. If necessary, select the destination.
TEM
ENTER
ESCAPE
7/8
○
○
7. If necessary, select the source file.
TEM
○
○
Use the / buttons to select the source
file from the active column. If you are not in
the desired column, move over with the /
buttons.
ENTER
○
○
Move into the destination column with the /
buttons and use the / buttons to select
a destination.
Empty locations are identified by a broken
line. If you select an existing file, it will be
erased by the incoming file.
○
○
9. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.
○
○
You will be prompted with “Are you sure?”.
○
○
10. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
11
Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations
and remembers the last page selected.
Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the
current Block, (2) close the file selector and
(3) escape from «Disk».
○
TEM
ESCAPE
12. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit «Disk».
○
○
With ENTER, the command is executed and
a dialog window opens showing a message
relating to the current operation: For example, if you are loading a single Song, the
message will say: “Loading Single Song....”
When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed.
11
To select another file from a different block,
return to the source column, press Escape
to escape the current Block, press Escape
again to exit the File Selector, select another
Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.
○
○
11. Repeat steps 7, 8, 9 and 10 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
10
ENTER
11. Repeat steps 7, 8, 9 and 10 until your destination is organized according to your requirements.
○
○
To select another file from a different block,
return to the source column, press Escape
to escape the current Block, press Escape
again to exit the File Selector, select another
Block, press Enter to gain access and continue as already described.
With ENTER, the command is executed and
a dialog window opens showing a message
relating to the current operation: For example, if you are loading a single Song, the
message will say: “Loading Single Song....”
When the dialog window closes, the operation has been executed.
○
○
ESCAPE
10. Press ENTER again to execute the command, or
ESCAPE to cancel the operation.
○
○
8. If necessary, select the destination.
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
12
ENTER
You will be prompted with “Are you sure?”.
○
○
12. Press DISK (or ESCAPE three times) to exit «Disk».
9
9. Press ENTER to confirm your choice.
○
○
Pressing DISK escapes the Disk operations
and remembers the last page selected.
Pressing ESCAPE allows you to (1) close the
current Block, (2) close the file selector and
(3) escape from «Disk».
Move into the destination column with the /
buttons and use the / buttons to select
a destination.
Empty locations are identified by a broken
line. If you select an existing file, it will be
erased by the incoming file.
○
7/8
Use the / buttons to select the source
file from the active column. If you are not in
the desired column, move over with the /
buttons.
8. If necessary, select the destination.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
11
12
ENTER
DISK
H. D
+
or
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
Disk & Hard Disk 3•7
○
Load Operations
The load operations operate in the direction
Source –> RAM where the source can be Floppy
disk or Hard disk.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Operations
○
○
○
○
The load operations operate in the direction
Source –> RAM where the source can be Floppy
disk or Hard disk.
1
1
ESCAPE
or
Have a disk ready containing the data you wish
to load. These can be WK6/8 format disks, disks
of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series,
and MIDI file disks. If you are working with the
Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK
option with soft button F2 and proceed from point
3 below.
+
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
TE
+
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
ENTER
H. D
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
3
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
DISK
2
H. D
+
From here, proceed as described for the Load
operations on the pages which follow.
DISK
THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE
DISK
2
NOTE: All Load Single operations also feature a SEARCH RESOURCE function which
allows you to search for a single element
(Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User
Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the
Search Resource is explained at the end of
this chapter.
H. D
4
THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE
4. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
Have a disk ready containing the data you wish
to load. These can be WK6/8 format disks, disks
of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series,
and MIDI file disks. If you are working with the
Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK
option with soft button F2 and proceed from point
3 below.
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the
File Selector.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the
File Selector.
3. Specify the load operation required (example,
Load SingleSong) then press ENTER to open the
File Selector.
If the main Load page is not shown, use the
left page scroll button (
) to open it.
TE
H. D
DISK
TEMPO / DATA
H. D
or
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
DISK
H. D
or
+
ESCAPE
1
○
ENTER
4
4. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
DISK
+
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•7
○
○
○
○
Load Operations
4
TE
The load operations operate in the direction
Source –> RAM where the source can be Floppy
disk or Hard disk.
ENTER
ENTER
Have a disk ready containing the data you wish
to load. These can be WK6/8 format disks, disks
of previous formats, such as WX or SX Series,
and MIDI file disks. If you are working with the
Hard Disk, press DISK and select the HARD DISK
option with soft button F2 and proceed from point
3 below.
ESCAPE
4. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
NOTE: All Load Single operations also feature a SEARCH RESOURCE function which
allows you to search for a single element
(Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User
Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the
Search Resource is explained at the end of
this chapter.
THE GENERAL LOAD PROCEDURE
+
ENTER
2
NOTE: All Load Single operations also feature a SEARCH RESOURCE function which
allows you to search for a single element
(Block, Sound, Real Perf, Style Perf, User
Style, Song, MIDI File). How to use the
Search Resource is explained at the end of
this chapter.
3
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
From here, proceed as described for the Load
operations on the pages which follow.
3
2. Press DISK to open the main Load page.
From here, proceed as described for the Load
operations on the pages which follow.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•7
3•8 Reference Guide
LOAD SINGLE
directories containing other MIDI Files.
The Load Single command offers the following
possibilities:
Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17
is created automatically in order to be able to play
along with the Song in playback.
○
Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data
contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style
Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain
information relating to the status of the instrument’s general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio
Mic/Line settings, the MIDI Lock status, MIDI lock
configurations, Pedals/Pads Lock status, Pedals
and Pads configuration). Load a disk-based
Setup file when you want to change the general
status of the instrument in a single step instead
of programming the individual parameters that
constitute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into
RAM does not affect other data. Only one Setup
file resides in each Block.
Load Single Song
Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operation allows you to choose single Song files from
various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in
its own format (Song), in previous compatible
formats (WK4, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI
file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound
Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well
as RAM -Sounds. The «Load Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots. You can choose to load your RamSounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you load to the original Sound Group
to facilitate future selection.
Load Single Sound also features a Sound Search
function. Owing to the large WK6/8 Sound library, you might find it easier to pass directly to a
Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound
that occupies a particular bank. From there, you
can then easily select a destination for the Sound
being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
Loads a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4).
Load Single Block
Load Single Sound
Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17
is created automatically in order to be able to play
along with the Song in playback.
The Load Single command offers the following
possibilities:
directories containing other MIDI Files.
LOAD SINGLE
○
○
○
3•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Single Setup
Load Single Sound
Load Single User Style
Load Single MIDI File
Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data
contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style
Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances).
○
Rewrites the entire contents of RAM. Block data
contains: Setup file, Sounds, Performances, Style
Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances), Songs (and relative Performances).
Load Single Setup
○
Load Single Block
Loads a single Performance (RealTime) to any
of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups
(1-8). The incoming Performances overwrite
those in RAM. The original factory-set Performances can be restored at any time with the Restore Perf. operation.
Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain
information relating to the status of the instrument’s general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio
Mic/Line settings, the MIDI Lock status, MIDI lock
configurations, Pedals/Pads Lock status, Pedals
and Pads configuration). Load a disk-based
Setup file when you want to change the general
status of the instrument in a single step instead
of programming the individual parameters that
constitute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into
RAM does not affect other data. Only one Setup
file resides in each Block.
○
Important: When you load a MIDI File, track 17
is created automatically in order to be able to play
along with the Song in playback.
Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operation allows you to choose single Song files from
various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in
its own format (Song), in previous compatible
formats (WK4, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI
file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
Load Single Performance
○
The Load Single command offers the following
possibilities:
Loads a single Performance (RealTime) to any
of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups
(1-8). The incoming Performances overwrite
those in RAM. The original factory-set Performances can be restored at any time with the Restore Perf. operation.
Load Single Song
○
directories containing other MIDI Files.
Load Single Performance
Loads a single Performance (RealTime) to any
of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups
(1-8). The incoming Performances overwrite
those in RAM. The original factory-set Performances can be restored at any time with the Restore Perf. operation.
○
LOAD SINGLE
Load Single Song
Loads Songs to RAM one at a time. This operation allows you to choose single Song files from
various different blocks and load to RAM in a preferred order. WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in
its own format (Song), in previous compatible
formats (WK4, SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI
file format 0 or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
○
○
Load Single Performance
Load Single User Style
○
○
Load Single MIDI File
○
○
Loads a Setup file into RAM. Setup files contain
information relating to the status of the instrument’s general functions (Tuning/Scale, Audio
Mic/Line settings, the MIDI Lock status, MIDI lock
configurations, Pedals/Pads Lock status, Pedals
and Pads configuration). Load a disk-based
Setup file when you want to change the general
status of the instrument in a single step instead
of programming the individual parameters that
constitute a Setup file. Loading a Setup file into
RAM does not affect other data. Only one Setup
file resides in each Block.
Loads a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4).
Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time
Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically converts the files into WK6/8 format Songs. The
«Load MIDI File» procedure is almost identical
to «Load Single Song». In this case instead of
Song names, you’ll see a list of files in the source
directory with the “.MID” extension. In some
cases, other names appear which represent sub○
○
Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound
Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well
as RAM -Sounds. The «Load Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots. You can choose to load your RamSounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you load to the original Sound Group
to facilitate future selection.
Load Single Sound also features a Sound Search
function. Owing to the large WK6/8 Sound library, you might find it easier to pass directly to a
Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound
that occupies a particular bank. From there, you
can then easily select a destination for the Sound
being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
Load Single User Style
Load Single MIDI File
○
○
Load Single Sound
Loads single disk-based sounds to the Sound
Bank destinations. Loads Ram-Sounds as well
as RAM -Sounds. The «Load Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots. You can choose to load your RamSounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you load to the original Sound Group
to facilitate future selection.
Load Single Sound also features a Sound Search
function. Owing to the large WK6/8 Sound library, you might find it easier to pass directly to a
Sound bank by specifying the name of a Sound
that occupies a particular bank. From there, you
can then easily select a destination for the Sound
being loaded. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
Load Single Setup
○
Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time
Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically converts the files into WK6/8 format Songs. The
«Load MIDI File» procedure is almost identical
to «Load Single Song». In this case instead of
Song names, you’ll see a list of files in the source
directory with the “.MID” extension. In some
cases, other names appear which represent sub-
Load Single Block
○
Loads disk-based MIDI files to RAM one at a time
Loading MIDI Files into RAM automatically converts the files into WK6/8 format Songs. The
«Load MIDI File» procedure is almost identical
to «Load Single Song». In this case instead of
Song names, you’ll see a list of files in the source
directory with the “.MID” extension. In some
cases, other names appear which represent sub○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Loads a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4).
Disk & Hard Disk 3•9
Load Single Style Performance
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Single Style Performance
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances to the original ROM Style
Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances to the original ROM Style
Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
Press ESCAPE to close the message and try
again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Press ESCAPE to close the message and try
again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Press ESCAPE to close the message and try
again, this time selecting the correct destination.
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
Loads a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances to the original ROM Style
Performance bank. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be loaded to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•9
○
○
○
Load Single Style Performance
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
3•9
3•10 Reference Guide
○
1/2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DISK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
H. D
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: It is recommended to load Sounds and
Samples to their original locations to facilitate the
on-board file search facilities, but you are free to
load them to any Group.
LOAD SINGLE SOUND PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
LOAD SINGLE SOUND PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
1/2
DISK
H. D
+
ENTER
○
ESCAPE
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
ENTER
○
Note: It is recommended to load Sounds and
Samples to their original locations to facilitate the
on-board file search facilities, but you are free to
load them to any Group.
ENTER
○
ESCAPE
TEM
○
ENTER
○
3
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
A
TEM
ESCAPE
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The instrument’s RAM directory shows the ROM
sounds of the first Group (Piano).
○
○
○
○
H. D
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DISK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1/2
○
ESCAPE
3
TEM
ESCAPE
4
3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and press
ENTER to gain access.
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of one Percussive Sample
(GRV.bpm 106 ) with Pr. Change and Bank
Select number 114-6.
A
4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6).
Use the
buttons to scroll the Sound
Groups (1, 2, … 15, 16). In this case, scroll
to Group 15 (Percussive - example A).
Use the directional / arrows to scroll to
the desired Bank (in this case, bank 6) and
destination (Program Change 114 - example B).
5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to
memory.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
B
5
ENTER
○
©
Note: It is recommended to load Sounds and
Samples to their original locations to facilitate the
on-board file search facilities, but you are free to
load them to any Group.
+
○
LOAD SINGLE SOUND PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
○
TEM
2. Select SINGLE SOUND from the Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector.
B
TEM
ENTER
ENTER
TEM
2. Select SINGLE SOUND from the Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector.
○
ESCAPE
○
4
5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to
memory.
○
3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and press
ENTER to gain access.
Use the
buttons to scroll the Sound
Groups (1, 2, … 15, 16). In this case, scroll
to Group 15 (Percussive - example A).
Use the directional / arrows to scroll to
the desired Bank (in this case, bank 6) and
destination (Program Change 114 - example B).
○
Use the Demo Disk 01 supplied with the instrument to load a Sample to memory. For this procedure, your instrument requires additional Sample RAM. If your WK6/8 does not have additional S-RAM, use any WK6/8 Sounds disk containing edited sounds, or have your instrument
upgraded with optional S-RAM.
A
4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6).
○
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
B
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of one Percussive Sample
(GRV.bpm 106 ) with Pr. Change and Bank
Select number 114-6.
○
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The instrument’s RAM directory shows the ROM
sounds of the first Group (Piano).
TEM
3. Select (if necessary) the Sample Block and press
ENTER to gain access.
○
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of one Percussive Sample
(GRV.bpm 106 ) with Pr. Change and Bank
Select number 114-6.
ENTER
○
Use the Demo Disk 01 supplied with the instrument to load a Sample to memory. For this procedure, your instrument requires additional Sample RAM. If your WK6/8 does not have additional S-RAM, use any WK6/8 Sounds disk containing edited sounds, or have your instrument
upgraded with optional S-RAM.
4. Select (if necessary) the Sample and its corresponding destination in RAM (114-6).
3
○
Use the
buttons to scroll the Sound
Groups (1, 2, … 15, 16). In this case, scroll
to Group 15 (Percussive - example A).
Use the directional / arrows to scroll to
the desired Bank (in this case, bank 6) and
destination (Program Change 114 - example B).
ENTER
5
ESCAPE
2. Select SINGLE SOUND from the Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector.
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc.. The instrument’s RAM directory shows the ROM
sounds of the first Group (Piano).
TEM
5. Press ENTER twice to load the Sample file to
memory.
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
ESCAPE
Use the Demo Disk 01 supplied with the instrument to load a Sample to memory. For this procedure, your instrument requires additional Sample RAM. If your WK6/8 does not have additional S-RAM, use any WK6/8 Sounds disk containing edited sounds, or have your instrument
upgraded with optional S-RAM.
+
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
○
○
TEM
3•11
The Load Group command offers a quick way of
loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks,
each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the
Style Groups cannot be “switched” - they must
be loaded to their original locations in memory.
For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be
loaded to any other location in RAM other than
Group 8.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Warning: The Group currently in memory is
overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example,
the User Style Group you are loading contains only
one User Style, all User Styles of the destination
Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and
replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your
Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk
before proceeding.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Group offers the following possibilities:
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
○
○
○
LOAD GROUP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Group Style Perf
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Warning: The Group currently in memory is
overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example,
the User Style Group you are loading contains only
one User Style, all User Styles of the destination
Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and
replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your
Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk
before proceeding.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Load Group offers the following possibilities:
Load Group Real Perf
Loads a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination.
Loads a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination.
Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Load Group User Style
Load Group Song
Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.
Loads a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination.
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Load Group Song
Load Group Song
Loads Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In
fact, in normal conditions when you press the
Song button to select a Song, the song selection
display shows two columns, left and right. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This
feature is particularly useful for the WX Series
Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.
Load Group User Style
Loads Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In
fact, in normal conditions when you press the
Song button to select a Song, the song selection
display shows two columns, left and right. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This
feature is particularly useful for the WX Series
Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.
Loads a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•11
Load Group Style Perf
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Load Group command offers a quick way of
loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks,
each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the
Style Groups cannot be “switched” - they must
be loaded to their original locations in memory.
For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be
loaded to any other location in RAM other than
Group 8.
○
○
© Warning: The Group currently in memory is
overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for example,
the User Style Group you are loading contains only
one User Style, all User Styles of the destination
Group currently in RAM will be cancelled and
replaced by the new Group. Be sure that your
Group data are safely saved to Disk or Hard Disk
before proceeding.
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
Load Group offers the following possibilities:
Load Group User Style
If you attempt to load to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
Load Group Real Perf
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Loads a Group of 8 Style Performance banks,
each bank containing up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. Unlike other Groups, the
Style Groups cannot be “switched” - they must
be loaded to their original locations in memory.
For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD) cannot be
loaded to any other location in RAM other than
Group 8.
The Load Group command offers a quick way of
loading a Groups of 8 elements at a time.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOAD GROUP
○
○
Load Group Real Perf
○
©
○
Loads Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. In
fact, in normal conditions when you press the
Song button to select a Song, the song selection
display shows two columns, left and right. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2. This
feature is particularly useful for the WX Series
Songs disks which contain Song Groups containing up to 8 Songs each.
Load Group Style Perf
Disk & Hard Disk
LOAD GROUP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•11
3•12 Reference Guide
LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE
(EXAMPLE)
○
Use the Demo Disk 01 to load a User Style Group
to memory.
1
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
DISK
H. D
+
ENTER
5
TEM
2. Select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load
page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE
SELECTOR.
User Style Groups can be interchanged. For
example, User Group 3 on floppy disk can
be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.
4. Select the User Group that you wish to load and
its corresponding destination in RAM (1, 2, 3 or
4).
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of two User Style Groups (User 3
and User 4).
5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Group
file to memory.
TEM
4
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
4
ENTER
3
TEM
TEM
ENTER
ENTER
TEM
3
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
4
ENTER
TEM
TEM
User Style Groups can be interchanged. For
example, User Group 3 on floppy disk can
be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.
3. Select the Styles Block and press ENTER to gain
access.
User Style Groups can be interchanged. For
example, User Group 3 on floppy disk can
be loaded to User Group 1 in RAM.
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of two User Style Groups (User 3
and User 4).
4. Select the User Group that you wish to load and
its corresponding destination in RAM (1, 2, 3 or
4).
3
ENTER
5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Group
file to memory.
2
3. Select the Styles Block and press ENTER to gain
access.
5. Press ENTER twice to load the User Style Group
file to memory.
4. Select the User Group that you wish to load and
its corresponding destination in RAM (1, 2, 3 or
4).
H. D
+
ESCAPE
3. Select the Styles Block and press ENTER to gain
access.
ENTER
DISK
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc..
ESCAPE
In this example, the disk directory shows the
presence of two User Style Groups (User 3
and User 4).
1
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
ESCAPE
TEM
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc..
2
ENTER
LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE
(EXAMPLE)
Use the Demo Disk 01 to load a User Style Group
to memory.
ESCAPE
2. Select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load
page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE
SELECTOR.
○
ESCAPE
The floppy disk directory may show the presence of several blocks, one containing the
Sample, another User Styles, etc..
2
+
H. D
1
DISK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOAD GROUP USER STYLE PROCEDURE
(EXAMPLE)
TEM
ESCAPE
TEM
5
ENTER
ESCAPE
Use the Demo Disk 01 to load a User Style Group
to memory.
ENTER
ENTER
1. Insert the supplied Demo Disk 01 in the disk
drive and press DISK.
5
ESCAPE
2. Select GROUP USER STYLE from the main Load
page then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE
SELECTOR.
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEM
3•13
○
Use «Load All» to load an entire set of file types
in a single step.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Warning: Use “Load ALL” with care. If, for
example, the disk-based «All User Style» data
contains only one User Style, all your User Styles
currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through
cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely
sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles
and Performances are safely stored to Disk or
Hard Disk before using the “Load ALL” procedures.
TEM
○
○
©
Warning: Use “Load ALL” with care. If, for
example, the disk-based «All User Style» data
contains only one User Style, all your User Styles
currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through
cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely
sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles
and Performances are safely stored to Disk or
Hard Disk before using the “Load ALL” procedures.
○
○
Use «Load All» to load an entire set of file types
in a single step.
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Load All procedure offers the following possibilities:
The Load All procedure offers the following possibilities:
Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs;
Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs;
Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds;
Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds;
Load All Real Perf: loads 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Load All Real Perf: loads 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Load All Style Perf: loads 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
Load All Style Perf: loads 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector
ESCAPE
LOAD ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
ENTER
TEM
Load All User Style: loads 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
1
Load All User Style: loads 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
1
Load All Style Perf: loads 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
1
Load All User Style: loads 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
Load All Real Perf: loads 8 Groups of Real Performances;
ENTER
ENTER
TEM
TEM
Load All Sound: an unspecified number of RamSounds and RAM -Sounds;
LOAD ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
LOAD ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Load page then
press ENTER to gain access to the File Selector
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
The Load All procedure offers the following possibilities:
2. Select the Block containing the Songs required
from the source directory then press ENTER twice
to start the loading procedure.
2. Select the Block containing the Songs required
from the source directory then press ENTER twice
to start the loading procedure.
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Warning: Use “Load ALL” with care. If, for
example, the disk-based «All User Style» data
contains only one User Style, all your User Styles
currently in RAM will be irremediably lost through
cancellation by the incoming file. Be absolutely
sure, therefore, that your Sounds, Songs, Styles
and Performances are safely stored to Disk or
Hard Disk before using the “Load ALL” procedures.
ENTER
○
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEM
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use «Load All» to load an entire set of file types
in a single step.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOAD ALL
○
LOAD ALL
Load All Song: loads up to 16 Songs;
○
○
ENTER
○
○
2
○
○
2. Select the Block containing the Songs required
from the source directory then press ENTER twice
to start the loading procedure.
○
○
ESCAPE
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
LOAD ALL
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•13
3•14 Reference Guide
LOAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES
WK6/8 can load Songs and Styles from the following previous format disks:
WK6/8 can load Songs and Styles from the following previous format disks:
WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3
WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3
The loading procedures are identical to those
used for WK6/8 Songs and Styles.
The loading procedures are identical to those
used for WK6/8 Songs and Styles.
The Blocks however show the «.WXS» extension instead of «.BLK».
The Blocks however show the «.WXS» extension instead of «.BLK».
Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block
only.
Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block
only.
WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the
WK6/8 Disk environment contains two virtual
Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks. Refer to the Load Group procedure
explained on page 3.12.
WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the
WK6/8 Disk environment contains two virtual
Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks. Refer to the Load Group procedure
explained on page 3.12.
WX Songs disks contain Song Groups consisting of up to 8 Songs each. For this purpose, the
WK6/8 Disk environment contains two virtual
Songs Groups (1 and 2) specific for the WX Series disks. Refer to the Load Group procedure
explained on page 3.12.
Furthermore, WX2/SX2 disks contain one Block
only.
The Blocks however show the «.WXS» extension instead of «.BLK».
The loading procedures are identical to those
used for WK6/8 Songs and Styles.
WX2, WX400, WX Expander, SX2, SX3
WK6/8 can load Songs and Styles from the following previous format disks:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•14 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOAD WX/SX SONGS AND STYLES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•14 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save operations
○
○
○
○
The Save procedures operate in the direction
RAM –> Destination where the destination can
be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
F8
F7
F6
F5
F4
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable
battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy
disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The
RAM should be considered as a work area which
can be continually updated, not as a data storage device.
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable
battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy
disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The
RAM should be considered as a work area which
can be continually updated, not as a data storage device.
F3
F2
F1
+
2
○
○
○
○
H. D
DISK
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to.
These can be WK6/8 format disks or standard
MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI
files. You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8
format disks.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you
forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you
with an appropriate message when you attempt
to save to the disk.
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you
forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you
with an appropriate message when you attempt
to save to the disk.
○
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.
©
○
○
○
○
○
WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected.
○
○
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
H. D
THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE
THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE
+
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
F1
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
F3
F4
F7
F8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
DISK
H. D
+
F1
F2
F3
F4
The Save procedures operate in the direction
RAM –> Destination where the destination can
be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
F5
F6
○
○
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
F2
○
○
2
DISK
○
○
○
○
○
3•15
F5
F6
F7
F8
○
○
○
○
Save operations
○
○
The WK6/8 RAM is backed by a rechargeable
battery to safeguard the data when the instrument is turned off. For security reasons, however, it is necessary to store your data to floppy
disk or Hard disk with the Save command. The
RAM should be considered as a work area which
can be continually updated, not as a data storage device.
○
○
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to.
These can be WK6/8 format disks or standard
MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI
files. You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8
format disks.
○
○
Check that the floppy disk is not write protected if so, remove the protection beforehand. If you
forget to do this, the instrument will prompt you
with an appropriate message when you attempt
to save to the disk.
○
○
Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.
1
Save operations are characterized by an additional option: the creation of a new Block if necessary.
○
○
© WARNING - Do not save data to the original
disks supplied with the instrument. As a precautionary measure against data loss, always check
that your original disks are write protected.
Have a new or used disk ready to save data to.
These can be WK6/8 format disks or standard
MS-DOS disks for the exclusive storage of MIDI
files. You can also save MIDI Files to WK6/8
format disks.
○
THE GENERAL SAVE PROCEDURE
○
1. Insert the floppy disk into the drive.
The Save procedures operate in the direction
RAM –> Destination where the destination can
be Floppy disk or Hard disk.
○
2. Press DISK to open the main Save page.
○
If the main Save page is not shown, use the
page scroll buttons (
) to open it.
If you are working with the Hard Disk, press
DISK and select the HARD DISK option with
soft button F2.
3•15
Save operations
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•15
3•16 Reference Guide
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
Save All Song) then press ENTER to open the File
Selector.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
4. Select an existing Block to save to or empty destination to create a new Block.
ENTER
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
Save All Song) then press ENTER to open the File
Selector.
4. Select an existing Block to save to or empty destination to create a new Block.
TEMP
3
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
7. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
Save to an existing Block to backup your data
after a work session when the destination
Block and RAM block are of the same origin.
ESCAPE
Save to an existing Block to backup your data
after a work session when the destination
Block and RAM block are of the same origin.
or
+
H. D
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
DISK
ESCAPE
4
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
ESCAPE
The existing Block will be updated or the new
Block will be created and the file(s) will be
saved to the Block.
5. Press ENTER.
Select an empty destination (shown as a broken line with .BLK extension) to create new
block.
If you selected an existing Block, the operation will proceed depending on specified command.
ENTER
TEMP
5/6/7
TEMP
6. Press ENTER to confirm the Save operation.
ESCAPE
ENTER
The existing Block will be updated or the new
Block will be created and the file(s) will be
saved to the Block.
TEMP
5. Press ENTER.
4
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
Whenever possible, try to save to an empty
location (shown as a broken line) to safeguard
existing data on the storage device.
ESCAPE
ENTER
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
DISK
ESCAPE
ENTER
DISK
H. D
ESCAPE
7. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
+
or
H. D
7. When you have finished, press DISK (or ESCAPE
three times) to exit «Disk».
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•16 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
○
3. Specify the Save operation required (example,
Save All Song) then press ENTER to open the File
Selector.
TEMP
○
ENTER
○
+
or
ESCAPE
4. Select an existing Block to save to or empty destination to create a new Block.
○
TEMP
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
Select an empty destination (shown as a broken line with .BLK extension) to create new
block.
Remember that if you save to an existing file,
it will be overwritten by the incoming one.
5/6/7
6. Press ENTER to confirm the Save operation.
If you selected an existing Block, the operation will proceed depending on specified command.
The existing Block will be updated or the new
Block will be created and the file(s) will be
saved to the Block.
If you save to an empty location, you’ll be
prompted to create a new Block. Use the
keyboard and the numeric keypad as the
sources of alphanumeric data to give the
block a name (see Data Entry procedures in
chapter 1). The extension “.BLK” is created
automatically. Confirm the new name with
ENTER.
5/6/7
ENTER
4
5. Press ENTER.
6. Press ENTER to confirm the Save operation.
If you save to an empty location, you’ll be
prompted to create a new Block. Use the
keyboard and the numeric keypad as the
sources of alphanumeric data to give the
block a name (see Data Entry procedures in
chapter 1). The extension “.BLK” is created
automatically. Confirm the new name with
ENTER.
Save to an existing Block to backup your data
after a work session when the destination
Block and RAM block are of the same origin.
TEMP
ENTER
If you selected an existing Block, the operation will proceed depending on specified command.
If you save to an empty location, you’ll be
prompted to create a new Block. Use the
keyboard and the numeric keypad as the
sources of alphanumeric data to give the
block a name (see Data Entry procedures in
chapter 1). The extension “.BLK” is created
automatically. Confirm the new name with
ENTER.
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
Select an empty destination (shown as a broken line with .BLK extension) to create new
block.
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•16 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Single Setup
Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or
Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instrument’s global parameters
(Edit General status) that determine how the
machine operates, regardless of the contents of
RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites
the existing Setup file without affecting other data.
Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block.
You can create different Setup files for particular
occasions. For example, one for home sessions,
one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided
into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are
shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In
this case, either overwrite an existing Song that
you don’t mind losing, or close the Block with
ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press
ENTER to create a new Block.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Single Block
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Single MIDI File
Saves a WK6/8 Song to disk (MS-Dos format)
as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with
other instruments or computers. WK6/8 saves
Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set
the “SMF Save Format” parameter in the «General Set» function of «Edit MIDI».
If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set
the “General MIDI” parameter to ON in the «General set» function of «Edit MIDI».
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard
disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup
file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances)
and Songs (and relative Performances), all
housed in their respective Groups.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Single Setup
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•17
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Single User Style
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
○
○
○
○
Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided
into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are
shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In
this case, either overwrite an existing Song that
you don’t mind losing, or close the Block with
ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press
ENTER to create a new Block.
○
○
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have
already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this
procedure to convert the files to WK6/8 format
songs.
○
○
Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
You can create different Setup files for particular
occasions. For example, one for home sessions,
one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.
○
○
Save Single Style Performance
Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or
Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instrument’s global parameters
(Edit General status) that determine how the
machine operates, regardless of the contents of
RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites
the existing Setup file without affecting other data.
Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block.
©
Saves a single user-programmed Performance
(RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The
incoming Performances overwrite those present
on the storage device.
Saves a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.
Note: If you assign a new block the name
“AUTOLOAD”, you can load the Block into RAM
automatically on a future occasion by turning the
instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the
drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name
“AUTOLOAD” can exist in a disk.
Save Single Song
Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have
already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this
procedure to convert the files to WK6/8 format
songs.
○
Save Single Performance
○
©
Save Single Song
○
○
Save Single Performance
○
○
Saves a single user-programmed Performance
(RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The
incoming Performances overwrite those present
on the storage device.
○
○
Save Single User Style
○
○
Saves a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.
○
○
The Save Single command offers the following
possibilities:
○
Save Single Style Performance
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Single MIDI File
Saves a WK6/8 Song to disk (MS-Dos format)
as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with
other instruments or computers. WK6/8 saves
Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set
the “SMF Save Format” parameter in the «General Set» function of «Edit MIDI».
If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set
the “General MIDI” parameter to ON in the «General set» function of «Edit MIDI».
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SAVE SINGLE
○
○
The Save Single command offers the following
possibilities:
○
○
Save Single Block
○
○
Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard
disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup
file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances)
and Songs (and relative Performances), all
housed in their respective Groups.
○
○
Save Single Style Performance
○
○
© Note: If you assign a new block the name
“AUTOLOAD”, you can load the Block into RAM
automatically on a future occasion by turning the
instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the
drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name
“AUTOLOAD” can exist in a disk.
○
○
Save Single Setup
○
○
Saves a single bank of up to 8 user-programmed
Style Performances. These Performances cannot be loaded to locations other than the original
source Style Performance bank. For example,
the Style Performances of Style 59 (U.S.Trad)
cannot be saved to any other location of the ROM
Styles.
○
○
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
○
Saves a Setup file to a Block on floppy disk or
Hard Disk. The Setup corresponds to the configuration of the instrument’s global parameters
(Edit General status) that determine how the
machine operates, regardless of the contents of
RAM. Saving a Setup file to a Block overwrites
the existing Setup file without affecting other data.
Only one Setup file can be saved in each Block.
○
Note: If you assign a new block the name
“AUTOLOAD”, you can load the Block into RAM
automatically on a future occasion by turning the
instrument on with the floppy disk inserted in the
drive. Naturally, only one Block with the name
“AUTOLOAD” can exist in a disk.
SAVE SINGLE
You can create different Setup files for particular
occasions. For example, one for home sessions,
one for live shows, one for piano-bar work, etc.
○
Saves a single User Style and associated User
Style Performances to any location in the USER
Style Groups (1-4) present on disk or Hard disk.
○
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
○
©
Save Single User Style
○
Single MIDI File
Saves the entire contents of RAM to disk or Hard
disk in a single step. Block data contains: a Setup
file, Sounds, Performances, ROM Style Performances, User Styles (and relative Performances)
and Songs (and relative Performances), all
housed in their respective Groups.
○
Saves a WK6/8 Song to disk (MS-Dos format)
as a MIDI File in order to exchange the song with
other instruments or computers. WK6/8 saves
Songs as SMF1 or SMF0 format MIDI files. Set
the “SMF Save Format” parameter in the «General Set» function of «Edit MIDI».
If you want to save GM compatible MIDI files, set
the “General MIDI” parameter to ON in the «General set» function of «Edit MIDI».
Save Single Block
○
Saves Songs to disk one at a time. If you have
already loaded some MIDI Files to RAM, use this
procedure to convert the files to WK6/8 format
songs.
Saves a single user-programmed Performance
(RealTime) to any of the 64 locations of the Performance Groups (1-8) on disk or Hard disk. The
incoming Performances overwrite those present
on the storage device.
○
© Hint: A Block can hold up to 16 Songs divided
into two virtual groups. If no empty locations are
shown, it means that the block is fully occupied. In
this case, either overwrite an existing Song that
you don’t mind losing, or close the Block with
ESCAPE, then select an empty location and press
ENTER to create a new Block.
The Save Single command offers the following
possibilities:
○
Save Single Song
3•17
Save Single Performance
Disk & Hard Disk
SAVE SINGLE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•17
3•18 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: You can also use the Sound Search
function to pass directly to a particular Sound and
sound Bank. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•18 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Performances are converted into track data (Bank
Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume,
Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects).
If a Score is present, the text is converted into
Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text
events.
The save procedure is almost identical to «Save
Single Song». In this case you’ll see a list of files
in the destination directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which
represent sub-directories containing other MIDI
Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken
line with the .MID extension. The .MID extension is attached to the original WK6/8 Song name
automatically.
Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk
ready. Use the «Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb)»
and «Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB)» functions
in the «Utility» Disk page to format your new disks.
○
©
○
Save Single Sound
Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the
ProgramChange number of the chosen destination, therefore, if you save 19-7 SwOrgan to, say,
destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with
the new ProgramChange number on a future load
operation, not with the old.
○
Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM Sounds to disk or hard disk to build a library of
Sounds for future use. The «Save Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots.
You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you
save to the same location as the original RAM
position to facilitate future selection.
○
You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you
save to the same location as the original RAM
position to facilitate future selection.
Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM Sounds to disk or hard disk to build a library of
Sounds for future use. The «Save Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots.
○
Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the
ProgramChange number of the chosen destination, therefore, if you save 19-7 SwOrgan to, say,
destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with
the new ProgramChange number on a future load
operation, not with the old.
Save Single Sound
○
© Note: You can also use the Sound Search
function to pass directly to a particular Sound and
sound Bank. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
Performances are converted into track data (Bank
Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume,
Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects).
If a Score is present, the text is converted into
Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text
events.
The save procedure is almost identical to «Save
Single Song». In this case you’ll see a list of files
in the destination directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which
represent sub-directories containing other MIDI
Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken
line with the .MID extension. The .MID extension is attached to the original WK6/8 Song name
automatically.
Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk
ready. Use the «Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb)»
and «Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB)» functions
in the «Utility» Disk page to format your new disks.
Performances are converted into track data (Bank
Select MSB and LSB, Program Change, Volume,
Pan, CC91 and CC93 for the depth of the effects).
If a Score is present, the text is converted into
Lyric events and the chord symbols into Text
events.
The save procedure is almost identical to «Save
Single Song». In this case you’ll see a list of files
in the destination directory with the .MID extension. In some cases, other names appear which
represent sub-directories containing other MIDI
Files. Empty locations are shown as a broken
line with the .MID extension. The .MID extension is attached to the original WK6/8 Song name
automatically.
Have an MS-DOS or Atari ST/Falcon format disk
ready. Use the «Format MS-DOS disk (1.44 Mb)»
and «Format MS-DOS/Atari (720 KB)» functions
in the «Utility» Disk page to format your new disks.
Save Single Sound
Saves single Ram-Sounds as well as RAM Sounds to disk or hard disk to build a library of
Sounds for future use. The «Save Single Sound»
procedure is characterized by an increased
number of steps, owing to the fact that there are
16 Sound Groups, each consisting of 8 Banks of
16 slots.
You can choose to save your Ram-Sounds anywhere you want, but it is recommended that you
save to the same location as the original RAM
position to facilitate future selection.
Bear in mind that the RAM-Sound will take the
ProgramChange number of the chosen destination, therefore, if you save 19-7 SwOrgan to, say,
destination 25-16, the Sound will be shown with
the new ProgramChange number on a future load
operation, not with the old.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: You can also use the Sound Search
function to pass directly to a particular Sound and
sound Bank. The Sound Search procedure is
explained in detail on pages 3.33 & 3.34.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•18 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•19
○
1
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page
then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
○
○
○
SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page
then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
ENTER
ENTER
TEMP
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
TEMP
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
ESCAPE
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
ENTER
ESCAPE
TEMPO / DATA
3. Select the WK6/8 Song to save as a MIDI file
from the RAM directory and select a “.MID” destination in disk.
2
3. Select the WK6/8 Song to save as a MIDI file
from the RAM directory and select a “.MID” destination in disk.
F1
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory
shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations.
ESCAPE
4
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
2
F1
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory
shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations.
F2
F1
F2
F1
F2
F2
You can create a new Block in the destination device as already discussed in the General Save procedure.
You can create a new Block in the destination device as already discussed in the General Save procedure.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the conversion process.
3
3
3
You can create a new Block in the destination device as already discussed in the General Save procedure.
F2
If necessary, enter a Block (or sub-directory
shown with the .<DIR> extension) to gain access to other MIDI File locations.
3. Select the WK6/8 Song to save as a MIDI file
from the RAM directory and select a “.MID” destination in disk.
F1
F2
2
F1
4
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ENTER
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
4
ESCAPE
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMP
1. Select SINGLE MIDI FILE from the main Save page
then press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•19
SAVE MIDI FILE PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•19
3•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard
disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for
example, the User Style Group you are saving
contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the
destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled
and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the
contents of the Group data being overwritten before
proceeding.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Group Real Perf
Saves a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination on disk or
hard disk.
Save Group User Style
Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination on disk or hard disk.
Save Group Song
Saves Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2.
Save Group Style Perf
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
○
○
○
○
○
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SAVE GROUP
The Save Group command offers a quick way of
saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
○
©
Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard
disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for
example, the User Style Group you are saving
contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the
destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled
and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the
contents of the Group data being overwritten before
proceeding.
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
Save Group offers the following possibilities:
Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to
disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8
user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike
other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be
“switched” - they must be saved to their original
locations. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD)
cannot be saved to any other location on disk
other than Group 8.
○
The Save Group command offers a quick way of
saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step.
○
○
© Warning: The Group currently on disk or hard
disk is overwritten by the incoming Group. If, for
example, the User Style Group you are saving
contains only one User Style, all User Styles of the
destination Group currently on disk will be cancelled
and replaced by the new Group. Be sure of the
contents of the Group data being overwritten before
proceeding.
○
○
Save Group offers the following possibilities:
○
○
Save Group Real Perf
○
○
Saves a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination on disk or
hard disk.
○
○
Save Group User Style
○
○
Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination on disk or hard disk.
○
○
Save Group Song
○
○
Saves Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2.
○
○
○
Save Group Style Perf
○
○
Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to
disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8
user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike
other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be
“switched” - they must be saved to their original
locations. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD)
cannot be saved to any other location on disk
other than Group 8.
The Save Group command offers a quick way of
saving a Group of 8 elements in a single step.
○
If you attempt to save to a destination other than
the correct one, a user message will inform you
of your error with the following message:
SAVE GROUP
SAVE GROUP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Save Group offers the following possibilities:
Save Group Real Perf
Saves a Group of Performances consisting of up
to 8 user-programmed RealTime Performances
to any Real Performance destination on disk or
hard disk.
Save Group User Style
Saves a Group of up to 8 User Styles (and corresponding Performances) to any User Group destination on disk or hard disk.
Save Group Song
Saves Songs as “virtual Groups” (Song Group 1
and Song Group 2 found in the Disk environment
only). Each virtual group corresponds to the first
8 or second 8 locations of the Song memory. The
left column corresponds to the virtual SongsGroup 1 and the right to Songs-Group 2.
Save Group Style Perf
Saves a Group of 8 Style Performance banks to
disk or hard disk, each bank containing up to 8
user-programmed Style Performances. Unlike
other Groups, the Style Groups cannot be
“switched” - they must be saved to their original
locations. For example, Group 8 (US. TRAD)
cannot be saved to any other location on disk
other than Group 8.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Press ESCAPE to close the user message and
try again, this time selecting the correct destination.
3•21
○
1
1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Save page then press ENTER to gain access
to the FILE SELECTOR.
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)
○
○
○
SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Save page then press ENTER to gain access
to the FILE SELECTOR.
ESCAPE
TEMP
TEMP
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
ESCAPE
3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to
gain access.
2
F1
F2
F1
TEMP
F2
4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and
its destination then press ENTER twice to execute
the command.
3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to
gain access.
4
F2
F1
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
F2
2
F1
ESCAPE
ENTER
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•21
SAVE GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE (EXAMPLE)
ESCAPE
TEMP
1. Select GROUP STYLE PERFORMANCE from the
main Save page then press ENTER to gain access
to the FILE SELECTOR.
TEMP
○
TEMP
ESCAPE
4
ENTER
3
ENTER
TEMP
ESCAPE
○
F1
3
3
○
F2
4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and
its destination then press ENTER twice to execute
the command.
F2
ENTER
F1
ESCAPE
4. Select the Group file from the RAM directory and
its destination then press ENTER twice to execute
the command.
2
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
ESCAPE
4
3. Select the destination Block then press ENTER to
gain access.
TEMP
ENTER
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
ENTER
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
ENTER
ENTER
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•21
3•22 Reference Guide
SAVE ALL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use «Save All» to save an entire set of file types
contained in RAM in a single step.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Warning: Use “Save ALL” with care as this
procedure overwrites all data at the destination.
Be absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in
disk before using the “Save ALL” procedures.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMP
The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities:
Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs;
Save All Sound: saves an unspecified number
of Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16
Groups);
Save All Real Perf: saves 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Save All Style Perf: saves 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
Save All User Style: saves 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
1
F2
F1
ENTER
F2
2
F1
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
TEMP
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory.
F1
F2
F1
F2
1
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page then
press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
2
ENTER
SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE).
TEMP
3/4
ENTER
TEMP
○
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Warning: Use “Save ALL” with care as this
procedure overwrites all data at the destination.
Be absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in
disk before using the “Save ALL” procedures.
ESCAPE
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities:
Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs;
Save All Sound: saves an unspecified number
of Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16
Groups);
Save All Real Perf: saves 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Save All Style Perf: saves 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
Save All User Style: saves 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE).
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•22 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2
F1
F2
F1
F2
3/4
ENTER
ESCAPE
○
4. Press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure.
SAVE ALL
○
TEMP
ESCAPE
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
Use «Save All» to save an entire set of file types
contained in RAM in a single step.
○
ENTER
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
○
4. Press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure.
1
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page then
press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
© Warning: Use “Save ALL” with care as this
procedure overwrites all data at the destination.
Be absolutely sure, therefore, of the file content in
disk before using the “Save ALL” procedures.
○
The Save All procedure offers the following possibilities:
Save All Song: saves up to 16 Songs;
Save All Sound: saves an unspecified number
of Ram-Sounds and RAM -Sounds (16
Groups);
Save All Real Perf: saves 8 Groups of Real Performances;
Save All Style Perf: saves 12 Groups of Rom
Style Performance banks, each containing up to
8 Style Performances;
Save All User Style: saves 4 Groups of User
Styles (including all associated User Style Performances).
○
SAVE ALL SONG PROCEDURE (EXAMPLE).
○
1. Select ALL SONG from the main Save page then
press ENTER to gain access to the FILE SELECTOR.
○
2. Select the destination device (Floppy or Hard
disk).
○
3/4
○
Press soft button F1 to select the Floppy disk.
Press soft button F2 to select the Hard disk.
○
ENTER
○
3. Select the destination Block in the disk directory.
○
If necessary, select an empty location to create a new Block using the method already
discussed in the General Save procedure.
○
Use «Save All» to save an entire set of file types
contained in RAM in a single step.
4. Press ENTER twice to start the saving procedure.
○
©
SAVE ALL
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•22 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMP
3•23
Erase operations
○
○
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer
needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard
Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Erase operations
○
○
○
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer
needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard
Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
ESCAPE
When you pass to the Erase page, you can
choose the device to erase data from with the
corresponding soft buttons:
• Floppy disk = F1
• Hard Disk = F2
• RAM = F3
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
F3
In this case, select the RAM option with soft
button F3.
If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert
the disk into the drive and check that the
“Floppy Disk” option is selected (soft button
F1).
If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select
the “Hard Disk” option with soft button F2.
TEMPO
F2
F1
3/4
The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories as in
the load and save file selector, but on a single
directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from.
The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories as in
the load and save file selector, but on a single
directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from.
The example which follows shows how to Erase
a single Song from RAM.
The example which follows shows how to Erase
a single Song from RAM.
3. Select the source device to erase from.
ENTER
When you pass to the Erase page, you can
choose the device to erase data from with the
corresponding soft buttons:
• Floppy disk = F1
• Hard Disk = F2
• RAM = F3
2. Select the ERASE command required from the
main page.
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page.
H. D
+
If the main Erase page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
1/2
DISK
H. D
+
If the main Erase page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page.
1. Press DISK to open the main Erase page.
DISK
If the main Erase page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
1/2
+
1/2
H. D
DISK
The example which follows shows how to Erase
a single Song from RAM.
2. Select the ERASE command required from the
main page.
2. Select the ERASE command required from the
main page.
3. Select the source device to erase from.
3. Select the source device to erase from.
In this case, select the RAM option with soft
button F3.
If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert
the disk into the drive and check that the
“Floppy Disk” option is selected (soft button
F1).
If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select
the “Hard Disk” option with soft button F2.
F1
F2
ENTER
TEMPO
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
ENTER
TEMPO
Use the Erase command to cancel files no longer
needed from a data storing device (Disk or Hard
Disk) or from RAM to make room for other files.
ESCAPE
○
F1
F2
F3
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
○
3/4
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
3•23
○
○
○
Erase operations
F3
When you pass to the Erase page, you can
choose the device to erase data from with the
corresponding soft buttons:
• Floppy disk = F1
• Hard Disk = F2
• RAM = F3
3/4
○
The Erase File Selector does not operate between source and destination directories as in
the load and save file selector, but on a single
directory contained in the device you are cancelling files from.
In this case, select the RAM option with soft
button F3.
If you are erasing from a floppy disk, insert
the disk into the drive and check that the
“Floppy Disk” option is selected (soft button
F1).
If you are erasing from the Hard Disk, select
the “Hard Disk” option with soft button F2.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•23
3•24 Reference Guide
5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file
to erase then press ENTER to access the Block.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
6. Select the file to erase.
ENTER
5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file
to erase then press ENTER to access the Block.
6. Select the file to erase.
TEM
7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the directory.
ENTER
ESCAPE
6/7
ENTER
6/7
ENTER
TEM
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEM
6/7
ESCAPE
7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the directory.
TEM
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•24 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5. If necessary, select the Block containing the file
to erase then press ENTER to access the Block.
ENTER
○
6. Select the file to erase.
○
TEM
7. Press ENTER twice to erase the file from the directory.
ESCAPE
○
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•24 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEM
3•25
Copy operations
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Copy operations
○
○
○
○
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. The source file remains intact.
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. The source file remains intact.
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy
to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy
to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
ESCAPE
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
F8
F7
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
F6
F5
F4
F3
F2
F1
1/2
DISK
H. D
+
The example which follows shows how to copy a
single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk,
and provides sufficient information which you can
apply to all Copy situations.
3/4
1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.
In this case, use the button to pass to the
source directory and, if necessary, select
Floppy Disk (F1).
Then use the button to pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2)
as the destination. Entering the Hard disk
for the first time takes some time, depending
on the number of files already present. A
“Please Wait” message appears during the
scanning period.
Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source and
destination.
The example which follows shows how to copy a
single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk,
and provides sufficient information which you can
apply to all Copy situations.
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.
If the main Copy page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
If the main Copy page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
2. Select the COPY command required from the
main page.
2. Select the COPY command required from the
main page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
1/2
DISK
H. D
+
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3 and directional arrows.
2. Select the COPY command required from the
main page.
If the main Copy page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
In this case, use the button to pass to the
source directory and, if necessary, select
Floppy Disk (F1).
Then use the button to pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2)
as the destination. Entering the Hard disk
for the first time takes some time, depending
on the number of files already present. A
“Please Wait” message appears during the
scanning period.
Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source and
destination.
H. D
DISK
F5
F6
F7
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
○
○
○
○
○
F7
F8
ENTER
TEMPO / DATA
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•25
○
○
○
○
Copy operations
ESCAPE
○
F5
F6
Use the Copy command to copy a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. The source file remains intact.
TEMPO / DATA
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
○
F3
F4
Models without a Hard disk can copy from floppy
to floppy or from RAM to RAM.
F8
○
F1
F2
To copy a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
F3
F4
ENTER
1/2
+
F1
F2
3/4
The example which follows shows how to copy a
single Sound file from Floppy disk to Hard Disk,
and provides sufficient information which you can
apply to all Copy situations.
3/4
1. Press DISK to open the main Copy page.
In this case, use the button to pass to the
source directory and, if necessary, select
Floppy Disk (F1).
Then use the button to pass to the destination directory and select the Hard disk (F2)
as the destination. Entering the Hard disk
for the first time takes some time, depending
on the number of files already present. A
“Please Wait” message appears during the
scanning period.
Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source and
destination.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•25
3•26 Reference Guide
5. If necessary, select the source Block containing
the desired file and press ENTER to gain access.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
5. If necessary, select the source Block containing
the desired file and press ENTER to gain access.
6. Select the File to Copy from the source directory.
6. Select the File to Copy from the source directory.
7. Pass into the destination directory to select the
destination
7. Pass into the destination directory to select the
destination
ENTER
If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk
and press ENTER to access then select a
destination.
TEM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
6/7
○
Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEM
ESCAPE
8. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.
©
○
ENTER
If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk
and press ENTER to access then select a
destination.
8. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.
○
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6/7
ESCAPE
ENTER
8
8
ENTER
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by copying to
a different destination.
TEM
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by copying to
a different destination.
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by copying to
a different destination.
TEM
ESCAPE
6/7
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8. Press ENTER twice to copy the file to the destination.
ESCAPE
If necessary, select a Block in the Hard disk
and press ENTER to access then select a
destination.
7. Pass into the destination directory to select the
destination
ENTER
TEM
6. Select the File to Copy from the source directory.
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•26 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5. If necessary, select the source Block containing
the desired file and press ENTER to gain access.
○
ENTER
ESCAPE
○
© Note: It is not possible to copy a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•26 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEM
3•27
Move operations
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
Use the Move command to shift a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. This option cancels the file at the
source.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Move operations
○
○
Use the Move command to shift a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. This option cancels the file at the
source.
ESCAPE
F3
F2
TEM
ENTER
F1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© WARNING - Use the Move function only in
○
cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Models without a Hard disk can move files from
within the same floppy or within RAM.
Models without a Hard disk can move files from
within the same floppy or within RAM.
To move a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
To move a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
The example which follows shows how to use
the Move operation within RAM (Move Single
Sound), and provides sufficient information which
you can apply to all Move situations.
The example which follows shows how to use
the Move operation within RAM (Move Single
Sound), and provides sufficient information which
you can apply to all Move situations.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
2. Select the MOVE command required from the
main page.
If the main Move page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
1/2
+
H. D
H. D
1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.
DISK
+
1/2
1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.
DISK
DISK
1. Press DISK to open the main Move page.
1/2
H. D
+
If the main Move page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
If the main Move page is not shown, use the
page scroll (
) buttons to open it.
2. Select the MOVE command required from the
main page.
2. Select the MOVE command required from the
main page.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
3. Select the source and destination devices with
soft buttons F1, F2 or F3.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work
in. Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source
and destination.
In this case, select RAM as the device to work
in. Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source
and destination.
The example which follows shows how to use
the Move operation within RAM (Move Single
Sound), and provides sufficient information which
you can apply to all Move situations.
To move a file from one floppy disk to another,
first load the file to RAM, then save it to the other
floppy.
Models without a Hard disk can move files from
within the same floppy or within RAM.
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
F1
ENTER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3/4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
F1
TEM
Use the Move command to shift a file from one
location to another within the same device, or from
the Hard Disk to floppy (bypassing the RAM) and
vice versa. This option cancels the file at the
source.
○
○
ENTER
F3
ESCAPE
○
○
○
F2
F3
○
○
○
TEM
F2
○
○
© WARNING - Use the Move function only in
cases where the original file is to be cancelled.
3/4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
3•27
○
○
○
Move operations
○
3/4
○
In this case, select RAM as the device to work
in. Selecting «Floppy disk» or «RAM» automatically assigns the same device to source
and destination.
○
4. Press ENTER to enter the file selector.
○
© WARNING - Use the Move function only in
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•27
3•28 Reference Guide
5. If necessary, select a Block containing the desired file then press ENTER to access the Block.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5
6. Select the File to Move from the source directory.
ENTER
7. Pass into the destination directory and select the
destination.
In this case, use the Page scroll
buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups and
the / directional arrows to scroll through
the individual Sound Group locations.
○
5. If necessary, select a Block containing the desired file then press ENTER to access the Block.
6. Select the File to Move from the source directory.
TEM
7. Pass into the destination directory and select the
destination.
ESCAPE
In this case, use the Page scroll
buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups and
the / directional arrows to scroll through
the individual Sound Group locations.
ESCAPE
6/7
8. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the
selected destination.
TEMPO / DATA
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ENTER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ESCAPE
6/7
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
TEM
The file at the original location (in this case,
19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).
©
○
ENTER
8. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the
selected destination.
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a
different destination.
The file at the original location (in this case,
19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).
5
Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: It is not possible to move a file to itself.
Attempting to do so prompts the following
message:
○
8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The file at the original location (in this case,
19-7) is cancelled and moved to the new location (in this case, 17-8).
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a
different destination.
○
ENTER
Press ENTER or ESCAPE to close the window and repeat the operation by moving to a
different destination.
TEMPO / DATA
8
ENTER
8. Press ENTER twice to Move the Sound file to the
selected destination.
In this case, use the Page scroll
buttons to scroll through the Sound Groups and
the / directional arrows to scroll through
the individual Sound Group locations.
6/7
ESCAPE
TEM
5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•28 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5. If necessary, select a Block containing the desired file then press ENTER to access the Block.
ENTER
○
6. Select the File to Move from the source directory.
ESCAPE
○
7. Pass into the destination directory and select the
destination.
○
ESCAPE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•28 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TEMPO / DATA
• Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
This extended format procedure prepares the disk
with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with
the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format
cannot be read by computers.
• Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);
1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
You can also use a formatted disk, provided
that you are not interested in conserving its
contents.
The Hard Disk Utility options include:
• Hard Disk Check-Recovery
○
○
Utility
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
These pages provide useful functions for disk and
hard Disk formatting and servicing.
○
○
○
○
○
○
This operation force-formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk
for WK6/8 use.
• Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
• Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);
1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
The Floppy Disk Utility page options include:
○
FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)
This extended format procedure prepares the disk
with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with
the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format
cannot be read by computers.
• Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
You can also use a formatted disk, provided
that you are not interested in conserving its
contents.
○
• Change Disk Name
○
○
○
○
○
The Hard Disk Utility options include:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• Hard Disk Check-Recovery
The following dialog window appears:
• Hard Disk Sleep Time
○
After pressing DISK, use the page scroll
button to pass to the last two Disk pages: Floppy
Disk Utility and Hard Disk Utility.
○
2. Select «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)».
○
2. Select «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)».
The following dialog window appears:
• Hard Disk Sleep Time
• Hard Disk Protection
• Hard Disk Protection
• Hard Disk Back-up
• Hard Disk Back-up
• Hard Disk Restore
• Hard Disk Restore
• Hard Disk Back-up
• Change Disk Name
○
• Hard Disk Restore
• Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)
○
3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.
The Floppy Disk Utility page options include:
○
© WARNING: All the Disk initializing procedures
cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be
absolutely sure that the contents include files that
you don’t mind losing.
This operation force-formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk
for WK6/8 use.
○
FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)
These pages provide useful functions for disk and
hard Disk formatting and servicing.
FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)
○
This operation formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk in
MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes).
This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of
reading MS-DOS format disks.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
After pressing DISK, use the page scroll
button to pass to the last two Disk pages: Floppy
Disk Utility and Hard Disk Utility.
○
Floppy Disk Utility page
3•29
Utility
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
• Hard Disk Protection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Insert a new floppy disk into the drive.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•29
FORMAT WORK DISK (1.62 MB)
○
This operation force-formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk
for WK6/8 use.
Floppy Disk Utility page
This operation formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk in
MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes).
This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of
reading MS-DOS format disks.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
This extended format procedure prepares the disk
with a capacity of 1.62 megabytes (compared with
the standard 1.4 of MS-DOS disks). This format
cannot be read by computers.
FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)
Floppy Disk Utility page
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© WARNING:
All the Disk initializing procedures
cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be
absolutely sure that the contents include files that
you don’t mind losing.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FORMAT MS-DOS DISK (1.44 MB)
This operation formats a 3.5” HD floppy disk in
MS-DOS format (capacity: 1.44 megabytes).
This format permits file exchange with computers running MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2, Macintosh, Atari, Amiga, and all computers capable of
reading MS-DOS format disks.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Utility
○
After pressing DISK, use the page scroll
button to pass to the last two Disk pages: Floppy
Disk Utility and Hard Disk Utility.
○
These pages provide useful functions for disk and
hard Disk formatting and servicing.
○
The Floppy Disk Utility page options include:
○
• Format Work Disk (1.62 MB);
○
• Format Ms-Dos Disk (1.44 MB);
○
All the Disk initializing procedures
cancel the entire contents of a used disk - be
absolutely sure that the contents include files that
you don’t mind losing.
• Format Ms-Dos/Atari (720 KB)
○
You can also use a formatted disk, provided
that you are not interested in conserving its
contents.
○
• Change Disk Name
○
The Hard Disk Utility options include:
○
2. Select «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)».
○
3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.
• Hard Disk Check-Recovery
The following dialog window appears:
○
© WARNING:
• Hard Disk Sleep Time
3. Press ENTER to start the formatting procedure.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•29
3•30 Reference Guide
FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)
FORMAT HARD DISK
This operation formats a 3.5” DD floppy disk in
MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilobytes), suitable in particular for MIDI file exchanges.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
This operation formats the Hard disk and is used
in two cases:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Hard Disk Utility page
1) as an essential operation after installing a
new Hard disk kit (if you install a Hard Disk
supplied by Generalmusic, do not format the
unit as it will contain factory loaded files);
2) when a rapid cancellation of the HD contents is required.
The following dialog window appears:
The following dialog window appears:
2. Select (if necessary) the «Format hard disk» function.
1. From page 6 of the “Utility page“, press the page
scroll button ( ) to page to page 7.
2) when a rapid cancellation of the HD contents is required.
1) as an essential operation after installing a
new Hard disk kit (if you install a Hard Disk
supplied by Generalmusic, do not format the
unit as it will contain factory loaded files);
This operation formats the Hard disk and is used
in two cases:
This operation formats a 3.5” DD floppy disk in
MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilobytes), suitable in particular for MIDI file exchanges.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
FORMAT HARD DISK
FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•30 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. Select (if necessary) the «Format hard disk» function.
The following dialog window appears:
CHANGE DISK NAME
○
1. From page 6 of the “Utility page“, press the page
scroll button ( ) to page to page 7.
Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with
Escape.
Hard Disk Utility page
○
1) as an essential operation after installing a
new Hard disk kit (if you install a Hard Disk
supplied by Generalmusic, do not format the
unit as it will contain factory loaded files);
2) when a rapid cancellation of the HD contents is required.
CHANGE DISK NAME
Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy
disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows
quick recognition of the contents during a search
through disks without labels. If you write the disk’s
name on the index label, you can reduce the
search times even further.
WK6/8 assigns a generic code name to disks formatted with the Utility formatting procedures - the
name depending on the size.
For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned
a code name such as the one shown below:
2. Select (if necessary) the «Format hard disk» function.
Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with
Escape.
This operation formats the Hard disk and is used
in two cases:
Use the standard name entry procedure to give
your disks a name.
1. From page 6 of the “Utility page“, press the page
scroll button ( ) to page to page 7.
Use the standard name entry procedure to give
your disks a name.
This operation formats a 3.5” DD floppy disk in
MS-DOS / Atari ST format (capacity: 720 kilobytes), suitable in particular for MIDI file exchanges.
The procedure is identical to that described for
the «Format work disk (1.62 Mb)» operation.
Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy
disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows
quick recognition of the contents during a search
through disks without labels. If you write the disk’s
name on the index label, you can reduce the
search times even further.
WK6/8 assigns a generic code name to disks formatted with the Utility formatting procedures - the
name depending on the size.
For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned
a code name such as the one shown below:
Confirm the entry with ENTER or cancel with
Escape.
Use this operation to assign a name to a floppy
disk. Giving your disks a specific name allows
quick recognition of the contents during a search
through disks without labels. If you write the disk’s
name on the index label, you can reduce the
search times even further.
WK6/8 assigns a generic code name to disks formatted with the Utility formatting procedures - the
name depending on the size.
For example, a 1.62 Mb work disk will be assigned
a code name such as the one shown below:
FORMAT HARD DISK
Use the standard name entry procedure to give
your disks a name.
CHANGE DISK NAME
FORMAT MS-DOS/ATARI DISK (720 KB)
Hard Disk Utility page
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•30 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•31
2. Select «Hard disk check/recovery» .
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
The following dialog window appears:
As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears (for security reasons):
2. Select «Hard disk check/recovery» .
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The following dialog window appears:
As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears (for security reasons):
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.
HARD DISK SLEEP TIME
4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the
hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the
hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• Error found - Code relating to the error
found. “None” appears in cases where no
errors are encountered.
HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY
• Error found - Code relating to the error
found. “None” appears in cases where no
errors are encountered.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Use the following recovery procedure as soon
as possible.
HARD DISK SLEEP TIME
To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter
to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
1. Enter «Edit Disk» and go to the «Hard Disk Utility» page.
3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.
○
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•31
2. Select «Hard disk check/recovery» .
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
HARD DISK SLEEP TIME
To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter
to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
Options: Off (always on), 5 sec ... 60 sec.
The following dialog window appears:
○
○
the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save,
Copy, Move, Erase operations).
Shortly after, another dialog window appears
similar to the one below:
○
○
4. Press the Soft button F1 (not ENTER) to start the
hard-disk format procedure, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
© WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while
the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save,
Copy, Move, Erase operations).
○
• Error found - Code relating to the error
found. “None” appears in cases where no
errors are encountered.
3. Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
• Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery.
As a security measure, a second confirmation request appears (for security reasons):
○
If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to access it prompts a message similar to the following:
HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY
• Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery.
In this case, the message shows no errors.
In cases where errors exist, make a note of
the numbers shown in the dialog window as
they are useful to provide information for technical assistance.
In this case, the message shows no errors.
In cases where errors exist, make a note of
the numbers shown in the dialog window as
they are useful to provide information for technical assistance.
If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to access it prompts a message similar to the following:
This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk
to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk
can be caused by:
• a power failure during a Save operation;
• physical defects of the disk.
This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk
to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk
can be caused by:
• a power failure during a Save operation;
• physical defects of the disk.
In this case, the message shows no errors.
In cases where errors exist, make a note of
the numbers shown in the dialog window as
they are useful to provide information for technical assistance.
• Check version - Version of the test program and data recovery.
This procedure can restore a damaged Hard Disk
to its original status. Damage to the Hard Disk
can be caused by:
• a power failure during a Save operation;
• physical defects of the disk.
If the Hard disk is damaged, attempting to access it prompts a message similar to the following:
HARD DISK CHECK/RECOVERY
1. Enter «Edit Disk» and go to the «Hard Disk Utility» page.
Shortly after, another dialog window appears
similar to the one below:
© WARNING - Never turn off the instrument while
the Hard disk or disk drive are writing data (Save,
Copy, Move, Erase operations).
○
Use the following recovery procedure as soon
as possible.
3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.
Use the following recovery procedure as soon
as possible.
To avoid hearing the noise caused by the rotation of the hard disk, you can set this parameter
to turn the hard disk off after an operation.
Shortly after, another dialog window appears
similar to the one below:
1. Enter «Edit Disk» and go to the «Hard Disk Utility» page.
3. Press ENTER to start the recovery of the data.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•31
3•32 Reference Guide
HARD DISK PROTECTION
HARD DISK BACKUP
As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss,
use the Hard Disk Protection function to protect
your hard disk
Note: All WK6/8 instruments with factory fitted
Hard Disks leave the factory with the Hard Disk
Protection active.
In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operations on the Hard Disk, the protection must be
removed.
Select the Hard Disk Protection function and
press ENTER to activate the protection function.
Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between
the two options (Unprotect/Protect).
This option allows you to backup part or all the
Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or
decompressed form. By default, the “Compress”
option is selected.
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard
disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer
damage and data loss, you will always be able to
recuperate the data from disks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Hard Disk Backup - list
Hard Disk protected
How to back up your Hard Disk data
1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready.
Hard Disk not protected
Selecting this function opens a second level
display showing the Hard disk directory on
the left and a column on the right where you
can prepare a list of data to backup and compress.
The backup list can consist of Block files only,
not individual files normally found in a block.
Press ENTER to save the selected status to
memory.
As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data
are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in
the case of Sounds. Use this conversion to
calculate approximately how many disks you
will require to backup your data.
The size of each selected Block file is shown
at the bottom of the directory.
HARD DISK PROTECTION
HARD DISK BACKUP
As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss,
use the Hard Disk Protection function to protect
your hard disk
Note: All WK6/8 instruments with factory fitted
Hard Disks leave the factory with the Hard Disk
Protection active.
In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operations on the Hard Disk, the protection must be
removed.
Select the Hard Disk Protection function and
press ENTER to activate the protection function.
Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between
the two options (Unprotect/Protect).
This option allows you to backup part or all the
Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or
decompressed form. By default, the “Compress”
option is selected.
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard
disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer
damage and data loss, you will always be able to
recuperate the data from disks.
Press ENTER to save the selected status to
memory.
2. Select Hard Disk Backup and press ENTER to
activate the function.
Selecting this function opens a second level
display showing the Hard disk directory on
the left and a column on the right where you
can prepare a list of data to backup and compress.
The backup list can consist of Block files only,
not individual files normally found in a block.
Selecting this function opens a second level
display showing the Hard disk directory on
the left and a column on the right where you
can prepare a list of data to backup and compress.
The backup list can consist of Block files only,
not individual files normally found in a block.
This option allows you to backup part or all the
Hard disk data to floppy disk in compressed or
decompressed form. By default, the “Compress”
option is selected.
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all newly elaborated data present on Hard
disk to floppy disks. Should the Hard disk suffer
damage and data loss, you will always be able to
recuperate the data from disks.
As a safety measure to prevent unwanted file loss,
use the Hard Disk Protection function to protect
your hard disk
Note: All WK6/8 instruments with factory fitted
Hard Disks leave the factory with the Hard Disk
Protection active.
In order to use the Save, Erase or Move operations on the Hard Disk, the protection must be
removed.
Select the Hard Disk Protection function and
press ENTER to activate the protection function.
Use the right/left cursor arrows to toggle between
the two options (Unprotect/Protect).
HARD DISK BACKUP
HARD DISK PROTECTION
1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready.
How to back up your Hard Disk data
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Hard Disk Backup - list
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•32 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data
are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in
the case of Sounds. Use this conversion to
calculate approximately how many disks you
will require to backup your data.
The size of each selected Block file is shown
at the bottom of the directory.
2. Select Hard Disk Backup and press ENTER to
activate the function.
Press ENTER to save the selected status to
memory.
Hard Disk protected
1. Have some empty formatted data disks ready.
2. Select Hard Disk Backup and press ENTER to
activate the function.
As a general rule, 1000 Kb of Hard Disk data
are compressed to approx. 50% of the original value in the case of Songs, and 30% in
the case of Sounds. Use this conversion to
calculate approximately how many disks you
will require to backup your data.
The size of each selected Block file is shown
at the bottom of the directory.
Hard Disk not protected
How to back up your Hard Disk data
Hard Disk not protected
Hard Disk protected
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Hard Disk Backup - list
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•32 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•33
Execute (F8)
• Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.
After a short period, the unit is ready to
backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:
Repeat the operation for other blocks
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
○
○
3. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to backup.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
Select All (F7)
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Block contained in the Hard disk
Execute (F8)
• Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.
After a short period, the unit is ready to
backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:
Repeat the operation for other blocks
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
4. Press EXECUTE to start the backup process.
Delete (F5)
See EXECUTE below.
“Operation completed”.
Compress (F2)
When the Backup has finished, a message
is displayed saying:
Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of
the backup list.
• Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to
start saving to the disk.
This function is selected by default.
See EXECUTE below.
This function is selected by default.
Overwrite (F1)
Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of
the backup list.
If the Backup procedure requires more than
one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the
insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite
data on disks previously used for other backups.
Compress (F2)
“Operation completed”.
Deselect this function if you want the backup
floppies to retain any data currently stored in
them.
This function is selected by default.
If the Backup procedure requires more than
one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the
insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
When the Backup has finished, a message
is displayed saying:
This function is selected by default.
If the Backup procedure requires more than
one disk, a dialogue appears requesting the
insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
“Operation completed”.
Deselect this function if you want the backup
floppies to retain any data currently stored in
them.
Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite
data on disks previously used for other backups.
Deselect this function if you want the backup
floppies to retain any data currently stored in
them.
This function is selected by default.
• Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to
start saving to the disk.
Compress (F2)
When the Backup has finished, a message
is displayed saying:
Overwrite (F1)
Select COMPRESS (F2) to compress the files of
the backup list.
• Insert a disk into the drive and press ENTER to
start saving to the disk.
This function is selected by default.
See EXECUTE below.
Select OVERWRITE (F1) if you want to overwrite
data on disks previously used for other backups.
○
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
4. Press EXECUTE to start the backup process.
Overwrite (F1)
○
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Hard Disk directory.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Block contained in the Hard disk
○
Reset (F6)
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
○
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
Select All (F7)
Disk & Hard Disk
3. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to backup.
Delete (F5)
Delete (F5)
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Hard Disk directory.
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Hard Disk directory.
4. Press EXECUTE to start the backup process.
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
After a short period, the unit is ready to
backup the data and a dialog appears requesting you to insert Disk n. 1:
Reset (F6)
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Block contained in the Hard disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•33
Select All (F7)
○
3. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to backup.
Execute (F8)
○
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
• Press EXECUTE (F8) to start the backup process.
○
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
Repeat the operation for other blocks
Reset (F6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•33
3•34 Reference Guide
4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to restore.
HARD DISK RESTORE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load
backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard
Disk.
Hard Disk Restore - list
Press EXCECUTE (F8) to start the restore process.
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
How to restore backup data to the Hard disk
Execute (F8)
1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup file
or files into the drive.
Repeat the operation for other blocks
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Restore directory.
2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER to activate the function.
Select All (F7)
The floppy disk may contain more than one
backup file (shown with the “.AR” extension),
4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to restore.
HARD DISK RESTORE
Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load
backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard
Disk.
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
How to restore backup data to the Hard disk
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup file
or files into the drive.
Repeat the operation for other blocks
2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER to activate the function.
The floppy disk may contain more than one
backup file (shown with the “.AR” extension),
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
5. Press EXECUTE to start the hard disk restore process.
Reset (F6)
When the Hard Disk restore procedure is finished, a message is displayed saying:
Confirming the backup file selection opens a
second level display showing the Floppy disk
directory on the left and a column on the right
where you can prepare a list of backup data
to decompress.
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Restore directory.
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
Delete (F5)
“Operation completed”.
3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and
press ENTER to confirm.
Confirming the backup file selection opens a
second level display showing the Floppy disk
directory on the left and a column on the right
where you can prepare a list of backup data
to decompress.
3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and
press ENTER to confirm.
Delete (F5)
Confirming the backup file selection opens a
second level display showing the Floppy disk
directory on the left and a column on the right
where you can prepare a list of backup data
to decompress.
If the Hard disk restore procedure requires
more than one disk, a dialogue apppears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
If the Hard disk restore procedure requires
more than one disk, a dialogue apppears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
“Operation completed”.
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Restore directory.
When the Hard Disk restore procedure is finished, a message is displayed saying:
Reset (F6)
5. Press EXECUTE to start the hard disk restore process.
The floppy disk may contain more than one
backup file (shown with the “.AR” extension),
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Restore directory.
Use Select All (F7) to select all the Blocks contained in the Restore directory.
Execute (F8)
Execute (F8)
1. Insert the Floppy disk containing the backup file
or files into the drive.
Repeat the operation for other blocks
The cursor moves down to the next empty
location automatically.
How to restore backup data to the Hard disk
Select a Block with the Up/Down cursor arrows and press ENTER to insert it into the
list.
Use the HARD DISK RESTORE function to load
backup data from floppy disk back into the Hard
Disk.
4. Prepare a list containing the block(s) to restore.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•34 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
HARD DISK RESTORE
○
The Delete option does not cancel a Block from
the Restore directory.
Select All (F7)
2. Select Hard Disk Restore and press ENTER to activate the function.
○
Select DELETE (F5) to cancel a block from the
list.
Select All (F7)
Hard Disk Restore - list
○
Delete (F5)
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
Press EXCECUTE (F8) to start the restore process.
○
If the Hard disk restore procedure requires
more than one disk, a dialogue apppears requesting the insertion of disk n. 2 and so on..
Reset (F6)
Select RESET (F6) to cancel a list containing two
or more Blocks in a single step.
○
5. Press EXECUTE to start the hard disk restore process.
When the Hard Disk restore procedure is finished, a message is displayed saying:
“Operation completed”.
3. Select the file to restore to the Hard disk and
press ENTER to confirm.
If you attempt to insert a Block that has already been inserted, an appropriate warning
is displayed. Press ESCAPE to cancel the
warning and select a different Block.
Press EXCECUTE (F8) to start the restore process.
Hard Disk Restore - list
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•34 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•35
SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Additional functions
○
○
○
○
○
○
NEW FL. DISK (F5)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Updates the current directory after changing a
disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument
to recognize the disk change.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
3•35
The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all
the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the
type of Sample-RAM required to access.
Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor
buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
You can also see the new directory by closing
the «Edit Disk» environment with ESCAPE then
re-entering «Edit Disk».
FREE MEMORY (F6)
This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed
Sample-RAM.
SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
○
This option is active only if the instrument has
been installed with one or both optional Sample
RAM kits.
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following
dialog window:
This option is active only if the instrument has
been installed with one or both optional Sample
RAM kits.
○
SAMPLE-RAM... (F8)
Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a
‘flag’ is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sound’s associated sample.
When you save the RAM -Sound, the ‘flag’ is
retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds
again with the Load All Sound or Load Single
Block operations, the RAM
-Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the ‘flag’.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note -
The samples saved in a Block with
successive Save Single Sound operations may be
too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this
case, the instrument attempts to load all the
samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case
also the samples are too large for the available
memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Additional functions
○
The samples saved in a Block with
successive Save Single Sound operations may be
too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this
case, the instrument attempts to load all the
samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case
also the samples are too large for the available
memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This section explains the various options found
in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector,
some of which are permanent, others specific to
a particular command or disk page.
○
○
NEW FL. DISK (F5)
○
○
The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all
the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the
type of Sample-RAM required to access.
○
○
Updates the current directory after changing a
disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument
to recognize the disk change.
○
© Note -
○
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following
dialog window:
When you save the RAM -Sound, the ‘flag’ is
retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds
again with the Load All Sound or Load Single
Block operations, the RAM
-Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the ‘flag’.
○
Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor
buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed
Sample-RAM.
Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a
‘flag’ is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sound’s associated sample.
○
Once a RAM -Sound is loaded into memory, a
‘flag’ is applied to it to indicate which SampleRAM contains the sound’s associated sample.
FREE MEMORY (F6)
○
○
Select the type of Sample-RAM with the cursor
buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
○
You can also see the new directory by closing
the «Edit Disk» environment with ESCAPE then
re-entering «Edit Disk».
The Sample-RAM option, which appears in all
the main Disk pages except Utility, selects the
type of Sample-RAM required to access.
○
This section explains the various options found
in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector,
some of which are permanent, others specific to
a particular command or disk page.
This option is active only if the instrument has
been installed with one or both optional Sample
RAM kits.
Pressing the F5 Soft button opens the following
dialog window:
You can also see the new directory by closing
the «Edit Disk» environment with ESCAPE then
re-entering «Edit Disk».
○
When you save the RAM -Sound, the ‘flag’ is
retained in the disk. When you load the Sounds
again with the Load All Sound or Load Single
Block operations, the RAM
-Sounds are directed to the Sample-RAM indicated by the ‘flag’.
Updates the current directory after changing a
disk inserted in the drive, allowing the instrument
to recognize the disk change.
○
FREE MEMORY (F6)
NEW FL. DISK (F5)
○
© Note - The samples saved in a Block with
successive Save Single Sound operations may be
too large to reside in the Backed S-RAM. In this
case, the instrument attempts to load all the
samples into the Volatile S-RAM. If in this case
also the samples are too large for the available
memory, the loading operation will be interrupted.
This section explains the various options found
in the main Disk pages and in the File Selector,
some of which are permanent, others specific to
a particular command or disk page.
○
This option displays the amount of memory remaining in the floppy disk, Hard disk, SystemRAM, volatile Sample-RAM and in the Backed
Sample-RAM.
Additional functions
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
3•35
3•36 Reference Guide
BLOCK RENAME (F7)
SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)
This option, which appears in all File Selectors,
allows you to modify the name of the selected
Block. Use the standard method of name entry
as described in the Data Entry paragraph in Chapter 1.
This option appears in all second level pages of
all Single File operations. The second level pages
are those that appear after confirming a File Selector selection.
○
BLOCK SIZE (F8)
This option, which appears in all File selectors,
determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the
directory of the active File Selector.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Search Resource function is particularly useful if your instrument is fitted with a Hard Disk
containing a large number of files.
For example, if you do not remember in which
Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-programmed Sound, or you want to go directly to a
Block name without scrolling through the entire
Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search option to open an insertion window where you can
specify a name.
Press ENTER to start the search and the first
Sound which includes the written name will appear, showing its location:
The dimensions of the same Block residing in
RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes,
due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is
not saved to disk.
BLOCK RENAME (F7)
SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)
This option, which appears in all File Selectors,
allows you to modify the name of the selected
Block. Use the standard method of name entry
as described in the Data Entry paragraph in Chapter 1.
This option appears in all second level pages of
all Single File operations. The second level pages
are those that appear after confirming a File Selector selection.
BLOCK SIZE (F8)
This option, which appears in all File selectors,
determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the
directory of the active File Selector.
The dimensions of the same Block residing in
RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes,
due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is
not saved to disk.
The name can be of the particular file you are
looking for, or part of the entire name. For example, if your Sound name includes the word “organ” or a Block contains a particular sequence
of letters, you can search for all files which include the inserted name.
The name can be of the particular file you are
looking for, or part of the entire name. For example, if your Sound name includes the word “organ” or a Block contains a particular sequence
of letters, you can search for all files which include the inserted name.
The dimensions of the same Block residing in
RAM and in disk can differ by a few kilobytes,
due to the fact that some Setup data in RAM is
not saved to disk.
For example, if you do not remember in which
Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-programmed Sound, or you want to go directly to a
Block name without scrolling through the entire
Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search option to open an insertion window where you can
specify a name.
The Search Resource function is particularly useful if your instrument is fitted with a Hard Disk
containing a large number of files.
SEARCH RESOURCE (F4)
BLOCK RENAME (F7)
○
This option appears in all second level pages of
all Single File operations. The second level pages
are those that appear after confirming a File Selector selection.
○
This option, which appears in all File Selectors,
allows you to modify the name of the selected
Block. Use the standard method of name entry
as described in the Data Entry paragraph in Chapter 1.
○
BLOCK SIZE (F8)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•36 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Press ENTER to start the search and the first
Sound which includes the written name will appear, showing its location:
This option, which appears in all File selectors,
determines the dimensions of the currently selected Block. The information appears under the
directory of the active File Selector.
○
For example, if you do not remember in which
Block of the Hard disk you stored a user-programmed Sound, or you want to go directly to a
Block name without scrolling through the entire
Hard Disk contents, press the Sound Search option to open an insertion window where you can
specify a name.
The name can be of the particular file you are
looking for, or part of the entire name. For example, if your Sound name includes the word “organ” or a Block contains a particular sequence
of letters, you can search for all files which include the inserted name.
Press ENTER to start the search and the first
Sound which includes the written name will appear, showing its location:
○
The Search Resource function is particularly useful if your instrument is fitted with a Hard Disk
containing a large number of files.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•36 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•37
○
The Sound Search function appears in the third
level directory displays for the following operations:
• Load Single Sound;
• Save Single Sound;
• Erase Single Sound;
• Copy Single Sound;:
• Move Single Sound.
○
○
○
○
If the displayed file is not the one you are looking
for, use the “F7 to Previous” and “F8 to Next options” are required.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
When you find the file you are looking for, press
ENTER to pass directly to the file location or
ESCAPE to abort the search operation.
SOUND SEARCH... (F7)
The Sound Search function appears in the third
level directory displays for the following operations:
• Load Single Sound;
• Save Single Sound;
• Erase Single Sound;
• Copy Single Sound;:
• Move Single Sound.
Sound Search will also inform you of the absence
a specified name by showing “Not Found”.
The function recalls the nearest Sound having
the string of characters specified in the active
zone.
SEARCH NEXT (F8)
Sound Search will also inform you of the absence
a specified name by showing “Not Found”.
○
This option recalls the next Sound on the search
list containing the string of characters specified
in the Sound Search option.
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound
found containing the specified characters.
1. Press Soft button F7.
The following dialog window appears:
The function recalls the nearest Sound having
the string of characters specified in the active
zone.
1. Press Soft button F7.
The following dialog window appears:
3. Press ENTER.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.
2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the
Sound you are looking for.
2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the
Sound you are looking for.
2. Insert the string of characters that relate to the
Sound you are looking for.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.
2 or 3 letters are sufficient.
3. Press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•37
SOUND SEARCH... (F7)
○
If the displayed file is not the one you are looking
for, use the “F7 to Previous” and “F8 to Next options” are required.
The Sound Search function appears in the third
level directory displays for the following operations:
○
This option recalls the next Sound on the search
list containing the string of characters specified
in the Sound Search option.
When you find the file you are looking for, press
ENTER to pass directly to the file location or
ESCAPE to abort the search operation.
• Load Single Sound;
• Save Single Sound;
• Erase Single Sound;
• Copy Single Sound;:
• Move Single Sound.
This option recalls the next Sound on the search
list containing the string of characters specified
in the Sound Search option.
SEARCH NEXT (F8)
Sound Search will also inform you of the absence
a specified name by showing “Not Found”.
The function recalls the nearest Sound having
the string of characters specified in the active
zone.
SEARCH NEXT (F8)
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound
found containing the specified characters.
1. Press Soft button F7.
The cursor goes directly to the first Sound
found containing the specified characters.
The following dialog window appears:
When you find the file you are looking for, press
ENTER to pass directly to the file location or
ESCAPE to abort the search operation.
SOUND SEARCH... (F7)
Disk & Hard Disk
If the displayed file is not the one you are looking
for, use the “F7 to Previous” and “F8 to Next options” are required.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•37
3•38 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
General disk handling information
General disk handling information
Handling Floppy Disks
When handling floppy disks, certain precautions
should be taken to avoid damage or data loss.
• Do not open the metal protection shutter or
touch the surface of a disk
• If your WK6/8 has to be transported, make
sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the
disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive
head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in close
proximity of television sets, computer monitors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are
potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing
so may render the disk unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in locations subject to extremes of temperature and
humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust
and dirt.
• Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk.
• Return disks to their protective cases after
use.
Disk not protected
Disk protected
Handling Floppy Disks
When handling floppy disks, certain precautions
should be taken to avoid damage or data loss.
• Do not open the metal protection shutter or
touch the surface of a disk
• If your WK6/8 has to be transported, make
sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the
disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive
head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in close
proximity of television sets, computer monitors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are
potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing
so may render the disk unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in locations subject to extremes of temperature and
humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust
and dirt.
• Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk.
• Return disks to their protective cases after
use.
Handling Floppy Disks
When handling floppy disks, certain precautions
should be taken to avoid damage or data loss.
• Do not open the metal protection shutter or
touch the surface of a disk
• If your WK6/8 has to be transported, make
sure that a floppy disk is not inserted in the
disk drive. Vibration may cause the disk drive
head to scratch the disk, rendering it unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in close
proximity of television sets, computer monitors, loudspeakers, or other devices that are
potential sources of magnetic fields. Doing
so may render the disk unusable.
• Do not store or place floppy disks in locations subject to extremes of temperature and
humidity, direct sunlight, or excessive dust
and dirt.
• Do not place objects on top of a floppy disk.
• Return disks to their protective cases after
use.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•38 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
General disk handling information
○
Ejecting a Floppy Disk
Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk
drive operating led is off and that the WK6/8 display is not currently showing a “Loading” or “Saving” message.
To extract the disk, press the eject button and
remove the disk.
If you’re new to working with floppy disks and
are not sure as to how you should handle these
delicate accessories, please read this section for
some useful information.
○
Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the
disk straight while inserting it.
Inserting a Disk into the disk drive
The Write Protect Tab
Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which
allows you to protect valuable data from being
accidentally overwritten.
To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid accidental erasure, slide the tab fully down to “open”
the window.
To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully
up to “close” the window.
○
Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive
label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly
into the drive until it “clicks” into place.
Disk protected
To extract the disk, press the eject button and
remove the disk.
Disk protected
Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab
as shown.
Disk not protected
Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk
drive operating led is off and that the WK6/8 display is not currently showing a “Loading” or “Saving” message.
Disk not protected
Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab
as shown.
Use a pen or other pointed object to set the tab
as shown.
Ejecting a Floppy Disk
Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive
label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly
into the drive until it “clicks” into place.
Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the
disk straight while inserting it.
Avoid forcing a disk into the drive and hold the
disk straight while inserting it.
Inserting a Disk into the disk drive
The Write Protect Tab
Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which
allows you to protect valuable data from being
accidentally overwritten.
To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid accidental erasure, slide the tab fully down to “open”
the window.
To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully
up to “close” the window.
Ejecting a Floppy Disk
Floppy disks must be inserted into the disk drive
label side up and shutter first. Push the disk firmly
into the drive until it “clicks” into place.
If you’re new to working with floppy disks and
are not sure as to how you should handle these
delicate accessories, please read this section for
some useful information.
Before ejecting a disk, make sure that the disk
drive operating led is off and that the WK6/8 display is not currently showing a “Loading” or “Saving” message.
Inserting a Disk into the disk drive
The Write Protect Tab
Floppy disks contain a write protect tab which
allows you to protect valuable data from being
accidentally overwritten.
To prevent writing data to disk and so avoid accidental erasure, slide the tab fully down to “open”
the window.
To permit writing data to disk, slide the tab fully
up to “close” the window.
To extract the disk, press the eject button and
remove the disk.
If you’re new to working with floppy disks and
are not sure as to how you should handle these
delicate accessories, please read this section for
some useful information.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•38 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
3•39
Backup copies
Disk Drive Head Cleaning
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or
Hard disk to Floppy Disks.
After a prolonged period of use, disk save and
load errors may become frequent due mainly to
dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive
head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for
3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a
cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or
Hard disk to Floppy Disks.
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid.
It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your
disk data. “Backup” is technical jargon for “a second copy”. Backup copies stored in a safe place
are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.
2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive.
3. Execute a load function. An error message will
appear. This is normal.
○
○
○
○
Backup copies
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk Drive Head Cleaning
○
Should you accidentally erase some files from
RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and
data loss, you will always be able to recuperate
the data from your disks.
After a prolonged period of use, disk save and
load errors may become frequent due mainly to
dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive
head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for
3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a
cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid.
2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive.
3. Execute a load function. An error message will
appear. This is normal.
4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.
4. After approximately 10 seconds, eject the disk.
After a prolonged period of use, disk save and
load errors may become frequent due mainly to
dirty disk drive heads, indicating that the disk drive
head may need cleaning. This can be done using a good-quality fluid-type head cleaning kit for
3.5 inch (double-sided) disk drives. Do not use a
cleaning kit intended for single-sided disk drives.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•39
Disk Drive Head Cleaning
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Backup copies
1. Moisten the cleaning disk with cleaning fluid.
○
At the end of a work session, always remember
to copy all elaborated data present on RAM or
Hard disk to Floppy Disks.
2. Insert the cleaning disk into the disk drive.
○
Should you accidentally erase some files from
RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and
data loss, you will always be able to recuperate
the data from your disks.
3. Execute a load function. An error message will
appear. This is normal.
○
It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your
disk data. “Backup” is technical jargon for “a second copy”. Backup copies stored in a safe place
are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.
It is advisable to keep backup copies of all your
disk data. “Backup” is technical jargon for “a second copy”. Backup copies stored in a safe place
are extremely important. Disks can become damaged or lost, so please backup your work.
○
Do not use the disk drive for about 5 minutes.
Should you accidentally erase some files from
RAM, or should the hard disk suffer damage and
data loss, you will always be able to recuperate
the data from your disks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Disk & Hard Disk
○
○
○
○
○
3•39
3•40 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•40 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macintosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can
be found in a Bloc.
Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSDOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to
bear in mind the following advice:
• do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.:
«MY FILE.BLK»). To separate a name into
two parts, you can either:
1) separate two parts by the “underscore”
symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK»).
2) Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first
letters of both parts of the name, lowercase
for the others (e.g.: «MyFile.BLK»).
• do not assign two files the same name using
uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g.
«MYFILE» and «myfile»).
○
○
Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSDOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to
bear in mind the following advice:
• do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.:
«MY FILE.BLK»). To separate a name into
two parts, you can either:
1) separate two parts by the “underscore”
symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK»).
2) Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first
letters of both parts of the name, lowercase
for the others (e.g.: «MyFile.BLK»).
• do not assign two files the same name using
uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g.
«MYFILE» and «myfile»).
The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macintosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can
be found in a Bloc.
○
○
Precautions to observe when using WK6/8 disks
with a computer
In name write situations, the WK6/8 allows file
names of up to 10 characters, except the Block
which accepts 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS
and Windows 3.1 OS. Block files also include
the extension «.BLK». If your files are to be used
in MS-DOS devices (IBM PC’s and compatibles),
bear in mind the 8 character limit of these systems when naming your files.
In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems,
file names can include more that 8 characters.
When a name is modified on a computer, the following rules should be remembered:
• do not change the Block file extension.
• avoid Block names longer that 8 characters.
• the maximum number of files in a Block cannot exceed the limit imposed by the WK6/8
RAM.
• do not change the names of the permanent
files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM
Style Group names). WK6/8 requires standard names to recognize the structure of the
data.
○
In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems,
file names can include more that 8 characters.
When a name is modified on a computer, the following rules should be remembered:
• do not change the Block file extension.
• avoid Block names longer that 8 characters.
• the maximum number of files in a Block cannot exceed the limit imposed by the WK6/8
RAM.
• do not change the names of the permanent
files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM
Style Group names). WK6/8 requires standard names to recognize the structure of the
data.
Precautions to observe when using WK6/8 disks
with a computer
In name write situations, the WK6/8 allows file
names of up to 10 characters, except the Block
which accepts 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS
and Windows 3.1 OS. Block files also include
the extension «.BLK». If your files are to be used
in MS-DOS devices (IBM PC’s and compatibles),
bear in mind the 8 character limit of these systems when naming your files.
Precautions to observe when using WK6/8 disks
with a computer
In name write situations, the WK6/8 allows file
names of up to 10 characters, except the Block
which accepts 8, in compatibility with MS-DOS
and Windows 3.1 OS. Block files also include
the extension «.BLK». If your files are to be used
in MS-DOS devices (IBM PC’s and compatibles),
bear in mind the 8 character limit of these systems when naming your files.
In the Macintosh, OS/2 and Windows 95 systems,
file names can include more that 8 characters.
When a name is modified on a computer, the following rules should be remembered:
• do not change the Block file extension.
• avoid Block names longer that 8 characters.
• the maximum number of files in a Block cannot exceed the limit imposed by the WK6/8
RAM.
• do not change the names of the permanent
files contained in the Blocks (e.g. the ROM
Style Group names). WK6/8 requires standard names to recognize the structure of the
data.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3•40 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Furthermore, owing to some limitations of MSDOS, Windows 3.1 and Atari, it is essential to
bear in mind the following advice:
• do not insert spaces within a file name (e.g.:
«MY FILE.BLK»). To separate a name into
two parts, you can either:
1) separate two parts by the “underscore”
symbol (e.g.: MY_FILE.BLK»).
2) Use Uppercase (capital) letters for the first
letters of both parts of the name, lowercase
for the others (e.g.: «MyFile.BLK»).
• do not assign two files the same name using
uppercase and lowercase letters (e.g.
«MYFILE» and «myfile»).
The aspect of the Blocks are as folders (Macintosh, Atari) or sub-directories (MS-DOS, Windows, OS/2). Other sub-directories or folders can
be found in a Bloc.
Preload 4•1
• 4 Preload
○
○
○
○
Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more
than one Block, only the songs contained in the
first Block will be played while those of other Blocks
are ignored.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 4 Preload
○
○
○
○
○
Furthermore, if the «Auto Preload» option is enabled, Preload loads a Song together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds to
ensure the correct playback.
PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI
FILES ON DISK
If you have a WK6/8 Songs disk, or have purchased a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk
contains Song files, you can playback all the files
in a Block with a single command, without having to load them to memory beforehand. Preload
plays back up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after
the other.
THE PRELOAD FUNCTION
The Preload function is a background loading
facility which allows you to playback all the Songs
and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or
Hard disk with a single command, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Playback stops automatically when the last
Song or MIDI File reaches the end.
2. During playback, press PRELOAD to enter the
Preload display.
Once you have entered the Preload display,
you will have access to the available options
using the corresponding Soft buttons F1…F8.
3. Press STOP at any time during playback to stop
the current song and return to the Song view
page.
This will, however, cancel the Preload operation.
Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Preload 4•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more
than one Block, only the songs contained in the
first Block will be played while those of other Blocks
are ignored.
After short disk scanning period, the first Song
on the disk starts to play. During playback,
the background loading procedure for the
second song begins (the message
“Preloading Song” appears for an instant).
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been
played. During playback, the Song view page
is shown, where you can select a track and
set it to key-play in order to play along with
the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
If you have a WK6/8 Songs disk, or have purchased a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk
contains Song files, you can playback all the files
in a Block with a single command, without having to load them to memory beforehand. Preload
plays back up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after
the other.
©
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive and press
PRELOAD.
It is also possible to prepare a “Preload” list consisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both
files types are present on the source device
(floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from
different Blocks.
PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI
FILES ON DISK
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive and press
PRELOAD.
○
Furthermore, if the «Auto Preload» option is enabled, Preload loads a Song together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds to
ensure the correct playback.
After short disk scanning period, the first Song
on the disk starts to play. During playback,
the background loading procedure for the
second song begins (the message
“Preloading Song” appears for an instant).
It is also possible to prepare a “Preload” list consisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both
files types are present on the source device
(floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from
different Blocks.
Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been
played. During playback, the Song view page
is shown, where you can select a track and
set it to key-play in order to play along with
the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
○
○
○
○
○
○
Playback stops automatically when the last
Song or MIDI File reaches the end.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. During playback, press PRELOAD to enter the
Preload display.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Once you have entered the Preload display,
you will have access to the available options
using the corresponding Soft buttons F1…F8.
3. Press STOP at any time during playback to stop
the current song and return to the Song view
page.
This will, however, cancel the Preload operation.
• 4 Preload
○
©
○
○
THE PRELOAD FUNCTION
○
○
PLAYBACK ALL THE SONGS OR MIDI
FILES ON DISK
○
○
The Preload function is a background loading
facility which allows you to playback all the Songs
and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or
Hard disk with a single command, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand.
○
○
If you have a WK6/8 Songs disk, or have purchased a MIDI File data disk, or your Hard disk
contains Song files, you can playback all the files
in a Block with a single command, without having to load them to memory beforehand. Preload
plays back up to 16 Songs or MIDI files one after
the other.
○
○
© Note: if the disk or Hard disk contains more
than one Block, only the songs contained in the
first Block will be played while those of other Blocks
are ignored.
○
○
1. Insert the disk into the disk drive and press
PRELOAD.
○
○
Furthermore, if the «Auto Preload» option is enabled, Preload loads a Song together with all associated RAM-Sounds and RAM -Sounds to
ensure the correct playback.
○
○
After short disk scanning period, the first Song
on the disk starts to play. During playback,
the background loading procedure for the
second song begins (the message
“Preloading Song” appears for an instant).
○
○
It is also possible to prepare a “Preload” list consisting of Songs and MIDI files, provided that both
files types are present on the source device
(floppy or Hard disk); you can select files from
different Blocks.
○
○
Playback continues non-stop until all the
Songs or MIDI Files on disk have been
played. During playback, the Song view page
is shown, where you can select a track and
set it to key-play in order to play along with
the Song. Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
○
○
Playback stops automatically when the last
Song or MIDI File reaches the end.
○
○
2. During playback, press PRELOAD to enter the
Preload display.
○
○
Once you have entered the Preload display,
you will have access to the available options
using the corresponding Soft buttons F1…F8.
○
○
3. Press STOP at any time during playback to stop
the current song and return to the Song view
page.
The Preload function is a background loading
facility which allows you to playback all the Songs
and/or MIDI Files contained in a floppy disk or
Hard disk with a single command, without having to load all the data to memory beforehand.
○
○
This will, however, cancel the Preload operation.
THE PRELOAD FUNCTION
○
○
Preload: Song or MIDI File playback from disk
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Preload 4•1
4•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Create a Preload list
Create a Preload list
Preload display showing a list of 8 Song files
Return the cursor to the right again and select an empty location for the next file on the
list. Return the cursor to the left to select the
next file and continue as before until your list
is complete.
1. If the Preload window is not showing, press
PRELOAD with a disk inserted in the drive,
press PRELOAD again then press RESET
LIST (F4).
6. If you want to change an inserted file, take
the cursor over to the right of the display,
select the file that needs replacing, return the
cursor over to the left, select the file to insert
and press ENTER.
Reset List cancels all the Songs from the
current list and stops playback instantly.
You can fill the list in a single step using the
«Select All” function (F7).
During playback, the Song View page is
shown. You can select a track and set it to
key-play in order to play along with the Song.
Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
5. Select other files and press ENTER each time
to include them in the list.
If the disk contains more than one Block,
press ESCAPE to exit from the current directory, select another block and press ENTER
to gain access.
3. Select the type of file to include in the list using the soft buttons F5 («SONG») and F6
(«SMF», Standard MIDI File).
Press STOP only if you want to stop playback, otherwise you will cancel the Preload
operation.
The PRELOAD window shows the Songs or
MIDI files disk directory on the left, and the
destination directory on the right, represented
by the Preload list.
Reset List cancels all the Songs from the
current list and stops playback instantly.
1. If the Preload window is not showing, press
PRELOAD with a disk inserted in the drive,
press PRELOAD again then press RESET
LIST (F4).
IMPORTANT: If you are working from
Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so
will provoke the cancellation of the list.
2. If necessary select the source device using
the Soft buttons F1 («Floppy disk») and F2
(«Hard disk»).
During playback, the Song View page is
shown. You can select a track and set it to
key-play in order to play along with the Song.
Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
5. Select other files and press ENTER each time
to include them in the list.
3. Select the type of file to include in the list using the soft buttons F5 («SONG») and F6
(«SMF», Standard MIDI File).
Press STOP only if you want to stop playback, otherwise you will cancel the Preload
operation.
If the disk contains more than one Block,
press ESCAPE to exit from the current directory, select another block and press ENTER
to gain access.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or
MIDI file to include in the list and press ENTER. The selected file is added to the first
available space in the list and the destination
frame moves one step forward.
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or
MIDI file to include in the list and press ENTER. The selected file is added to the first
available space in the list and the destination
frame moves one step forward.
7. Press F8 («Play») to start the playback of the
Songs in the list.
You can fill the list in a single step using the
«Select All” function (F7).
6. If you want to change an inserted file, take
the cursor over to the right of the display,
select the file that needs replacing, return the
cursor over to the left, select the file to insert
and press ENTER.
The PRELOAD window shows the Songs or
MIDI files disk directory on the left, and the
destination directory on the right, represented
by the Preload list.
7. Press F8 («Play») to start the playback of the
Songs in the list.
2. If necessary select the source device using
the Soft buttons F1 («Floppy disk») and F2
(«Hard disk»).
©
Reset List cancels all the Songs from the
current list and stops playback instantly.
© IMPORTANT: If you are working from
Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so
will provoke the cancellation of the list.
The PRELOAD window shows the Songs or
MIDI files disk directory on the left, and the
destination directory on the right, represented
by the Preload list.
1. If the Preload window is not showing, press
PRELOAD with a disk inserted in the drive,
press PRELOAD again then press RESET
LIST (F4).
2. If necessary select the source device using
the Soft buttons F1 («Floppy disk») and F2
(«Hard disk»).
3. Select the type of file to include in the list using the soft buttons F5 («SONG») and F6
(«SMF», Standard MIDI File).
4. Use the cursor buttons to select the Song or
MIDI file to include in the list and press ENTER. The selected file is added to the first
available space in the list and the destination
frame moves one step forward.
Return the cursor to the right again and select an empty location for the next file on the
list. Return the cursor to the left to select the
next file and continue as before until your list
is complete.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Create a Preload list
○
You can fill the list in a single step using the
«Select All” function (F7).
7. Press F8 («Play») to start the playback of the
Songs in the list.
During playback, the Song View page is
shown. You can select a track and set it to
key-play in order to play along with the Song.
Use the << and >> buttons to advance or rewind the Song at will.
Press STOP only if you want to stop playback, otherwise you will cancel the Preload
operation.
If the disk contains more than one Block,
press ESCAPE to exit from the current directory, select another block and press ENTER
to gain access.
5. Select other files and press ENTER each time
to include them in the list.
©
IMPORTANT: If you are working from
Floppy disk, do not extract the disk during the file insertion procedure; doing so
will provoke the cancellation of the list.
6. If you want to change an inserted file, take
the cursor over to the right of the display,
select the file that needs replacing, return the
cursor over to the left, select the file to insert
and press ENTER.
Preload display showing a list of 8 Song files
○
Return the cursor to the right again and select an empty location for the next file on the
list. Return the cursor to the left to select the
next file and continue as before until your list
is complete.
Preload display showing a list of 8 Song files
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Preload 4•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Preload functions
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk,
identified by the extension ‘.MID’, together with
any other sub-directories present (shown with the
.<DIR> extension).
HARD DISK (F2)
SELECT ALL (F7)
Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on
the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory
showing the files contained in the disk (Block files
or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend
on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is
selected.
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the
display and inserts them directly into the list. The
list can contain a maximum of 16 files.
SMF (F6)
Preload exploits the Song memory locations 1
and 2 for playback and stand-by of the background loaded files.
Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corresponds to the disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files).
The files that appear depend on whether the
SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
The instant you start the playback, all Songs currently residing in memory are cancelled, except
the one currently playing.
To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
SELECT ALL (F7)
HARD DISK (F2)
Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on
the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory
showing the files contained in the disk (Block files
or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend
on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is
selected.
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the
list, after a short period. If the songs shown originate from Midi files, the preloading period takes
more time due to the conversion process.
PLAY (F8)
If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the
Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM
Sounds will not be loaded.
PLAY (F8)
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the
list, after a short period. If the songs shown originate from Midi files, the preloading period takes
more time due to the conversion process.
During playback, you can advance or rewind the
Song using the << and >> buttons. You can select one or more tracks, set them to key-play and
play along with the Song. It is not possible, however, to select the Song-Performances.
HARD DISK (F2)
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the
display and inserts them directly into the list. The
list can contain a maximum of 16 files.
During playback, you can advance or rewind the
Song using the << and >> buttons. You can select one or more tracks, set them to key-play and
play along with the Song. It is not possible, however, to select the Song-Performances.
If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts
all MIDI files present in the current directory. The
list will show the Song names without the .MID
extension.
Starts the playback of the Songs contained in the
list, after a short period. If the songs shown originate from Midi files, the preloading period takes
more time due to the conversion process.
When this option is selected (negative highlight),
Songs are loaded into memory together with all
associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If
there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept
the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used
instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
Selects the Hard disk (if installed). The list on
the left corresponds to the Hard disk directory
showing the files contained in the disk (Block files
or Song/SMF files). The files that appear depend
on whether the SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is
selected.
PLAY (F8)
If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts
all MIDI files present in the current directory. The
list will show the Song names without the .MID
extension.
When this option is selected (negative highlight),
Songs are loaded into memory together with all
associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If
there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept
the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used
instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
Selects all the files shown in the left part of the
display and inserts them directly into the list. The
list can contain a maximum of 16 files.
If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the
Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM
Sounds will not be loaded.
AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
During playback, you can advance or rewind the
Song using the << and >> buttons. You can select one or more tracks, set them to key-play and
play along with the Song. It is not possible, however, to select the Song-Performances.
If the SMF option is selected, Select All inserts
all MIDI files present in the current directory. The
list will show the Song names without the .MID
extension.
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk,
identified by the extension ‘.MID’, together with
any other sub-directories present (shown with the
.<DIR> extension).
RESET LIST (F4)
Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corresponds to the disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files).
The files that appear depend on whether the
SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
AUTO PRELOAD (F3)
○
Cancels the current list and stops the playback
instantly.
SMF (F6)
SELECT ALL (F7)
If the Auto Preload option is not selected, the
Songs associated RAM-Sounds and RAM
Sounds will not be loaded.
○
If the «Auto Preload» option is selected, a Song
will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
When this option is selected (negative highlight),
Songs are loaded into memory together with all
associated RAM-Sounds and RAM Sounds. If
there is not sufficient memory in RAM to accept
the associated Sounds, ROM Sounds will be used
instead and the Song may playback incorrectly.
○
SONG (F5)
The Preload functions
○
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows WK6/8 or WX/SX format Songs
only.
○
RESET LIST (F4)
To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
RESET LIST (F4)
To stop the playback, press the STOP button.
Cancels the current list and stops the playback
instantly.
The instant you start the playback, all Songs currently residing in memory are cancelled, except
the one currently playing.
Cancels the current list and stops the playback
instantly.
The instant you start the playback, all Songs currently residing in memory are cancelled, except
the one currently playing.
SONG (F5)
Preload exploits the Song memory locations 1
and 2 for playback and stand-by of the background loaded files.
SONG (F5)
Preload exploits the Song memory locations 1
and 2 for playback and stand-by of the background loaded files.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Preload 4•3
If the «Auto Preload» option is selected, a Song
will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
The Preload functions
○
SMF (F6)
○
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows WK6/8 or WX/SX format Songs
only.
FLOPPY DISK (F1)
○
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows the MIDI files contained in the disk,
identified by the extension ‘.MID’, together with
any other sub-directories present (shown with the
.<DIR> extension).
If the «Auto Preload» option is selected, a Song
will load with its associated RAM Sounds and
Selects the floppy disk. The list on the left corresponds to the disk directory showing the files contained in the disk (Block files or Song/SMF files).
The files that appear depend on whether the
SONG (F5) or SMF (F6) option is selected.
When this option is selected, the left part of the
display shows WK6/8 or WX/SX format Songs
only.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Preload 4•3
4•4 Reference Guide
RAM -Sounds contained in the Block housing
the Song. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM
for the operation, the Song will play incorrectly
using ROM-Sounds.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RAM -Sounds contained in the Block housing
the Song. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM
for the operation, the Song will play incorrectly
using ROM-Sounds.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: When the samples of a Song are loaded,
© Hint: When the samples of a Song are loaded,
the Auto Preload utilizes the free Sample-RAM,
then starts to substitute the samples of the Song in
playback with the samples of the new Song. At a
certain point, the Song in playback will start to play
incorrectly. It is advisable, therefore, to avoid using
an excessive amount of samples (not more than
half the available Sample-RAM).
the Auto Preload utilizes the free Sample-RAM,
then starts to substitute the samples of the Song in
playback with the samples of the new Song. At a
certain point, the Song in playback will start to play
incorrectly. It is advisable, therefore, to avoid using
an excessive amount of samples (not more than
half the available Sample-RAM).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: When the samples of a Song are loaded,
the Auto Preload utilizes the free Sample-RAM,
then starts to substitute the samples of the Song in
playback with the samples of the new Song. At a
certain point, the Song in playback will start to play
incorrectly. It is advisable, therefore, to avoid using
an excessive amount of samples (not more than
half the available Sample-RAM).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RAM -Sounds contained in the Block housing
the Song. If there is not sufficient memory in RAM
for the operation, the Song will play incorrectly
using ROM-Sounds.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•1
• 5 Selection/Help
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 5 Selection/Help
Selection
Name of the selected
Performance group
Name of the selected
Performance group
Performance 57...64
Selection
○
CC00 [48] - PC [56...63]
○
...
SELECTING PERFORMANCES
Panel selection
Panel selection
Panel selection is preferable when playing live.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Performances from the Performance Groups also
changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
Panel selection is preferable when playing live.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Performances from the Performance Groups also
changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS
buttons to open a «Select Performance» window.
1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS
buttons to open a «Select Performance» window.
2. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
2. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
CC00 [48] - PC [8...15]
SELECTING PERFORMANCES
Performance 9...16
Performance 1...8
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: When you select a Performance, WK6/8
sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
Performance (selected with the
corresponding Soft button)
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Performance (selected with the
corresponding Soft button)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection via MIDI
Selection via MIDI
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 48) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 48) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
Message...
selects...
Message...
selects...
CC00 [48] - PC [0...7]
Performance 1...8
CC00 [48] - PC [0...7]
Performance 1...8
CC00 [48] - PC [8...15]
Performance 9...16
CC00 [48] - PC [8...15]
Performance 9...16
Panel selection is preferable when playing live.
If the STYLE LOCK button is off, selecting Performances from the Performance Groups also
changes the Style, the Variation and Tempo.
...
Name of the selected
Performance group
Performance 57...64
CC00 [48] - PC [56...63]
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•1
Performance 57...64
• 5 Selection/Help
...
CC00 [48] - PC [56...63]
○
Selection
○
○
SELECTING PERFORMANCES
○
○
Panel selection
○
○
1. Press one of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS
buttons to open a «Select Performance» window.
○
Note: When you select a Performance, WK6/8
sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
2. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
○
©
○
© Note: When you select a Performance, WK6/8
sends CC00 [value 48]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
Performance (selected with the
corresponding Soft button)
○
Selection via MIDI
○
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 48) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
○
selects...
○
Message...
○
CC00 [48] - PC [0...7]
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•1
5•2 Reference Guide
SELECTING STYLES
Selecting Styles via MIDI
Panel selection
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. The Common
Channel is set in «Edit MIDI »
○
3. Select a Style with the corresponding Soft
button.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: When you select a Style, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 32, 33 or 44]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
USER 4 - Style 25...32
USER 1 - Style 1...8
TRAD 1 - Style 129…144
○
CC00 [32] - PC [112..127] US.TRAD - Style 113...128
...
To select USER Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 44) and a Program Change.
To select ROM Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 32) and a Program Change.
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. The Common
Channel is set in «Edit MIDI »
Selecting Styles via MIDI
○
○
○
○
Panel selection
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. The Common
Channel is set in «Edit MIDI »
○
○
Name of the selected
Style Group
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: When you select a Style, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 32, 33 or 44]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Style (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
To select ROM Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 32) and a Program Change.
To select USER Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 44) and a Program Change.
Message..
selects...
CC00 [32] - PC [0...15]
8 BEAT - Style 1...16
...
CC00 [32] - PC [112..127] US.TRAD - Style 113...128
CC00 [33] - PC [0…15]
TRAD 1 - Style 129…144
…
○
CC00 [33] - PC [48…63] LATIN 2 - Style 177…192
Recalling Styles by selecting the Performances
If the LED of the STYLE LOCK button is OFF
when you select a Performance, you also recall
a Style, Variation and Tempo. If STYLE LOCK is
ON, the current Style rests unchanged when you
select a Performance.
As well as track data (Bank Select, Program
Change, Volume, Pan) the Programmable Performances memorize (a) the selection of a Style,
(b) the selection of a Variation of the Style, (c)
the Tempo.
CC00 [44] - PC [0...7]
USER 1 - Style 1...8
...
CC00 [44] - PC [24...31]
USER 4 - Style 25...32
Name of the selected
Style Group
1. Deactivate the STYLE LOCK button.
2. Press one of the PERFORMANCE buttons
of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS to open a
«Select Performance» window.
3. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button. The memorized Style and
Variation will be recalled.
1. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons
to open a «Style Select» window.
selects...
○
USER 4 - Style 25...32
2. Use the Page scoll buttons (
) to pass to
the second bank of Rom Styles or to return
to the first bank.
Message..
8 BEAT - Style 1...16
○
USER 1 - Style 1...8
3. Select a Style with the corresponding Soft
button.
CC00 [32] - PC [0...15]
5•2 Reference Guide
○
Selecting Styles via MIDI
TRAD 1 - Style 129…144
CC00 [44] - PC [24...31]
CC00 [33] - PC [0…15]
○
SELECTING STYLES
1. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons
to open a «Style Select» window.
...
…
○
○
© Note: When you select a Style, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 32, 33 or 44]-PC messages in rapid
succession on the Common Channel . The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
○
8 BEAT - Style 1...16
CC00 [44] - PC [0...7]
CC00 [33] - PC [48…63] LATIN 2 - Style 177…192
○
○
CC00 [33] - PC [48…63] LATIN 2 - Style 177…192
CC00 [44] - PC [0...7]
○
○
…
...
○
○
selects...
CC00 [32] - PC [0...15]
CC00 [44] - PC [24...31]
○
○
Message..
○
Name of the selected
Style Group
○
○
3. Select a Style with the corresponding Soft
button.
3. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button. The memorized Style and
Variation will be recalled.
○
○
To select USER Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 44) and a Program Change.
CC00 [33] - PC [0…15]
2. Press one of the PERFORMANCE buttons
of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS to open a
«Select Performance» window.
○
○
2. Use the Page scoll buttons (
) to pass to
the second bank of Rom Styles or to return
to the first bank.
1. Deactivate the STYLE LOCK button.
○
○
To select ROM Styles, send Control Change 00
(value = 32) and a Program Change.
As well as track data (Bank Select, Program
Change, Volume, Pan) the Programmable Performances memorize (a) the selection of a Style,
(b) the selection of a Variation of the Style, (c)
the Tempo.
○
○
CC00 [32] - PC [112..127] US.TRAD - Style 113...128
If the LED of the STYLE LOCK button is OFF
when you select a Performance, you also recall
a Style, Variation and Tempo. If STYLE LOCK is
ON, the current Style rests unchanged when you
select a Performance.
○
○
...
Recalling Styles by selecting the Performances
○
○
1. Deactivate the STYLE LOCK button.
○
○
SELECTING STYLES
○
○
Style (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
Panel selection
○
○
Recalling Styles by selecting the Performances
○
○
If the LED of the STYLE LOCK button is OFF
when you select a Performance, you also recall
a Style, Variation and Tempo. If STYLE LOCK is
ON, the current Style rests unchanged when you
select a Performance.
○
○
As well as track data (Bank Select, Program
Change, Volume, Pan) the Programmable Performances memorize (a) the selection of a Style,
(b) the selection of a Variation of the Style, (c)
the Tempo.
○
©
○
2. Press one of the PERFORMANCE buttons
of the PERFORMANCE GROUPS to open a
«Select Performance» window.
2. Use the Page scoll buttons (
) to pass to
the second bank of Rom Styles or to return
to the first bank.
○
3. Select a Performance with the corresponding Soft button. The memorized Style and
Variation will be recalled.
Style (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
1. Press one of the STYLE GROUPS buttons
to open a «Style Select» window.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING STYLE-PERFORMANCES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Panel selection
Panel selection
To select a ROM Style-Performance or a User
Style-Performance, the Single Touch Play button should be on. If this button is not on, selecting a Style Performance sets S.T. PLAY to on
automatically.
To select a ROM Style-Performance or a User
Style-Performance, the Single Touch Play button should be on. If this button is not on, selecting a Style Performance sets S.T. PLAY to on
automatically.
STYLE P.
User Style-Perfs 1...8
1. In Style mode, press the STYLE.P button to
open the «Select Style-Performances» window.
2. Select a Style-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
2. Select a Style-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: When you select a Style-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 36 or 40]-PC messages
in rapid succession on the Common Channel. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
○
○
Note: When you select a Style-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 36 or 40]-PC messages
in rapid succession on the Common Channel. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
Style Performances (select with
the corresponding Soft button)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: If a Style-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTION VIA MIDI
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTION VIA MIDI
Style Performances (select with
the corresponding Soft button)
To select a Style-Performance (ROM or User) via
MIDI, the selection message must be sent to
WK6/8 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 36 for ROM, value 40 for
User] and a Program Change message in rapid
succession.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
To select a Style-Performance (ROM or User) via
MIDI, the selection message must be sent to
WK6/8 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 36 for ROM, value 40 for
User] and a Program Change message in rapid
succession.
○
○
○
Style Performances (select with
the corresponding Soft button)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. Select a Style-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
1. In Style mode, press the STYLE.P button to
open the «Select Style-Performances» window.
○
○
© Note: When you select a Style-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 36 or 40]-PC messages
in rapid succession on the Common Channel. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
○
Note: If a Style-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
© Note: If a Style-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
©
Message...
selects...
Message...
selects...
CC00 [36] - PC [0...7]
ROM Style-Perfs 1...8
CC00 [36] - PC [0...7]
ROM Style-Perfs 1...8
CC00 [40] - PC [0...7]
User Style-Perfs 1...8
CC00 [40] - PC [0...7]
User Style-Perfs 1...8
To select a ROM Style-Performance or a User
Style-Performance, the Single Touch Play button should be on. If this button is not on, selecting a Style Performance sets S.T. PLAY to on
automatically.
STYLE P.
Panel selection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•3
SELECTING STYLE-PERFORMANCES
○
SELECTION VIA MIDI
○
To select a Style-Performance (ROM or User) via
MIDI, the selection message must be sent to
WK6/8 on the Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00 [Value 36 for ROM, value 40 for
User] and a Program Change message in rapid
succession.
○
selects...
○
Message...
○
ROM Style-Perfs 1...8
○
©
CC00 [36] - PC [0...7]
1. In Style mode, press the STYLE.P button to
open the «Select Style-Performances» window.
○
STYLE P.
CC00 [40] - PC [0...7]
SELECTING STYLE-PERFORMANCES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•3
5•4 Reference Guide
SELECTING SOUNDS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SOUNDS
Recall Sounds by selecting Performances or Styles
Recall Sounds by selecting Performances or Styles
Refer to the previous sections relating to the selection of Performances or Styles.
Refer to the previous sections relating to the selection of Performances or Styles.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
Note: When you select a Sound, WK6/8 sends
CC00-CC32-PC messages in rapid succession on
the MIDI channel assigned to the track.
ProgramChange
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selecting with the Numeric keypad
It is possible to specify a Sound selection message on the numeric keypad (EDIT/NUMBERS
section). This section can send a MIDI message
consisting of Control Change 00 (CC00/
BankSelect MSB), Control Change 32 (CC32/
BankSelect LSB), ProgramChange (PC) to an
external unit connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, it is sufficient to specify
the message CC00-PC. The CC32 message can
be ignored.
Name of the selected
Sound Group
Bank (select it
)
with
The keypad insertion zone will close automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons
to open a «Sound Select» window.
2. Scroll through the Banks with the
buttons. The Bank number corresponds to the
Control Change 00 MIDI message (CC00/
BankSelect MSB).
3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft
button.
ProgramChange
CC00/BankSelect MSB
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: When you select a Sound, WK6/8 sends
CC00-CC32-PC messages in rapid succession on
the MIDI channel assigned to the track.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selecting with the Numeric keypad
It is possible to specify a Sound selection message on the numeric keypad (EDIT/NUMBERS
section). This section can send a MIDI message
consisting of Control Change 00 (CC00/
BankSelect MSB), Control Change 32 (CC32/
BankSelect LSB), ProgramChange (PC) to an
external unit connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, it is sufficient to specify
the message CC00-PC. The CC32 message can
be ignored.
The keypad insertion zone will close automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.
Recall Sounds by selecting Performances or Styles
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SOUNDS
○
ProgramChange
©
○
Refer to the previous sections relating to the selection of Performances or Styles.
○
○
While playing, Sounds are instantly recalled by
selecting Performances or Styles. Program your
Performances or Style-Performances accordingly
before you play.
○
○
Panel selection
○
○
1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons
to open a «Sound Select» window.
○
○
2. Scroll through the Banks with the
buttons. The Bank number corresponds to the
Control Change 00 MIDI message (CC00/
BankSelect MSB).
○
○
Name of the selected
Sound Group
Panel selection
3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft
button.
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
○
○
While playing, Sounds are instantly recalled by
selecting Performances or Styles. Program your
Performances or Style-Performances accordingly
before you play.
© Note: When you select a Sound, WK6/8 sends
CC00-CC32-PC messages in rapid succession on
the MIDI channel assigned to the track.
3. Select a Sound with the corresponding Soft
button.
Selecting with the Numeric keypad
2. Scroll through the Banks with the
buttons. The Bank number corresponds to the
Control Change 00 MIDI message (CC00/
BankSelect MSB).
Bank (select it
with
)
Name of the selected
Sound Group
It is possible to specify a Sound selection message on the numeric keypad (EDIT/NUMBERS
section). This section can send a MIDI message
consisting of Control Change 00 (CC00/
BankSelect MSB), Control Change 32 (CC32/
BankSelect LSB), ProgramChange (PC) to an
external unit connected to the WK6/8 MIDI OUT.
1. Press one of the SOUND GROUPS buttons
to open a «Sound Select» window.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, it is sufficient to specify
the message CC00-PC. The CC32 message can
be ignored.
Panel selection
The keypad insertion zone will close automatically after a few seconds of inactivity.
While playing, Sounds are instantly recalled by
selecting Performances or Styles. Program your
Performances or Style-Performances accordingly
before you play.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
Bank (select it
with
)
Selection/Help 5•5
Keypad selection procedure
○
1. Select the track to which a Sound is to be
assigned.
2. Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the
EDIT/NUMBERS section as a numeric
keypad. An insertion zone opens in the display showing the number of the current sound
assigned to the track.
3. Specify the Program Change number of the
Sound to select.
If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add
a separating hyphen (symbol «-») followed
by the corresponding bank number
(BankSelect MSB).
In MIDI situations, if necessary, add another
separating hyphen and a BankSelect MSB
number (not for WK6/8 internal Sounds).
4. Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER,
or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The
LED on the KEY PAD button goes off.
5. Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to
memorize the modification to the current Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insertion Zone
CC32/BankSelect LSB
CC00/BankSelect MSB
PC/ProgramChange
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insertion Zone
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
CC32/BankSelect LSB
○
○
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
PC/ProgramChange
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PC/ProgramChange
○
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
When working with an external sequencer,
messages must be entered in the order CC00CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the WK6/
8 Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be
ignored.
Insertion Zone
○
○
Note: Sound selection messages are
transmitted and received via MIDI in the order
CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For
practical purposes, the reverse order has been
adopted for the panel selection procedure, given
that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to
select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
When working with an external sequencer,
messages must be entered in the order CC00CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the WK6/
8 Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be
ignored.
○
○
©
CC32/BankSelect LSB
○
○
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
PC/ProgramChange
○
○
○
Note: Sound selection messages are
transmitted and received via MIDI in the order
CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For
practical purposes, the reverse order has been
adopted for the panel selection procedure, given
that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to
select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
○
○
1. Select the track to which a Sound is to be
assigned.
2. Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the
EDIT/NUMBERS section as a numeric
keypad. An insertion zone opens in the display showing the number of the current sound
assigned to the track.
3. Specify the Program Change number of the
Sound to select.
If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add
a separating hyphen (symbol «-») followed
by the corresponding bank number
(BankSelect MSB).
In MIDI situations, if necessary, add another
separating hyphen and a BankSelect MSB
number (not for WK6/8 internal Sounds).
4. Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER,
or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The
LED on the KEY PAD button goes off.
5. Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to
memorize the modification to the current Performance.
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PC/ProgramChange
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•5
○
○
○
○
Keypad selection procedure
○
○
1.
○
○
2.
○
○
3.
○
○
4.
○
○
5.
○
Keypad selection procedure
Select the track to which a Sound is to be
assigned.
Press KEY PAD (LED on) to activate the
EDIT/NUMBERS section as a numeric
keypad. An insertion zone opens in the display showing the number of the current sound
assigned to the track.
Specify the Program Change number of the
Sound to select.
If the Sound belongs to a different Bank, add
a separating hyphen (symbol «-») followed
by the corresponding bank number
(BankSelect MSB).
In MIDI situations, if necessary, add another
separating hyphen and a BankSelect MSB
number (not for WK6/8 internal Sounds).
Confirm the entry with KEY PAD or ENTER,
or press ESCAPE to cancel the entry. The
LED on the KEY PAD button goes off.
Press STORE PERF followed by ENTER to
memorize the modification to the current Performance.
○
○
© Note: Sound selection messages are
transmitted and received via MIDI in the order
CC00-CC32-PC with the ProgramChange last. For
practical purposes, the reverse order has been
adopted for the panel selection procedure, given
that the ProgramChange on its own is sufficient to
select all the Sounds of the current Bank.
○
○
PC/ProgramChange
○
○
When working with an external sequencer,
messages must be entered in the order CC00CC32-PC. If it is intended to select only the WK6/
8 Sounds, the PC32 part of the message can be
ignored.
○
○
CC00/BankSelect MSB
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•5
5•6 Reference Guide
Selection via MIDI
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection via MIDI
The Sound selection message must be received
on the MIDI channel assigned to the track to which
the Sound is assigned.
The Sound selection message must be received
on the MIDI channel assigned to the track to which
the Sound is assigned.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, you must send a Control Change 00 (CC00/BankSelect MSB) and Program Change (PC) message.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, you must send a Control Change 00 (CC00/BankSelect MSB) and Program Change (PC) message.
The relative numbers are also displayed in the main
page (Multi mode) and the selection window that
appears when you select a SOUND GROUPS
button.
The relative numbers are also displayed in the main
page (Multi mode) and the selection window that
appears when you select a SOUND GROUPS
button.
The Sound table in the Appendix lists all the WK6/
8 Sounds and corresponding MIDI selection messages.
The Sound table in the Appendix lists all the WK6/
8 Sounds and corresponding MIDI selection messages.
The Sound table in the Appendix lists all the WK6/
8 Sounds and corresponding MIDI selection messages.
The relative numbers are also displayed in the main
page (Multi mode) and the selection window that
appears when you select a SOUND GROUPS
button.
To select a WK6/8 Sound, you must send a Control Change 00 (CC00/BankSelect MSB) and Program Change (PC) message.
The Sound selection message must be received
on the MIDI channel assigned to the track to which
the Sound is assigned.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection via MIDI
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•7
SELECTING SONGS
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SONGS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Panel selection
Panel selection
Selecting a Song sets WK6/8 to Song mode.
Selecting a Song sets WK6/8 to Song mode.
1. Press the SONG button to open the «Select
Song» window.
1. Press the SONG button to open the «Select
Song» window.
2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft
button.
2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft
button.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: When you select a Song, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession
on the Common Channel . The BankSelect,
ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of
the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
Note: When you select a Song, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession
on the Common Channel . The BankSelect,
ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of
the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Song (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
Song (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
Message..
selects...
Message..
selects...
CC00 [55] - PC [0...15]
Song 1...16
CC00 [55] - PC [0...15]
Song 1...16
selects...
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 55) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
Message..
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 55) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
Song 1...16
SELECTION VIA MIDI
CC00 [55] - PC [0...15]
SELECTION VIA MIDI
WK6/8 must receive the relative selection messages on the Common Channel. Send Control
Change 00 (value = 55) and Program Change
messages in rapid succession to WK6/8.
SELECTION VIA MIDI
Song (select with the
corresponding Soft buttons)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: When you select a Song, WK6/8 sends
CC00 [value 55]-PC messages in rapid succession
on the Common Channel . The BankSelect,
ProgramChange, Volume and Pan messages of
the tracks are sent on the normal MIDI channels.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. Select a Song with the corresponding Soft
button.
1. Press the SONG button to open the «Select
Song» window.
Selecting a Song sets WK6/8 to Song mode.
Panel selection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•7
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SONGS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•7
5•8 Reference Guide
SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES
Panel selection
Panel selection
To select a Song Performance, WK6/8 must be
set to Song mode.
To select a Song Performance, WK6/8 must be
set to Song mode.
F1
1. Press the SONG P. button with the F4 Soft
button to open the «Song-Performance» selection window.
F1
1. Press the SONG P. button with the F4 Soft
button to open the «Song-Performance» selection window.
F2
F3
F4
F5
CC00 [64] - PC [0...7]
2. Select a Song-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
Song-Perfs 1...8
F6
Message...
selects...
F7
2. Select a Song-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: When you select a Song-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 64]-PC messages in
rapid succession on the Common Channel.. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
Song-Performance (select with
the corresponding Soft buttons
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: If PLAY or STOP are pressed, the SongPerformance recorded in the Song is recalled (the
initial one or the most recent one). All temporary
modifications will, therefore, be cancelled.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTION VIA MIDI
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: If a Song-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Song-Performance (select with
the corresponding Soft buttons
○
○
Note: If PLAY or STOP are pressed, the SongPerformance recorded in the Song is recalled (the
initial one or the most recent one). All temporary
modifications will, therefore, be cancelled.
○
© Note: When you select a Song-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 64]-PC messages in
rapid succession on the Common Channel.. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
To select a Song-Performance via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to WK6/8 on the
Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00
[Value 64] and a Program Change message in
rapid succession.
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
© Note: If PLAY or STOP are pressed, the SongPerformance recorded in the Song is recalled (the
initial one or the most recent one). All temporary
modifications will, therefore, be cancelled.
○
Note: If a Song-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
SELECTION VIA MIDI
To select a Song-Performance via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to WK6/8 on the
Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00
[Value 64] and a Program Change message in
rapid succession.
○
F8
F7
selects...
CC00 [64] - PC [0...7]
Song-Perfs 1...8
2. Select a Song-Performance with the corresponding Soft button.
Message...
F6
F5
Message...
selects...
CC00 [64] - PC [0...7]
Song-Perfs 1...8
1. Press the SONG P. button with the F4 Soft
button to open the «Song-Performance» selection window.
F4
F3
F2
F1
To select a Song Performance, WK6/8 must be
set to Song mode.
Panel selection
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SELECTING SONG-PERFORMANCES
○
F6
Note: When you select a Song-Performance,
WK6/8 sends CC00 [value 64]-PC messages in
rapid succession on the Common Channel.. The
BankSelect, ProgramChange, Volume and Pan
messages of the tracks are sent on the normal
MIDI channels.
© Note: If a Song-Performance is selected in
record mode, the selection number specified is
recorded in the Master Track.
○
F5
©
SELECTION VIA MIDI
○
©
F4
F8
○
To select a Song-Performance via MIDI, the selection message must be sent to WK6/8 on the
Common Channel. Send the Control Change 00
[Value 64] and a Program Change message in
rapid succession.
○
F3
F7
F8
○
F2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Song-Performance (select with
the corresponding Soft buttons
Selection/Help 5•9
Display Hold
○
Effects Off
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display Hold
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Effects Off
You can select items from a selection display without closing the selection window by pressing the
D. HOLD button.
You can choose to select and play your Performances, Styles and Songs without the programmed
effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button.
You can select items from a selection display without closing the selection window by pressing the
D. HOLD button.
You can choose to select and play your Performances, Styles and Songs without the programmed
effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function. When the LED is on,
the effects are bypassed and the current Performance, Style or Song plays “dry” (i.e. without effects).
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function.
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function. When the LED is on,
the effects are bypassed and the current Performance, Style or Song plays “dry” (i.e. without effects).
UNDO
HELP
D. HOLD
KEY PAD
CONTRAST
UNDO
HELP
D. HOLD
KEY PAD
EFFECTS
BYPASS
EFFECTS
BYPASS
D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the
button is pressed again.
Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles,
Programmable Performances and Songs.
Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD.
EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the
button is pressed again.
Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles,
Programmable Performances and Songs.
Use Display Hold when selecting Sounds, Styles,
Programmable Performances and Songs.
Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD.
EFFECTS OFF remains active (LED on) until the
button is pressed again.
D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
EFFECTS
BYPASS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•9
Effects Off
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Display Hold
○
You can choose to select and play your Performances, Styles and Songs without the programmed
effects by activating the EFFECTS OFF button.
○
You can select items from a selection display without closing the selection window by pressing the
D. HOLD button.
○
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function.
○
The LED of the button turns on to indicate the
activation of the function. When the LED is on,
the effects are bypassed and the current Performance, Style or Song plays “dry” (i.e. without effects).
○
KEY PAD
○
D. HOLD
○
HELP
○
UNDO
Use ESCAPE to close the current selection window without deactivating D. HOLD.
D. HOLD remains active (LED on) until the button is pressed again.
CONTRAST
CONTRAST
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selection/Help 5•9
5•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Help
Help
Help - EDIT Midi - Details information
Also incorporated is a PANIC function which helps
to unlock the instrument in MIDI situations.
Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showing information regarding the currently set mode.
HOW TO USE HELP
WK6/8 incorporates an on-line-help system which
provides brief information on the basic functions
of the instrument. This feature is particularly helpful if you get stuck and do not have access to the
owner’s manual at the time.
1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode.
A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode.
Also incorporated is a PANIC function which helps
to unlock the instrument in MIDI situations.
2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open
a sub-page with specific details concerning
the current help topic.
Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showing information regarding the currently set mode.
Depending on the current mode, a NEXT
page (F3/F4) may or not be available.
Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode,
press HELP to get information concerning the
default situation (main page).
Similarly, if you are currently working in one of
the Edit environments, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section.
Help - General Default - main page information
WK6/8 incorporates an on-line-help system which
provides brief information on the basic functions
of the instrument. This feature is particularly helpful if you get stuck and do not have access to the
owner’s manual at the time.
Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode,
press HELP to get information concerning the
default situation (main page).
Once you have entered a NEXT page, the
PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available.
Similarly, if you are currently working in one of
the Edit environments, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section.
Options not available will be shown with broken lines.
5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP
page.
Some Help pages consist of a General information page and one or more ‘Detail’ pages which
provide detailed information regarding the current topic.
Some Help pages consist of a General information page and one or more ‘Detail’ pages which
provide detailed information regarding the current topic.
3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6.
4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of
the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/
F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2).
Some Help pages consist of a General information page and one or more ‘Detail’ pages which
provide detailed information regarding the current topic.
4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of
the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/
F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2).
5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP
page.
2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open
a sub-page with specific details concerning
the current help topic.
A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode.
1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode.
HOW TO USE HELP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•10 Reference Guide
○
○
Help - EDIT Midi - Details information
○
○
○
○
○
Help - General Default - main page information
Help
○
Once you have entered a NEXT page, the
PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available.
Options not available will be shown with broken lines.
3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6.
4. To pass to another HELP topic, regardless of
the current operating mode, press NEXT (F3/
F4) or PREVIOUS (F1/F2).
WK6/8 incorporates an on-line-help system which
provides brief information on the basic functions
of the instrument. This feature is particularly helpful if you get stuck and do not have access to the
owner’s manual at the time.
Depending on the current mode, a NEXT
page (F3/F4) may or not be available.
○
Depending on the current mode, a NEXT
page (F3/F4) may or not be available.
Also incorporated is a PANIC function which helps
to unlock the instrument in MIDI situations.
Once you have entered a NEXT page, the
PREVIOUS option (F1/F2) will be available.
○
2. If available, press DETAILS (F7/F8) to open
a sub-page with specific details concerning
the current help topic.
Generally, pressing HELP opens a page showing information regarding the currently set mode.
Options not available will be shown with broken lines.
○
A GENERAL page will open showing information regarding the current operating mode.
Therefore, if you are in Style/Performance mode,
press HELP to get information concerning the
default situation (main page).
3. To return to a GENERAL page, press F5/F6.
○
1. Press the HELP button when you want general information regarding the current mode.
5. Press ESCAPE to close the current HELP
page.
Similarly, if you are currently working in one of
the Edit environments, (Edit Effects, for example), press HELP to get information on the Effects section.
Help - General Default - main page information
HOW TO USE HELP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
5•10 Reference Guide
○
○
Help - EDIT Midi - Details information
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording
GMX format
GMX refers to the “General MIDI eXtended” format, specifically created by Generalmusic, which
renders the first three sound banks of the WK6/8
with previous series instruments (WK6/8, WK4,
WK3, SK, PS) completely compatible.
To program WK6/8 Songs that are perfectly compatible with all WK6/8 and SK, PS Series instruments (e.g. WK6 and WK3), use the Sounds of
the first three Sound banks and record the Songs
using 16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1…A16).
ABOUT SONGS
A Song is a multitrack recording of several instrumental parts, each corresponding to a track.
WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK4,
SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0
or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
WK6/8 Songs are ‘free’, that is, tracks can be
recorded starting from any point, without start or
end segment limitations, which characterize most
sequencers. Your recorded Songs can also be
saved as MIDI Files.
Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and
control data. Control data can include PitchBend
and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and
BankSelect messages for sound changes,
ControlChange messages to control the effects
sends, Sustain pedal and other control parameters. MIDI events recorded on tracks are not
the internal Wave sounds, but messages which
activate the WK6/8 internal sound generator or
an expander controlled by WK6/8. A Song is a
MIDI event list – a list for each track.
General control messages are recorded in the
Master Track. These messages relate to the instrument in general, such as effects change or
Performance selections.
ABOUT STANDARD MIDI FILES
General MIDI
To facilitate compatibility between different makes
of instruments, MIDI files should be in General
MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds
and the way they are selected. General MIDI
stipulates common standards regarding the listing of sounds, Program Change numbers for
sound selection, the percussive sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assignment of MIDI
channel 10 to the Drumkits, a minimum polyphony
(24) and a maximum number of tracks (16).
In WK6/8, Sound Banks 1 and Drumkit Bank 2
are fully GM compatible. WK6/8 recognizes GM
compatible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If
this message is not detected, sounds that differ to
a Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10.
To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI
files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag,
be sure that the General MIDI parameter is set
to ON in the “General Set” parameter of «Edit
MIDI» before loading.
WK6/8 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when
the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI
Files loaded into the WK6/8 memory are converted to WK6/8 Songs.
A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created
to maintain data compatibility among different devices complying with the Standard MIDI File format. This format allows Songs to be exchanged
between different instruments and computers. If
you save your recorded Songs as MIDI files on
an MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the
most recent generation of instruments and
sequencers/computers will be able to load and
read your WK6/8 Songs.
GMX format
GMX refers to the “General MIDI eXtended” format, specifically created by Generalmusic, which
renders the first three sound banks of the WK6/8
with previous series instruments (WK6/8, WK4,
WK3, SK, PS) completely compatible.
To program WK6/8 Songs that are perfectly compatible with all WK6/8 and SK, PS Series instruments (e.g. WK6 and WK3), use the Sounds of
the first three Sound banks and record the Songs
using 16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1…A16).
ABOUT SONGS
General MIDI
To facilitate compatibility between different makes
of instruments, MIDI files should be in General
MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds
and the way they are selected. General MIDI
stipulates common standards regarding the listing of sounds, Program Change numbers for
sound selection, the percussive sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assignment of MIDI
channel 10 to the Drumkits, a minimum polyphony
(24) and a maximum number of tracks (16).
In WK6/8, Sound Banks 1 and Drumkit Bank 2
are fully GM compatible. WK6/8 recognizes GM
compatible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If
this message is not detected, sounds that differ to
a Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10.
To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI
files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag,
be sure that the General MIDI parameter is set
to ON in the “General Set” parameter of «Edit
MIDI» before loading.
WK6/8 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when
the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI
Files loaded into the WK6/8 memory are converted to WK6/8 Songs.
General MIDI
To facilitate compatibility between different makes
of instruments, MIDI files should be in General
MIDI standard, a common platform for sounds
and the way they are selected. General MIDI
stipulates common standards regarding the listing of sounds, Program Change numbers for
sound selection, the percussive sound configuration in the Drumkits, the assignment of MIDI
channel 10 to the Drumkits, a minimum polyphony
(24) and a maximum number of tracks (16).
In WK6/8, Sound Banks 1 and Drumkit Bank 2
are fully GM compatible. WK6/8 recognizes GM
compatible MIDI Files, thanks to a messages contained in the MIDI File (General MIDI ON flag). If
this message is not detected, sounds that differ to
a Drumkit may be assigned to MIDI channel 10.
To ensure correct loading of GM compatible MIDI
files that do not contain the General MIDI ON flag,
be sure that the General MIDI parameter is set
to ON in the “General Set” parameter of «Edit
MIDI» before loading.
WK6/8 can save GM compatible MIDI Files when
the General MIDI parameter is set to ON. MIDI
Files loaded into the WK6/8 memory are converted to WK6/8 Songs.
• 6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording
A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created
to maintain data compatibility among different devices complying with the Standard MIDI File format. This format allows Songs to be exchanged
between different instruments and computers. If
you save your recorded Songs as MIDI files on
an MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the
most recent generation of instruments and
sequencers/computers will be able to load and
read your WK6/8 Songs.
○
A Song is a multitrack recording of several instrumental parts, each corresponding to a track.
WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK4,
SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0
or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
WK6/8 Songs are ‘free’, that is, tracks can be
recorded starting from any point, without start or
end segment limitations, which characterize most
sequencers. Your recorded Songs can also be
saved as MIDI Files.
Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and
control data. Control data can include PitchBend
and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and
BankSelect messages for sound changes,
ControlChange messages to control the effects
sends, Sustain pedal and other control parameters. MIDI events recorded on tracks are not
the internal Wave sounds, but messages which
activate the WK6/8 internal sound generator or
an expander controlled by WK6/8. A Song is a
MIDI event list – a list for each track.
General control messages are recorded in the
Master Track. These messages relate to the instrument in general, such as effects change or
Performance selections.
ABOUT STANDARD MIDI FILES
○
ABOUT STANDARD MIDI FILES
A Song is a multitrack recording of several instrumental parts, each corresponding to a track.
WK6/8 can load Songs from disk in its own format (Song), in previous compatible formats (WK4,
SK, PS, WX, SX), in standard MIDI file format 0
or 1 and in Tune1000™ format.
WK6/8 Songs are ‘free’, that is, tracks can be
recorded starting from any point, without start or
end segment limitations, which characterize most
sequencers. Your recorded Songs can also be
saved as MIDI Files.
Tracks contain MIDI events, that is, notes and
control data. Control data can include PitchBend
and Aftertouch messages, ProgramChange and
BankSelect messages for sound changes,
ControlChange messages to control the effects
sends, Sustain pedal and other control parameters. MIDI events recorded on tracks are not
the internal Wave sounds, but messages which
activate the WK6/8 internal sound generator or
an expander controlled by WK6/8. A Song is a
MIDI event list – a list for each track.
General control messages are recorded in the
Master Track. These messages relate to the instrument in general, such as effects change or
Performance selections.
○
GMX format
GMX refers to the “General MIDI eXtended” format, specifically created by Generalmusic, which
renders the first three sound banks of the WK6/8
with previous series instruments (WK6/8, WK4,
WK3, SK, PS) completely compatible.
To program WK6/8 Songs that are perfectly compatible with all WK6/8 and SK, PS Series instruments (e.g. WK6 and WK3), use the Sounds of
the first three Sound banks and record the Songs
using 16 tracks only (MIDI channels A1…A16).
ABOUT SONGS
○
A Standard MIDI File is a storage format created
to maintain data compatibility among different devices complying with the Standard MIDI File format. This format allows Songs to be exchanged
between different instruments and computers. If
you save your recorded Songs as MIDI files on
an MS-DOS disk, you can be certain that all the
most recent generation of instruments and
sequencers/computers will be able to load and
read your WK6/8 Songs.
• 6 Songs, MIDI files & Song recording
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•1
6•2 Reference Guide
SONG-PERFORMANCES
○
SONG
STOP
During playback, the DIAL changes the Song’s
playing speed (tempo).
<</>>
Song playback
control buttons
○
○
○
○
SCORE
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SEQUENCER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SEQUENCER
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SCORE
PLAY
STOP
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Song playback
control buttons
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position,
the LED on the STOP button flashes. When the
Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
Song Playback/Jukebox
○
○
SONG-PERFORMANCES
○
PLAY
○
○
SONG-PERFORMANCES
Song Playback/Jukebox
Normally, Sound change messages
(ProgramChange and BankSelect) are inserted
in the single track. Effects change messages are
inserted in the Master Track.
Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and
rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects.
Song-Performances instantly reset the instrument, therefore, they are very useful during a real
time Song recording.
Generally, when programming a Song from an
external computer, it is convenient to insert all
the messages in the tracks, while during a real
time Song recording, it is better to program several Song-Performances and select them during
the recording. The selection message is recorded
in the Master Track as a ProgramChange.
Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which
are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song.
When a MIDI file is saved, Performances are converted in track data (ProgramChange, Pan, Volume, effects send).
To select Song Performances, refer to the Selection chapter of the Reference Gide.
PROGRAMMING SONG-PERFORMANCES
The method used to program Song-Performances is identical to that used for the Performances of the Performance Groups (Real). Refer
to the Store Performance procedure discussed
on page 2.38 in the Quick Guide.
A Song has a maximum of 32 tracks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: After having programmed or modified a
Song-Performance, press STORE PERFORMANCE to save it to RAM. The selection of another
or the same Performance or pressing STOP and
PLAY, will erase the modifications.
Normally, Sound change messages
(ProgramChange and BankSelect) are inserted
in the single track. Effects change messages are
inserted in the Master Track.
○
STOP
○
STOP
SONG
○
○
Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and
rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects.
Song-Performances instantly reset the instrument, therefore, they are very useful during a real
time Song recording.
○
○
During playback, the DIAL changes the Song’s
playing speed (tempo).
PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS
○
○
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance one
measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at
high speed. These buttons are active either in
Song play or stop status.
The buttons which control the playback of Songs
in memory are in the SEQUENCER section.
○
○
This button starts the Song playback (or recording). During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The location (LOC) in the display
shows the current position of the Song. If the
Song is not playing, pressing PLAY starts the
Song from the current position.
PLAY
○
Song-Performance, press STORE PERFORMANCE to save it to RAM. The selection of another
or the same Performance or pressing STOP and
PLAY, will erase the modifications.
○
○
Generally, when programming a Song from an
external computer, it is convenient to insert all
the messages in the tracks, while during a real
time Song recording, it is better to program several Song-Performances and select them during
the recording. The selection message is recorded
in the Master Track as a ProgramChange.
○
© Note: After having programmed or modified a
○
○
Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which
are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song.
○
○
PLAY
This button starts the Song playback (or recording). During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The location (LOC) in the display
shows the current position of the Song. If the
Song is not playing, pressing PLAY starts the
Song from the current position.
○
○
When a MIDI file is saved, Performances are converted in track data (ProgramChange, Pan, Volume, effects send).
A Song has a maximum of 32 tracks.
○
○
The buttons which control the playback of Songs
in memory are in the SEQUENCER section.
<</>>
The method used to program Song-Performances is identical to that used for the Performances of the Performance Groups (Real). Refer
to the Store Performance procedure discussed
on page 2.38 in the Quick Guide.
○
○
To select Song Performances, refer to the Selection chapter of the Reference Gide.
PROGRAMMING SONG-PERFORMANCES
○
○
PROGRAMMING SONG-PERFORMANCES
To select Song Performances, refer to the Selection chapter of the Reference Gide.
○
○
PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance one
measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at
high speed. These buttons are active either in
Song play or stop status.
When a MIDI file is saved, Performances are converted in track data (ProgramChange, Pan, Volume, effects send).
○
○
The method used to program Song-Performances is identical to that used for the Performances of the Performance Groups (Real). Refer
to the Store Performance procedure discussed
on page 2.38 in the Quick Guide.
Each Song contains up to 8 Performances, which
are loaded and memorized with the corresponding Song.
○
○
A Song has a maximum of 32 tracks.
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position,
the LED on the STOP button flashes. When the
Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
Generally, when programming a Song from an
external computer, it is convenient to insert all
the messages in the tracks, while during a real
time Song recording, it is better to program several Song-Performances and select them during
the recording. The selection message is recorded
in the Master Track as a ProgramChange.
○
○
© Note: After having programmed or modified a
Song-Performance, press STORE PERFORMANCE to save it to RAM. The selection of another
or the same Performance or pressing STOP and
PLAY, will erase the modifications.
Using the Song-Performance is an alternative and
rapid method of changing Sounds and Effects.
Song-Performances instantly reset the instrument, therefore, they are very useful during a real
time Song recording.
○
○
Song Playback/Jukebox
Normally, Sound change messages
(ProgramChange and BankSelect) are inserted
in the single track. Effects change messages are
inserted in the Master Track.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SEQUENCER
SCORE
SONG
STOP
PLAY
Song playback
control buttons
PLAYBACK CONTROL BUTTONS
The buttons which control the playback of Songs
in memory are in the SEQUENCER section.
PLAY
This button starts the Song playback (or recording). During the playback, the LED on the PLAY
button is on. The location (LOC) in the display
shows the current position of the Song. If the
Song is not playing, pressing PLAY starts the
Song from the current position.
<</>>
The << and >> buttons rewind or advance one
measure (bar) at a time. If you hold these buttons pressed, the Song rewinds or advances at
high speed. These buttons are active either in
Song play or stop status.
During playback, the DIAL changes the Song’s
playing speed (tempo).
STOP
This button stops the Song playback (or recording). When the Song has been stopped at a position that differs to the initial Song start position,
the LED on the STOP button flashes. When the
Song is not playing and at its initial starting position, the LED on the STOP button remains on.
Songs 6•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View» mode
in order to modify the playing parameters, or in
«Sound View» mode in order to see the sounds
assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Performance. You can pass from one mode to another by pressing the corresponding Soft button
(F5 or F6).
Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator and stops at the natural Song
end.
•
Forced stop: the Song starts at the point in○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
«Sound View» page
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the
playing speed (beats per second) at the current
song position. During the playback, the Tempo
can be modified with the DIAL.
•
Tempo
○
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value,
are an indication of the status of the synchronizing
MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK6/WK8) or [e] = external (external sequencer connected to the WK6/
WK8 MIDI IN). The synchronization is programmed in «Edit MIDI», «General settings» page.
There are three Play or Record options to choose
from:
○
○
© Note: The starting tempo can be changed by
modifying the Master Track in «Edit Song», or by
using the DIAL in «Play View». The selected value
remains in memory.
Play/Rec mode
○
○
Locator (Song position pointer)
When the sequencer is off, the three parts can
be individually modified (if selected) by rotating
the DIAL.
○
○
This section shows the current Song position
expressed in measures and beats. When the
Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified
in the «Play View» page in order to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of
the status of the sequencer (playing or off).
Repeats the same information of the locator
shown in the status bar, but also contains the
sequencer resolution (or ‘tick’).
○
○
The main page of Song mode («Play View») contains position pointers and performance control
parameters.
Locator (programmable)
○
○
Locator (programmable)
This section shows the current Song position
expressed in measures and beats. When the
Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified
in the «Play View» page in order to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of
the status of the sequencer (playing or off).
«Play View» page
○
«Play view» parameters
Locator (Song position pointer)
«Sound View» page
○
«Play View» page
Tempo
○
○
Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the
playing speed (beats per second) at the current
song position. During the playback, the Tempo
can be modified with the DIAL.
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value,
are an indication of the status of the synchronizing
MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK6/WK8) or [e] = external (external sequencer connected to the WK6/
WK8 MIDI IN). The synchronization is programmed in «Edit MIDI», «General settings» page.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note: The starting tempo can be changed by
modifying the Master Track in «Edit Song», or by
using the DIAL in «Play View». The selected value
remains in memory.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Locator (Song position pointer)
This section shows the current Song position
expressed in measures and beats. When the
Song is not playing, the Locator can be modified
in the «Play View» page in order to select a starting point for the playback. It can be also modified with the [<<] and [>>] buttons regardless of
the status of the sequencer (playing or off).
Locator (programmable)
Repeats the same information of the locator
shown in the status bar, but also contains the
sequencer resolution (or ‘tick’).
When the sequencer is off, the three parts can
be individually modified (if selected) by rotating
the DIAL.
Play/Rec mode
There are three Play or Record options to choose
from:
•
Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator and stops at the natural Song
end.
•
Forced stop: the Song starts at the point in-
«Play view» parameters
○
○
The main page of Song mode («Play View») contains position pointers and performance control
parameters.
○
○
SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW
○
○
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View» mode
in order to modify the playing parameters, or in
«Sound View» mode in order to see the sounds
assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Performance. You can pass from one mode to another by pressing the corresponding Soft button
(F5 or F6).
○
○
Repeats the same information of the locator
shown in the status bar, but also contains the
sequencer resolution (or ‘tick’).
○
○
«Sound View» page
○
○
When the sequencer is off, the three parts can
be individually modified (if selected) by rotating
the DIAL.
○
○
Play/Rec mode
○
Note: The starting tempo can be changed by
modifying the Master Track in «Edit Song», or by
using the DIAL in «Play View». The selected value
remains in memory.
○
There are three Play or Record options to choose
from:
○
○
•
○
©
○
Linear: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator and stops at the natural Song
end.
You can opt to see the Song in «Play View» mode
in order to modify the playing parameters, or in
«Sound View» mode in order to see the sounds
assigned to the tracks of the current Song-Performance. You can pass from one mode to another by pressing the corresponding Soft button
(F5 or F6).
The [i] or [e] symbols, shown after the tempo value,
are an indication of the status of the synchronizing
MIDI clock: [i] = internal (WK6/WK8) or [e] = external (external sequencer connected to the WK6/
WK8 MIDI IN). The synchronization is programmed in «Edit MIDI», «General settings» page.
○
Forced stop: the Song starts at the point in-
SONG VIEW/PLAY VIEW
Metronomic Tempo. The value represents the
playing speed (beats per second) at the current
song position. During the playback, the Tempo
can be modified with the DIAL.
○
•
The main page of Song mode («Play View») contains position pointers and performance control
parameters.
○
«Play View» page
«Play view» parameters
Tempo
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•3
6•4 Reference Guide
OPTION... (F2)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recalls the «Record View» page, where you can
control the record/playback parameters.
Recalls the «Sound View» page, where you can
see and change the sounds of the current Performance.
PLAY VIEW (F6)
PLAY VIEW (F6)
Recalls the «Record View» page, where you can
control the record/playback parameters.
Recalls the «Sound View» page, where you can
see and change the sounds of the current Performance.
ERASE... (F7)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
Play view Soft buttons
○
6•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
dicated by the locator and stops at the specified End.
JUKEBOX... (F1)
○
Determines the start measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Loop». If
Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the
starting point of the loop. Modify this parameter
when it is in a selected state, or when the Song
has already been recorded, by rotating the DIAL.
JUKEBOX... (F1)
Recalls the Jukebox function (explained afterwards).
OPTION... (F2)
Metronome options.
Countdown - activates a one measure lead
into the recording of a sequence during which
events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off.
Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume.
Options: Off, 10...127.
Determines the end measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Forced stop»
or «Loop». If Loop is selected, this parameter
indicates the point at which the sequence ends
before looping back to the Start locator. If Forced
stop is selected, it indicates the automatic Stop
point.
PLAY VIEW (F6)
This parameter can be modified when it is in a
selected state by rotating the DIAL.
Recalls the «Record View» page, where you can
control the record/playback parameters.
Time Signature (programmable with an empty
Song)
ERASE... (F7)
This parameter can only be modified before recording the Song.
Start Tempo (programmable when the Song is off)
Determines the starting tempo of a Song. This
parameter can be modified when the Song is off.
The value of the setting is recorded in the Master
Track, as the Start Parameter.
Song memory (not programmable)
Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilobytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory,
independent of the memory remaining in the System RAM.
•
Recalls the Jukebox function (explained afterwards).
○
Loop: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator, stops at the End, then repeats
from the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button.
OPTION... (F2)
○
Start
○
Determines the start measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Loop». If
Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the
starting point of the loop. Modify this parameter
when it is in a selected state, or when the Song
has already been recorded, by rotating the DIAL.
Metronome options.
Countdown - activates a one measure lead
into the recording of a sequence during which
events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off.
Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume.
Options: Off, 10...127.
METRONOME (F8)
Play view Soft buttons
Start
End
Track or Song erase parameter.
Track- Cancels the selected track.
Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving
an empty Song, ready to start another recording.. The Song-Performances are not cancelled.
SOUND VIEW (F5)
○
Determines the end measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Forced stop»
or «Loop». If Loop is selected, this parameter
indicates the point at which the sequence ends
before looping back to the Start locator. If Forced
stop is selected, it indicates the automatic Stop
point.
○
Loop: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator, stops at the End, then repeats
from the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button.
End
SOUND VIEW (F5)
Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilobytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory,
independent of the memory remaining in the System RAM.
○
dicated by the locator and stops at the specified End.
•
This parameter can be modified when it is in a
selected state by rotating the DIAL.
Song memory (not programmable)
○
○
ERASE... (F7)
Determines the starting tempo of a Song. This
parameter can be modified when the Song is off.
The value of the setting is recorded in the Master
Track, as the Start Parameter.
○
○
Time Signature (programmable with an empty
Song)
Start Tempo (programmable when the Song is off)
○
○
This parameter can only be modified before recording the Song.
This parameter can only be modified before recording the Song.
○
○
Start Tempo (programmable when the Song is off)
Time Signature (programmable with an empty
Song)
○
○
Metronome options.
Countdown - activates a one measure lead
into the recording of a sequence during which
events cannot be captured. Options: On, Off.
Metr. volume - Sets the metronome volume.
Options: Off, 10...127.
Track or Song erase parameter.
Track- Cancels the selected track.
Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving
an empty Song, ready to start another recording.. The Song-Performances are not cancelled.
This parameter can be modified when it is in a
selected state by rotating the DIAL.
○
○
Recalls the Jukebox function (explained afterwards).
METRONOME (F8)
Determines the end measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Forced stop»
or «Loop». If Loop is selected, this parameter
indicates the point at which the sequence ends
before looping back to the Start locator. If Forced
stop is selected, it indicates the automatic Stop
point.
○
JUKEBOX... (F1)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
End
○
Play view Soft buttons
Start
Determines the start measure and can be modified only if the Play mode is set to «Loop». If
Loop is selected, this parameter indicates the
starting point of the loop. Modify this parameter
when it is in a selected state, or when the Song
has already been recorded, by rotating the DIAL.
○
Determines the starting tempo of a Song. This
parameter can be modified when the Song is off.
The value of the setting is recorded in the Master
Track, as the Start Parameter.
Loop: the Song starts at the point indicated
by the locator, stops at the End, then repeats
from the Starting point. The loop repeats continuously until stopped with the Stop button.
○
Song memory (not programmable)
•
○
Shows the Song dimensions expressed in Kilobytes. Each Song is limited to 400 kb of memory,
independent of the memory remaining in the System RAM.
dicated by the locator and stops at the specified End.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SOUND VIEW (F5)
Recalls the «Sound View» page, where you can
see and change the sounds of the current Performance.
Track or Song erase parameter.
Track- Cancels the selected track.
Song - Cancels all tracks (all Song) leaving
an empty Song, ready to start another recording.. The Song-Performances are not cancelled.
METRONOME (F8)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
Songs 6•5
○
Jukebox Soft buttons
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Jukebox Soft buttons
Delete (F4)
Delete (F4)
Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list.
Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list.
Insert (F5)
Insert (F5)
Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the
display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving
the names which follow afterwards one step forward. This command can be used instead of
ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling another at the same location.
Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the
display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving
the names which follow afterwards one step forward. This command can be used instead of
ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling another at the same location.
Reset list (F6)
Reset list (F6)
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list.
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list.
All Song (F7)
All Song (F7)
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to
the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled
and substituted with the new.
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to
the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled
and substituted with the new.
Execute (F8)
Execute (F8)
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once
pressed, this button appears in the Play View
page of the Song.
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once
pressed, this button appears in the Play View
page of the Song.
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.
To stop the playback of Jukebox press STOP.
Starts the playback of the Jukebox. Once
pressed, this button appears in the Play View
page of the Song.
Execute (F8)
Includes all the Songs contained in memory to
the Jukebox list. An existing list will be cancelled
and substituted with the new.
All Song (F7)
Removes all the names from the Jukebox list.
Reset list (F6)
Inserts the Song selected in the left part of the
display into the Jukebox list on the right, moving
the names which follow afterwards one step forward. This command can be used instead of
ENTER to insert a Song without cancelling another at the same location.
Insert (F5)
Removes a selected Song from the Jukebox list.
Delete (F4)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•5
Jukebox Soft buttons
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Songs 6•5
6•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song
Recording a Song
4. Program the Performance as required and
save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE.
2. Select the QuickRec option from the «New
Song» dialog window by pressing the soft
button F2.
5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO,
FILL or ENDING.
6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.
The PLAY button activates automatically.
1. Press SONG to open the «Songs» dialog
window and select a free location (User).
7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic
accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at
will.
(N.B. See also page 2.50).
THE QUICK REC METHOD
8. Conclude your song (use the Ending).
9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to
modify the song recording in «Edit Song», or
to record other tracks using the normal
Record method described on the next page.
9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to
modify the song recording in «Edit Song», or
to record other tracks using the normal
Record method described on the next page.
6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.
The PLAY button activates automatically.
2. Select the QuickRec option from the «New
Song» dialog window by pressing the soft
button F2.
5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO,
FILL or ENDING.
4. Program the Performance as required and
save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE.
The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick
Record page activates showing a negative
highlight page.
3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment
controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS).
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if
modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to
the new Song-Performance).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
tracks
«QuickRecord» page
Quick Rec recording
The “Quick Rec” method exploits existing Styles
in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick
and easy way of recording which does not involve
the more advanced options common to the more
traditional Song Record method explained afterwards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent
way of recording backing tracks for vocalists.
Record method
The more traditional “Record” method allows you
to record one track at a time and does not exploit
existing structures.
For example, to record a Drum track, you must
build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a
Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks.
3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment
controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS).
4. Program the Performance as required and
save the changes with STORE PERFORMANCE.
5. If necessary, activate KEY START, INTRO,
FILL or ENDING.
6. Press START/STOP to start the recording.
The PLAY button activates automatically.
7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic
accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at
will.
8. Conclude your song (use the Ending).
9. Press STOP. The LED on the RECORD button goes off. At this point it is possible to
modify the song recording in «Edit Song», or
to record other tracks using the normal
Record method described on the next page.
THE QUICK REC METHOD
(N.B. See also page 2.50).
1. Press SONG to open the «Songs» dialog
window and select a free location (User).
2. Select the QuickRec option from the «New
Song» dialog window by pressing the soft
button F2.
The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick
Record page activates showing a negative
highlight page.
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if
modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to
the new Song-Performance).
menu
Recording a Song
1. Press SONG to open the «Songs» dialog
window and select a free location (User).
WK6/8 offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record.
WK6/8 offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record.
7. Play the keyboard sounds with the automatic
accompaniment, using the Fills and Intro at
will.
(N.B. See also page 2.50).
Quick Rec recording
The “Quick Rec” method exploits existing Styles
in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick
and easy way of recording which does not involve
the more advanced options common to the more
traditional Song Record method explained afterwards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent
way of recording backing tracks for vocalists.
8. Conclude your song (use the Ending).
THE QUICK REC METHOD
Record method
The more traditional “Record” method allows you
to record one track at a time and does not exploit
existing structures.
For example, to record a Drum track, you must
build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a
Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks.
Record method
The more traditional “Record” method allows you
to record one track at a time and does not exploit
existing structures.
For example, to record a Drum track, you must
build the drum accompaniment note for note using the individual percussive instruments of a
Drumkit assigned to one of the tracks.
3. Select a Style and set the accompaniment
controls (MIXER LOCK, TEMPO LOCK, ARRANGE ON/OFF, ARRANGE MEMORY,
LOWER MEMORY, ARRANGE MODE OPTIONS).
The RECORD LED lights up and the Quick
Record page activates showing a negative
highlight page.
menu
Quick Rec recording
The “Quick Rec” method exploits existing Styles
in order to record your keyboard tracks with automatic accompaniments. This method is a quick
and easy way of recording which does not involve
the more advanced options common to the more
traditional Song Record method explained afterwards. The Quick Rec method is an excellent
way of recording backing tracks for vocalists.
A new Song and Song Performance is created based on the starting Performance (if
modifications were previously applied, entering record mode saves the modifications to
the new Song-Performance).
tracks
«QuickRecord» page
WK6/8 offers two principal Song recording methods: Quick Rec and Record.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
tracks
«QuickRecord» page
menu
Recording a Song 6•7
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The Record method
PREPARATION
Tempo
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) button lights up and the display shows the
«Record View» page for Song mode in negative highlight.
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
5. Select and program the initial Song parameters:
• Press F3 («Controls
rec...») to activate or
deactivate the recording of the Tempo,
Pedal Volume, Effect
Change events. Press
ENTER to confirm the settings.
• Press F2 («Option»)
to open the «Option»
dialog window where
you can program the metronome and countdown options. Press ENTER to confirm the
settings.
menu
free locations
Song Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature (metronome).
○
○
«Select Song» window
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•7
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
Song name
Song-Performance name
Tempo
locator
(measure
counter)
1. Press SONG. In the «Select Song» dialog
window and select an empty location (User see display example below).
locator
(measure
counter)
Tempo
tracks
○
5. Select and program the initial Song parameters:
2. In the «New Song» dialog window, select the
Record option.
• Press F1 («Rec
Mode») to open the
«Rec Mode» dialog
window, select the
mode required and
press ENTER to confirm.
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature (metronome).
Song-Performance name
○
• Press F3 («Controls
rec...») to activate or
deactivate the recording of the Tempo,
Pedal Volume, Effect
Change events. Press
ENTER to confirm the settings.
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) button lights up and the display shows the
«Record View» page for Song mode in negative highlight.
Song name
○
• Press F2 («Option»)
to open the «Option»
dialog window where
you can program the metronome and countdown options. Press ENTER to confirm the
settings.
4. Program the recording options.
«Select Song» window
○
Song name
free locations
○
tracks
menu
Song Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
○
○
The Record method
○
PREPARATION
○
4. Program the recording options.
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
• Press F1 («Rec
Mode») to open the
«Rec Mode» dialog
window, select the
mode required and
press ENTER to confirm.
○
2. In the «New Song» dialog window, select the
Record option.
locator
(measure
counter)
4. Program the recording options.
○
Song-Performance name
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature (metronome).
○
1. Press SONG. In the «Select Song» dialog
window and select an empty location (User see display example below).
• Press F3 («Controls
rec...») to activate or
deactivate the recording of the Tempo,
Pedal Volume, Effect
Change events. Press
ENTER to confirm the settings.
5. Select and program the initial Song parameters:
○
• Press F1 («Rec
Mode») to open the
«Rec Mode» dialog
window, select the
mode required and
press ENTER to confirm.
3. The LED of the RECORD (ST/SONG) button lights up and the display shows the
«Record View» page for Song mode in negative highlight.
menu
2. In the «New Song» dialog window, select the
Record option.
○
tracks
1. Press SONG. In the «Select Song» dialog
window and select an empty location (User see display example below).
○
free locations
• Press F2 («Option»)
to open the «Option»
dialog window where
you can program the metronome and countdown options. Press ENTER to confirm the
settings.
PREPARATION
○
Song Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
The Record method
○
«Select Song» window
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•7
6•8 Reference Guide
9. Select the track(s) to record and set it (them)
for recording. Only tracks marked by the
record icon will capture data and be heard:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the prequantization (auto-correction of timing errors)
during the recording phase.
To place all the tracks in record, press F4
(«Select all tracks»). All the tracks will be
activated for recording and the parameter
changes to «Deselect all tracks».
○
○
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
10. To change sounds, select the «Sound View»
option by pressing F5.
○
○
After assigning your Sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERFORMANCE.
Press F6 («Rec View») to return to the «Rec
View» page.
After assigning your Sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERFORMANCE.
Press F6 («Rec View») to return to the «Rec
View» page.
○
○
10. To change sounds, select the «Sound View»
option by pressing F5.
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
○
○
6. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the prequantization (auto-correction of timing errors)
during the recording phase.
7. If necessary,
select «Play/
Rec Mode» to
alter the Song Play/Rec mode:
• The Linear option causes the Song to play
or be recorded once only, from the beginning
to the point at which you press STOP.
• The Forced Stop option causes the song
to play or be recorded from the specified start
locator to the end locator.
• The Loop option allows you to play or record
in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the
End point.
8. If
necessary,
modify the Start
and End locators.
These parameters can be modified only if the
Song contains recorded data (it will not be
possible to specify the measures if no recorded events exist).
The Start locator can be modified only when
the Play/Rec mode is set to Loop. The End
locator can be modified only if the Play/Rec
mode is set to Forced Stop or Loop.
7. If necessary,
select «Play/
Rec Mode» to
alter the Song Play/Rec mode:
• The Linear option causes the Song to play
or be recorded once only, from the beginning
to the point at which you press STOP.
• The Forced Stop option causes the song
to play or be recorded from the specified start
locator to the end locator.
• The Loop option allows you to play or record
in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the
End point.
○
○
To place all the tracks in record, press F4
(«Select all tracks»). All the tracks will be
activated for recording and the parameter
changes to «Deselect all tracks».
The Start locator can be modified only when
the Play/Rec mode is set to Loop. The End
locator can be modified only if the Play/Rec
mode is set to Forced Stop or Loop.
Song Mode - Sound View display
(Sounds display)
○
8. If
necessary,
modify the Start
and End locators.
These parameters can be modified only if the
Song contains recorded data (it will not be
possible to specify the measures if no recorded events exist).
8. If
necessary,
modify the Start
and End locators.
These parameters can be modified only if the
Song contains recorded data (it will not be
possible to specify the measures if no recorded events exist).
○
The Start locator can be modified only when
the Play/Rec mode is set to Loop. The End
locator can be modified only if the Play/Rec
mode is set to Forced Stop or Loop.
7. If necessary,
select «Play/
Rec Mode» to
alter the Song Play/Rec mode:
• The Linear option causes the Song to play
or be recorded once only, from the beginning
to the point at which you press STOP.
• The Forced Stop option causes the song
to play or be recorded from the specified start
locator to the end locator.
• The Loop option allows you to play or record
in a cyclic manner from the Start point to the
End point.
○
9. Select the track(s) to record and set it (them)
for recording. Only tracks marked by the
record icon will capture data and be heard:
Song Mode - Sound View display
(Sounds display)
6. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the prequantization (auto-correction of timing errors)
during the recording phase.
Song Mode - Sound View display
(Sounds display)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9. Select the track(s) to record and set it (them)
for recording. Only tracks marked by the
record icon will capture data and be heard:
To place all the tracks in record, press F4
(«Select all tracks»). All the tracks will be
activated for recording and the parameter
changes to «Deselect all tracks».
10. To change sounds, select the «Sound View»
option by pressing F5.
After assigning your Sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERFORMANCE.
Press F6 («Rec View») to return to the «Rec
View» page.
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
Recording a Song 6•9
UNDO
1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON wait for the countdown to finish
before playing (events are not recorded during the countdown phase).
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO
to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO
button is located to the right of the display, just
after the Contrast knob.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return
to the previous situation, press UNDO.
4. To add additional events to the same tracks,
press STOP again to take the song pointer
to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
UNDO
○
2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will
be recorded in the track or tracks active for
recording.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
○
○
Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song
back to the beginning.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
You are prompted with a request to confirm
the operation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6. Repeat the recording procedures for other
tracks.
6. Repeat the recording procedures for other
tracks.
○
UNDO
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO
to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO
button is located to the right of the display, just
after the Contrast knob.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•9
UNDO
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed
operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request
and retain the last operation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON wait for the countdown to finish
before playing (events are not recorded during the countdown phase).
○
You are prompted with a request to confirm
the operation.
○
2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will
be recorded in the track or tracks active for
recording.
○
○
3. When you have finished, stop the recording
with STOP.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO.
Just press UNDO and confirm the request with
ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
○
○
© Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song
back to the beginning.
○
○
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED of the RECORD button goes off and
the display returns to normal.
1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return
to the previous situation, press UNDO.
○
○
4. To add additional events to the same tracks,
press STOP again to take the song pointer
to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.
2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed
operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request
and retain the last operation.
UNDO
Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track,
select the Overdub option. To substitute existing
notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the
Replace option.
5. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be
confirmed and the tracks set to «seq-play».
○
1. If, after recording a track, you wish to return
to the previous situation, press UNDO.
○
5. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be
confirmed and the tracks set to «seq-play».
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED of the RECORD button goes off and
the display returns to normal.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO.
Just press UNDO and confirm the request with
ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
3. When you have finished, stop the recording
with STOP.
○
○
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO
to cancel the last performed task. The UNDO
button is located to the right of the display, just
after the Contrast knob.
1. Press PLAY to start the recording. If Countdown is ON wait for the countdown to finish
before playing (events are not recorded during the countdown phase).
©
Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track,
select the Overdub option. To substitute existing
notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the
Replace option.
○
○
4. To add additional events to the same tracks,
press STOP again to take the song pointer
to the starting point and repeat points 1 - 3.
UNDO
©
○
RECORDING
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RECORDING
○
○
© Note: To add notes to existing ones in a track,
select the Overdub option. To substitute existing
notes in a recorded track with new ones, select the
Replace option.
○
Note: Pressing STOP twice rewinds the Song
back to the beginning.
○
You are prompted with a request to confirm
the operation.
○
○
5. If you are satisfied with the recording, confirm the track or tracks by pressing the corresponding Soft buttons. The recording will be
confirmed and the tracks set to «seq-play».
○
©
○
6. Repeat the recording procedures for other
tracks.
3. When you have finished, stop the recording
with STOP.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick an easy way is to use UNDO.
Just press UNDO and confirm the request with
ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
○
2. Press ENTER to cancel the last performed
operation, or ESCAPE to cancel the request
and retain the last operation.
2. Start to play after the countdown. Events will
be recorded in the track or tracks active for
recording.
○
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED of the RECORD button goes off and
the display returns to normal.
RECORDING
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•9
6•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The «Record View» page in detail
The «Record View» page in detail
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
the instrument using the Volume pedal .
These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Tempo - To record the Tempo variations.
Settings: On, Off.
Metronome (F8)
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song)
and leaves an “empty” Song, ready to capture recorded events. The Song Performance
remains intact.
Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume,
effects changes. These events are captured in
the Master Track.
Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127.
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Cancellation of the track or Song.
Countdown - A lead into the recording during which time no events can be captured..
Settings: On, Off.
Erase... (F7)
Select all tracks (F4)
Recalls the «Record View» page in which it is
possible to control the record/play parameters.
© Once pressed, the option changes to «Deselect
all tracks».
Metronome options.
Rec View (F6)
Activates all the tracks for recording. «Deselect
all tracks» resets all the tracks in «key-play» or
«seq-play» status.
Option... (F2)
Sound View (F5)
Recalls the «Sound View» page in which it is
possible to see and change the sounds assigned
to the Performance.
Activates all the tracks for recording. «Deselect
all tracks» resets all the tracks in «key-play» or
«seq-play» status.
© Once pressed, the option changes to «Deselect
all tracks».
Select all tracks (F4)
Erase... (F7)
Select all tracks (F4)
Tempo - To record the Tempo variations.
Settings: On, Off.
Metronome (F8)
P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The «Record View» page in detail
○
Countdown - A lead into the recording during which time no events can be captured..
Settings: On, Off.
Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127.
©
Select all tracks (F4)
© Once pressed, the option changes to «Deselect
all tracks».
Activates all the tracks for recording. «Deselect
all tracks» resets all the tracks in «key-play» or
«seq-play» status.
Sound View (F5)
Recalls the «Sound View» page in which it is
possible to see and change the sounds assigned
to the Performance.
Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume,
effects changes. These events are captured in
the Master Track.
○
○
Recalls the «Record View» page in which it is
possible to control the record/play parameters.
Erase... (F7)
Cancellation of the track or Song.
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Controls rec... (F3)
Mode... (F1)
the instrument using the Volume pedal .
These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
○
Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song)
and leaves an “empty” Song, ready to capture recorded events. The Song Performance
remains intact.
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Effect - To record the changes of the effects
assigned to the Performance and respective
effect volume levels. These events are captured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see
Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Recording options for Tempo, Master Volume,
effects changes. These events are captured in
the Master Track.
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Select all tracks (F4)
Rec View (F6)
Metronome options.
Cancellation of the track or Song.
Controls rec... (F3)
Effect - To record the changes of the effects
assigned to the Performance and respective
effect volume levels. These events are captured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see
Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Option... (F2)
Recalls the «Record View» page in which it is
possible to control the record/play parameters.
©
Metronome vol. - Volume setting of the metronome tick. Settings Off, 10...127.
○
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present in the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Controllers/
Pads» of «Edit Performance»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches a position just before the point
at which the correction must be inserted,
press the pedal. At this point, the recording
proceeds in “replace” mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop
the replace recording.
Recalls the «Sound View» page in which it is
possible to see and change the sounds assigned
to the Performance.
Sound View (F5)
Rec View (F6)
Countdown - A lead into the recording during which time no events can be captured..
Settings: On, Off.
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present in the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Controllers/
Pads» of «Edit Performance»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches a position just before the point
at which the correction must be inserted,
press the pedal. At this point, the recording
proceeds in “replace” mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop
the replace recording.
Select all tracks (F4)
©
the instrument using the Volume pedal .
These events are recorded as CC07 (see Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Effect - To record the changes of the effects
assigned to the Performance and respective
effect volume levels. These events are captured as CC16, CC17, CC48, CC49 (see
Appendix). Settings: On, Off.
Option... (F2)
Metronome options.
Mode... (F1)
Controls rec... (F3)
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present in the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Controllers/
Pads» of «Edit Performance»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches a position just before the point
at which the correction must be inserted,
press the pedal. At this point, the recording
proceeds in “replace” mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop
the replace recording.
P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of
Mode... (F1)
Song - Cancels all the tracks (entire Song)
and leaves an “empty” Song, ready to capture recorded events. The Song Performance
remains intact.
Tempo - To record the Tempo variations.
Settings: On, Off.
Metronome (F8)
P.Volume. - To record the general Volume of
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•11
END
Locator. Indicates the current position of the
Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick).
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point
at which the repeating song ends before looping
back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec
Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the
automatic Stop point.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
END
○
Locator. Indicates the current position of the
Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick).
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point
at which the repeating song ends before looping
back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec
Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the
automatic Stop point.
resolution
beat
○
TIME SIGNATURE
○
○
○
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It
is not possible to select the next measure after
the Song end point. For example, if the recorded
Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.
○
Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains
recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified.
TEMPO
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL in the «Play View»
or «Record View» page, or in the Master Track.
Tempo changes can be carried out during the
recording by using the DIAL. The events are
captured in the Master Track, provided that the
appropriate option is active («Controls rec», dialog window F3).
The Master Track always contains the initial
Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified
but not cancelled.
○
PLAY/REC MODE
○
○
○
○
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
TIME SIGNATURE
○
○
Recording and playback options for the Song.
The options are:
Linear - A linear recording or playback of the
Song, starting from the current locator to the
Song end. In record mode, new events are
recorded as the recording proceeds.
Forced stop - The Song is played back or
recorded from the current Locator to a specified End locator. With Forced Stop active, the
Loc and End indicators determine the start
and end point of the recording.
Loop - Song playback or recording repeats
continuously. When the Song reaches the
end, it loops back to the beginning and starts
again and continues to repeat until stopped
with STOP.
○
○
○
○
○
©
Note: The loop requires an additional memory
buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory
progress bar shows an increased amount of used
memory.
○
○
measure (bar)
©
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains
recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified.
○
○
○
TEMPO
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL in the «Play View»
or «Record View» page, or in the Master Track.
Tempo changes can be carried out during the
recording by using the DIAL. The events are
captured in the Master Track, provided that the
appropriate option is active («Controls rec», dialog window F3).
The Master Track always contains the initial
Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified
but not cancelled.
○
○
○
Note: The loop requires an additional memory
buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory
progress bar shows an increased amount of used
memory.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
START
START
End point marker. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point
at which the repeating song ends before looping
back to the Start marker. If the Play/Rec
Mode=Forced Stop, this parameter indicates the
automatic Stop point.
○
○
○
○
○
Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at
which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•11
END
Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at
which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
LOC
○
○
Locator. Indicates the current position of the
Song, expressed in measures, beats and resolution (tick).
○
○
resolution
○
○
beat
○
○
measure (bar)
○
○
TIME SIGNATURE
○
○
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It
is not possible to select the next measure after
the Song end point. For example, if the recorded
Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.
○
○
Metro. This parameter can be modified only before starting a recording. If the Song contains
recorded events, the parameter cannot be modified.
○
○
PLAY/REC MODE
○
○
TEMPO
○
○
Initial playing/recording speed. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL in the «Play View»
or «Record View» page, or in the Master Track.
○
LOC
Tempo changes can be carried out during the
recording by using the DIAL. The events are
captured in the Master Track, provided that the
appropriate option is active («Controls rec», dialog window F3).
○
○
The Master Track always contains the initial
Tempo of the Song. The value can be modified
but not cancelled.
Recording and playback options for the Song.
The options are:
Linear - A linear recording or playback of the
Song, starting from the current locator to the
Song end. In record mode, new events are
recorded as the recording proceeds.
Forced stop - The Song is played back or
recorded from the current Locator to a specified End locator. With Forced Stop active, the
Loc and End indicators determine the start
and end point of the recording.
Loop - Song playback or recording repeats
continuously. When the Song reaches the
end, it loops back to the beginning and starts
again and continues to repeat until stopped
with STOP.
○
○
© Note: The loop requires an additional memory
buffer. When this mode is selected, the memory
progress bar shows an increased amount of used
memory.
PLAY/REC MODE
○
○
The parameter can be modified with the DIAL.
The measure can be modified with the DIAL. It
is not possible to select the next measure after
the Song end point. For example, if the recorded
Song terminates at measure 10, the Locator cannot be given a value greater than 10 -1 -1.
○
○
Recording and playback options for the Song.
The options are:
Linear - A linear recording or playback of the
Song, starting from the current locator to the
Song end. In record mode, new events are
recorded as the recording proceeds.
Forced stop - The Song is played back or
recorded from the current Locator to a specified End locator. With Forced Stop active, the
Loc and End indicators determine the start
and end point of the recording.
Loop - Song playback or recording repeats
continuously. When the Song reaches the
end, it loops back to the beginning and starts
again and continues to repeat until stopped
with STOP.
resolution
beat
○
Starting indicator. If Loop is active (Play/Rec
Mode= Loop) this parameter indicates the point at
which the Song starts to repeat. The parameter
can be modified with the DIAL.
measure (bar)
○
START
LOC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording a Song 6•11
6•12 Reference Guide
QUANTIZE
EDITING YOUR SONGS
An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal,
triplets or swing.
The “Edit Song” functions allow you to modify the
recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts
of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in ‘event edit’ environments (Microscope and Master Track). For detailed information, refer to the Edit Song chapter 7.
○
1/4
q
1/8
○
○
e
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of
clearing Song memory and making room for other
Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation.
x triplet
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
r
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
r triplet
(1/64)
Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs
that you don’t want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
e. x (swing)
1/16 B...F*
MEMORY PROGRESS BAR
q. e (swing)
1/8 B...F*
2. Press F6 («Restore Songs») to cancel all the
Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in
RAM.
no quantization
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
free
2. Press F6 («Restore Songs») to cancel all the
Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in
RAM.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
q. e (swing)
no quantization
free
(1/64 triplet)
1/96
(1/64)
1/64
r triplet
1/48
r
1/32
Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs
that you don’t want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
A bar graph which monitors the amount of
memory being used up by the song as it is being
recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes
to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical
value and is independent of the total amount of
memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.
1/8 B...F*
MEMORY PROGRESS BAR
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of
clearing Song memory and making room for other
Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation.
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
x triplet
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
○
○
○
○
○
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quantization
○
Value
○
q
The “Edit Song” functions allow you to modify the
recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts
of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in ‘event edit’ environments (Microscope and Master Track). For detailed information, refer to the Edit Song chapter 7.
An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal,
triplets or swing.
EDITING YOUR SONGS
QUANTIZE
○
○
1/4
○
○
e
○
e triplet
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
EDITING YOUR SONGS
An auto-corrector of timing errors during the recording phase. The selection values are normal,
triplets or swing.
The “Edit Song” functions allow you to modify the
recorded song, by copying or moving entire parts
of a song, by correcting timing errors, by inserting events in ‘event edit’ environments (Microscope and Master Track). For detailed information, refer to the Edit Song chapter 7.
Value
Quantization
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
1/24
x triplet
1/32
r
1/48
r triplet
1/64
(1/64)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
1/8 B...F*
q. e (swing)
1/16 B...F*
e. x (swing)
free
no quantization
RESTORING THE SONGS MEMORY
If you have loaded disk-based Songs or recorded
Songs and used up all the memory dedicated to
the storage of Songs, a quick and easy way of
clearing Song memory and making room for other
Songs is to use the Restore Songs operation.
Naturally, you must remember to save the Songs
that you don’t want to lose to disk before proceeding with the restore procedure.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
2. Press F6 («Restore Songs») to cancel all the
Songs (and relative Song-Performances) in
RAM.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
MEMORY PROGRESS BAR
A bar graph which monitors the amount of
memory being used up by the song as it is being
recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes
to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical
value and is independent of the total amount of
memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the Songs are cancelled from
memory.
With ESCAPE, the song data are retained.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
©
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
1/12
○
If the RAM already contains a large amount of
data, a dialog window may appear showing the
message «Memory full!», which indicates that the
recording cannot proceed further. The recording
is instantly interrupted.
1/8
1/64
x
1/48
QUANTIZE
1/16
1/32
1/24
1/24
○
e. x (swing)
○
1/16 B...F*
○
no quantization
x
○
free
○
A bar graph which monitors the amount of
memory being used up by the song as it is being
recorded. In Play mode, the parameter changes
to SONG MEMORY, expressed as a numerical
value and is independent of the total amount of
memory remaining in RAM. Each Song is limited to 400 kb.
○
1/16
○
○
© Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
e triplet
1/12
○
○
If the RAM already contains a large amount of
data, a dialog window may appear showing the
message «Memory full!», which indicates that the
recording cannot proceed further. The recording
is instantly interrupted.
Quantization
○
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
Value
○
○
If the RAM already contains a large amount of
data, a dialog window may appear showing the
message «Memory full!», which indicates that the
recording cannot proceed further. The recording
is instantly interrupted.
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•1
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
5. Select the parameters with the directional
arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL
or the numeric keypad.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 7 Edit Song
After recording a Song using either the «Record»
method or the «QuickRec» method, it can be edited by entering «Edit Song».
THE EDIT PROCEDURE
HOW TO ENTER «EDIT SONG»
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
Select the Song that requires editing.
The name of the Song will appear in the title bar
of the display.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter «Edit
Song». The main menu appears.
THE EDIT PROCEDURE
Edit Song: Main menu
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•1
• 7 Edit Song
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor.
Edit Song: Main menu
To escape from «Edit Song» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
After recording a Song using either the «Record»
method or the «QuickRec» method, it can be edited by entering «Edit Song».
Locator
ESCAPE «EDIT SONG»
HOW TO ENTER «EDIT SONG»
Editors
7. Pass to another editor with the buttons
.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
Select the Song that requires editing.
Page name
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
The name of the Song will appear in the title bar
of the display.
7
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
To escape from «Edit Song» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
5. Select the parameters with the directional
arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL
or the numeric keypad.
Locator
5. Select the parameters with the directional
arrows. Modify the parameter with the DIAL
or the numeric keypad.
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions,
the last page selected is recalled.
ST. / SONG
3. Press ENTER to gain access to the editor.
Song name
7. Pass to another editor with the buttons
.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter «Edit
Song». The main menu appears.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
Song name
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Song».
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
ESCAPE «EDIT SONG»
7
Editors
○
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
ST. / SONG
Page name
○
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Song».
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions,
the last page selected is recalled.
○
7. Pass to another editor with the buttons
.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Song».
○
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu (page 00/10). On all successive occasions,
the last page selected is recalled.
Song name
○
ESCAPE «EDIT SONG»
The name of the Song will appear in the title bar
of the display.
○
ST. / SONG
Select the Song that requires editing.
○
7
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
○
Locator
HOW TO ENTER «EDIT SONG»
1. In Song mode, press ST./SONG to enter «Edit
Song». The main menu appears.
○
Editors
THE EDIT PROCEDURE
○
Page name
After recording a Song using either the «Record»
method or the «QuickRec» method, it can be edited by entering «Edit Song».
○
To escape from «Edit Song» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
• 7 Edit Song
○
Edit Song: Main menu
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•1
7•2 Reference Guide
EDIT SCORE (F6)
○
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM,
it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
EDIT SCORE (F6)
○
The main Menu Options
Opens the Score Edit function.
Opens the Score Edit function.
Score Edit is described separately in detail in the
«Score & Edit Score» section towards the end of
this chapter.
Score Edit is described separately in detail in the
«Score & Edit Score» section towards the end of
this chapter.
SONG NAME (F8)
Modifies the name of the Song.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
Pub - Song Publisher.
UNDO
○
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
UNDO (F2)
○
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
The main Menu Options
○
UNDO (F2)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM,
it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
SONG NAME (F8)
Modifies the name of the Song.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
UNDO
Author - Name of the composer.
Title - Full name of the Song.
Name - Name of the Song which appears in the
WK6/8 file selector. This name does not appear
when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum
character length: 10.
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
The characters are insereted using the method
described on page 1.4 of the «Data Entry» section of chapter 1. You can move the cursor with
the Soft buttons or the DIAL and insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard.
The characters are insereted using the method
described on page 1.4 of the «Data Entry» section of chapter 1. You can move the cursor with
the Soft buttons or the DIAL and insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard.
Name - Name of the Song which appears in the
WK6/8 file selector. This name does not appear
when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum
character length: 10.
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
Title - Full name of the Song.
Author - Name of the composer.
Pub - Song Publisher.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Song. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM,
it is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
UNDO (F2)
Modifies the name of the Song.
SONG NAME (F8)
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
Score Edit is described separately in detail in the
«Score & Edit Score» section towards the end of
this chapter.
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
Opens the Score Edit function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
EDIT SCORE (F6)
○
○
○
○
○
The main Menu Options
○
Name - Name of the Song which appears in the
WK6/8 file selector. This name does not appear
when the disk is read by a computer. Maximum
character length: 10.
Title - Full name of the Song.
UNDO
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
The characters are insereted using the method
described on page 1.4 of the «Data Entry» section of chapter 1. You can move the cursor with
the Soft buttons or the DIAL and insert the characters with the keys of the keyboard.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Author - Name of the composer.
Pub - Song Publisher.
Edit Song 7•3
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Cancels the events from a single track or from all
tracks.
Cancels the events from a single track or from all
tracks.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.
firm the cancellation.
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be cancelled. Depending
on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be cancelled. Depending
on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
All tracks (F8) .
All tracks (F8) .
All tracks (F8) .
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be cancelled. Depending
on the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Cancels the events from a single track or from all
tracks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•3
7•4 Reference Guide
ERASE PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ERASE PARAMETERS
Event type
Event type
(Only for tracks which capture note events). Selects the type of event to cancel.
(Only for tracks which capture note events). Selects the type of event to cancel.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify
the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in others, only the measure.
The highest and lowest limits of the note range
to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value
to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example,
to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Note range from... to...
From locator... To locator...
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Note range from... to...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify
the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in others, only the measure.
The highest and lowest limits of the note range
to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value
to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example,
to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as
«Note range from D2 to D2».
From locator... To locator...
Note range from... to...
The highest and lowest limits of the note range
to cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument from the Drum track, assign the same value
to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example,
to cancel the snare (D2), set the parameter as
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. In some cases it is possible to specify
the measure, beat and resolution (tick), in others, only the measure.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
(Only for tracks which capture note events). Selects the type of event to cancel.
Event type
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ERASE PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•5
○
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Shifts events from one point of the selected track
to another.
Shifts events from one point of the selected track
to another.
©
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the movement.
©
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
From locator... To locator...
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution (tick).
Determines the start and end point of the part to
move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution (tick).
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Start locator
Start locator
Determines the new position of the part that is to
be moved.
Determines the new position of the part that is to
be moved.
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the movement.
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
Determines the new position of the part that is to
be moved.
Start locator
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point before the start
or after the end of the Song.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
move. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution (tick).
From locator... To locator...
PARAMETERS
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the movement.
Shifts events from one point of the selected track
to another.
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•5
7•6 Reference Guide
○
Copy
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Copy
Copies events from a single track or from all
tracks.
Copies events from a single track or from all
tracks.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the copy.
firm the copy.
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be copied. Depending on
the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be copied. Depending on
the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
All tracks (F8) .
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
Master track (F4) - The Master Track records
events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song (Tempo, Time Signature, selected
Performance, selected effects).
Chords track (F5) - Track for the chord symbols inserted in the score.
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
Track (F3) - Single track. Select the track
with the Soft buttons A...H.
Lyrics track (F7) - Track for the lyrics of the
score.
Music track (F6) - Track for the notes of the
score (standard notation).
All tracks (F8) .
All tracks (F8) .
Use the Soft buttons F1...F8 to select the track
from which events will be copied. Depending on
the type of track selected, the following parameters may or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F3 ... F8
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the copy.
Copies events from a single track or from all
tracks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Copy
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•7
COPY PARAMETERS
Copy mode
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Options: Merge, Replace.
From track... to track...
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start measure and end measure
of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot
be specified.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a measure after the
end of the Song.
○
○
○
○
○
○
COPY PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
value to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter
as «Note range from D2 to D2».
○
Copy mode
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Options: Merge, Replace.
From track... to track...
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start measure and end measure
of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot
be specified.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a measure after the
end of the Song.
Start locator
Specifies the source and destination track of the
copy. The «From track...» part is selected with
the Soft buttons A ... H. The «To track...» part is
modified with the DIAL.
Assignable values: any track (1...32).
Determines the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: any track (1...32).
Determines the new position of the copied part.
To Song...
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
To Song...
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
Copy times
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If
the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command.
Specifies the number of consecutive copies.
Each copy starts exactly where the previous one
ends.
Note range from... to...
Copy times
Assignable values: 1...998.
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the
note range to copy. To copy a single percussive
instrument from the Drum track, assign the same
Assignable values: any point, even after the end
point of the Song.
To Song...
Determines the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: any track (1...32).
Start locator
Specifies the source and destination track of the
copy. The «From track...» part is selected with
the Soft buttons A ... H. The «To track...» part is
modified with the DIAL.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•7
value to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter
as «Note range from D2 to D2».
○
○
○
○
○
○
COPY PARAMETERS
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
○
Copy mode
From locator... To locator...
○
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Determines the start measure and end measure
of the part to copy. Bars and Resolution cannot
be specified.
○
Options: Merge, Replace.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a measure after the
end of the Song.
○
From track... to track...
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the
note range to copy. To copy a single percussive
instrument from the Drum track, assign the same
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If
the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command.
Assignable values: 1...998.
Assignable values: any Song (1...16).
Specifies the number of consecutive copies.
Each copy starts exactly where the previous one
ends.
Assignable values: any Song (1...16).
Note range from... to...
Assignable values: 1...998.
Assignable values: any Song (1...16).
Specifies the number of consecutive copies.
Each copy starts exactly where the previous one
ends.
Copy times
Note range from... to...
Determines the destination Song for the copy. If
the selected Song is non existent, it will be created by the act of confirming the copy command.
Start locator
Determines the highest and lowest limits of the
note range to copy. To copy a single percussive
instrument from the Drum track, assign the same
Specifies the source and destination track of the
copy. The «From track...» part is selected with
the Soft buttons A ... H. The «To track...» part is
modified with the DIAL.
value to the “from” and “to” parameters. For example, to copy the snare (D2), set the parameter
as «Note range from D2 to D2».
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•7
7•8 Reference Guide
○
Quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quantize
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the quantization.
firm the quantization.
SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2
SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note
On event.
Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note
On event.
Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note
Off event. After a Note On quantization, a
Note Off quantization affects the duration of
the notes, adapting them to the quantization
grid.
Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note
Off event. After a Note On quantization, a
Note Off quantization affects the duration of
the notes, adapting them to the quantization
grid.
Note Off Quantize - Quantization of the Note
Off event. After a Note On quantization, a
Note Off quantization affects the duration of
the notes, adapting them to the quantization
grid.
Note On Quantize - Quantization of the Note
On event.
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
SOFT BUTTONS F1 AND F2
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the quantization.
An auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize values.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•9
Note Off quantization
Note On quantization
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
Value
Quantization
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
1/24
x triplet
1/32
r
1/48
r triplet
1/64
(1/64)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
1/8 B...F*
q. e (swing)
1/16 B...F*
e. x (swing)
free
no quantization
○
○
○
○
○
QUANTIZE PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note Off quantization
○
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
Note On quantization
Determines the Note On quantize values.
Note range from... to...
Determines the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Value
Quantization
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
1/24
x triplet
From locator... To locator...
1/32
r
1/48
r triplet
1/64
(1/64)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
1/8 B...F*
q. e (swing)
1/16 B...F*
e. x (swing)
free
no quantization
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point after the end
of the Song.
Note range from... to...
Determines the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point after the end
of the Song.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.
Determines the Note On quantize values.
○
no quantization
e. x (swing)
Assignable values: within the limits of the Song.
It is not possible to specify a point after the end
of the Song.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.
q. e (swing)
no quantization
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
(1/64 triplet)
(1/64)
r triplet
From locator... To locator...
r
x triplet
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
x
Determines the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
e triplet
e
q
Quantization
Determines the Note On quantize values.
Note range from... to...
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•9
Note Off quantization
○
○
○
○
QUANTIZE PARAMETERS
○
Note On quantization
○
Value
○
1/4
○
1/8
○
1/12
○
1/16
○
1/24
○
1/32
○
1/48
○
1/64
○
1/96
○
free
○
1/8 B...F*
○
1/16 B...F*
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the swing feel.
free
QUANTIZE PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•9
7•10 Reference Guide
○
Insert measures
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insert measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward
the same number of bars as those inserted.
Given that the Time Signature of the inserted
measures can differ to the Time Signature of the
Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the
creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward
the same number of bars as those inserted.
Given that the Time Signature of the inserted
measures can differ to the Time Signature of the
Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the
creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the insertion.
firm the insertion.
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
2
(2)
(4)
5
6
Determines the Time Signature of the measures
to insert.
1
2
3
4
a
Assignable values: from the first measure of the
Song, to the first measure after the end measure
of the Song (coda insertion).
(1)
2
(2)
3
(a)
4
(b)
5
(3)
6
(4)
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved
forward.
Measures to insert
(3)
4
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
1
Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999.
(b)
3
Insert from locator
4
Time Signature
(a)
2
Determines the Time Signature of the measures
to insert.
3
Insert from locator
(1)
1
1
Time Signature
b
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved
forward.
Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999.
a
Assignable values: from the first measure of the
Song, to the first measure after the end measure
of the Song (coda insertion).
Measures to insert
Measures to insert
b
Time Signature
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insert measures
○
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Insert from locator
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
Assignable values: from the first measure of the
Song, to the first measure after the end measure
of the Song (coda insertion).
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Song after the insertion point shifts forward
the same number of bars as those inserted.
Given that the Time Signature of the inserted
measures can differ to the Time Signature of the
Song, the Insert Measures parameter permits the
creation of a Song with multiple Time Signatures.
○
1
Determines the Time Signature of the measures
to insert.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the insertion.
○
b
Specifies the number of measures to insert. Assignable values: 1...999.
PARAMETERS
○
a
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
(1)
(2)
(a)
(b)
5
(3)
6
(4)
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measures are moved
forward.
Edit Song 7•11
Delete measures
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Delete measures
○
○
○
○
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Song and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Song and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.
firm the cancellation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled.
All the measures after the delete point shift towards the
beginning of the song.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Measures to delete
Measures to delete
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song.
For example, if the Song is 50 measures long,
the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.
Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song.
For example, if the Song is 50 measures long,
the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.
Assignable values: any number that does not exceed the total number of measures in the Song.
For example, if the Song is 50 measures long,
the maximum value that can be assigned is 50.
2
3
4
5
6
Delete from locator
(6)
1
1
3
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. The parameter is linked to the previous
one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the
Song are less than those shown in «Measures».
○
○
○
2
(1)
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
4
5
6
3
(2)
4
(5)
(6)
○
○
○
Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled.
All the measures after the delete point shift towards the
beginning of the song.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
Example of Delete measures. Measures 3 and 4 are cancelled.
All the measures after the delete point shift towards the
beginning of the song.
2
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
1
(5)
Delete from locator
(6)
4
(2)
(5)
4
3
3
(2)
2
6
2
1
5
(1)
4
1
3
(1)
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Song and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. The parameter is linked to the previous
one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the
Song are less than those shown in «Measures».
2
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
Delete from locator
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•11
○
○
○
○
Delete measures
○
PARAMETERS
○
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. The parameter is linked to the previous
one, which can be modified if the measures between the deletion start point and the end of the
Song are less than those shown in «Measures».
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
Measures to delete
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•11
7•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Velocity
Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter represents the speed with which a note is played, or
its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity
the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the
filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with
increased velocity.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single
percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign
the same note to the highest and lowest limit.
For example, to change the snare (D2) set the
parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the dynamic changes.
Note range from... to...
PARAMETERS
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option
selected in «Velocity Mode».
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Velocity
○
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter represents the speed with which a note is played, or
its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity
the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the
filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with
increased velocity.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the dynamic changes.
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single
percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign
the same note to the highest and lowest limit.
For example, to change the snare (D2) set the
parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
○
Velocity mode
Note range from... to...
○
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option
selected in «Velocity Mode».
Velocity mode
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
key Velocity values.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
From locator... To locator...
Change Velocity
PARAMETERS
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the
value specified in the «Change Velocity» parameter.
firm the dynamic changes.
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
key Velocity values.
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
key Velocity values.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the
value specified in the «Change Velocity» parameter.
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Change Velocity
Velocity mode
Modifies the key Velocity. This parameter represents the speed with which a note is played, or
its intensity. Generally, the greater the velocity
the higher the volume. Velocity also affects the
filter of many sounds, rendering them brighter with
increased velocity.
Fixed - The key Velocities are all set to the
value specified in the «Change Velocity» parameter.
Change Velocity
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option
selected in «Velocity Mode».
Note range from... to...
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To modify the velocity of a single
percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign
the same note to the highest and lowest limit.
For example, to change the snare (D2) set the
parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Edit Song 7•13
○
Transpose
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transpose
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones.
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones.
Also available are options to transpose the
Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song.
This allows you to see the score in the correctly
transposed status after a transpose operation.
Also available are options to transpose the
Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song.
This allows you to see the score in the correctly
transposed status after a transpose operation.
Track (F6)
Track (F6)
Transposition of a Song track by semitones.
Transposition of a Song track by semitones.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones).
Note range from... to...
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To transpose a single percussive
instrument of the Drum track, assign the same
note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter
to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Transposition of the Music track of the Score by
semitones.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation.
Note range from... to...
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To transpose a single percussive
instrument of the Drum track, assign the same
note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter
to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Transposition of the Chords track of the Score
by semitones.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Chords trk (F7)
Transposition of a Song track by semitones.
Transpose value
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Song. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the Song.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones).
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Music trk (F8)
From locator... To locator...
Note range from... to...
Transposition of the Music track of the Score by
semitones.
Track (F6)
Also available are options to transpose the
Chords and Music tracks of the Score of a song.
This allows you to see the score in the correctly
transposed status after a transpose operation.
Transposition of a recorded track by semitones.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transpose
firm the operation.
Transpose value
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the operation.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
Music trk (F8)
Assigns the upper and lower limits of the notes
to be affected. To transpose a single percussive
instrument of the Drum track, assign the same
note to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter
to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Transposition of the Music track of the Score by
semitones.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitones).
Transposition of the Chords track of the Score
by semitones.
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Music trk (F8)
Transpose value
From locator... To locator...
Transposition of the Chords track of the Score
by semitones.
Chords trk (F7)
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify Measure,
Beat and ‘tick’.
Chords trk (F7)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•13
7•14 Reference Guide
○
Microscope
○
○
○
Event List
○
○
○
○
○
○
track in edit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Event List
Microscope
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
at the centre of the display shows all the events
recorded.
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
at the centre of the display shows all the events
recorded.
ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE
ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE
1. Select the track whose events you wish to
see in the Event List.
1. Select the track whose events you wish to
see in the Event List.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the
events. The selected notes are played automatically.
measure
beat
4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.
event type
(Status)
Gate
EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN
BE CHANGED
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed in the
Event List.
SHOW... (F2)
SHOW... (F2)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed in the
Event List.
EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN
BE CHANGED
4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event.
3. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
Refer to the events table on the following page
for an explanation of each event.
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
measure
beat
resolution
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
event type
(Status)
Gate
Value 3
resolution
Value 2
beat
Value 1
measure
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed in the
Event List.
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
1. Select the track whose events you wish to
see in the Event List.
ACCESSING THE EVENT EDIT MODE
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
at the centre of the display shows all the events
recorded.
○
○
○
○
○
track in edit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•14 Reference Guide
Event List
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Microscope
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•14 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Gate
SHOW... (F2)
2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the
events. The selected notes are played automatically.
event type
(Status)
Refer to the events table on the following page
for an explanation of each event.
3. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event.
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event.
Value 3
Refer to the events table on the following page
for an explanation of each event.
4. Use the DIAL to modify the selected parameter.
EVENTS AND PARAMETERS WHICH CAN
BE CHANGED
Value 2
resolution
3. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
2. Use the / buttons to scroll through the
events. The selected notes are played automatically.
Value 1
track in edit
Edit Song 7•15
EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
STATUS
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
GATE
STATUS
VALUE 1
VALUE 2
VALUE 3
GATE
Note
Note name
[C–1 … G9]
Key On Velocity
[1 … 127]
Key Off Velocity
[1 … 127]
Note Length
expressed as the
Sequencer resolution
(q=192) [0 … 63323]
Note
Note name
[C–1 … G9]
Key On Velocity
[1 … 127]
Key Off Velocity
[1 … 127]
Note Length
expressed as the
Sequencer resolution
(q=192) [0 … 63323]
Program
Change
Program change
message. The PC
contained in the tracks
and shown in the
Microscope has
priority over the PC
recorded in the
Performance.
[1 … 128]
Bank Select MSB
message. To select
the WK6/8 banks, use
numbers 1 … 16
[1 … 128]
Bank Select LSB
message. Not
necessary to select
the WK6/8 sounds
[1 … 128]
Program
Change
Program change
message. The PC
contained in the tracks
and shown in the
Microscope has
priority over the PC
recorded in the
Performance.
[1 … 128]
Bank Select MSB
message. To select
the WK6/8 banks, use
numbers 1 … 16
[1 … 128]
Bank Select LSB
message. Not
necessary to select
the WK6/8 sounds
[1 … 128]
Control
Change
Type of Control
Change (or MIDI
controller).
Example: CC00 =
BankSelect MSB,
CC32 = BankSelect
LSB, CC01 =
Modulation, CC07 =
Volume
[1 … 128]
Control Change
Value
Control
Change
Type of Control
Change (or MIDI
controller).
Example: CC00 =
BankSelect MSB,
CC32 = BankSelect
LSB, CC01 =
Modulation, CC07 =
Volume
[1 … 128]
Control Change
Value
Pitch
Bend
Value of LSB (Least
Significant Byte).
[0= Off, 1…127 = On]
Value of MSB
(Most Significant
Byte). Effectifve
value of bending.
[0…63 = down
64 = neutral
65…127 = up]
Pitch
Bend
Value of LSB (Least
Significant Byte).
[0= Off, 1…127 = On]
Mono
Touch
Channel
Aftertouch intensity
[0 … 127]
Mono
Touch
Channel
Aftertouch intensity
[0 … 127]
Poly
Touch
Note to which
Aftertouch is applied.
[C–1 … G9]
Poly
Touch
Note to which
Aftertouch is applied.
[C–1 … G9]
Bank Select LSB
message. Not
necessary to select
the WK6/8 sounds
[1 … 128]
Note Aftertouch
intensity.
[0 … 127]
Bank Select MSB
message. To select
the WK6/8 banks, use
numbers 1 … 16
[1 … 128]
Key Off Velocity
[1 … 127]
Key On Velocity
[1 … 127]
VALUE 3
VALUE 2
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•15
EVENTS TABLE AND RELATED PARAMETERS
GATE
○
VALUE 1
○
STATUS
○
Note
○
Note name
[C–1 … G9]
Note Length
expressed as the
Sequencer resolution
(q=192) [0 … 63323]
○
Program
Change
○
Program change
message. The PC
contained in the tracks
and shown in the
Microscope has
priority over the PC
recorded in the
Performance.
[1 … 128]
○
Control Change
Value
○
Control
Change
○
Type of Control
Change (or MIDI
controller).
Example: CC00 =
BankSelect MSB,
CC32 = BankSelect
LSB, CC01 =
Modulation, CC07 =
Volume
[1 … 128]
○
Pitch
Bend
○
Value of LSB (Least
Significant Byte).
[0= Off, 1…127 = On]
○
Value of MSB
(Most Significant
Byte). Effectifve
value of bending.
[0…63 = down
64 = neutral
65…127 = up]
○
Channel
Aftertouch intensity
[0 … 127]
○
Mono
Touch
○
Note Aftertouch
intensity.
[0 … 127]
○
Note to which
Aftertouch is applied.
[C–1 … G9]
○
Poly
Touch
Note Aftertouch
intensity.
[0 … 127]
Value of MSB
(Most Significant
Byte). Effectifve
value of bending.
[0…63 = down
64 = neutral
65…127 = up]
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•15
7•16 Reference Guide
INS: (X) (F3)
DELETE (F6)
Inserts the event specified in the “INS. TYPE”
function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator
accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Status).
Cancels the selected event.
○
Status
1V
2V
3V
Gate
Note:
C4
64
64
128
P. Ch
1
1
1
Contr.
1
0
----
P.Bend
0
64
----
M.Tch
0
----
P.Tch
C4
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
○
GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
specified locator (measure). The number can be
specified with the DIAL.
Recalls a dialog window where you can select
the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
----
INS: (X) (F3)
DELETE (F6)
Inserts the event specified in the “INS. TYPE”
function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator
accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Status).
Cancels the selected event.
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Status
1V
2V
3V
Gate
Note:
C4
64
64
128
P. Ch
1
1
1
Contr.
1
0
----
P.Bend
0
64
----
M.Tch
0
----
P.Tch
C4
0
INS TYPE... (F4)
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
INS TYPE... (F4)
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.
C4
1V
Status
64
2V
64
3V
128
Gate
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
GO TO LOC... (F8)
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
Cancels the selected event.
Inserts the event specified in the “INS. TYPE”
function at the current cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely, modify its locator
accordingly (the parameters to the left of the Status).
DELETE (F6)
INS: (X) (F3)
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
7•16 Reference Guide
Note:
○
1
○
1
○
1
○
P. Ch
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
specified locator (measure). The number can be
specified with the DIAL.
○
----
○
0
○
1
○
Contr.
---○
64
○
0
○
P.Bend
----
○
0
○
M.Tch
----
○
0
○
C4
Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.
P.Tch
Recalls a dialog window where you can select
the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
specified locator (measure). The number can be
specified with the DIAL.
----
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
Specify the locator and press ENTER to confirm.
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
INS TYPE... (F4)
Recalls a dialog window where you can select
the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
Select the event type to insert and press ENTER.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•16 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•17
Initial parameters
Master Track
Event List
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Master Track
○
○
○
○
Initial parameters
○
Event List
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the
score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the
score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct
accidentals shown in the initial key signature by
setting the Key parameter to F#.
beat
VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the
Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function.
1. Use the cursor buttons /
the events.
○
○
○
○
○
○
resolution
to scroll through
event type
(Status)
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the
Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact
that commercially available MIDI files contain
initializing events at the start of each track
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify
the selected parameter.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the
score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the
score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct
accidentals shown in the initial key signature by
setting the Key parameter to F#.
TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on
«Play View» or «Record View» pages.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the
Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact
that commercially available MIDI files contain
initializing events at the start of each track
The events that define the Song at the start point
can be modified but not deleted. To access and
modify the events press F1 («Start param»).
○
VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the
Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function.
○
○
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify
the selected parameter.
○
○
INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG
Performance settings are ignored, due to the fact
that commercially available MIDI files contain
initializing events at the start of each track
The events that define the Song at the start point
can be modified but not deleted. To access and
modify the events press F1 («Start param»).
○
○
© Note: When loading a MIDI file, normally the
INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•17
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VOLUME - Overall volume, controlled by the
Damper pedal set for continuous control and assigned the Volume function.
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program
Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each
track, the sound, volume and pan settings are
selected and controlled by the events contained
in the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.
Event List
○
Initial parameters
○
KEY - Key for the correct visualization of the
score. Alters the score according to the specified key (inserts the correct accidentals), rendering the score easier to read. For example, if the
score was captured in the key of C, you can display the score in the key of F# with all the correct
accidentals shown in the initial key signature by
setting the Key parameter to F#.
TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on
«Play View» or «Record View» pages.
○
○
○
○
○
○
Master Track
○
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the
events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect
Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes,
initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
○
bar
○
The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List
at the center of the display.
○
value
○
beat
○
Accessing the Event Edit Mode
○
resolution
○
to scroll through
○
1. Use the cursor buttons /
the events.
○
event type
(Status)
○
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
○
INITIAL PARAMETERS OF THE SONG
3. Use the DIAL or the numeric keypad to modify
the selected parameter.
value
The events that define the Song at the start point
can be modified but not deleted. To access and
modify the events press F1 («Start param»).
event type
(Status)
2. Select the parameter to modify using the cursor buttons / .
bar
Accessing the Event Edit Mode
value
resolution
to scroll through
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program
Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each
track, the sound, volume and pan settings are
selected and controlled by the events contained
in the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
TEMPO - Metronome pulse. Can also be set on
«Play View» or «Record View» pages.
beat
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.
○
The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List
at the center of the display.
bar
Accessing the Event Edit Mode
PERF - Initial Performance. Sets the initial values of some of the track parameters (Program
Change, Volume, Pan, Effects). If the same parameters are also found at the beginning of each
track, the sound, volume and pan settings are
selected and controlled by the events contained
in the tracks and not by the initial Performance.
○
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the
events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect
Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes,
initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
The structure of the page is analogous to the Microscope. The events are shown in the Event List
at the center of the display.
1. Use the cursor buttons /
the events.
○
Assignable values: one of the 8 (max) Song Performances.
The Master Track editor allows you to modify the
events recorded in the Master track which contains events pertaining to the general controls of
the Song. This Track records changes in Performance, general Volume (Pedal Volume), Effect
Changes, Effect Volume, Scale, Tempo changes,
initial Time Signature and the Score Key.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•17
7•18 Reference Guide
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event. The table shown opposite lists the events
and parameters which can be modified.
STATUS
TEMPO
General Effect Volume of the
effect type assigned to the
DSP. The Effect Sends
(amount of effect applied) for
each track is regulated in the
Microscope by means of the
Control Change messages
CC91 & CC93.
Selection of a DSP device.
Corresponds to CC18.
Volume variation via MIDI
(through the Common channel)
or by means of the Volume
Pedal. Does not record
Volume changes made with the
M.VOL slider.
[0 … 127]
VALUE
○
○
○
○
○
○
STATUS
7•18 Reference Guide
○
TEMPO
○
○
○
○
○
○
PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event. The table shown opposite lists the events
and parameters which can be modified.
START PARAMETERS (F1)
STATUS
VALUE
TEMPO
Metronomic Tempo. If the
Tempo Rec option is enabled
during the recording, all tempo
variations are recorded.
[20 … 250]
PERFORMANCE Change of Performance
[1 … 8]
VOLUME
Volume variation via MIDI
(through the Common channel)
or by means of the Volume
Pedal. Does not record
Volume changes made with the
M.VOL slider.
[0 … 127]
EFF. DEVICE
SEL.
Selection of a DSP device.
Corresponds to CC18.
EFF. TYPE
Type of effect assigned to the
selected DSP. Corresponds to
CC48. The tables of the
assignable effects are in the
Appendix.
EFF. DEVICE
VOLUME
General Effect Volume of the
effect type assigned to the
DSP. The Effect Sends
(amount of effect applied) for
each track is regulated in the
Microscope by means of the
Control Change messages
CC91 & CC93.
Enters the edit of the Song’s start parameters.
Press F1 again to return to the edit of the successive parameters.
SHOW... (F2)
PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS
Metronomic Tempo. If the
Tempo Rec option is enabled
during the recording, all tempo
variations are recorded.
[20 … 250]
○
○
The «Status» column shows the type of event.
One or more parameters can be modified for each
event. The table shown opposite lists the events
and parameters which can be modified.
○
○
General Effect Volume of the
effect type assigned to the
DSP. The Effect Sends
(amount of effect applied) for
each track is regulated in the
Microscope by means of the
Control Change messages
CC91 & CC93.
PERFORMANCE Change of Performance
[1 … 8]
○
○
EFF. DEVICE
VOLUME
VOLUME
○
○
START PARAMETERS (F1)
○
○
Enters the edit of the Song’s start parameters.
Press F1 again to return to the edit of the successive parameters.
○
○
Type of effect assigned to the
selected DSP. Corresponds to
CC48. The tables of the
assignable effects are in the
Appendix.
EFF. DEVICE
SEL.
○
○
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed by the
Event List.
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
SHOW... (F2)
○
○
EFF. TYPE
EFF. TYPE
○
○
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed by the
Event List.
Type of effect assigned to the
selected DSP. Corresponds to
CC48. The tables of the
assignable effects are in the
Appendix.
○
○
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
○
○
Selection of a DSP device.
Corresponds to CC18.
EFF. DEVICE
VOLUME
Inserts the specified event type at the cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely,
modify its locator (the parameters to the left of
the Status).
○
○
EFF. DEVICE
SEL.
INS: (X) (F3)
○
○
Volume variation via MIDI
(through the Common channel)
or by means of the Volume
Pedal. Does not record
Volume changes made with the
M.VOL slider.
[0 … 127]
Set the events that you want to mask to OFF.
○
○
VALUE
INS: (X) (F3)
Recalls a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed by the
Event List.
○
Metronomic Tempo. If the
Tempo Rec option is enabled
during the recording, all tempo
variations are recorded.
[20 … 250]
Enters the edit of the Song’s start parameters.
Press F1 again to return to the edit of the successive parameters.
SHOW... (F2)
○
PERFORMANCE Change of Performance
[1 … 8]
VOLUME
START PARAMETERS (F1)
○
Inserts the specified event type at the cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely,
modify its locator (the parameters to the left of
the Status).
PROGRAMMABLE EVENTS AND PARAMETERS
INS: (X) (F3)
Inserts the specified event type at the cursor position. To position the inserted event precisely,
modify its locator (the parameters to the left of
the Status).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•18 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•19
○
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Status
Value
Status
Value
Tempo
120
Tempo
120
Performance
1
Performance
1
Volume
64
Volume
64
Eff. Dv. Sel
0
Eff. Dv. Sel
0
Status
Value
Status
Value
Eff. Type
0
Eff. Type
0
Eff. Vol
0
Eff. Vol
0
RotaryA
Slw/Fst
RotaryA
Slw/Fst
RotaryB
Slw/Fst
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
RotaryB
Slw/Fst
Scale
1
Key Sign
C
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
DELETE (F6)
Cancels the selected event.
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
Scale
1
Key Sign
C
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
INS TYPE... (F4)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
selected measure. The number can be specified
with the DIAL.
Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
Selects the event currently playing (when the
Song is in playback mode), or the event immediately after the current Song position.
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.
1
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.
C
Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
Select the type of event and press ENTER.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
INS TYPE... (F4)
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
selected measure. The number can be specified
with the DIAL.
○
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
GO TO LOC... (F8)
○
Takes the cursor directly to the first event of the
selected measure. The number can be specified
with the DIAL.
After inserting the desired event, modify its parameters accordingly.
○
Recalls a dialog window from which you can select the type of event to insert manually with the
«Ins(x)» function.
Cancels the selected event.
○
Specify the required number and confirm with ENTER.
DELETE (F6)
○
cursor arrow to bring other events
Select the type of event and press ENTER.
○
CATCH LOCATOR (F7)
Slw/Fst
RotaryA
○
RotaryB
○
Scale
○
Key Sign
○
INS TYPE... (F4)
○
Press the
into view.
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
Slw/Fst
Eff. Vol
0
Eff. Type
Cancels the selected event.
0
Status
DELETE (F6)
Value
0
cursor arrow to bring other events
Select the type of event and press ENTER.
64
Performance
1
Tempo
Press the
into view.
Volume
cursor arrow to bring other events
Eff. Dv. Sel
120
Value
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•19
The events are inserted with the following default parameter values:
○
Status
Press the
into view.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Song 7•19
7•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score & Edit Score
Score & Edit Score
Score page - Lyrics 1 mode
(lyrics in large type)
THE SCORE TRACK
Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord
symbols on the display and/or on an external
monitor.
SCORE
Press F8 («Score controls...») to select the viewing options and the video standard.
When a Song containing a Score is in playback,
an indicator ( ) monitors the current position
of the score.
Score page - All mode
(notes, lyrics and chord symbols)
THE SCORE BUTTON
The Score track is a “ghost” track that is added
to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the
insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words
(Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords).
THE SCORE BUTTON
THE SCORE TRACK
Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord
symbols on the display and/or on an external
monitor.
The Score track is a “ghost” track that is added
to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the
insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words
(Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords).
SCORE
The Score displays a melody line and not chords.
A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes
are extracted and a melody line is generated.
The Score displays a melody line and not chords.
A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes
are extracted and a melody line is generated.
The score can be viewed on the instrument’s display, or projected onto an external monitor by
pressing SCORE. To view on an external monitor, the WK6/8 must be fitted with Generalmusic’s
optional Audio/Video card.
The score can be viewed on the instrument’s display, or projected onto an external monitor by
pressing SCORE. To view on an external monitor, the WK6/8 must be fitted with Generalmusic’s
optional Audio/Video card.
The Score is created in «Edit Song».
Press ESCAPE to exit Score.
Press F8 («Score controls...») to select the viewing options and the video standard.
When a Song containing a Score is in playback,
an indicator ( ) monitors the current position
of the score.
The Score is created in «Edit Song».
Press ESCAPE to exit Score.
Press ESCAPE to exit Score.
When a Song containing a Score is in playback,
an indicator ( ) monitors the current position
of the score.
Press F8 («Score controls...») to select the viewing options and the video standard.
The Score is created in «Edit Song».
The score can be viewed on the instrument’s display, or projected onto an external monitor by
pressing SCORE. To view on an external monitor, the WK6/8 must be fitted with Generalmusic’s
optional Audio/Video card.
The Score displays a melody line and not chords.
A track of chords is analyzed, the highest notes
are extracted and a melody line is generated.
The Score track is a “ghost” track that is added
to the tracks of a Song. This track allows the
insertion and viewing of notes (Music), words
(Lyrics) and chord symbols (Chords).
Press SCORE to view the notes, lyrics and chord
symbols on the display and/or on an external
monitor.
THE SCORE TRACK
THE SCORE BUTTON
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score page - Lyrics 1 mode
(lyrics in large type)
○
○
○
7•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score & Edit Score
○
SCORE
Score page - All mode
(notes, lyrics and chord symbols)
Score page - All mode
(notes, lyrics and chord symbols)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score page - Lyrics 1 mode
(lyrics in large type)
○
○
○
7•20 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•21
○
Score Controls
VIDEO CONTROLS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score Controls
○
○
○
○
○
F4
F5
F7
F8
Controls the vertical alignment.
Y shift
ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is
shown on the WK6/8 display.
OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts
(music, lyrics, chords).
Options: On, Off.
View mode
Options: RGB, CV.
CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this
option is recommended.
Video mode
RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals.
Options: RGB, CV.
Select the parts of the Score to display with the
Soft buttons F3 … F8.
Y shift
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only.
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE
RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals.
Options: 1…16.
CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this
option is recommended.
Video mode
Score control dialog window
(viewing options for external monitor)
Video mode
RGB: the RGB port transmits RGB and Composite Video signals.
Options: 1…16.
Score control dialog window
(viewing options for external monitor)
Options: 1…16.
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only.
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Selects a color for the lyrics and for the background. This option is valid for the external monitor only.
CV: the RGB port transmits Composite Video signals. For a correct Composite Video image, this
option is recommended.
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE
Options: RGB, CV.
Select the parts of the Score to display with the
Soft buttons F3 … F8.
Y shift
View mode
Options: On, Off.
Controls the vertical alignment.
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts
(music, lyrics, chords).
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes.
This option refreshes the display very quickly
which can be useful for guitarists and bassists.
OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef
only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef
are shown with the symbol «
» (bass 8ve).
VIDEO CONTROLS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•21
○
○
○
○
○
Score Controls
Viewing options for an external monitor.
○
In the «Score» page, press F8 to open the «Score
Control» dialog window.
Echo LCD
○
ON: the notes are displayed on a staff.
F4
OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef
only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef
are shown with the symbol «
» (bass 8ve).
Score split
F5
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes.
This option refreshes the display very quickly
which can be useful for guitarists and bassists.
ON: the notes are displayed on a staff.
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display,
with characters of various dimensions.
F6
Score split
ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is
shown on the WK6/8 display.
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display,
with characters of various dimensions.
F7
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
Controls the vertical alignment.
F8
When finished, press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Echo LCD
PARTS OF THE DISPLAYED SCORE
View mode
Score control dialog window
(viewing options for external monitor)
Viewing options for an external monitor.
Select the parts of the Score to display with the
Soft buttons F3 … F8.
Options: On, Off.
VIDEO CONTROLS
All - Notes, lyrics, chord symbols.
OFF: the monitor displays only the Score parts
(music, lyrics, chords).
F6
Score split
ON: the external monitor displays exactly what is
shown on the WK6/8 display.
ON: the notes are displayed on a staff.
F8
○
Lyric 1...Lyric4 - Lyrics only across the display,
with characters of various dimensions.
F7
○
OFF: the notes are displayed on the treble clef
only. Notes that normally occupy the bass clef
are shown with the symbol «
» (bass 8ve).
Viewing options for an external monitor.
F5
F6
○
In the «Score» page, press F8 to open the «Score
Control» dialog window.
Echo LCD
F4
○
Chords - Traditional chord symbols without notes.
This option refreshes the display very quickly
which can be useful for guitarists and bassists.
In the «Score» page, press F8 to open the «Score
Control» dialog window.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•21
7•22 Reference Guide
Chords on lyrics
○
If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show
chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Score
Chords on lyrics
If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show
chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.
Score Edit - Chord mode
(chord symbol edit)
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE
1. Press SONG and select a Song.
3. Press F5 («Edit Score») in the main menu of
«Edit Song» to open Edit Score.
If the Song does not contain a score, select
the «Get Score» command (F4) to create one
(this procedure is explained afterwards).
HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE
The «octave lower» symbol.
The displayed note or notes
are in reality one octave
lower.
The «note too high» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to
appear in the staff.
The «note too low» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too low to
appear in the staff. This
symbol rarely appears with a
standard music staff («Score
split» option in the «Score
controls” window set to ON).
Press ESCAPE to return to «Edit Song». Press
ESCAPE once again to return to the «Play View»
or «Record View» page.
2. Press ST./SONG in the EDIT section to enter «Edit Song».
SPECIAL SYMBOLS
At times, the music score will show special symbols.
The «octave lower» symbol.
The displayed note or notes
are in reality one octave
lower.
The «note too high» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to
appear in the staff.
The «note too low» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too low to
appear in the staff. This
symbol rarely appears with a
standard music staff («Score
split» option in the «Score
controls” window set to ON).
3. Press F5 («Edit Score») in the main menu of
«Edit Song» to open Edit Score.
If the Song does not contain a score, select
the «Get Score» command (F4) to create one
(this procedure is explained afterwards).
HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE
Press ESCAPE to return to «Edit Song». Press
ESCAPE once again to return to the «Play View»
or «Record View» page.
At times, the music score will show special symbols.
At times, the music score will show special symbols.
The «octave lower» symbol.
The displayed note or notes
are in reality one octave
lower.
The «note too high» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too high to
appear in the staff.
The «note too low» symbol.
The note at the position
corresponding to the displayed symbol is too low to
appear in the staff. This
symbol rarely appears with a
standard music staff («Score
split» option in the «Score
controls” window set to ON).
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE
1. Press SONG and select a Song.
2. Press ST./SONG in the EDIT section to enter «Edit Song».
SPECIAL SYMBOLS
Edit Score
Press ESCAPE to return to «Edit Song». Press
ESCAPE once again to return to the «Play View»
or «Record View» page.
HOW TO EXIT EDIT SCORE
If the Song does not contain a score, select
the «Get Score» command (F4) to create one
(this procedure is explained afterwards).
3. Press F5 («Edit Score») in the main menu of
«Edit Song» to open Edit Score.
2. Press ST./SONG in the EDIT section to enter «Edit Song».
SPECIAL SYMBOLS
1. Press SONG and select a Song.
If ON, the viewing options Lyric 1 ...Lyric 4 show
chord symbols together with lyrics on the external monitor.
HOW TO ENTER EDIT SCORE
Score Edit - Chord mode
(chord symbol edit)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•22 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
Edit Score
○
○
○
○
Chords on lyrics
○
Score Edit - Chord mode
(chord symbol edit)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•22 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•23
1. Press F4 («Get Score»):
2. Press the soft button G («Go to loc...») to go
to a specific measure:
○
○
○
○
○
○
INSERTING NOTES
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a
Song track.
6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a
pedal note, press the function button F («Extension») and play the alternative chord. The
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a
Song track.
1. Press F5 («Chords») to take the cursor to
the chord line (above the staff).
1. Press F4 («Get Score»):
1. Press F5 («Chords») to take the cursor to
the chord line (above the staff).
Score Edit - Lyrics mode
INSERTING NOTES
2. Press the soft button G («Go to loc...») to go
to a specific measure:
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The
chord symbol appears, in the following form:
CMaj, Dmin, E7th...
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a
note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the symbol insertion zone:
INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS
Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI ‘Text’
event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI
files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new
Song using the procedure explained on the next
page.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or
next note using the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a
note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the symbol insertion zone:
Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or
next note using the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to
confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to a symbol at the beginning of a
note (first 1/16th), you can insert symbols in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the symbol insertion zone:
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th
INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th
Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th
Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI ‘Text’
event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI
files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new
Song using the procedure explained on the next
page.
Insertion of the symbol at the second 1/16th
Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The
chord symbol appears, in the following form:
CMaj, Dmin, E7th...
5. Play the chord below the Split Point. The
chord symbol appears, in the following form:
CMaj, Dmin, E7th...
6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a
pedal note, press the function button F («Extension») and play the alternative chord. The
6. If you want to indicate a bass extension, or a
pedal note, press the function button F («Extension») and play the alternative chord. The
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•23
1. Press F5 («Chords») to take the cursor to
the chord line (above the staff).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
INSERTING NOTES
○
2. Press the soft button G («Go to loc...») to go
to a specific measure:
○
To create a Score, notes are withdrawn from a
Song track.
○
Score Edit - Lyrics mode
1. Press F4 («Get Score»):
Score Edit - Lyrics mode
3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to
confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Insertion of the symbol at the third 1/16th
Chord symbols correspond to the MIDI ‘Text’
event. These are loaded and saved with MIDI
files. Chord symbols can be inserted into a new
Song using the procedure explained on the next
page.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous or
next note using the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
Insertion of the symbol at the fourth 1/16th
INSERTING CHORD SYMBOLS
2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe.
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
3. Press ENTER to confirm. Wait a few seconds for the score to be generated.
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
2. User the DIAL to select the track to transcribe.
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER to
confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•23
7•24 Reference Guide
○
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th
○
○
○
○
○
7•24 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
bass extension will appear in the following form:
CMaj/D, Dmin/G...
2. Press soft button G («Go to loc...») to go to a
specific measure (bar):
Press the soft buttons D («Next event» or E
(«Previous event») to pass to another event.
7. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord.
8. You can modify a chord by transforming it,
for example, from a major to minor chord to
seventh. Press F7 («Root») repeatedly to
alternate between the bass of the chord (the
root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of
the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
The entire symbol is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
The root note is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm
or ESCAPE to cancel.
3. Move the insertion point to the previous note
or the next note with the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to syllables at the beginning of the
note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the syllable insertion zone.
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th
Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th
The chord abbreviation is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
At this point, «Next event» and «previous
event» pass from 16th to 16th instead of from
note to note.
5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see
the «Data Entry» paragraph on page 1.4 of
Chapter 1). Write the required syllable using
the keys of the keyboard.
2. Press soft button G («Go to loc...») to go to a
specific measure (bar):
○
○
bass extension will appear in the following
form: CMaj/D, Dmin/G...
○
○
Press the soft buttons D («Next event» or E
(«Previous event») to pass to another event.
○
○
7. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord.
○
○
Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm
or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
○
Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th
3. Move the insertion point to the previous note
or the next note with the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
○
○
8. You can modify a chord by transforming it,
for example, from a major to minor chord to
seventh. Press F7 («Root») repeatedly to
alternate between the bass of the chord (the
root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of
the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
○
○
Insertion of the syllable at the second 1/16th
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to syllables at the beginning of the
note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the syllable insertion zone.
○
○
Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th
The entire symbol is selected again.
The entire symbol is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
Insertion of the syllable at the third 1/16th
○
○
The root note is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
Insertion of the syllable at the fourth 1/16th
○
○
The chord abbreviation is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
1. Press F6 («Lyrics») to take the cursor to the
lyrics line (below the staff).
○
The entire symbol is selected again.
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This
type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files.
Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the
following manner:
○
Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to
modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).
INSERTING LYRICS
○
4. Each note is ideally subdivided into 1/16ths.
In addition to syllables at the beginning of the
note (first 1/16th), you can insert syllables in
one of the 1/16ths which follow. Press F8 to
open the syllable insertion zone.
The chord abbreviation is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to
modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).
○
3. Move the insertion point to the previous note
or the next note with the soft buttons D («Next
event») and E («Previous event»).
The root note is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
The entire symbol is selected again.
○
INSERTING LYRICS
The entire symbol is selected.
Press F7 («Root»).
○
Specify the measure with the DIAL then press ENTER confirm
or ESCAPE to cancel.
At this point, «Next event» and «previous
event» pass from 16th to 16th instead of from
note to note.
8. You can modify a chord by transforming it,
for example, from a major to minor chord to
seventh. Press F7 («Root») repeatedly to
alternate between the bass of the chord (the
root: A, B, C, etc.) and the abbreviation of
the chord (min, 7th, dim, aug...).
○
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This
type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files.
Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the
following manner:
5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see
the «Data Entry» paragraph on page 1.4 of
Chapter 1). Write the required syllable using
the keys of the keyboard.
Press the soft buttons D («Next event» or E
(«Previous event») to pass to another event.
7. You can modify the selected symbol by playing a different chord.
○
2. Press soft button G («Go to loc...») to go to a
specific measure (bar):
1. Press F6 («Lyrics») to take the cursor to the
lyrics line (below the staff).
bass extension will appear in the following form:
CMaj/D, Dmin/G...
Rotate the DIAL or play another chord to
modify the selected element (the root or abbreviation).
INSERTING LYRICS
Lyrics corresponds to the MIDI Lyrics event. This
type of event is loaded and saved with MIDI files.
Lyrics can be inserted into a new Song in the
following manner:
1. Press F6 («Lyrics») to take the cursor to the
lyrics line (below the staff).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•24 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The number shown on the left of the insertion zone indicates the current 1/16th. To
move the insertion point to one of the other
1/16ths, use the soft buttons H («<<1/16»)
and F8 («>>1/16»).
To escape and return to the note, press the
soft button E («Previous event»). To escape
and pass to the next note press the soft button D («Next event»).
At this point, «Next event» and «previous
event» pass from 16th to 16th instead of from
note to note.
5. In this operating mode, the keyboard transforms into a source of alphanumeric data (see
the «Data Entry» paragraph on page 1.4 of
Chapter 1). Write the required syllable using
the keys of the keyboard.
Score/Edit Score 7•25
○
○
6. Press soft button F («End phrase») to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the “end phrase” symbol ‘I’.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Do not write lines consisting of more than 20
characters. This is to avoid the incorrect
syllabisation of words when you are viewing
lyrics in large type. For example, the word
“Ballgame” may syllabize to “Bal-lgame”, or
“Ballg-ame” or other, instead of “Ball-game”.
The «Edit Score» page
CHORDS (F5)
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the
staff).
PREV. EVENT (E)
«Previous event». Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause).
To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2
(«INS/OVER»); the cursor will take the form
of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the
DIAL, then insert the new character. Press
D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
«Previous event». Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause).
Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the
dialog window:
PREV. EVENT (E)
GO TO LOC... (G)
Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause).
NEXT EVENT (D)
Specify the measure with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).
LYRICS (F6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•25
The «Edit Score» page
○
CHORDS (F5)
○
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the
staff).
○
PREV. EVENT (E)
«Previous event». Takes the cursor to the previous event (note or pause).
GO TO LOC... (G)
Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the
dialog window:
Specify the measure with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
>> 1/16 (F8)
Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this
button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For
example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/
16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..
○
Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause).
Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this
button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For
example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/
16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..
6. Press soft button F («End phrase») to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the “end phrase” symbol ‘I’.
>> 1/16 (F8)
NEXT EVENT (D)
Do not write lines consisting of more than 20
characters. This is to avoid the incorrect
syllabisation of words when you are viewing
lyrics in large type. For example, the word
“Ballgame” may syllabize to “Bal-lgame”, or
“Ballg-ame” or other, instead of “Ball-game”.
Takes the cursor to the next event (note or pause).
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).
7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially.
NEXT EVENT (D)
To replace one character with another, remain
in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you
are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a
vertical line), press note D#2 («INS/OVER»)
to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor
with the DIAL, then insert the new character.
LYRICS (F6)
To replace one character with another, remain
in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you
are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a
vertical line), press note D#2 («INS/OVER»)
to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor
with the DIAL, then insert the new character.
Takes the cursor to the Lyrics line (below the staff).
7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially.
To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2
(«INS/OVER»); the cursor will take the form
of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the
DIAL, then insert the new character. Press
D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
LYRICS (F6)
GO TO LOC... (G)
To insert a character without cancelling another, pass to Insert mode. Press note D#2
(«INS/OVER»); the cursor will take the form
of a vertical line. Move the cursor with the
DIAL, then insert the new character. Press
D#2 to return to Overwrite mode.
Takes the cursor to the Chords line (above the
staff).
○
Takes the cursor to the beginning of the specified measure. Press soft button G to open the
dialog window:
To replace one character with another, remain
in Overwrite mode (rectangular cursor). If you
are in Insert mode (cursor in the form of a
vertical line), press note D#2 («INS/OVER»)
to pass to Overwrite mode. Move the cursor
with the DIAL, then insert the new character.
CHORDS (F5)
○
Specify the measure with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
7. You can modify a selected syllable by rewriting it entirely or partially.
The «Edit Score» page
○
>> 1/16 (F8)
Do not write lines consisting of more than 20
characters. This is to avoid the incorrect
syllabisation of words when you are viewing
lyrics in large type. For example, the word
“Ballgame” may syllabize to “Bal-lgame”, or
“Ballg-ame” or other, instead of “Ball-game”.
○
Each note greater than a sixteenth (demisemiquaver) is ideally subdivided into sixteenths; this
button takes the cursor to the next sixteenth. For
example, a quaver (8th) is divided into two 1/
16ths, a crotchet (quarter) into four 1/16ths, etc..
6. Press soft button F («End phrase») to terminate the verse. The end of the verse is indicated by the “end phrase” symbol ‘I’.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Score/Edit Score 7•25
7•26 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or
play a different chord.
○
This command allows you to modify the root note
of a chord and its related abbreviation separately.
Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place
the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire
chord symbol.
You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,
or by playing a different chord.
This command inserts an ‘End phrase’ symbol
(‘I’) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes
Lyrics 1 … Lyrics 4, when the verses that end
with the “End phrase” symbol are reached, the
next verse starts on a new line.
Play the chords below the Split Point.
You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or
play a different chord.
The edit takes place in an active zone:
To escape and return to the normal edit of the
note, press soft button E (“Previous event»). To
escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D («Next event»).
<< 1/16 (H)
See above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixteenth
GET SCORE... (F4)
Creates a score from the selected track from
which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open
the dialog window:
Specify the track with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Creates a score from the selected track from
which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open
the dialog window:
○
ROOT (F7)
We recommend that you write lines using not
more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying incorrectly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used.
GET SCORE... (F4)
○
If the track contains chords, the analyser withdraws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate
notes not related to the melody. A score is obtained with excellent results from a track containing a melody line only.
See above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixteenth
○
Play the chords below the Split Point.
This symbol can be cancelled as any other character by selecting the syllable with D («Next
event») or E («Previous event»). Select the symbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note
F2 (DELETE).
<< 1/16 (H)
○
EXTENSION (F)
To escape and return to the normal edit of the
note, press soft button E (“Previous event»). To
escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D («Next event»).
○
This command allows you to add an alternative
bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and
press soft button F, then play a complete chord
which contains the alternative bass root required
to insert.
The edit takes place in an active zone:
END PHRASE (F)
This command inserts an ‘End phrase’ symbol
(‘I’) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes
Lyrics 1 … Lyrics 4, when the verses that end
with the “End phrase” symbol are reached, the
next verse starts on a new line.
Play the chords below the Split Point.
You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,
or by playing a different chord.
We recommend that you write lines using not
more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying incorrectly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used.
This command allows you to modify the root note
of a chord and its related abbreviation separately.
Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place
the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire
chord symbol.
See above. Takes the cursor to the previous sixteenth
ROOT (F7)
To escape and return to the normal edit of the
note, press soft button E (“Previous event»). To
escape and pass to the next note, press soft button D («Next event»).
This symbol can be cancelled as any other character by selecting the syllable with D («Next
event») or E («Previous event»). Select the symbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note
F2 (DELETE).
○
○
You can modify the extension with the DIAL, or
play a different chord.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•26 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The edit takes place in an active zone:
Play the chords below the Split Point.
○
<< 1/16 (H)
This command allows you to add an alternative
bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and
press soft button F, then play a complete chord
which contains the alternative bass root required
to insert.
○
GET SCORE... (F4)
EXTENSION (F)
○
Creates a score from the selected track from
which the melody is transcribed. Press F4 to open
the dialog window:
If the track contains chords, the analyser withdraws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate
notes not related to the melody. A score is obtained with excellent results from a track containing a melody line only.
ROOT (F7)
This command allows you to modify the root note
of a chord and its related abbreviation separately.
Select a chord and press F7 repeatedly to place
the chord parts in edit, first the root, then the abbreviation, then to return to the edit of the entire
chord symbol.
You can modify the selected part with the DIAL,
or by playing a different chord.
Play the chords below the Split Point.
END PHRASE (F)
END PHRASE (F)
Specify the track with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
Play the chords below the Split Point.
Specify the track with the DIAL.
Press ENTER to confirm or ESCAPE to cancel.
If the track contains chords, the analyser withdraws the highest notes, attempting to eliminate
notes not related to the melody. A score is obtained with excellent results from a track containing a melody line only.
EXTENSION (F)
This command allows you to add an alternative
bass extension to the chord. Select a chord and
press soft button F, then play a complete chord
which contains the alternative bass root required
to insert.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7•26 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
This command inserts an ‘End phrase’ symbol
(‘I’) at the end of a verse. In the viewing modes
Lyrics 1 … Lyrics 4, when the verses that end
with the “End phrase” symbol are reached, the
next verse starts on a new line.
We recommend that you write lines using not
more than 20 characters, to avoid displaying incorrectly syllabized words when the Lyrics 1 option (large types) is used.
This symbol can be cancelled as any other character by selecting the syllable with D («Next
event») or E («Previous event»). Select the symbol with the DIAL and cancel the symbol with note
F2 (DELETE).
User Styles 8•1
○
• 8 User Style recording
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 8 User Style recording
End Major
End Major
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the
STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, or free locations that allow you
to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to
32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each
User Group.
End Minor
End Major
Intro 7th
Intro Minor
Intro Minor Intro Minor
Intro Major
Intro Major Intro Major
A new Style can be created by recording every
part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an existing Style. This second option is discussed in the
Edit Style chapter.
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill Major
Fill Major
Basic 7th
Basic 7th
Fill 7th
Fill Minor
Fill Major
Basic 7th
End Minor
End Major
Intro 7th
Intro Minor
Intro Major
Fill 7th
Fill Minor
Fill Major
Basic 7th
Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major
Var1
Var2
Var3
Var4
Styles provide automatic accompaniments based
on the system of chords. In particular, the Major,
Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns.
Styles provide automatic accompaniments based
on the system of chords. In particular, the Major,
Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns.
A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long.
Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum,
Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE
Var4
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major
Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor
Fill Major
Fill Major
Fill Major
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Intro Major Intro Major
Intro Major
Intro Major
Intro Minor Intro Minor
Intro Minor
Intro Minor
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
End Major
End Major
End Major
End Major
End Minor
End Minor
End Minor
End Minor
End 7th
End 7th
End 7th
End 7th
WHAT IS A RIFF?
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a “phrase” or
“lick”, but it is important to understand that the
Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when
you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences.
Riffs of a Style
○
○
○
○
○
Var1
Var2
Var3
Var4
Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major Basic Major
Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor Basic Minor
Basic 7th
Basic 7th
Basic 7th
Basic 7th
Fill Major
Fill Major
Fill Major
Fill Major
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill Minor
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Intro Major Intro Major
Intro Major
Intro Major
Intro Minor Intro Minor
Intro Minor
Intro Minor
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
Intro 7th
End Major
End Major
End Major
End Major
End Minor
End Minor
End Minor
End Minor
End 7th
End 7th
End 7th
End 7th
• 8 User Style recording
Fill Major
The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make
up a Style.
Basic 7th
The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style
which repeats continually until stopped, or until it
is “broken” by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
Basic 7th
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by
pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING
buttons.
Basic 7th
A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long.
Basic 7th
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and
7th chords and each Variation breaks down into
several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four elements form the basis of a
structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or
“Riffs”, for each Style.
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the
STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, or free locations that allow you
to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to
32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each
User Group.
Var3
A new Style can be created by recording every
part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an existing Style. This second option is discussed in the
Edit Style chapter.
Var2
Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum,
Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
Var1
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into
memory and user-programmed Styles can be
saved to disk, using the methods described in
the Disk chapter 3 of the Reference Guide.
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a “phrase” or
“lick”, but it is important to understand that the
Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when
you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences.
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by
pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING
buttons.
Styles provide automatic accompaniments based
on the system of chords. In particular, the Major,
Minor and Seventh chords trigger three completely different arrangement patterns.
THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE
WHAT IS A RIFF?
The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style
which repeats continually until stopped, or until it
is “broken” by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and
7th chords and each Variation breaks down into
several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four elements form the basis of a
structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or
“Riffs”, for each Style.
Fill 7th
Fill 7th
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into
memory and user-programmed Styles can be
saved to disk, using the methods described in
the Disk chapter 3 of the Reference Guide.
THE BASIC STRUCTURE OF A STYLE
There are 4 Variations of the Major, minor and
7th chords and each Variation breaks down into
several different elements: basic, Intro, Fill, Ending. These four elements form the basis of a
structure consisting of 48 short sequences, or
“Riffs”, for each Style.
The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make
up a Style.
WHAT IS A RIFF?
End Minor
Each Riff consists of up to 8 Style tracks: Drum,
Bass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6.
End Minor
A Riff can vary in length from one to sixteen measures long.
End 7th
The Fills, Intros and Endings are triggered by
pressing the relative FILL, INTRO, or ENDING
buttons.
End 7th
The basic Riff is the principal pattern of the Style
which repeats continually until stopped, or until it
is “broken” by a Fill, Intro or Ending pattern.
End 7th
The table shown below lists all the Riffs that make
up a Style.
End 7th
Disk based User Styles can be loaded into
memory and user-programmed Styles can be
saved to disk, using the methods described in
the Disk chapter 3 of the Reference Guide.
○
A Riff is a musical motif capable of repetition (looping). It can also be expressed as a “phrase” or
“lick”, but it is important to understand that the
Riff must be capable of repetition. In fact, when
you play with Styles, you will note that the patterns are short repeating sequences.
A new Style can be created by recording every
part yourself, or by modifying a copy of an existing Style. This second option is discussed in the
Edit Style chapter.
○
Riffs of a Style
The four USER buttons (1, 2, 3 and 4) of the
STYLE/SONG GROUPS section recall User-programmable Styles, or free locations that allow you
to record your own auto accompaniments. Up to
32 User Styles can reside in memory, 8 in each
User Group.
○
Riffs of a Style
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•1
8•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording
Recording
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature.
PREPARATION
1. Select a USER Style. Select a free location
(User) to create a new Style.
environment
name
Style name
2. You are prompted to create a new style. Press
F1 («Ok»).
5. Once the dialog window closes, press F1
(«Mode») to select the recording mode. The
«Record Mode» dialog window opens where
you can select the required mode.
3. The Style «Record View» page activates and
the «Select Riff» dialog window is also shown:
4. Select the Variation, element and chord with
the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. The LED on the RECORD button lights
up and the «Record View» page is shown in
negative highlight.
tracks
Tempo
1. Select a USER Style. Select a free location
(User) to create a new Style.
Select the record mode and press ENTER to confirm.
Style Mode - Sound View display
3. The Style «Record View» page activates and
the «Select Riff» dialog window is also shown:
6. Select and program the basic Style parameters:
2. You are prompted to create a new style. Press
F1 («Ok»).
locator
(measure
counter)
PREPARATION
menu
tracks
Style Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
4. Select the Variation, element and chord with
the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. The LED on the RECORD button lights
up and the «Record View» page is shown in
negative highlight.
Style Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
4. Select the Variation, element and chord with
the cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm. The LED on the RECORD button lights
up and the «Record View» page is shown in
negative highlight.
Style Mode - Record View display
(record/play parameters display)
tracks
menu
5. Once the dialog window closes, press F1
(«Mode») to select the recording mode. The
«Record Mode» dialog window opens where
you can select the required mode.
3. The Style «Record View» page activates and
the «Select Riff» dialog window is also shown:
5. Once the dialog window closes, press F1
(«Mode») to select the recording mode. The
«Record Mode» dialog window opens where
you can select the required mode.
Select the record mode and press ENTER to confirm.
2. You are prompted to create a new style. Press
F1 («Ok»).
Select the record mode and press ENTER to confirm.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Recording
○
Style Mode - Sound View display
6. Select and program the basic Style parameters:
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature.
PREPARATION
○
environment
name
locator
(measure
counter)
Tempo
• «Time Signature» to modify
the time signature.
1. Select a USER Style. Select a free location
(User) to create a new Style.
Style name
6. Select and program the basic Style parameters:
environment
name
Style name
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Style Mode - Sound View display
Tempo
locator
(measure
counter)
menu
User Styles 8•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
RECORDING
○
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A
one-measure countdown with start.
• «Key note» to
specify the reference key. When a chord is played, WK6/8
transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, indicate the key in which the riffs are programmed.
7. Set both
parts of
the «Scale conversion» parameter. The
Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two
chords starting from the complementary
chord. For example, you can program the
Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter engages the task of reconstructing the Basic
Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale
Converter tables at the end of this chapter.
8. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the pre-quantization setting (auto-correction of the timing) during the
recording.
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and
set them to Record mode. Only Tracks showing the record icon will capture events:
2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording
proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of
the riff is reached, the recording starts again
from the beginning.
3. Stop the recording with START/STOP.
4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points
1 - 3.
Note: If the Overdubb recording mode is selected, new notes will be added to the tracks
each time the recording repeats. If Replace
is selected, new notes will cancel those already existing on the next cycle. In Replace
mode, the recording returns to Overdubb
mode at the end of the first cycle.
5. Select the tracks shown in «record» and set
them to «seq-play».
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other
tracks.
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED on the RECORD button goes off.
UNDO
10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open
the «Sound View» page with the F5 Soft button
After assigning the sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERF. Return to the «Rec
View» page with Soft button F6.
3. Stop the recording with START/STOP.
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording
proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of
the riff is reached, the recording starts again
from the beginning.
Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to
return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to retain the last task.
○
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO.
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO.
• «Key note» to
specify the reference key. When a chord is played, WK6/8
transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, indicate the key in which the riffs are programmed.
Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to
return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to retain the last task.
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A
one-measure countdown with start.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•3
RECORDING
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO.
○
4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points
1 - 3.
Note: If the Overdubb recording mode is selected, new notes will be added to the tracks
each time the recording repeats. If Replace
is selected, new notes will cancel those already existing on the next cycle. In Replace
mode, the recording returns to Overdubb
mode at the end of the first cycle.
After assigning the sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERF. Return to the «Rec
View» page with Soft button F6.
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO.
○
7. Set both
parts of
the «Scale conversion» parameter. The
Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two
chords starting from the complementary
chord. For example, you can program the
Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter engages the task of reconstructing the Basic
Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale
Converter tables at the end of this chapter.
10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open
the «Sound View» page with the F5 Soft button
○
5. Select the tracks shown in «record» and set
them to «seq-play».
UNDO
○
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other
tracks.
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED on the RECORD button goes off.
○
8. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the pre-quantization setting (auto-correction of the timing) during the
recording.
6. If necessary, repeat the procedure for other
tracks.
○
7. Press RECORD to escape «Record» mode.
The LED on the RECORD button goes off.
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and
set them to Record mode. Only Tracks showing the record icon will capture events:
5. Select the tracks shown in «record» and set
them to «seq-play».
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
○
9. Select the tracks that you want to record and
set them to Record mode. Only Tracks showing the record icon will capture events:
8. Select
the
«Quantize» parameter to modify the pre-quantization setting (auto-correction of the timing) during the
recording.
○
UNDO
4. To add notes to the same tracks, repeat points
1 - 3.
Note: If the Overdubb recording mode is selected, new notes will be added to the tracks
each time the recording repeats. If Replace
is selected, new notes will cancel those already existing on the next cycle. In Replace
mode, the recording returns to Overdubb
mode at the end of the first cycle.
○
If, during the recording phase, you want to cancel the last performed recording task, use UNDO.
7. Set both
parts of
the «Scale conversion» parameter. The
Scale Converter reconstructs the riffs of two
chords starting from the complementary
chord. For example, you can program the
Basic Major riff and the Scale Converter engages the task of reconstructing the Basic
Minor and Basic 7th. Refer to the Scale
Converter tables at the end of this chapter.
3. Stop the recording with START/STOP.
○
10. If you want to assign different Sounds, open
the «Sound View» page with the F5 Soft button
2. Start playing after the lead-in. The recording
proceeds in a cyclic manner: once the end of
the riff is reached, the recording starts again
from the beginning.
○
For example, after adding new events to an existing drum pattern, you might want to return to
the original pattern and just cancel the new
events. A quick and easy way is to use UNDO.
• «Key note» to
specify the reference key. When a chord is played, WK6/8
transposes the riffs. You must, therefore, indicate the key in which the riffs are programmed.
○
Just press UNDO and confirm with ENTER to
return to the previous status, or ESCAPE to retain the last task.
1. Press START/STOP to start the recording. A
one-measure countdown with start.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
○
After assigning the sounds, save the Performance with STORE PERF. Return to the «Rec
View» page with Soft button F6.
RECORDING
11. Activate the metronome with F8 («Metronome»).
• «Tempo» to
modify the playing
speed.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•3
8•4 Reference Guide
RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY
If you have loaded disk-based User Styles or recorded User Styles and used up all the memory
dedicated to the storage of Styles, a quick and
easy way of clearing User Style memory and
making room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
The «Record View» page
If you have loaded disk-based User Styles or recorded User Styles and used up all the memory
dedicated to the storage of Styles, a quick and
easy way of clearing User Style memory and
making room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation.
MODE... (F1)
Recalls the «Sound View» page where you can
see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance.
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present on the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Edit Controllers/Pads»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At
this point, the recording proceeds in “replace”
mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the recording.
SOUND VIEW (F5)
Naturally, you must remember to save the User
Styles that you don’t want to lose to disk before
proceeding with the restore procedure.
Naturally, you must remember to save the User
Styles that you don’t want to lose to disk before
proceeding with the restore procedure.
Select the Variation, section and chord with the
cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
2. Press F5 («Restore Styles») to cancel all the
User Styles (and relative User Style-Performances) in RAM.
Opens a dialog window where you can select a
riff to record.
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
○
REC RIFF... (F2)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the User Styles are cancelled
from memory.
With ESCAPE, the User Styles are retained.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Select the Variation, section and chord with the
cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
SOUND VIEW (F5)
SOUND VIEW (F5)
○
○
○
○
○
○
The «Record View» page
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY
MODE... (F1)
○
Opens a dialog window where you can select a
riff to record.
Select the Variation, section and chord with the
cursor buttons and press ENTER to confirm.
Recalls the «Sound View» page where you can
see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance.
○
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present on the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Edit Controllers/Pads»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At
this point, the recording proceeds in “replace”
mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the recording.
REC RIFF... (F2)
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
Opens a dialog window where you can select a
riff to record.
MODE... (F1)
○
©
REC RIFF... (F2)
Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
○
○
If you have loaded disk-based User Styles or recorded User Styles and used up all the memory
dedicated to the storage of Styles, a quick and
easy way of clearing User Style memory and
making room for other Styles is to use the Restore Styles operation.
○
○
Naturally, you must remember to save the User
Styles that you don’t want to lose to disk before
proceeding with the restore procedure.
○
○
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
○
○
The «Record View» page
2. Press F5 («Restore Styles») to cancel all the
User Styles (and relative User Style-Performances) in RAM.
○
○
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
○
○
Opens the «Record Mode» dialog window where
you can select various recording options.
Replace - The new notes substitute “old”
notes already present in the tracks being recorded.
Overdubb - New notes are merged with
those already present on the tracks being recorded.
Punch In/Out - A means of inserting a correction without repeating a recording. Punch
recording is activated by pressing an appropriately programmed pedal (in «Edit Controllers/Pads»).
Activate the recording with PLAY. When the
song reaches the point at which the correction must be inserted, press the pedal. At
this point, the recording proceeds in “replace”
mode. When the correction is complete, release the pedal to stop the recording.
○
©
○
You are prompted with a request to reconfirm your choice.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
With ENTER, the User Styles are cancelled
from memory.
With ESCAPE, the User Styles are retained.
○
2. Press F5 («Restore Styles») to cancel all the
User Styles (and relative User Style-Performances) in RAM.
With ENTER, the User Styles are cancelled
from memory.
With ESCAPE, the User Styles are retained.
3. Press ENTER to confirm, or ESCAPE to cancel.
○
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
© Hint: To cancel the entire contents of RAM in a
single operation, use the «Restore All» command.
1. Press GENERAL in the EDIT section to gain
access to the «Edit General» environment.
RESTORING THE USER STYLES MEMORY
Recalls the «Sound View» page where you can
see and change the sounds assigned to the Performance.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•5
○
○
○
○
SCALE CONVERSION
○
Recalls the «Record View» page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.
ERASE... (F7)
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Riff - Cancels the selected riff.
Variation - Cancels the selected variation.
Style - Cancels the entire Style.
METRONOME (F8)
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
TIME SIGNATURE
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be
modified only before starting a recording. If the
Style contains recorded events, this parameter
cannot be modified.
MEASURES
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).
TEMPO
The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for
the entire Style.
KEY NOTE
Reference key. Indicates the key in which the
original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the
same manner as recorded. If other chords are
played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.
SCALE CONVERSION
○
○
If you program a Style accompaniment based on
the Major scale, the WK6/8 arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style
recording times by, for example, recording only
the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when
you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th
chord will be automatically adjusted for the
change. However, in harmonic terms, this type
of ‘over-simplification’ creates errors when using
the more complex chord structures. To overcome
this problem, the WK6/8 Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems,
based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical.
You can program the Major chord only and set
the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish
to program also the respective riffs, the relative
Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter
consists of two variable parts, corresponding to
the two complementary chords with respect to the
one being recorded.
If the “Off” setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The
tables at the end of this chapter show how the
Scale Converter operates, both in the off status,
as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several
different solutions for each chord are provided
for.
The tables on pages 7 and 8 refer to chord and
bass patterns played in the key of C and shows
which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C
shows a conversion of –2, the note is converted
2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are
shown blank.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
REC VIEW (F6)
○
○
Recalls the «Record View» page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.
○
○
ERASE... (F7)
Reference key. Indicates the key in which the
original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the
same manner as recorded. If other chords are
played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.
○
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
KEY NOTE
The tables on pages 7 and 8 refer to chord and
bass patterns played in the key of C and shows
which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C
shows a conversion of –2, the note is converted
2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are
shown blank.
○
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Riff - Cancels the selected riff.
Variation - Cancels the selected variation.
Style - Cancels the entire Style.
The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for
the entire Style.
○
METRONOME (F8)
TEMPO
If the “Off” setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The
tables at the end of this chapter show how the
Scale Converter operates, both in the off status,
as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several
different solutions for each chord are provided
for.
○
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).
○
If you program a Style accompaniment based on
the Major scale, the WK6/8 arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style
recording times by, for example, recording only
the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when
you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th
chord will be automatically adjusted for the
change. However, in harmonic terms, this type
of ‘over-simplification’ creates errors when using
the more complex chord structures. To overcome
this problem, the WK6/8 Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems,
based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical.
MEASURES
○
TIME SIGNATURE
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be
modified only before starting a recording. If the
Style contains recorded events, this parameter
cannot be modified.
You can program the Major chord only and set
the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish
to program also the respective riffs, the relative
Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter
consists of two variable parts, corresponding to
the two complementary chords with respect to the
one being recorded.
○
Valid for the entire Style. This parameter can be
modified only before starting a recording. If the
Style contains recorded events, this parameter
cannot be modified.
TIME SIGNATURE
○
You can program the Major chord only and set
the scale converter for the other two chords (minor and/or 7th). If, on a future occasion, you wish
to program also the respective riffs, the relative
Scale conversion will be ignored. The parameter
consists of two variable parts, corresponding to
the two complementary chords with respect to the
one being recorded.
Activates/deactivates the metronome.
REC VIEW (F6)
MEASURES
METRONOME (F8)
○
Determines the length of a riff expressed in measures (max 16).
Track - Cancels the selected track.
Riff - Cancels the selected riff.
Variation - Cancels the selected variation.
Style - Cancels the entire Style.
○
If the “Off” setting is selected, the arranger carries out the simplified conversion referred to. The
tables at the end of this chapter show how the
Scale Converter operates, both in the off status,
as well as for the Minor and 7th chords. Several
different solutions for each chord are provided
for.
Cancellation of a track, riff, variation or Style.
○
The tables on pages 7 and 8 refer to chord and
bass patterns played in the key of C and shows
which notes are converted. The changes are expressed in semitones, therefore, if the note C
shows a conversion of –2, the note is converted
2 semitones down (Bb). Notes not converted are
shown blank.
ERASE... (F7)
○
TEMPO
If you program a Style accompaniment based on
the Major scale, the WK6/8 arranger will automatically convert a minor or 7th chord accordingly. This allows you to limit your User Style
recording times by, for example, recording only
the Major riff of Variation 1, in order that when
you play with the recorded style, a minor or 7th
chord will be automatically adjusted for the
change. However, in harmonic terms, this type
of ‘over-simplification’ creates errors when using
the more complex chord structures. To overcome
this problem, the WK6/8 Scale Converter provides a selection of chord inversion systems,
based on algorithms in order to render the conversion more musical.
○
The playing speed (metronomic Tempo). Valid for
the entire Style.
Recalls the «Record View» page where it is possible to control the record/play parameters.
○
KEY NOTE
SCALE CONVERSION
Reference key. Indicates the key in which the
original riff is recorded. When you play the indicated chord, the riff will play back in exactly the
same manner as recorded. If other chords are
played, the riff will be transposed accordingly.
REC VIEW (F6)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•5
8•6 Reference Guide
QUANTIZE
FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)
An auto-corrector of timing during the recording
phase. The selection values are normal, triplets
or swing.
The amount of memory remaining to record the
riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30
kilobytes).
○
Value
Quantization
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
1/24
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a
dialog window may appear showing the message
«Memory full!» indicating that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted.
QUANTIZE
FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)
An auto-corrector of timing during the recording
phase. The selection values are normal, triplets
or swing.
The amount of memory remaining to record the
riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30
kilobytes).
If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a
dialog window may appear showing the message
«Memory full!» indicating that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted.
Value
Quantization
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
x triplet
1/24
x triplet
1/32
r
1/32
r
1/48
r triplet
1/48
r triplet
1/64
(1/64)
1/64
(1/64)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
free
no quantization
1/8 B...F*
q. e (swing)
1/8 B...F*
q. e (swing)
1/16 B...F*
e. x (swing)
1/16 B...F*
e. x (swing)
free
no quantization
free
no quantization
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
no quantization
free
(1/64 triplet)
1/96
(1/64)
1/64
r triplet
1/48
r
1/32
x triplet
1/24
x
1/16
e triplet
1/12
e
1/8
q
1/4
Quantization
Value
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
If the RAM contains a large amount of data, a
dialog window may appear showing the message
«Memory full!» indicating that the recording cannot proceed further. The recording is instantly interrupted.
The amount of memory remaining to record the
riff. Each riff can occupy up to 30.000 bytes (30
kilobytes).
An auto-corrector of timing during the recording
phase. The selection values are normal, triplets
or swing.
FREE MEMORY (CANNOT BE MODIFIED)
QUANTIZE
○
q. e (swing)
○
1/8 B...F*
○
e. x (swing)
○
1/16 B...F*
○
no quantization
○
free
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
You can increase the amount of space in RAM
by deactivating the Undo function.
* B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•7
SCALE CONVERSION TABLES
○
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
G#
G
bass
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
A
B
+1
–1
accomp.
+1
–1
bass
C
F#
D
E
G#
F
A#
G
–2
A
B
+1
–1
+1
–1
A#
C
accomp.
–1
+1
–1
accomp.
bass
–1
+1
–1
bass
D
E
G#
F
A#
G
A
B
–1
+1
–1
+1
–1
–1
7th 2 bass
B
F#
+1
A
D#
–2
G
C#
7th 3 accomp.
G#
F
D#
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C minor riff
F#
E
○
+1
D
○
C#
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C minor riff
C
○
7th 3 bass
F
D#
SCALE CONVERSION TABLES
A#
–2
C#
○
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
F#
E
○
–2
accomp.
D
○
7th 4 accomp.
C
D#
○
7th 4 bass
C#
○
–1
–1
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
F#
G#
A#
–1
7th 2 accomp.
–1
7th 2 bass
–2
–1
+1
–1
+1
A
E
C
D
C#
F
D#
G
F#
G#
–1
–2
+1
accomp.
–1
B
7th 4 accomp.
+1
7th 3 bass
–2
–1
+1
A#
7th 4 bass
B
bass
7th 3 accomp.
7th 4 bass
A
–1
+1
–2
G
A#
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
–2
F
D#
–2
7th 3 bass
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C minor riff
bass
accomp.
–2
C
D
E
C#
D#
F
G
F#
–1
+1
–1
+1
A
G#
B
A#
Scale Converter in OFF status: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•7
○
SCALE CONVERSION TABLES
7th 4 accomp.
–2
E
7th 1 bass
7th 2 bass
7th 3 accomp.
D
G#
C#
B
7th 1 accomp.
A
–2
7th 1 bass
7th 2 accomp.
C
G
B
F#
F
A
D#
E
G
C#
D
F
A#
C
E
G#
–2
F#
7th 1 accomp.
7th 1 accomp.
D
7th 1 bass
C
D#
–2
C#
7th 2 accomp.
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C 7th riff
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
User Styles 8•7
8•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C minor riff
C#
D#
C
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C minor riff
F#
D
E
F
G#
G
A#
A
C#
B
D#
C
F#
D
E
F
G#
G
A#
A
B
min 1 accomp.
–1
min 1 accomp.
–1
min 1 bass
–1
min 1 bass
–1
min 2 accomp.
–1
–1
min 2 accomp.
–1
–1
min 2 bass
–1
–1
min 2 bass
–1
–1
min 3 accomp.
–1
+1
min 3 accomp.
–1
+1
min 3 bass
–1
+1
min 3 bass
–1
+1
min 4 accomp.
–1
–1
min 4 accomp.
–1
–1
min 4 bass
–1
–1
min 4 bass
–1
–1
min 5 accomp.
–1
–1
–1
min 5 accomp.
–1
–1
–1
min 5 bass
–1
–1
–1
min 5 bass
–1
–1
–1
min 6 accomp.
–1
–1
+1
min 6 accomp.
–1
–1
+1
min 6 bass
–1
–1
+1
min 6 bass
–1
–1
+1
min 7 accomp.
–1
–1
–1
–1
min 7 accomp.
–1
–1
–1
–1
min 7 bass
–1
–1
–1
–1
min 7 bass
–1
–1
–1
–1
The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the
standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale
Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed.
Complex chords
Complex chords
The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the
standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale
Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed.
–1
–1
–1
min 2 accomp.
–1
min 1 bass
–1
min 1 accomp.
The logic applied to the conversion of the more complex chords follows similar lines to that used for the
standard Major, minor and 7th chords indicated above. The user is invited to experiment with the Scale
Converter in order to discover the most suitable conversion for the Style being programmed.
C
D
C#
E
–1
–1
F
D#
Scale Converter active: C Major riff –> C minor riff
G
F#
A
B
G#
A#
○
min 2 bass
+1
○
–1
○
min 3 accomp.
+1
○
–1
○
min 3 bass
○
–1
–1
○
min 4 accomp.
–1
8•8 Reference Guide
○
–1
–1
○
min 4 bass
–1
○
–1
–1
○
min 5 accomp.
+1
○
–1
–1
○
min 5 bass
+1
○
–1
–1
○
min 6 accomp.
–1
○
–1
–1
○
min 6 bass
–1
–1
○
–1
–1
○
min 7 accomp.
–1
○
–1
○
min 7 bass
○
Complex chords
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•1
• 9 Edit Style
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
• 9 Edit Style
ST. / SONG
7
ENTERING «EDIT STYLE»
1. Press ST./SONG to enter «Edit Style». The
main menu appears.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style functions will be available. The Style name appears
in the status bar of the display.
Style name
7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
EDIT PROCEDURE
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu page. On all successive occasions, the
last page selected is recalled.
5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or
the numeric keypad.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
EDIT PROCEDURE
ST. / SONG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•1
• 9 Edit Style
7
Edit Style - Main menu
○
To escape from «Edit Style» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be
modified in «Edit Style».
Edit Style - Main menu
ESCAPE FROM «EDIT STYLE»
ENTERING «EDIT STYLE»
To escape from «Edit Style» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
1. Press ST./SONG to enter «Edit Style». The
main menu appears.
ESCAPE FROM «EDIT STYLE»
Editors
In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish
to modify.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
page name
Editors
7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style functions will be available. The Style name appears
in the status bar of the display.
3. Press ENTER to enter the editor.
7. Pass to another editor with the / buttons.
Otherwise, return to the main menu with ESCAPE and select another editor.
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
Style name
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Style».
5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or
the numeric keypad.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Style».
5. Select the parameters with the cursor buttons and modify their value with the DIAL or
the numeric keypad.
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu page. On all successive occasions, the
last page selected is recalled.
2. Select the editor that you wish to edit using
the DIAL or the cursor buttons. It is also possible to enter an editor by specifying the relative number on the numeric keypad.
Entering this section the first time opens the main
menu page. On all successive occasions, the
last page selected is recalled.
4. Select the desired option with the soft buttons.
1. Press ST./SONG to enter «Edit Style». The
main menu appears.
3. Press ENTER to enter the editor.
6. Confirm the operation with ENTER.
Press the ST./SONG button in the EDIT section
to enter «Edit Style».
EDIT PROCEDURE
Editors
In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish
to modify.
3. Press ENTER to enter the editor.
page name
○
ESCAPE FROM «EDIT STYLE»
Style name
○
page name
ENTERING «EDIT STYLE»
If you select a User Style, all the Edit Style functions will be available. The Style name appears
in the status bar of the display.
○
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be
modified in «Edit Style».
ST. / SONG
7
In Style/RealTime mode, select the Style you wish
to modify.
○
To escape from «Edit Style» press ESCAPE
(once or twice, depending on the currently selected level). To escape without closing the edit
page, press the ST./SONG button. To pass to
another edit environment, press the corresponding button in the EDIT section.
After recording a User Style, the Style riff can be
modified in «Edit Style».
○
Edit Style - Main menu
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•1
9•2 Reference Guide
UNDO (F2)
STYLE NAME (F8)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it
is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
Changes the name of a Style. This function only
applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM
Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
UNDO (F2)
STYLE NAME (F8)
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it
is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
Changes the name of a Style. This function only
applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM
Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
The method used to insert characters is described
in the «Data Entry» paragraph of chapter 1, page
1.4. You can move the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert the characters with the
keys of the keyboard.
UNDO
In record mode, tasks are performed directly on
a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes
in the track and in the riff being recorded.
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
In play mode, this status icon indicates the presence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff
of the track does not contain notes, the «empty
track» message is displayed at the bottom of the
Edit Style page:
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
«EMPTY TRACK» INDICATION - NOTES
PRESENT IN THE TRACK
The method used to insert characters is described
in the «Data Entry» paragraph of chapter 1, page
1.4. You can move the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert the characters with the
keys of the keyboard.
UNDO
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
The presence of notes in a track is indicated by
the seq-play icon:
The presence of notes in a track is indicated by
the seq-play icon:
In play mode, this status icon indicates the presence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff
of the track does not contain notes, the «empty
track» message is displayed at the bottom of the
Edit Style page:
In play mode, this status icon indicates the presence of notes in at least one riff. If the current riff
of the track does not contain notes, the «empty
track» message is displayed at the bottom of the
Edit Style page:
The presence of notes in a track is indicated by
the seq-play icon:
You will be prompted with a request to confirm
the operation with ENTER or cancel with ESCAPE.
«EMPTY TRACK» INDICATION - NOTES
PRESENT IN THE TRACK
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
If UNDO is disabled, pressing the UNDO button
and confirming with ENTER activates the following user message:
The method used to insert characters is described
in the «Data Entry» paragraph of chapter 1, page
1.4. You can move the cursor with the soft buttons or the DIAL. Insert the characters with the
keys of the keyboard.
In record mode, tasks are performed directly on
a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes
in the track and in the riff being recorded.
STYLE NAME (F8)
○
UNDO (F2)
○
Changes the name of a Style. This function only
applies to USER Styles; the names of the ROM
Styles are permanent and cannot be modified.
○
When this parameter is selected (shown in negative highlight), the UNDO function is enabled.
Undo cancels the last operation or series of operations carried out. This function consumes exactly the same amount of RAM memory as the
Style. If there is a shortage of memory in RAM, it
is a good idea to deactivate UNDO.
○
Press the UNDO panel button to execute the
desired Undo operation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
In record mode, tasks are performed directly on
a riff, and the icon indicates the presence of notes
in the track and in the riff being recorded.
UNDO
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
○
«EMPTY TRACK» INDICATION - NOTES
PRESENT IN THE TRACK
Press ESCAPE to close the window and repeat
the UNDO operation, this time with UNDO enabled.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•2 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•3
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Cancellation of events.
Cancellation of events.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the cancellation.
firm the cancellation.
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of
the Style to cancel the events from. Depending
on the part selected, the following parameters
may or may not appear.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of
the Style to cancel the events from. Depending
on the part selected, the following parameters
may or may not appear.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Riff
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations
that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Variation
PARAMETERS
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Variation
Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations
that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only Variations
that contain at least one recorded riff can be selected.
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Riff
Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Selects one of the riffs of the selected Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the part of
the Style to cancel the events from. Depending
on the part selected, the following parameters
may or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Cancellation of events.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•3
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Erase
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•3
9•4 Reference Guide
Event type
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Event type
Determines the type of event to be erased.
Determines the type of event to be erased.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
Selects the Style to cancel [«Style (all Vars)» option].
Note range from... to...
Erase Style
Erase Style
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to
cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument
of the Drum track, assign the same note to the
highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel
the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range
from D2 to D2».
Selects the Style Variation to cancel [«Var (all
riffs)» option].
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Erase Variation
From locator... To locator...
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
From locator... To locator...
Erase Variation
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Selects the Style Variation to cancel [«Var (all
riffs)» option].
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to
cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument
of the Drum track, assign the same note to the
highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel
the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range
from D2 to D2».
Note range from... to...
Options: All, Duplicate note, Note, Pitch Bend,
Mono touch, Poly touch, Velocity Off,
ProgramChange, ControlChange 00...31,
ControlChange 64...127.
Selects the Style to cancel [«Style (all Vars)» option].
Note range from... to...
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to
cancel. To cancel a single percussive instrument
of the Drum track, assign the same note to the
highest and lowest limit. For example, to cancel
the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range
from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
cancel. It is possible to specify the measure, beat
and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
Erase Variation
Selects the Style Variation to cancel [«Var (all
riffs)» option].
Erase Style
Selects the Style to cancel [«Style (all Vars)» option].
«Duplicate note» eliminates the note with the lowest velocity value when two notes of the same
pitch start at the same position.
Determines the type of event to be erased.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Event type
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•4 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•5
○
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Shifts events from one point to another within the
selected track.
Shifts events from one point to another within the
selected track.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation.
firm the operation.
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Variation
Variation
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can
be selected.
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can
be selected.
Riff
Riff
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty the phrase «No Riff» appears.
From locator... To locator...
From locator... To locator...
Sets the start and end points of the part to be
moved. The measure, beat and resolution can
be specified.
Sets the start and end points of the part to be
moved. The measure, beat and resolution can
be specified.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
Start locator
Start locator
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.
Assignable values: any point within the riff.
Sets the new position of the section being moved.
Start locator
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. It is not possible to specify a point beyond
the end of the riff.
Sets the start and end points of the part to be
moved. The measure, beat and resolution can
be specified.
From locator... To locator...
Selects one of the riffs of the current Variation.
Only existing riffs can be selected. If the Style is
empty the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Riff
Selects one of the 4 Style Variations. Only Variations that contain at least one recorded riff can
be selected.
Variation
PARAMETERS
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the operation.
Shifts events from one point to another within the
selected track.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•5
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Move
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•5
9•6 Reference Guide
○
Copy
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Copy
Copies events from a single tracks or from all the
tracks.
Copies events from a single tracks or from all the
tracks.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the operation
firm the operation
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
Selects the source and destination Variations for
the part to be copied.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the type of
track to copy events from. Depending on the type
of track selected, the following parameters may
or may not appear.
Assignable values: any USER Style.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the type of
track to copy events from. Depending on the type
of track selected, the following parameters may
or may not appear.
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
From var... to var...
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
Selects the destination Style to copy the current
Style (part or whole) to.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Copy to Style...
PARAMETERS
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Style (all vars) (F8) - An entire Style (the 4
Variations of the Style).
Var (all riffs) (F7) - An entire Variation (all
the riffs of the Variation).
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
PARAMETERS
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
PARAMETERS
Riff (all tracks) (F6) - An entire riff (all the
tracks of the riff).
Copy to Style...
Copy to Style...
Track (F5) - Single track, the current riff.
Selects the destination Style to copy the current
Style (part or whole) to.
Selects the destination Style to copy the current
Style (part or whole) to.
Use the Soft buttons F5...F8 to select the type of
track to copy events from. Depending on the type
of track selected, the following parameters may
or may not appear.
From var... to var...
Selects the source and destination Variations for
the part to be copied.
Assignable values: any USER Style.
From var... to var...
Selects the source and destination Variations for
the part to be copied.
SOFT BUTTONS F5...F8
Assignable values: any USER Style.
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the operation
Copies events from a single tracks or from all the
tracks.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Copy
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•6 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•7
The source and destination of the copied Variation («Var (all riffs)» option).
Assignable values: any riff.
To Style...
○
○
From riff... to riff...
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Selects the source and destination riffs for the
part to be copied. For example, it is possible to
copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor
Fill riff.
Assignable values: any riff.
The destination Style of the copy.
Copy current Style to Style
Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to («Style [all Vars]»
option).
The source and destination of the copied Variation («Var (all riffs)» option).
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
To Style...
The destination Style of the copy.
Track... to track...
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
Copy Variation... to Variation...
○
Specifies the source and destination tracks for
the copied elements. «From track» shows the
track selected using soft buttons A...H. «To
track...» can be modified using the DIAL.
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
Copy current Style to Style
Assignable values: any accompaniment track
(9...16).
Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to («Style [all Vars]»
option).
From locator... To locator...
From locator... To locator...
Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff..
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff..
Start locator
Start locator
Sets the new position of the copied part.
Sets the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
destination riff.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
destination riff.
Copy times
Copy times
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each
copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each
copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Copy times
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
destination riff.
Sets the new position of the copied part.
Assignable values: any accompaniment track
(9...16).
○
Sets the number of consecutive copies. Each
copy starts exactly where the previous one ends.
Specifies the source and destination tracks for
the copied elements. «From track» shows the
track selected using soft buttons A...H. «To
track...» can be modified using the DIAL.
○
Assignable values: depends of the length of the
riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.
Track... to track...
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
○
Copy mode
Selects the source and destination riffs for the
part to be copied. For example, it is possible to
copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor
Fill riff.
○
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Copy Variation... to Variation...
Options: Merge, Replace.
From riff... to riff...
Start locator
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff..
Sets the start and end point of the part to be copied. Only the measure (bar) can be specified.
From locator... To locator...
Assignable values: any accompaniment track
(9...16).
Selects the USER location where the entire current Style is to be copied to («Style [all Vars]»
option).
Assignable values: depends of the length of the
riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.
Copy current Style to Style
Copy mode
Copy mode
Assignable values: any of the USER Styles.
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Track... to track...
Determines the copy mode. «Merge» unites the
copied events to those already present at the destination. «Replace» substitutes the events
present at the destination with those copied.
Specifies the source and destination tracks for
the copied elements. «From track» shows the
track selected using soft buttons A...H. «To
track...» can be modified using the DIAL.
Assignable values: depends of the length of the
riff. The copy must not exceed the riff length.
The destination Style of the copy.
Assignable values: any riff.
To Style...
Assignable values: 1 ... 4.
The source and destination of the copied Variation («Var (all riffs)» option).
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•7
Copy Variation... to Variation...
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
From riff... to riff...
Options: Merge, Replace.
Selects the source and destination riffs for the
part to be copied. For example, it is possible to
copy the patterns of a Basic Major riff to a minor
Fill riff.
Options: Merge, Replace.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•7
9•8 Reference Guide
○
Quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quantize
The Quantize function is an auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize
values.
The Quantize function is an auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize
values.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the quantize operation.
firm the quantize operation.
SOFT BUTTONS F1...F2
SOFT BUTTONS F1...F2
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
Riff
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
Note On Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note On event.
Note On Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note On event.
Note Off Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note Off event. After a Note On quantization,
a Note Off quantization affects the duration
of the notes, adapting them to a quantization
grid.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one riff recorded).
Variation
Note Off Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note Off event. After a Note On quantization,
a Note Off quantization affects the duration
of the notes, adapting them to a quantization
grid.
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
PARAMETERS
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Riff
These select the «Note On Quantize» and «Note
Off Quantize» parameters.
Riff
Variation
Note On Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note On event.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one riff recorded).
Note Off Quantize - Post-Quantization of the
Note Off event. After a Note On quantization,
a Note Off quantization affects the duration
of the notes, adapting them to a quantization
grid.
Variation
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one riff recorded).
SOFT BUTTONS F1...F2
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the quantize operation.
The Quantize function is an auto-corrector of timing errors. Includes triplet and swing quantize
values.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•8 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•9
Note On quantize
Note Off quantize
Specifies the Note On quantize values.
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
Specifies the Note On quantize values.
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
Value
Quantization
Note range from... to...
Value
Quantization
Note range from... to...
1/4
q
1/4
q
1/8
e
1/8
e
1/12
e triplet
1/12
e triplet
1/16
x
1/16
x
1/24
x triplet
1/24
x triplet
1/32
r
Sets the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
1/32
r
1/48
r triplet
1/48
r triplet
1/64
(1/64)
From locator... To locator...
1/64
(1/64)
From locator... To locator...
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
1/96
(1/64 triplet)
free
no quantization
free
no quantization
1/8 B...F
q. e (swing)
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
1/8 B...F
q. e (swing)
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
1/16 B...F
e. x (swing)
1/16 B...F
e. x (swing)
free
no quantization
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
free
no quantization
○
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
*B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
○
○
○
○
○
Note On quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note Off quantize
○
Sets the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
*B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
*B … F indicate an adjustment of the Swing feel.
no quantization
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
e. x (swing)
q. e (swing)
no quantization
(1/64 triplet)
From locator... To locator...
(1/64)
r triplet
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
r
Sets the highest and lowest note range to
quantize. To quantize a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note to
the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
quantize the snare (D2), set the parameter to
«Note range from D2 to D2».
x triplet
x
e triplet
e
q
Note range from... to...
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•9
Note Off quantize
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note On quantize
○
Specifies the Note On quantize values.
Determines the Note Off quantize value. Same
as Note On.
○
Quantization
○
Value
○
1/4
○
1/8
○
1/12
○
1/16
○
1/24
○
1/32
○
1/48
○
1/64
○
1/96
○
free
Determines the start and end point of the part
that requires quantizing. Only measures can be
selected.
○
1/8 B...F
○
1/16 B...F
○
free
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•9
9•10 Reference Guide
○
Insert Measures
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insert Measures
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts
forward the same number of measures as those
inserted. The length of the Riff changes.
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts
forward the same number of measures as those
inserted. The length of the Riff changes.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
firm the insertion.
firm the insertion.
Assignable values: from the first measure (bar)
of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measure of the Riff.
PARAMETERS
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved
forward.
(1)
1
a
Specifies the number of measures to insert.
1
2
a
Riff
2
(2)
3
(a)
4
(b)
5
(3)
Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Riff
(4)
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved
forward.
PARAMETERS
(4)
6
3
4
b
Measures to insert
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Insert Measures
○
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Assignable values: depends on the length of the
riff (max 16 measures).
(1)
Insert from locator
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
Assignable values: from the first measure (bar)
of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measure of the Riff.
Inserts a specified number of measures. The part
of the Riff that follows the insertion point shifts
forward the same number of measures as those
inserted. The length of the Riff changes.
○
b
Specifies the number of measures to insert.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the insertion.
○
a
Select.03e of the riffs from the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
6
Variation
(3)
5
(1)
Assignable values: from the first measure (bar)
of the Riff, to the first measure after the end measure of the Riff.
4
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
(b)
4
1
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
3
Selects one of the riffs from the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
2
Specifies the number of measures to insert.
Insert from locator
b
Measures to insert
(a)
3
1
Measures to insert
Assignable values: depends on the length of the
riff (max 16 measures).
Assignable values: depends on the length of the
riff (max 16 measures).
(2)
2
Riff
Select.03e of the riffs from the selected Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Insert from locator
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Specifies the measure at which the new measures will be inserted.
Variation
PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•10 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
(2)
(a)
(b)
5
(3)
6
(4)
Insert measures example. Two measures are inserted at
measure 3. Measure 3 and all successive measure are moved
forward.
Edit Style 9•11
○
Delete measures
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Delete measures
○
○
○
○
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
©
©
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PARAMETERS
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
PARAMETERS
(5)
○
3
○
(2)
○
2
○
(1)
○
1
○
Measures to delete
○
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
○
Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All
the measures after the deletion point shift towards the
beginning of the Riff.
○
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed
the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4
measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.
○
(6)
4
Variation
Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
(6)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
(1)
Measures to delete
6
(2)
(5)
(6)
PARAMETERS
Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All
the measures after the deletion point shift towards the
beginning of the Riff.
5
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
6
Riff
4
(5)
5
6
4
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed
the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4
measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.
○
○
○
○
○
○
Delete measures example. Measure 3 and 4 are cancelled. All
the measures after the deletion point shift towards the
beginning of the Riff.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
after the deletion point, use the Erase events
function.
Assignable values: a number that does not exceed
the length of the Riff. For example, if the Riff is 4
measures long, the maximum assignable value if 4.
3
(2)
5
3
Measures to delete
Specifies the number of measures to delete.
2
(1)
4
2
1
3
1
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
2
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
1
Riff
○
○
○
Delete from locator
Delete from locator
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
riff. Dependent on the previous parameter.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Cancels a specified number of measures. The
measures directly after the point of cancellation
shift towards the beginning of the Riff and join
with the measures preceding the cancellation
point.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•11
○
○
○
○
Delete measures
○
Variation
○
© Hint: To cancel measures without shifting those
Riff
○
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
Delete from locator
○
This parameter indicates the first measure of
those to be deleted.
Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the cancellation.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•11
9•12 Reference Guide
○
Velocity
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Velocity
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter
represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity.
Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the
volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many
sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter
represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity.
Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the
volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many
sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to con-
Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the
value specified in «Velocity change»
firm the dynamic changes.
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
Velocity values of the notes.
firm the dynamic changes.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
PARAMETERS
Change Velocity
PARAMETERS
Change Velocity
Variation
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in «Velocity Mode».
Variation
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in «Velocity Mode».
From locator... To locator...
Note range from... to...
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the
same note to the highest and lowest limit. For
example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Note range from... to...
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify measure,
beat and resolution.
Riff
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Velocity mode
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
Velocity values of the notes.
PARAMETERS
Change Velocity
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the
value specified in «Velocity change»
© Set the parameters and press ENTER to confirm the dynamic changes.
Fixed - The note Velocities are all set to the
value specified in «Velocity change»
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Variation
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values can be changed. This depends on the option selected in «Velocity Mode».
Normal - The value indicated in «Velocity
change» is added to or subtracted from the
Velocity values of the notes.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the
same note to the highest and lowest limit. For
example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Velocity mode
Riff
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Velocity mode
Riff
Provides two velocity modes to choose from
which affect the way the “Change Velocity” function operates.
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify measure,
beat and resolution.
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Modifies the key Velocity value. This parameter
represents the key-strike velocity, or its intensity.
Generally, the greater the velocity the higher the
volume. Velocity also affects the filter of many
sounds, making them brighter with increased velocity.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Velocity
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
9•12 Reference Guide
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Note range from... to...
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To modify the velocity of a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the
same note to the highest and lowest limit. For
example, to change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9.
From locator... To locator...
Determines the start and end point of the part to
be affected. It is possible to specify measure,
beat and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Edit Style 9•13
○
Transpose
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transpose
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transposition in semitone steps.
Transposition in semitone steps.
Variation
Variation
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Riff
Riff
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Transpose
Transpose
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps).
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps).
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.
Note range from... to...
Note range from... to...
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note
to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note
range from D2 to D2».
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note
to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note
range from D2 to D2».
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9
From locator... To locator...
From locator... To locator...
Defines the start and end point of the part to be
affected. It is possible to specify the measure,
beat and resolution.
Defines the start and end point of the part to be
affected. It is possible to specify the measure,
beat and resolution.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Assignable values: within the actual limits of the
Riff.
Defines the start and end point of the part to be
affected. It is possible to specify the measure,
beat and resolution.
From locator... To locator...
Assignable values: C-1 ... G9
Sets the upper and lower limits of the notes to be
affected. To transpose a single percussive instrument of the Drum track, assign the same note
to the highest and lowest limit. For example, to
change the snare (D2) set the parameter to «Note
range from D2 to D2».
Note range from... to...
Assignable values: -64 ... +64.
Determines the value of the transposition (in semitone steps).
Transpose
Selects one of the riffs from the chosen Variation. Only existing riffs can be selected. If the
Style is empty, the phrase «No Riff» appears.
Riff
Selects one of the 4 Variations. Only existing
Variations can be selected (those with at least
one recorded Riff).
Variation
Transposition in semitone steps.
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•13
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Transpose
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Edit Style 9•13
9•14 Reference Guide
○
Microscope
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Event List
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Microscope
track in edit
Event List
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
shown at the center of the display shows all the
events recorded.
The Microscope allows you to modify every single event recorded in the tracks. The Event List
shown at the center of the display shows all the
events recorded.
ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT
ACCESS TO THE EVENT EDIT
1. Select the track where you want to edit the
events in the Event List.
1. Select the track where you want to edit the
events in the Event List.
Set the parameters and press ENTER.
Selects the riff to edit. Select the variation and
the riff in the dialog window
measure
Opens a dialog window where it is possible to
select the events that will be displayed in